At ee tee dhe
SOM ey HH
MET a, mine
¥ Paks,
weve
: Crear war
: Wal
Ge 4
DAL. On rar) M
eee ts nee US you
ve f z
Pritt ew ey
tart
pareted
alee Nigh
Ree tw
ie
Vt hay th
1s tse
CP ehy ted 1,
ere.
yee
at
‘ft Aus}
FO een
jo i qorncevn ares uf
{heh ret
NODE Giebn ot)
WEL) Bere, basen
TAN tate
way in
wat Oe M gy pay,
at
vd Rare de
FV INT WAS @
an
anes
+
! AWM ive
tay
Oey
ehathel
Partin
vee
Gees tang
: PIMA be baat my
COV aw \ ii
; nekety ; nee
TRO ey ;
2 PON av
fee
mre ebay,
ears : 2 3 o
: meee
See
vali bln
MEMS wt
hal
am '
Exthavny
Ptah,
Ae tein
WON Mies te!
sh
PU wa,
y gird hey
eat D
i
ot
ete ty
y Lees
Veer TON rh
Craw!
; Nin val gate
BDC ay J
7 Par
ney
Sbrld 44
VSO De wineay uth at
.
“4
eva vies
Sweat yes ment
Ley
Mewes
4 vtbviwek
Wh evr ily
Vasant MANO y vn
Week tela, ,
Verbena HN: Yar Piha
UPN ya
ive
Whey ay
IRN
een
ue lah aay
ae 3 ON Saorarte A ON ging
PV eva e paoees
Sareea Dnt em en
WA Led vv watiyurn ni :
oe ; 3 ih hase
se ; i NAAN
Vtew whee y
% Setvderytie ;
; Mgts aye:
Pdi ’ :
bs Feijen Sewers ey
a Coe
1H Sly,
Mine ity on
es SORT THN
0 bead
ange
Fer eloDany
OMtvee
Be ee nice
De ee
(hehe ey
TOW
NI hy a
ee oe
“bles agate!
oer
Cauea)
Pony
E SOUTH AFRICAN
Ee MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of: title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of
new genera or species; Author’s(s’) name(s); address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out);
number of illustrations and tables
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary (if paper is lengthy)
(g) Acknowledgments
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
3. MANUSCRIPT should be typed, double spaced with adequate margins. Four copies should be
provided. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of figure captions should be
typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are centred small capitals;
second subheadings are shouldered small capitals; third subheadings are shouldered italics; fourth sub-
headings are indented, shouldered italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration
(never roman numerals) of headings and abbreviations. Footnotes should be avoided unless they are
short and essential. All generic and specific names should be underlined or italicized.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12.5 x 18.5 cm (19.5 cm including
caption); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated in pencil on the reverse of the
figure; originals larger than 36 x 48 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular
in shape and final size. The size of illustrated objects may be indicated by a metric scale on the figure
(if appropriate), or the enlargement or reduction should be given in the caption; if the latter, then the
final reduction or enlargement should be taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not
printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items
of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; labelling on all figures should be non-serif
lettering (e.g. Helvetica, Univers) of uniform style, in lower-case whenever possible, and of appropri-
ate size taking into account the final size. The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil
on the back of each illustration, together with an indication of the desired reduction or enlargement.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the
paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) described . . .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) described...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year; pagination indicated by colon, not p. (except in synonymies, see
example 2); names of joint authors connected by ampersand; et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names
of all authors given in list of references.
(b)Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within
each name, with suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in
that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal articles give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scieniific periodicals.
4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses (if pagination
discontinuous), pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88:
100-140.
FISCHER, P. H., DUVAL, M. & RAFFY, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines.
Archives de zoologie expérimentale et générale 74: 627-634. :
KOHN, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Annals and Magazine of Natural History (13) 2: 309-320. :
KOHN, A. J. 1960b. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bulletin of the Bingham Qceanographic Collection, Yale University 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid Afrika ausgefihrt in den
Jahren 1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16:
269-270.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 105 Band
February 1997 Februarie
Part” 1 Deel
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND
NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA. THE AMMONITE
FAMILY BACULITIDAE GILL, 1871
(EXCLUDING THE GENUS EUBACULITES)
By
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles,
revisions and review articles in anthropology, archaeology, palaeontology,
geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology, and marine and freshwater
biology.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in
part, with material from the collections of the South African Museum. Other
contributions are also considered provided at least one of the authors is a staff
member of the Museum. In the case of descriptions of new species not already
part of the Museum's collections, the holotype and, if possible, part of the
paratype series must be deposited in the South African Museum. Authors whose
contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Committee prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper
accepted is published as a separate part at irregular intervals as material becomes
available; parts are priced individually.
Editorial committee
Dr P. A. Hulley (Chairman) Dr H. C. Klinger Elizabeth Louw (Editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000 South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Publications Office.
OUT OF PRINT
1, 20=3, 5-8), 301=2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.1.), 4(); 30-3555 7-9), Ce. pa
71-4), 8, 9U1-2,, 7), 10G=3), 110-235, 7, t-pae) 43) pi SsGeae
24(@, 5), 27, 3101-3), 326), 33, 36), 43(); 45(1); 490), 67@; ID Sste)
ISBN 0 86813 168 7
D5220
Printed in South Africa by
The Rustica Press (Pty) Ltd,
Old Mill Road, Ndabeni, Cape
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL,
SOUTH AFRICA.
THE AMMONITE FAMILY BACULITIDAE GILL, 1871
(EXCLUDING THE GENUS EUBACULITES)
By
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
Division of Earth Sciences, South African Museum, Cape Town
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Geological Collections, University Museum, Oxford
(With 132 figures)
[MS accepted 17 May 1995]
ABSTRACT
Representatives of the ammonite family Baculitidae are common faunal elements in the
mid- and Upper Cretaceous of Zululand. The genus Lechites is rare, being represented by
a single species in the Upper Albian, L. gaudini (Pictet & Campiche); Sciponoceras is
represented by rare Cenomanian S. roto Cieslifiski, S$. baculoides (Mantell) and common
S. cucullatum Collignon. Baculites is very common, and represented by Coniacian B. yoko-
yamai Tokunaga & Shimizu, Coniacian to Santonian B. capensis Woods, Coniacian to
Campanian B. bailyi Woods, and Campanian B. sulcatus Baily, B. increscens Collignon,
B. vanhoepeni Venzo, B. duharti Hunicken, Baculites sp. aff. B. rectus Marshall and
B. nibelae sp. nov.
CONTENTS
PAGE
NOR tO ra chic cclelaiy Snitinne ok einin Tee mole o/h avineeteuoa eat Mealy vateinletetnaaten Gaetan ]
2 TL LEEECEUISI 5.0 ing oid ths Sega age aa aths MINA alle ire ee PCa A na aie PUES en deme a LA ae js
“ad DEMLOTE: Gil SiDSCIITMS TTS Aare ai res ae ent eared Oren ts nr MRI Sem Rn reer ae >
7 ELE MECRINGIOS 5 Cds Gki sie Bee ate eres es ATE ome ete fi eS err aah Seah Pater al ae 5
CAEEERTIOWS ococo fecha tee Cen Ole Re Oa Rain ey teeta a aea rarer rer rien OEP wr mmnyorr ee acere tare 5
Peed Mie NTN OO SW aay tes ascetic Fie, cc cidlte 5.4 us stein s siea'sidvan mina narineensiens Caner enue eee Ri oer na Seances 6
Ree eR Hem ACOMNCOL OS pe i a eee cis. sioaic eteraitis oe visrie nied olan eter peeueiarinis, sie hd eae ie a: 6
2 LEE ESCO SIS TIS A AE eel a PND te Met 7a ene va PUNE eee I 188
“ E-EPETCES cco o gate te Ne Neat ae ete ean Ine ae Tee mao dent ears esate eRe CUES nee t, 188
2 DEERGIR 50500000909 a 0b RMN Eon Reon tn Ee tenn nn Pe Toh Oe Ser Pein RE AMNNeE nee ers eae 198
INTRODUCTION
Members of the ammonite family Baculitidae are conspicuous faunal
elements in the mid- and Upper Cretaceous of Zululand. Early representatives
of the family belonging to the genus Lechites are rare, and so far only one
species, L. gaudini (Pictet & Campiche), represented by two specimens, is
known from the Upper Albian of Zululand. Sciponoceras is locally common in
the Cenomanian; the majority of specimens belong to the Lower Cenomanian
S. cucullatum Collignon. Sciponoceras roto Cieslinski and S. baculoides
(Mantell) are rare in the Lower and Middle Cenomanian, respectively. Turonian
sediments are absent in outcrops in Zululand and there is thus no baculitid
record of this stage. The earliest Middle Coniacian baculitids include smooth, or
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 105 (1), 1997: 1-206, 132 figs, appendix.
D ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
only rarely ribbed forms, referable to B. yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu and
B. bailyi Woods. Nodose baculitids of the group of B. capensis Woods first
appear in the Middle Coniacian, and become very abundant in the Upper
Coniacian of Zululand where they, in places, formed the major part of the
biomass. Concretions crowded with B. capensis are common in parts of the
Middle and Upper Coniacian. Baculites capensis and B. bailyi are common up
to the Lower or the Middle Santonian in southern Africa, but both occur as late
as the Early Campanian. Ribbed B. sulcatus Baily occurs in the Lower Cam-
panian of Pondoland. In Zululand and Natal, ribbed to nodose baculitids refer-
able to B. increscens Collignon, B. vanhoepeni Venzo and B. nibelae sp. nov.
occur in the Lower and Middle, and possibly part of the Upper Campanian,
respectively. A smooth species, B. duharti Hunicken is recorded from the
Middle Campanian.
In the Maastrichtian of Zululand, the genus Eubaculites replaces Baculites
completely, and locally forms a major part of the total biomass. Representatives
of the genus Eubaculites from Zululand have been described earlier by Klinger
(1976) and Klinger & Kennedy (1993) and include E. carinatus (Morton),
E. labyrinthicus (Morton), E. latecarinatus (Brunnschweiler) and E. simplex
(Kossmat).
CLASSIFICATION
Rigel
Until recently, authorship of the family Baculitidae was ascribed to Meek
(1876) (see e.g. Wright 1957: L218; Luppov & Drushchits 1958: 64). How-
ever, the name Baculitidae had been introduced five years earlier by Gill, in
1871, and authorship rests with him, as correctly indicated by Wright (1981:
172).
Wiedmann (1962a: 179) suggested that Cretaceous ptychoceratitid, poly-
ptychoceratid, hamitid and baculitid heteromorphs could be united as sub-
families into a single family, Baculitidae, and later (Wiedmann 19625: 93) even
suggested including bochianitids in this ‘super’ family Baculitidae. This radical
reorganization has found few supporters apart from Scholz (1979). According to
a recent review of the higher taxa of Jurassic and Cretaceous Ammonoidea by
Besnosov & Michailova (1991), Wiedmann’s classification would involve
lumping genera of two different orders into a single family! We regard the
family Baculitidae as a rather conservative group that probably had its origins in
the genus Hamites in the Albian, and retained a more or less straight shell
throughout its existence right up to the end of the Cretaceous Period.
The earliest baculitid, Lechites, arose in the Upper Albian from the genus
Hamites. The adult shell of Lechites consists of a single, straight shaft; as yet,
the ammonitella is unknown. Ornament is simple, consisting of circum-
peripheral ribs. Constrictions are rare. One small branch of Lechites, elevated
to subgeneric rank as L. (Tuberolechites) by Cooper & Kennedy (1977),
developed feeble tubercles on the venter. There is considerable variation in the
symmetry of the umbilical lobe in Lechites (see e.g. Wiedmann & Dieni 1968:
63, text-fig. 36; Scholz 1979: 14, text-fig. 5A); it may differ on either side of
the same individual. Recent comprehensive reviews of the genus by Cooper &
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 3
Kennedy (1977) and Scholz (1979) differed somewhat in details, but covered
most of the taxonomic problems. The distribution of the genus is more or less
cosmopolitan.
Baculites (?) (Protobaculites) ambiguus Collignon (1964: 9, pl. 319
(fig. 1375)), recorded from a single specimen from the Lower Cenomanian of
Madagascar, was regarded by Collignon as a possible precursor of Baculites, as
indicated by the etymology. Ornament consists of annular ribs and periodic
constrictions between every fifth and sixth rib. The suture line has a trifid
umbilical (U) lobe and a large internal (I) lobe. Kennedy & Wright (1994) have
shown that Baculites (?) (Protobaculites) ambiguus is, in fact, not a baculitid,
but a Hemiptychoceras.
Lechites gave rise to the next-oldest baculitid genus, Sciponoceras, in the
Early Cenomanian. The main feature of Sciponoceras is the regular occurrence
of constrictions. The last representatives of Sciponoceras occur in the Upper
Turonian. As in Lechites, Sciponoceras has a more or less cosmopolitan
distribution.
The first true Baculites occur in the Lower Turonian and differ from
contemporary Sciponoceras mainly by the loss of regular constrictions. The
earliest, Turonian, Baculites are cosmopolitan but later representatives become
restricted to distinct biogeographic regions. The genus Baculites persists up to
the end of the Maastrichtian, and is amongst the last ammonite genera before
the extinction of the order Ammonoidea at the K/T boundary (see e.g.
Birkelund 1979, 1993; Ward & Kennedy 1993).
Hamites
Lechites Criobaculites
/
/
/
Sciponoceras Trachybaculites
/
/
/
L. (Tuberolechites) Fresvillia
Baculites
AVGILITNOWA AO ANHDO'IAHd
Pseudobaculites
/
Boehmoceras \ Eubaculites
Fig. 1. Suggested phylogeny of the ammonite family Baculitidae Gill, 1871.
Time axis not to scale.
4 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
During the Late Coniacian, an insignificant baculitid lineage, Pseudo-
baculites, arose from Baculites in the United States Western Interior. It differed
from contemporary Baculites mainly in being larger, having a more rapid rate
of taper, and a far more complex suture line. Pseudobaculites is an endemic
lineage, the last representatives occurring in the Lower Maastrichtian; no
representatives are known outside the U.S. Western Interior.
Boehmoceras, another short-lived but apparently slightly more widely
distributed lineage, evolved from Baculites during the Late Santonian. The shell
is coiled in an open criocone, and it is interpreted as a recoiled baculitid. It is so
far known only from the Upper Santonian of Germany, Sweden, Austria,
France, Mississippi, Alabama and Texas; it is rare in Europe, but common in
the Gulf Coast region of the U.S.A.
During the Late Campanian, the genus Eubaculites arose from Baculites,
differing from the latter mainly by the development of a tabulate or acute venter
and pyriform whorl section. Eubaculites is the dominant baculitid of the Maas-
trichtian in the Southern Hemisphere, excluding Antarctica and New Zealand. It
is rare in Western Europe, and absent or not yet recorded from the Middle East
and North and West Africa. It is also absent from the U.S. Western Interior, but
occurs in the Pacific, Gulf Coast and Atlantic Seaboard regions of the U.S.A.
A number of aberrant baculitids are known from the Maastrichtian but their
origins and relations to Baculites are not clear. They all probably merit generic
separation and include:
(1) Fresvillia Kennedy, 1986, type species Fresvillia constricta Kennedy, 1986a
(p. 62, pl. 14 (figs 39-42), text-fig. 10a) from the Upper Maastrichtian of
France. Also included in the genus is Baculites teres Forbes, 1846 (p. 115,
pl. 10 (fig. 5)), recorded from the Upper Maastrichtian of Southern India and
tentatively from the Maastrichtian of California (Matsumoto 1959: 163, pl. 45
(figs Sa-d, 6a-—c), text-figs 82a—-c, 83) and southern Alaska (Jones 1963: 29,
pl. 16 (figs 10-12, 14), text-fig. 14).
(2) Trachybaculites Cobban & Kennedy, 1995, type species Baculites columna
Morton, 1834 (p. 44, pl. 19 (fig. 8)) (see Cobban & Kennedy 1992c, 1995)
from the Maastrichtian of Alabama, Texas, Mississippi, California and South
Dakota. This is a heterochronous homoeomorph of Albian Lechites with
circumperipheral ribbing, but with apparently simplified sutures.
Baculites lechitides Brunnschweiler, 1966 (p. 23, pl. 1 (figs 1-3), text-
fig. 8) from the Upper Maastrichtian of Western Australia probably also belongs
here and possibly B. kegeli Oliveira (1957: 22, pl. 2 (figs 6-7), text-fig. 1) from
the Maastrichtian of Brazil. According to Cobban & Kennedy (1995: 29),
Baculites vicentei Stinnesbeck, 1986 (p. 203, pl. 9 (fig. 4), pl. 10 (figs 3-6),
text-figs 23a—c) from the Maastrichtian of Chile also belongs to Trachybaculites.
(3) The group of Hamites trabeatus Morton, 1834 (p. 45, pl. 15 (fig. 3)) from
the Upper Maastrichtian of Alabama, appears to be an endogastrically recoiled
baculitid lineage, homoeomorphic with Santonian Boehmoceras but for the
position of the siphuncle. Baculites? sp. of Cobban & Kennedy (1992c: 68,
figs 1.1-1.4, 3.1) from the Maastrichtian Fox Hills Formation of South Dakota
belongs here.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 5
The name Criobaculites gen. nov. is here proposed for this group, with type
species Hamites trabeatus Morton, 1834. Diagnosis: Criocone coiled baculitids
with siphuncle inside the curve (i.e. endogastric).
(4) ?The group of Baculites paradoxus Pervinquiére, 1907 (p. 94, pl. 4
(figs 10-11), text-fig. 24) from the Upper Maastrichtian of Tunisia. We are not
certain if this group belongs to the family Baculitidae at all. These are minute,
straight shells with trigonal saddles and lobes, reminiscent of some Scipono-
ceras. Baculites indét. of Pervinquiére (1907: 95, pl. 4 (fig. 12a—b), text-fig. 25)
may also belong here. It differs from B. paradoxus mainly in possession of
constrictions. Both are of very dubious baculitid affinities and are better
regarded as allied to Phylloptychoceras.
LOCATION OF SPECIMENS
The following abbreviations are used to indicate the repositories of material
referred to in the text.
SAM _ South African Museum, Cape Town
NMB_ National Museum, Bloemfontein—presently housed in the South
African Museum
™ Transvaal Museum, Pretoria
MRC Prof. M. R. Cooper Collection, University of Durban-Westville
SAS Geological Survey, Pretoria—presently housed in the South African
Museum
GD Institut des Sciences de la Terre de 1l’Université Dijon (ex
Collignon Collection)
BMNH The Natural History Museum, London
MNHP Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris
CPC Facultad de Ciencias Exactas, Fisicas y Naturales, Universidad
Nacional de Cérdoba, Argentina
GO Department of Geological Sciences, University of Bologna
FIELD LOCALITIES
Details of field localities are given in Kennedy & Klinger (1975); fuller
descriptions of localities are deposited in the Department of Palaeontology,
Natural History Museum, London, Geological Survey of South Africa, Pretoria,
and Division of Earth Sciences, South African Museum, Cape Town. Additional
localities are referred to in the text.
DIMENSIONS
All dimensions are given in millimetres. MxWb—maximum whorl breadth
(in mm); MxWh—maximum whorl height (Gn mm); MnWb—minimum whorl
breadth Gn mm); MnWh—minimum whorl height (in mm); D—distance between
maximum and minimum whorl height and breadth measurements (in mm);
Wb/Wh—ratio of whorl breadth to whorl height; Ri—Rib or tubercle index:
6 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
number of ribs or tubercles per whorl height; Ti—taper index (after Matsumoto
& Obata 1963: 4) (Ti = MxWh - MnWh/ D x 100).
SUTURE TERMINOLOGY
The suture terminology of Wedekind (1916) reviewed and discussed by
Kullmann & Wiedmann (1970) is followed here: I = internal lobe, U =
umbilical lobe, L = lateral lobe, E = external lobe.
SYSTEMATIC PALAEONTOLOGY
Class CEPHALOPODA Cuvier, 1797
Order AMMONOIDEA Zittel, 1884
Suborder ANCYLOCERATINA Wiedmann, 1960
Family Baculitidae Gill, 1871
Genus Lechites Nowak, 1908
Type species. Baculites gaudini Pictet & Campiche (1861: 112, pl. 55
(figs 5-9)) by the original designation of Nowak (1908: 350).
Diagnosis
Shell straight, with simple ornament consisting of prorsiradiate ribs, some-
times grouped in pairs; shallow constrictions may be present. Ventral tubercles
present in some. Dimorphic; macroconchs with trumpet-shaped aperture, micro-
conch with down-turned aperture and incipient lappets.
Discussion
Lechites is the oldest of the Baculitidae; it first appeared in the Late Albian
and, as Spath (1941: 660) had previously suggested, was presumably derived
from Hamites. Middle Albian records, as Baculites Sanctae-Crucis Pictet &
Campiche (1861: 109, pl. 55 (figs 1-4)) are probably misidentified protaniso-
ceratids and not Lechites (see e.g. Spath 1939: 572-573; 1941: 661 footnote).
Recent work by Cooper & Kennedy (1977) and Scholz (1979) showed that
some specimens of Lechites in the Upper Albian and Lower Cenomanian
acquire incipient to distinct ventral tubercles, and are homoeomorphs of /dio-
hamites and Pseudoxybeloceras fragments to a certain extent. Cooper &
Kennedy (1977) separated the tuberculate forms as a separate subgenus of
Lechites, Tuberolechites (type species Tuberolechites regifex Cooper &
Kennedy, 1977: 654, fig. 8 (1-15)). Initially Scholz also considered separating
them at least at subgeneric level. On closer examination, Scholz (1979: 15)
found that all transitions occur between simply ribbed L. gaudini and tuberculate
forms in the condensed sequences he studied. According to Scholz, the tubercu-
late forms occur in the Upper Albian and again in the ‘Vraconnian’; he thus
regarded the acquisition of tubercles as an iterative, rather than as a unique
monophyletic event. Consequently, Scholz merely separated tuberculate and
normally ribbed at subspecific level, as Lechites gaudini s.s. and L. gaudini
nodosus Scholz (1979: 15, pl. 1 (figs 11-16)).
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA a
It is important to note that, in spite of their unique morphology, tuberculate
forms of Lechites are rare. Cooper & Kennedy (1977: 645, 654) examined
nearly 200 specimens of L. gaudini but found only four tuberculate examples;
Scholz (1979: 12, 15) had nearly 700 specimens of L. gaudini, of which only 32
from France and nine from Hungary were tuberculate.
From the extensive descriptions of e.g. Spath (1941), Renz (1968), Cooper
& Kennedy (1977) and Scholz (1979), it is obvious that there is considerable
variation in the shape and density of ribbing, and that transitions occur between
most of the different ‘species’ attributed to the genus. A reduction in the number
of names, as suggested by Cooper & Kennedy (1977) and Scholz (1979), is
probably justifiable.
Occurrence
Lechites is known with confidence only from the Upper Albian. It has been
recorded from Western and Central Europe, North Africa, ?Somalia, Madagas-
car, Zululand, India, North, Central and South America, Antarctica (Thomson
1984: 88—as Baculites; Moncrieff & Kelly 1993: 5) and Japan (Hokkaido).
Lechites gaudini (Pictet & Campiche, 1861)
Figs 2A-C, M, 3
1861 Baculites Gaudini Pictet & Campiche, p. 112, pl. 55 (figs 5-9).
1933 Baculites Gaudini Pictet & Campiche; Collignon, p. 73, pl. 5 (fig. 8, 8a).
non 1936 ~~ Baculites Gaudini Pictet & Campiche: Venzo, p. 118 [60], pl. 10 [6] (fig. 3).
[= Sciponoceras ?cucullatum]
1941 ~=+Lechites gaudini (Pictet & Campiche); Spath, p. 662, pl. 72 (figs 4-7, 9-10),
text-fig. 242. (cum. synon.)
1941 Lechites communis Spath, p. 666, text-fig. 244.
1947 = Lechites Gaudini var. raricosta Breistroffer, p. 78.
? 1968 = Lechites italicus Wiedmann & Dieni, p. 64, pl. 6 (fig. 10), text-fig. 37.
1968 = Lechites campichei Renz, p. 82, pl. 17 (figs 8a-c, 9a-c, 10a-b), text-fig. 29m.
1968 Lechites vraconensis Renz, p. 82, pl. 17 (figs 1la-c, 12a-b, 14a-b, 15a-c),
text-fig. 29b, g-h, k.
? 1971 = Lechites fasciata Scholz, p. 431, figs 1-2.
1977 Lechites gaudini (Pictet & Campiche); Cooper & Kennedy, p. 644, figs 1
(1-38), 2 (1-30), 3, 4 (1-18), 5 (1-15), 6-7, 8 (16-26). (cum. synon.)
1978 — Lechites gaudini (Pictet & Camp.); Scholz, pl. 3 (figs 1, 8).
1979 = Lechites gaudini gaudini (Pictet & Campiche); Scholz, p. 12, pl. 1 (figs 1-9),
text-fig. SA-B.
1982 = Lechites aff. gaudini Pictet & Campiche; Renz, p. 59, pl. 20 (fig. 7a-b).
1983 = Lechites gaudini (Pict. & Camp.); Horvath, pl. 1 (fig. 2).
1984 Lechites gaudini (Pict. & Camp.); Mitiu, p. 83, pl. 2 (figs 6-9).
1984 Lechites gaudini (Pict. & Camp.) transition to L. communis Spath; Mitiu,
p. 85, pl. 2 (figs 10-11).
1984 = Lechites communis Spath, Mitiu, p. 85, pl. 2 (figs 12-13).
‘1985 = Lechites gaudini (Pictet & Campiche); Immel & Seyed-Emami, p. 112, pl. 7
(hig):
1991 Lechites communis (Pictet & Campiche); Ivanov, pl. 4 (fig. 11).
Type
Lectotype, by subsequent designation of Spath (1941, p. 663) the specimen
figured by Pictet & Campiche (1861, pl. 55 (fig. Sa-c)) and refigured by Renz
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
\
Figs 2
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 2
(1968, pl. 17 (fig. 3)) from the Upper Albian Sroliczkaia dispar zone of Sainte-
Croix, Kanton Waadt, Switzerland.
Material
SAM-PCZ8766 from locality 182, Zululand, Mzinene Formation. Outcrops
here extend from uppermost Albian to Lower Cenomanian; SAS Z19 from
Haughton’s (1936: 299) locality Z19 on the Pongola River, north of the
confluence with the Mfongozi Creek, Zululand, Mzinene Formation, Upper
Albian.
Description
SAM-PCZ8766 is part of a phragmocone with parts of the original shell
preserved; SAS Z19 is an internal mould of part of the body chamber with the
last septum preserved. The whorl section in both specimens is ovoid, higher
Mmaewice with Wb: Wh ratios 7.7: 8.8 = 0.87 and 7.8: 10.2 = 0.76,
respectively. PCZ8766 is finely ribbed, with 5 ribs per whorl height; Z19 is
more coarsely ribbed with 3 ribs per whorl height.
The suture is partially exposed in PCZ8766 (Fig. 3); the umbilical lobe (U)
is distinctly smaller than the lateral lobe (L) and asymmetric.
Discussion
Lechites gaudini is quite variable as far as density and shape of ribbing is
concerned, and several varietal or specific names have been given to extreme
morphologies. PCZ8766 could be referred to Lechites gaudini s.s., whereas
Z19 could be referred to L. raricosta Breistroffer, 1947. We follow Cooper &
Kennedy (1977: 644), Wiedmann & Dieni (1968: 62) and Scholz (1979: 12) in
including these variants within L. gaudini s.s. Lechites antanimangaensis Col-
lignon (1964: 34, pl. 325 (fig. 1451)) is very similar to our coarsely ribbed
specimen (Z19). However, it has been suggested by Cooper & Kennedy (1977:
653) and Wright & Kennedy (1995: 314) that L. antanimangaensis may be a
Sciponoceras body chamber.
Occurrence
The species is common in the Upper Albian, Stoliczkaia dispar zone. It has
been recorded from England, France, Switzerland, Romania, Hungary, Sar-
dinia, Algeria, Madagascar, southern India, Hokkaido, Mexico, Venezuela and
Antarctica.
Fig. 2 (see facing page). A-C, M. Lechites gaudini (Pictet & Campiche, 1861).
A-C. SAS Z19 from Haughton’s (1936: 299) locality Z19, Zululand, Mzinene Formation,
Albian. M. SAM-PCZ8766 from locality 182, Mzinene Formation; the locality ranges from
the Upper Albian to Lower Cenomanian I. D-F. Sciponoceras baculoides (Mantell, 1822).
SAS A705 from an unspecified horizon on the Skoenberg, Mzinene Formation, Cenomanian.
G-L, N-O. Sciponoceras cucullatum Collignon (1964). G-H. NMBD1004a.
I-K. SAS H210/34. L, N. NMBD1004b. O. NMBD1002a. All from an unspecified
horizon on the Skoenberg, Mzinene Formation, Cenomanian. P. Sciponoceras roto
Cieslinski, 1959. SAS EM191 from an unspecified horizon at locality 181, Zululand,
Mzinene Formation, Cenomanian I or II. All x |
10 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(0) 5 mm
[ici Ne ee ae eae
Fig. 3. Lechites gaudini (Pictet & Campiche, 1861).
Suture line of SAM-PCZ8766. Scale bar for size.
Genus Sciponoceras Hyatt, 1894
(= Cyrtochilus Meek, 1876, non Jakowlew, 1875; Cyrtochilella Strand, 1929)
Type species: Hamites baculoides Mantell, 1822: 123, pl. 23 (figs 6-7), by
the original designation of Hyatt (1894: 578). |
Diagnosis
According to the most comprehensive, recent review by Wright & Kennedy
(1981: 112), ‘Sciponoceras is distinguished . . . by its marked constrictions.
These are straight and prorsiradiate in early forms but in later ones are rursi-
radiate on the inner quarter or third of the flank and then turn forward. There
are also well-marked, weakly branching ribs on the body chamber or the whole
Shell, following the same course as the constrictions. The apertural features
appear to be of specific as well as sexual significance; some are relatively
simple, others have a long rostrum, broad folds and a high collar, others have
long lateral lappets.’
Discussion
Extensive discussions on Sciponoceras are given by Matsumoto (1959),
Matsumoto & Obata (1963), Kennedy (1971), Cobban & Scott (1972), Wright
(1979), Wright & Kennedy (1981), Kennedy & Juignet (1983) and Wright &
Kennedy (1995), and nothing new can be added to these.
Occurrence
Transitions from Lechites to Sciponoceras first occur in the Upper Albian
Stoliczkaia dispar Zone faunas of the Anglo-Paris Basin. The genus extends to
the Upper Turonian. The genus has a world-wide distribution (see Matsumoto
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 11
1973: 422, fig. 1), including Europe as far east as Transcaspia, the Middle East,
North Africa, Madagascar, Zululand, ?Angola, India, northern Australia, New
Zealand, various localities in North America in the Western Interior, Gulf Coast
and California, Mexico, and in Argentina in South America.
Sciponoceras baculoides (Mantell, 1822)
Fig. 2D-F
1822 Hamites baculoides Mantell, p. 123, pl. 23 (figs 6-7).
1959 Sciponoceras baculoide (Mantell); Matsumoto, p. 104, pl. 31 (fig. la-d), text-
fig. 2a—b. (cum. synon.)
non 1973 Sciponoceras baculoide (Mantell); Henderson, p. 81, text-fig. 4a-d, fig. 6 nos
4a-c, Sa-c, 7a-c.
? 1975 Sciponoceras baculoides (Mantell); Forster, p. 166, pl. 4 (fig. 6), text-fig. 36.
1980 Sciponoceras baculoide (Mantell); Marcinowski, p. 252, pl. 3 (figs 17-20).
1983 Sciponoceras baculoides (Mantell); Kennedy & Juignet, p. 19, figs 11(a)-(y),
12(a)-(bb), 13(a)-(w), 14(a)-(n) (cum. synon.)
1983 Sciponoceras baculoide (Mantell); Marcinowski & Walaszczyk, pl. 1 (fig. 3).
1983 Sciponoceras baculoide (Mantell); Kaplan er al. pl. 5 (fig. 2).
1987 Sciponoceras baculoides (Mantell); Wright & Kennedy, p. 177, pl. 37
(ie 13):
1991 Sciponoceras baculoide (Mantell); Delamette & Kennedy, p. 462, figs 17.6,
he AA ATS.
1992 Sciponoceras baculoide (Mantell); Thomel, pl. 6 (fig. 7), pl. 10 (fig. 2),
pl. 11 (figs 1-3), pl. 19 (fig. 4).
1995 Sciponoceras baculoides (Mantell); Wright & Kennedy, p. 317, pl. 95
(figs 1-3, 5-10), pl. 96 (figs 1-7), pl. 97 (figs 1-5), pl. 98 (figs 29-32),
text-figs 129H, 132R-S, 133A-C, M-FF. (cum. synon.)
Type
Lectotype BMNH 8612, by subsequent designation of Kennedy (1971: 9), is
the larger specimen on the block figured by Mantell (1822, pl. 23 (fig. 6)) from
the lower Middle Cenomanian of Hamsey, Sussex, refigured by Kennedy (1971,
pl. 2 (fig. 5a—b)).
Material
SAS A705 from an unspecified horizon and locality on the Skoenberg, Zulu-
land, Mzinene Formation, Cenomanian.
Description
The specimen is a phragmocone fragment, preserved as an internal mould
in glauconitic silt. Part of a constriction is preserved at the smaller end, and
faint prorsiradiate ribs are visible on the flanks and over the venter. The whorl
section is ovoid, Wb: Wh 10.7: 11.7 (= 0.91).
Discussion
Extensive descriptions and discussions can be found in Kennedy (1971),
Juignet & Kennedy (1976), Kennedy & Juignet (1983) and Wright & Kennedy
(1995).
1 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Occurrence
Sciponoceras baculoides has been reported from the Lower to Upper Ceno-
manian, but many of these records are difficult to substantiate. According to
Kennedy & Juignet (1983: 22), the species is abundant only in the lower part of
the Middle Cenomanian in southern England and France. It extends to the lower
Upper Cenomanian. Other records are from Germany, Poland, Romania, Cali-
fornia, North Africa, southern India, Madagascar, Mozambique and Zululand.
Sciponoceras cucullatum Collignon, 1964
Figs 2G-L, N-O, 4-5, 6A-D
? 1936 = Baculites Gaudini Pictet & Campiche; Venzo, p. 118 [60], pl. 10 [6] (fig. 3).
1964 Sciponoceras cucullatum Collignon, p. 38, pl. 326 (fig. 1458).
Type
Holotype by monotypy is the specimen figured by Collignon (1964, pl. 326
(fig. 1458)) from the ‘Lower’ Cenomanian, Zone of Mantelliceras mantelli and
Calycoceras newboldi of gisement 505, west of the falls of Mahaboboka
(Manera), Madagascar; herein refigured in Figure 6A-C.
Material
SAM-PCZ7499, PCZ9137, PCZ9139-9140, NMB D1002, D1002a-b,
D1003a—c, D1004, D1004a-1, SAS H210/23, H30-31, H33-35, SAS A106,
1063-1064, 1069, all from an imprecisely located: horizon on the Skoenberg at
locality 61. Judging by the preservation, the specimens seem to have come from
the higher parts of the section. Mzinene Formation, upper Lower or lower
Middle Cenomanian.
Dimensions
Specimen MxWb MxWh Wb/Wh MnWb MnWh Wb/Wh D Ti _ Ri
D1002a oll Pee OA Sul 6.0 0.85 30 4.0 —
D1002b To) 853) OFS See all O30) 37 3.24 —
H210/34 0. WZ O72 US NOES OL TZ 2) (Re —
D10041 Do) Nabe OT CV eo 0,1 34 3.8 5
BANOS) NOG W2e O93 Bo UE Ole 31) dee —
D1004d Wet NOK OTT 102 Tae 30269 38 4.5 =
D1004b kai, NS O70) 1320) 1a TOS 59 3:05 3
D1003b We NSO) OZ 12:0) 14-3) O90 72, QO. 9)
D1003c Ne WeallSi3) Oso _ — — -~
A1063 ICA TZ) 2-25) 16.2 16.2 1.0 40 2.5 —
D1004 IMs ZZ) Wace) — 21.2 — 83° 220 —
H210/31 OFS) 220) 0286 NSe2 232 Oe, 46." 14 —
D1003a 230 2407 O93 18.5) 214 OES 110 3% 6
Fig. 4 (see facing page). Sciponoceras cucullatum Collignon, 1964. A-C. NMBD1003a.
D. NMBD1003b, both from an imprecisely located horizon on the Skoenberg at locality 61,
Zululand, Mzinene Formation, ?Middle Cenomanian. Arrow points to shallow constriction.
Both x 1.
18
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
14 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
Preservation of the material from this locality is characteristic: specimens
are either preserved as internal moulds in a combination of glauconitic silt and
sparry calcite, or with part of the original shell preserved in recrystallized
sparry calcite. Unfortunately, recrystallization of the calcite, plus the fact that
most specimens were found eroded on the surface, has obliterated most of the
surface ornament.
The species reaches large size; the largest Zululand specimen, D1003a
(Fig. 4A—C) is still septate at a whorl height of nearly 25 mm. The Madagascan
holotype (Fig. 6A-C) is adult with a fully developed, recurved, hooded aperture
at Wb = 20.7 mm.
There is considerable variation in whorl shape; it varies from circular, to
high oval, with Wb: Wh ratio as little as 0.67. This variation is partially due to
ontogenetic change: smaller specimens are generally more compressed laterally
than large specimens, which tend to be almost circular in cross section.
Where the shell is preserved, ornament is seen to consist of ribbing that is
distinctly prorsiradiate on the flanks, transverse or feebly convex on the venter,
and also straight and transverse, but weakened on the dorsum. Density of rib-
bing is approximately 5 per whorl height. On internal moulds the surface is
completely smooth. Constrictions are very rare, e.g. D1003a (Fig. 4A—C); these
seem to follow the same direction as the ribs and are strongest over the venter.
As a result of the preservation, only parts of the suture are visible.
Discussion
We have not yet been able to examine Venzo’s (1936) described material,
but the figure and the locality data indicate that it is very probable that his Bacu-
lites gaudini (Venzo 1936: 118 [60], pl. 10 [6] (fig. 3)) belongs to this species,
and not to Lechites gaudini. Because of the rare and weak development of con-
strictions it is quite easy to understand Venzo’s error in referring this species to
Lechites rather than to Sciponoceras.
In retrospect, we suspect that our earlier reference to §S. roto from Zululand
(Kennedy & Klinger 1975: 277) may, in part, have been based on this species.
As is shown below, S. roto lacks the distinctive prorsiradiate ribbing of the
present material and has regular constrictions, thus easily distinguishing it from
S. cucullatum.
As far as the large size is concerned, S. cucullatum is close to S. santa-
crucense Leanza (1970: 212, pl. 11 (figs 1-7)) (Fig. 6E herein), a rather poorly
known species from Santa Cruz Province, Argentina. This species was initially
dated as Cenomanian, but this was based on incorrect stratigraphic information.
Sciponoceras santacrucense occurs below a level with abundant Placenticeras at
Puesto el Alamo (Riccardi & Aguirre Urreta 1988; personal observation), which
would probably date it as late Turonian. Sciponoceras santacrucense has dis-
tinct, regular, albeit widely spaced constrictions that easily distinguish it from
S. cucullatum.
Sciponoceras gracile (Shumard, 1860) (see Kennedy 1988: 108, pl. 20
(figs 1-14, 17-20), text-fig. 38 for the most recent review) from the Upper
Cenomanian, grows to similar large size, but the ornament consists of fine ribs
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 15
Fig. 5. Sciponoceras cucullatum Collignon, 1964. A-D. NMBD1004. E-F. NMBD1004c.
G-H. NMBD1002. J-L. NMBD1004d. All from an imprecisely located horizon on the
Skoenberg at locality 61, Zululand, Mzinene Formation, 7Middle Cenomanian. All x 1.
16 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Cae
Fig. 6. A-D. Sciponoceras cucullatum Collignon, 1964. Plaster cast of the holotype from
the Lower Cenomanian zone of Mantelliceras mantelli and Calycoceras newboldi of gise-
ment 505, west of the falls of Mahaboboka (Manera), Madagascar. D. NMBD1004 from an
imprecisely located horizon on the Skoenberg at locality 61, Zululand, Mzinene Formation,
?Middle Cenomanian. E. Sciponoceras santacrucense Leanza, 1970. Impression of specimen
from the Turonian of Puesta el Alamo, Santa Cruz Province, Argentina. All x I.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 17
that are strongest on the ventral half of the flanks, and constrictions occur fairly
regularly at distances ranging from | to 1.5 major diameters, according to
Wright & Kennedy (1981: 113).
Sciponoceras kossmati (Nowak, 1908) is difficult to interpret (see Wright &
Kennedy 1981: 114), but it appears that most of the material from California
and Hokkaido, described by Matsumoto (1959: 106, pl. 31 (figs 2a—b, 3), text-
figs 4a—b, 5a—b, 6a-b) and Matsumoto & Obata (1963: 13, pl. 3 (fig. 2), pl. 4
(fig. 1), pl. 5 (figs 1-3), pl. 6 (figs 3-5), text-figs 5-25) as S. kossmati, is indis-
tinguishable from S. gracile.
Sciponoceras orientale Matsumoto & Obata (1963: 18, pl. 3 (fig. 1), pl. 6
(figs 1-2), pl. 7 (figs 1-6), pl. 9 (fig. 6), text-figs 33-49) from the Lower and
Middle Turonian of Hokkaido is also quite large, but is distinguished by the
frequent constrictions and coarse ribbing.
The recurved aperture of the holotype of S. cucullatum is totally unlike any
of the known apertures of other Sciponoceras species.
Occurrence
‘Lower’ Cenomanian of Madagascar, Lower and ?Middle Cenomanian,
Zululand.
Sciponoceras roto Cieslinski, 1959
Fig. 2P
1907 Baculites baculoides Mantell; Pervinquiére, p. 92 (pars), pl. 4 (fig. 8 only),
non pl. 4 (fig. 7), text-fig. 22.
1940 = Cyrtochilus pervinquierei Breistroffer, p. 99 (29). (nomen nudum)
1959 = Sciponoceras roto Cieslinski, p. 39, pl. 4 (fig. 10), text-fig. 14 (II).
1971 = Sciponoceras roto Cieslinski; Kennedy, p. 10, pl. 3 (fig. 7).
1972 Sciponoceras roto Cieslinski; Hancock er al. pl. 81 (fig. 8).
1975 Sciponoceras roto Cieslinski; Kennedy & Klinger, p. 277 (pars).
1979 = Sciponoceras cf. roto Cieslinski; Kennedy er al. p. 10, pl. 1 (fig. 4).
1980 Sciponoceras roto Cieslinski; Marcinowski, p. 254, pl. 3 (figs 14-15).
1985 Sciponoceras roto Cieslinski; Marcinowski & Walaszczyk, pl. 1 (fig. 9).
1991 Sciponoceras roto Cieslinski; Delamette & Kennedy, p. 460, figs 17.8-17.13,
17.16-17.23.
1995 Sciponoceras roto Cieslinski; Wright & Kennedy, p. 315, pl. 94 (figs 13-19),
pl. 95 (fig. 4), pl. 98 (fig. 28), text-figs 131J-L, N. (cum. synon.)
Type
Cieslinski based this species on nine syntypes; as yet, no lectotype has been
designated.
Material
SAS EM191 from an unspecified horizon at locality 181, Zululand, Mzinene
Formation, Cenomanian I-II.
Description
The specimen consists of part of the phragmocone and body chamber. The
whorl section is circular; Wb: Wh 9.5: 9.5 (= 1.0) at the greatest diameter.
18 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Apart from two prominent constrictions spaced at about two whorl heights
apart, the surface of the internal mould is nearly smooth. Faint ribs occur on the
venter.
Discussion
Sciponoceras roto is easily identified by the circular whorl section and lack
of ornament between the constrictions. The specimen from Zululand differs
from the European material in having the constrictions slightly closer spaced—
twice the whorl height compared to three times. We do not know if this feature
is significant.
Breistroffer (1940: 99 (29)) erected a new species, Cyrtochilus pervin-
quierei, for one of Pervinquiére’s specimens of Baculites baculoides. As Wright
& Kennedy (1995: 315) have noted, this is a nomen nudum. In any case, the
specimen is close to, if not identical with, S. rofo.
As discussed above, earlier records of S. roto from Zululand (Kennedy &
Klinger 1975: 277) are probably partially based on misidentified S. cucullatum.
Occurrence
Sciponoceras roto 1s rare and known from the Lower Cenomanian of
Poland, southern England, France, Germany, Mangyschlak, Iran, Tunisia,
Madagascar and Zululand.
Genus Baculites Lamarck, 1799
(= Homaloceratites Hupsch, 1768 (non binom.); Euhomaloceras Spath, 1926)
Type species. Baculites vertebralis Lamarck, 1799: 80, by subsequent
designation of Meek (1876: 80).
Diagnosis
Planispiral ammonitella followed by straight or curved shaft; body chamber
may curve in some. Size variable, up to 2 m in length; probably dimorphic.
Ornament variable, from nearly smooth with only growth striae around periph-
ery, to crescentic ribs that are strongest on dorsolateral region, but may be
circumperipheral, to distinct dorsolateral nodes, which may be round, crescentic
or, rarely, longitudinally elongated. In some, the venter may be distinctly corru-
gated, associated either with or without ventrolateral ribbing. Aperture simple,
in line with long axis of shell, short dorsal rostrum, prominent lateral sinus and
straight to slightly curved ventral rostrum; may be flared in some species.
Suture variable, ranging from simple, subquadrate lobes and saddles with open
bases with simple incisions or phylloid folioles, to highly dendritic, with saddles
and lobes with slender bases.
Discussion
Of all the heteromorph ammonite genera, the genus Baculites probably
poses most problems in identification and global stratigraphic correlation. The
great number of monotypical and/or endemic Baculites species that exist in the
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 19
literature, as well as gross misidentifications (e.g. B. ovatus, typically from the
Upper Campanian of North America, allegedly from the Coniacian of Vene-
zuela (Reyment 1958) or B. inornatus, typically Campanian but reportedly from
the Lower Coniacian of Venezuela (Renz 1982)), all bear testimony to this
problem.
Reasons for the taxonomic difficulties are due to a combination of various
factors. These include:
(1) Extreme degree of intraspecific variation. This is especially obvious in
ornate species; these may vary from completely smooth to heavily ribbed or
tuberculate (see e.g. B. anceps or B. capensis).
(2) Inornate (smooth) species are virtually impossible to identify unless they
have a very characteristic whorl section and/or suture line and the stratigraphic
position is known.
(3) Apparent endemism of some Baculites species and restriction to distinct
bio(?)geographic regions, 1.e. U.S. Western Interior, Europe and Indo-Pacific
regions, as well as possibly the U.S. Gulf Coast-Atlantic region and North
Africa—Middle East regions.
Details of these problems are to be discussed fully in our forthcoming
synthesis of the family Baculitidae (Klinger & Kennedy in press).
Fortunately, the descriptions and/or revision of the majority of the baculitid
faunas of these major regions are the work of a few persons. Consequently, the
taxonomic criteria within a certain geographic region are more or less constant.
The baculitid faunas of the U.S. Western Interior were dealt with primarily
by Reeside (1927a, 1927b) and especially Cobban (1951 onwards), and recently
with the assistance of Kennedy. The northern extension of the Western Interior
region into West Greenland was covered by Birkelund (1965). In the Indo-
Pacific region, the baculitids of California, Hokkaido and Honshu were mono-
graphed by Matsumoto (1959), Matsumoto & Obata (1963) and Obata & Matsu-
moto (1963), respectively; Ward (1978) revised the baculitids of Washington
State and British Columbia. Those of Madagascar were described virtually
single-handedly by Collignon (1931 to 1971). Major contributions from other
parts of the Indo-Pacific region include New Zealand (Marshall 1926; Hender-
son 1970), Antarctica (Olivero 1984, 1992), the Austral Basin of South America
(Hunicken 1965; Hiinicken et al. 1975, 1980) and Argentina (Leanza 1964,
1967).
In contrast, Baculites is poorly known in the European and Asian regions.
Recent revision of the Upper Cretaceous ammonite faunas of Europe, especially
those of France by Kennedy (1984 onwards) and Kennedy & Summesberger
(1986, 1987), have clarified the taxonomy of most of the Coniacian, Santonian
and Maastrichtian Baculites species. The succession and systematics of the
majority of Baculites species of the Campanian Stage still have to be worked
out.
Distribution of Baculites on either side of the Atlantic is erratic. The oldest
Baculites in Angola is an as yet undescribed Late Turonian—Early Coniacian
species, which is transitional between B. yokoyamai and B. codyensis (M. R.
Cooper collections, S.A. Museum; herein Fig. 131N—R, 132) or B. capensis.
Cooper (1988) recorded B. capensis from the Lower Campanian. Haughton
20 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(1925, 1926) and Howarth (1965) described B. subanceps (Figs 130, 131A—H)
from the Upper Campanian or Lower Maastrichtian, and Haas (1943: 13,
figs 15-19) described B. anceps (herein Fig. 131I-M) from the Lower Maas-
trichtian. A single baculite species, B. teicherti is known from the Maastrichtian
of Nigeria.
Baculites from the Atlantic seaboard and the Gulf Coast region of the
U.S.A. (see e.g. Adkins 1929; Stephenson 1941; Cobban 1974; Cobban &
Kennedy 199la, 1991b, 1992a, 1992b, 1993; Kennedy & Cobban) 1993a7
1993b, 1993c, 1993d, 1993e) bear little resemblance to those of Angola or of
the Western Interior.
Fig. 7. A-F. Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu, 1926. A. NMBD1158/2.
B-C. NMBD1158/3, specimen with distinct ribbing on body chamber. D. NMBD1158/4.
E. NMBD1158/1. F. NMBD1158/7. All from a locality on the Msunduzi River, Van
Hoepen collection, presumably the equivalent of locality 145 of Kennedy & Klinger (1975:
299), St Lucia Formation, Coniacian II. Scale x 1.
The baculitid records from Central America and Brazil are scant. Only
B. yokoyamai is known from the Lower Coniacian of Venezuela and B. kegeli
from the Maastrichtian of Brazil. |
The North African baculitids were last studied by Pervinquiére (1907, 1910)
and, from his descriptions, it appears that Baculites is rare. Lefeld & Uberna
(1992) recently mentioned Baculites in association with Nostoceras from Libya.
The baculitids of the Middle East, specifically Israel, appear to contain a
mixture of European, Indo-Pacific and U.S. Gulf Coast and Atlantic seaboard
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 7
elements, as well as some endemics. Dr Z. Lewy (Jerusalem) has shown us an
extensive collection of Campanian to Maastrichtian Baculites, which he intends
to describe. This as yet undescribed collection shows that the older records of
Blanckenhorn (1905), Taubenhaus (1920) and Picard (1929) are badly in need of
revision. Baculitids from Egypt were recently described by Luger & Groschke
(1989) and Hamama & Kassab (1990). These include B. subanceps and
B. ovatus—Indo-Pacific and Gulf Coast-Atlantic region species. The record of
B. scotti, a Western Interior species by Hamama & Kassab (1990: 462, pl. 2
(figs 5-9)) is probably incorrect. Alharithi & Ibrahim (1992) also recorded
B. ovatus from the Maastrichtian of Jordan.
The Upper Coniacian to Lower Maastrichtian Baculites fauna of the U.S.
Western Interior is mainly endemic (see review by Cobban 1994), but Kennedy
(1993) has recently recorded three typical Western Interior species from the
Campanian and Maastrichtian of Belgium. Some parallel development of the
sutures and ornament occurs in the baculites of the Western Interior and of the
Indo-Pacific regions (Klinger & Kennedy in press). Differences between bacu-
lites of the European and Indo-Pacific regions appear to be of lesser magnitude,
and there seems to have been a much greater amount of faunal interchange
between these two regions.
Occurrence
The genus first appears in the Lower Turonian, Zone of Pseudaspidoceras
flexuosum, of the Western Interior of the U.S.A., as B. yokoyamai, and also in
the Lower Turonian of Romania as Baculites aff. undulatus and Baculites sp.
(Szasz 1986); it persists to the end of the Maastrichtian (Birkelund 1979, 1993).
Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu, 1926
Figs 7-11, 12A-I
1926 Baculites (Lechites) yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu, p. 195, pl. 22
(fig. Sa—b), pl. 26 (fig. 11).
1931 Baculites Besairiei Collignon, p. 37, pl. 5 (figs 6, 6a, 7, 7a, 8, 8a, 9), pl. 9
(fig. 16).
1931 Baculites sulcatus Collignon, non Baily, p. 36, pl. 5 (figs 3, 3a, 4, 4a, 5, 5a,
[ei sa) pl. Oi (fie. 15);
1931 Baculites Roedereri Collignon, p. 38, pl. 5 (figs 10, 10a), pl. 9 (fig. 17).
51 Baculites latelobatus Collignon, p. 38, pl. 5 (igs 11, lla, 12, 12a), pl. 9
(fig. 18).
i 1958 Baculites ovatus Say?; Reyment, p. 7, pl. 1 (figs 1-2), text-figs 1-2.
1959 = Baculites aff. B. yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Matsumoto, p. 118, text-
fig. 26.
1963 ~=Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Matsumoto & Obata, p. 30, pl. 8
ie.) 5) aple LO (ies: 1-6). pla (iss 1,-4.2 5).¢pl. 12 (ie. 3), pl. 14
(fig. 4), text-figs 72-87.
1965 = Baculites besairiei Coll.; Collignon, p. 18, pl. 420 (figs 1745-1746).
1972 Baculites cf. B. yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Cobban & Scott, p. 48,
pl. 20 (figs 15-21).
1975 Baculites cf. B. yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Hattin pl. 8 (figs F, H).
1977 —Baculites cf. B. yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Kennedy, p. 271, fig. 17
Cie):
1978 Baculites cf. B. yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Hattin & Siemers, text-
ji ae ap as
22 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
1980 Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Cobban & Hook, p. 13, pl. 4
(figs 9-10).
1982 Baculites inornatus non Meek; Renz, p. 105, pl. 34 (figs 3-4, Sa—b, 6), text-
fig. 80.
1983 Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Cobban & Hook, p. 7, pl. 1
(figs 1-7).
1983 Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Cobban, p. 16, pl. 14 (figs 6-8).
1984 Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Cobban, p. 14, pl. 1 (figs 5-6).
1986 Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Cobban, fig. 3H-I.
1988 Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Kennedy, p. 110, pl. 23
(figs 8-10), text-fig. 29c.
1988 Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Kennedy & Cobban, p. 608, fig. 3
Oy Ss ea sh, NON,
1989 _~—-B. yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Kennedy er al. p. 101, fig. 3le-h.
1990 —_ Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Cobban, p. B11, pl. 9 (figs 16-22).
1991a_ Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Kennedy & Cobban, p. 69, pl. 13
(figs 4-10, 17-21, 24-28, 34-37, 41-42), text-fig. 22A.
1992 Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu; Summesberger, p. 124, pl. 8
(figs 10-11).
Type
Holotype, by monotypy, is the specimen figured by Tokunaga & Shimizu
(1926, pl. 22 (fig. 5a—-b), pl. 26 (fig. 11)) from the lower Futaba Beds in the
upper reaches of the Sakurazawa in Orikiri, Hirono-mura, Fukushima prefec-
ture, north-east Honshu. The type was destroyed by fire during World War II.
A specimen from the collections of the Kyushu University, GK 4580 from the
Bannosawa in Hokkaido, of Coniacian age, zone of Inoceramus uwajimensis,
was to be designated neotype by Matsumoto & Obata (see Matsumoto & Obata
963-73 0=3i))
Material
NMB D1158/1-2, ?3, 4-8, all from a locality on the Msundusi River,
collected by E. C. N. van Hoepen in 1923, presumably equivalent to Kennedy
& Klinger’s (1975: 299) locality 145, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian II
(associated with Forresteria (F.) madagascariensis Collignon, 1965).
_Dimensions
Specimen MxWb MxWh Wb/Wh MnWb MnWh Wb/Wh D Ti
D1158/4 6.4 8.6 0.74 Died 8.1 0.70 20) anes
D1158/7 8.4 UL On 79 9) 0.80 28. 7G
D1158/1 933 10 OWT q-9 10.3 OFT 26° 6
D1158/5 9.3 WAI O77 “= — _ — —
D1158/2 oo 13.0 — _- =
D1158/3 oO NET 0.68 Tod) Oo OO 50. <356
Description
This species is rare in Zululand, and known from one locality only. It is
easily identified by the elliptical whorl section and the very slow rate of taper in
adult specimens. Also, the maximum adult size is small compared to later
species of Baculites in Zululand.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 23
Only one specimen, D1158/1 (Fig. 7E) has faint traces of ribbing over the
venter; all the other specimens are perfectly smooth, both on the shell surface
and on internal moulds.
One specimen, D1158/3 (Fig. 7B-—C)—a body chamber with part of the last
two septa preserved, is identical to the above specimens except that it has
distinct, crescentic lateral ribs, which appear to originate in a curved, dorso-
lateral tubercle. Unfortunately we cannot determine on the basis of this speci-
men whether this ribbing is restricted to the body chamber, or is also present on
the phragmocone.
The suture is partially exposed in D1158/4 (Fig. 8A) and D1158/3
(Fig. 8B), showing very simple, open subquadrate saddles and lobes.
a [Pug vst
Fig. 8. Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu, 1926. Suture lines.
A. NMBD1158/4. B. NMBD1158/3. Scale bar in mm.
Discussion
Baculites yokoyamai is the best documented species in the early history of
the genus Baculites and appears to have both a wide geographic distribution and
long stratigraphic range. It appears to be the root stock from which the majority
of later Baculites species has evolved.
The name B. yokoyamai has been applied to non-tuberculate baculitids with
elliptical whorl section, primitive suture and of Turonian to Coniacian age. The
Turonian occurrences are best documented in the U.S. Western Interior, where
the species ranges throughout the stage, first appearing in the Lower Turonian
Zone of Pseudaspidoceras flexuosum. It persists into the Lower Coniacian,
Zone of Inoceramus erectus of the Western Interior, from where it has recently
been fully illustrated by Kennedy & Cobban (1991a). In Hokkaido it persists
through the greater part of the Coniacian, although possibly not into the upper-
‘most part, in the Zone of Inoceramus uwajimensis.
24 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
L
E U
9) 2mm
E (ee
L G
U
Fig. 9. Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu, 1926. A-E. Whorl sections.
A. Japanese specimens (copy of Matsumoto & Obata 1963, text-figs 72-86).
B. NMBD1158/8. C. NMBD1158/6. D. NMBD1158/1. E. NMBD1158/5. All x 1.
F-G. Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906. Suture lines. F. SAM-PCZ8355. G. SAM-PCZ8344.
Our smooth specimens are identical to material described from the U.S.
Western Interior and Hokkaido. Kennedy & Cobban (1991a) have recently
shown that, even though the majority of B. yokoyamai in the lower Coniacian of
the Western Interior are smooth, some forms occur with fold-like ribs on the
upper part of the flanks (e.g. Kennedy & Cobban 1991a, pl. 13 (figs 20, 24).
D1158/3 (Fig. 7B-C) could possibly be interpreted as a more strongly sculp-
tured variant of B. yokoyamai, and we see no need for separating it from the
latter at present. Nevertheless, the similarity in ornament between D1158/3 and
B. sweetgrassensis Cobban (1951: 820, pl. 118 (figs 6-9), text-figs 1-3) (see
also Kennedy & Cobban 199la: 70, pl. 14 (figs 24-25, 29-34, 38-42)) is
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 25
striking. This latter species, however, has a distinctive ovoid whorl section with
a narrow venter.
The relationship between ribbed D1158/3 and smooth forms of B. yoko-
yamai is very similar to that of B. sweetgrassensis (ribbed) and B. mariasensis
(smooth) (Cobban 1951: 818, pl. 118 (figs 10-12), text-figs 4-7)—see also
Kennedy & Cobban 1991a: 69, pl. 13 (figs 11-16, 22-23, 29-33, 38-40), pl. 14
(figs 1-23, 26-28, 43-48), text-fig. 25E). The latter species both occur in the
Lower Coniacian Zone of /noceramus erectus, and, according to the original
description of Cobban (1951: 820), ‘B. sweefgrassensis is an uncommon species
. . . . The types were collected with B. mariasensis in the Colorado shale’.
Their co-occurrence, as well as the ratio of smooth to ribbed forms suggests
that B. sweetgrassensis may be no more than a ribbed form of B. mariasensis,
in the same relation as the ribbed Zululand specimen of B. yokoyamai to the
majority of smooth specimens.
Cobban (1951: 817) and Cobban & Reeside (1952) initially identified what is
now known as B. yokoyamai in North America, as Baculites cf. B. besairiei.
Matsumoto (1959: 117) subsequently suggested that B. besairiei Collignon
(1931: 37, pl. 5 (figs 6-9), pl. 9 (fig. 16)) might be a synonym of B. yokoyamai.
Later, Matsumoto & Obata (1963: 34) concluded confidently that ‘all the
described characters of Baculites besairiei Collignon are the same as those of
B. yokoyamai’.
Collignon had 721 baculitid specimens from the apparently condensed or
secondarily concentrated ferruginous conglomerate of Mahagaga, initially dated
as Santonian (Collignon 1931), but later as Late Coniacian (Besairie & Collig-
non 1959). Of these, 531 specimens were discarded as being too fragmentary,
leaving 190 specimens to be studied. The majority, 150 specimens, were
Seremred to 6. Desairiei Collignon (1931: 37, pl. 5 (figs 6, 6a, 7, 7a,.8, 8a, 9),
pl. 9 (fig. 16)); lectotype herein designated, is the largest figured specimen pl. 5
(fig. 6)) (herein Fig. 1OA-C). Collignon (1931: 37) described the variation in
strength of ribbing over the venter in B. besairiei in detail. In typical forms, the
ribs are oblique over the flanks and cross the venter in a sharp chevron. In
some, ribbing is thin, in others thick, and in some alternating thick and thin.
In addition to B. besairiei, Collignon described three other non-tuberculate
baculitids from this assemblage. These include B. sulcatus Collignon, non Baily
(Collignon 1931: 36, pl. 5 (figs 3-5, 13), pl. 9 (fig. 15)) (24 specimens) (herein
Fig. 11D-L); B. roedereri (Collignon 1931: 38, pl. 5 (fig. 10), pl. 9 (fig. 17))
(herein Fig. 12G-I); holotype by monotypy is the figured specimen; B. late-
lobatus (Collignon 1931: 38, pl. 5 (figs 11-12), pl. 9 (fig. 18)) (8 specimens)
(herein Fig. 12A-F); lectotype, herein designated, is the largest of the two
figured specimens (Collignon 1931, pl. 5 (fig. 11)) (herein Fig. 12A-C).
We have been able to examine the figured and some of the unfigured
material and agree with Matsumoto & Obata that B. besairiei is probably a
synonym of B. yokoyamai. Certainly as far as the elliptical whorl section and
variation in ornament are concerned, there is no valid reason for maintaining
them as separate species.
Furthermore, Collignon’s B. sulcatus definitely does not belong to this Cam-
panian Pondoland species; it lacks the typical strong lateral ornament. Instead,
we regard the 24 specimens described by Collignon under that name as slightly
26
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 10
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA fa)
more strongly ribbed variants of B. yokoyamai. Externally, B. roedereri is
indistinguishable from B. besairiei, i.e. B. yokoyamai. According to Collignon
(1931: 38) it differs in the suture line: the terminations of the lobes are rounded;
the first (E/L) saddle is very large and divided by a prominent lobule; the
second lateral saddle (L/U) is narrow and much higher than the first; and the
antisiphona! saddle (I/U) is very large and very low, divided by a large, pointed
lobule. The first lateral lobe (L) is narrow and prominent, the second lateral
lobe (U) is smaller than the first and asymmetrical. These differences are trivial
and well within the range of variation of B. yokoyamai (= B. besairiei).
Similarly, B. latelobatus was alleged to differ on sutural details. The anti-
siphonal saddle (U/I) is elongated above the first lateral saddle (E/L), the first
lateral lobe (L) is wide, whereas the second lateral lobe (U) is nearly rudi-
mentary. Again, these differences are well within the limits of variation of
B. yokoyamai (= B. besairiei).
The Mahagaga baculitid assemblage is of extreme interest in that it contains
the earliest representatives of tuberculate Baculites in Madagascar, 1.e.
mevenier Collicnon (1931: 35, pl. S fig. 2, 2a), pl. 9 (fig. 14)) (herein
Fig. 12J-—L) and Baculites cf. B. brevicosta Collignon non Schliter (Collignon
1931: 34, pl. 5 (fig. 1, la), pl. 9 (fig. 13)), but these are numerically insignifi-
cant compared to unornamented B. yokoyamai.
It is difficult to separate B. yokoyamai from other contemporary Turonian
Baculites species. In the Western Interior, the name B. calamus Morrow, 1935
(p. 473, pl. 49 (fig. 8a—b)) is used for Turonian Baculites with weak lateral ribs
(fide Cobban & Scott 1972: 49). However, as shown by e.g. Cobban & Hook
(1983, pl. 1 (figs 3-6)) and recently Kennedy & Cobban (1991a), some speci-
mens of B. yokoyamai also have weak to prominent lateral ornament, and it is
difficult to maintain them as separate species. Compared to B. yokoyamai,
B. calamus is extremely rare. We are not quite sure on how many specimens
Morrow based his species; he only mentioned the holotype but, according to
Cobban & Scott (1972: 49), ‘The species is uncommon; we found it in only one
bed at one locality’ (in Colorado). According to Cobban & Scott (1972: 32,
table 3), B. yokoyamai occurs throughout virtually the whole of the Turonian,
whereas B. calamus occurs only in the Middle Turonian Collignoniceras
woollgari Zone. Rarity alone can not be a criterion for invalidating the species
but, combined with the overlapping morphologies, we doubt that B. calamus
can be separated satisfactorily from B. yokoyamai.
The only other Turonian Baculites species is B. undulatus d’Orbigny, 1850.
Matsumoto & Obata (1963: 28) ascribed authorship of this species to Roman &
Mazeran, who indeed first provided a description of this species and designated
the lectotype (Roman & Mazeran 1913: 11, pl. 4 (figs 6-8)). Although poorly
defined, d’Orbigny’s Prodrome species are valid, and authorship of
Fig. 10 (see facing page). Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu, 1926. The figured
specimens of B. besairiei Collignon, 1931. A-C. Lectotype, the original of Collignon, pl. 5
(fig. 6). D-F. The original of Collignon, pl. 5 (fig. 9). G-I. The original of Collignon,
pl. 5 (fig. 8). J-L. The original of Collignon, pl. 5 (fig. 7). All from the ferruginous
conglomerate at Mahagaga, Madagascar. All unregistered and housed in the collections in
Dijon. All x 2.
28 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ae Gy
Fig. 11. Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu, 1926. A-C. The original of Collignon
(1931, pl. 5 (fig. 13)) Baculites aff. sulcatus. D-F. The original of Collignon (1931, pl. 5
(fig. 4). G-I. The original of Collignon (1931, pl. 5 (fig. 3)). J-L. The original of Collig-
non (1931, pl. 5 (fig. 5)), all originally referred to Baculites sulcatus. All from the
ferruginous conglomerate at Mahagaga, Madagascar. All unregistered and housed in the
collections in Dijon. All x 2.
B. undulatus rests with d’Orbigny. The lectotype was refigured and described
by Sornay (1955) and Breton & Bavent (1985: 101-102, figs 1-3).
The name B. undulatus has generally been applied to Upper Turonian Bacu-
lites in Western Europe, especially France (d’Orbigny 1850: 19, 21, no. 21;
Roman & Mazeran (1913: 11, pl. 4 (figs 6-8)), and the Chalk Rock of England
Fig. 12 (see facing page). A-I. Baculites yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu, 1926.
A- ‘C. The lectotype of B. latelobatus, the original of Collignon (1931, pl. 5 (fig. 11)).
D-F. A paralectotype of B. latelobatus, the original of Collignon (1931, pl. 5 (fig. 12)).
G-I. The holotype of B. roedereri, the original of Collignon (1931, pl. 5 (fig. 10)).
J-O. Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. J-L. The lectotype of Baculites boulei Collignon, the
original of Collignon (1931, pl. 5 (fig. 2)). M-O. The original of Baculites cf. B. aspero-
anceps of Collignon (1931, pl. 3 (fig. 7)). A-L from the ferruginous conglomerate at
Mahagaga; M-O from Mokotibe-Tsianaloky. All unregistered and housed in the Soc:
in Dijon. A-L x 2; M-O x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 12
29
30 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(Wright 1979: 287, pl. 1 (figs 6-8), pl. 7 (fig. 11)), where it is only known
from a few localities; Fritsch & Schloenbach (1872: 49) recorded numerous
baculitids from several localities in Bohemia that they considered to probably
belong to B. undulatus. Unfortunately, the specimens were nearly all
secondarily compressed, and none were figured; this makes it difficult to
confirm their Bohemian records. That of Jahn (1895: 136, pl. 8 (fig. 8a—c)),
as Baculites n. sp., however, confirms the occurrence of B. undulatus in
Bohemia. Matsumoto & Obata (1963: 28, pl. 8 (fig. 4), pl. 9 (figs 1-5), pl. 11
(figs 2-3), text-figs 62-71) recorded B. undulatus from the Upper Turonian of
Hokkaido.
Kennedy ef al. (1989: 101, fig. 311) recently recorded B. undulatus from the
Upper Turonian Prionocyclus macombi and P. wyomingensis zones of Trans-
Pecos Texas and New Mexico. This figured specimen is very similar to the
Middle Turonian B. calamus, and we suspect that they may be allied, possibly
as a local subspecies or variant of B. undulatus.
Szasz (1986: 120, pl. 1 (figs 1-2)) recorded Baculites aff. B. undulatus from
the Lower Turonian of Romania, accompanied by a questionable baculitid with
ornament very similar to that of B. calamus. If the Romanian material is cor-
rectly identified as B. undulatus, this suggests that B. yokoyamai and
B. undulatus appeared more or less at the same time in Europe and in North
America.
Baculites undulatus differs from B. yokoyamai mainly in having coarser,
less oblique ribbing. Dorsolateral bullae develop in some adult specimens of
both B. undulatus (see e.g. Wright 1979, pl. 7 (fig. 11)) and B. yokoyamai (see
above and NMB D1158/3—Fig. 7B-C), and seem to be of little systematic
value.
It thus appears that differences between B. yokoyamai and B. undulatus are
found mainly in the ribbing—that of the former being more delicate than that of
the latter. In addition, B. undulatus has a narrower stratigraphic distribution,
being restricted mainly to the Upper Turonian, although it might already occur
in the Lower Turonian, whereas B. yokoyamai occurs throughout the Turonian,
all of the Lower Coniacian and probably persists into the Upper Coniacian.
Differences between B. yokoyamai and B. bailyi are discussed below.
Feebly ornamented baculitids recorded from the Coniacian of Venezuela,
and misidentified as B. inornatus Meek (a Campanian species) by Renz (1982:
105, pl. 34 (figs 3-6), text-fig. 80) and as B. ovatus Say? (of Late Campanian
age) by Reyment (1958: 7, pl. 1 (figs 1-2), text-figs 1-2), are good examples of
B. yokoyamai, thus extending the geographic range of the species to South
America.
Occurrence
Baculites yokoyamai is known from the Turonian and Lower Coniacian
of the U.S. Western Interior, Lower Coniacian of Venezuela, and Coniacian of
Hokkaido (though apparently not extending to the uppermost part of the stage),
Middle Coniacian of Zululand, and Upper Coniacian of Madagascar. Dubious
specimens have recently been recorded from the Middle Turonian of Austria
(Summesberger 1992: 124).
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 31
a ed
Fig. 13. Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906. A. Copy of the suture line figured by Woods (1906,
pl. 44 (fig. 5)) based on a paratype in the now missing Griesbach collection. B. Copy of
Baily (1855, pl. 11 (fig. 5a-b)) of the holotype of B. bailyi (as B. sulcatus). C-E. The
holotype, BMNH C11372. F-H. SAM-PCO5994a. I-K. SAM-PCO5994b. Both from
dredge samples off the Natal South Coast. All except A x 1. Photographs in C-E by
courtesy of Natural History Museum, London.
32 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906
Figs 13-23, ?34M-R, 67K-Q, 78A-B
1855 = Baculites sulcatus Baily, p. 457 (pars), pl. 11 (fig. 5a-b only, non Sc).
i 1904 Baculites sp. Etheridge, p. 90, pl. 3 (fig. 24).
1906 Baculites Bailyi Woods, p. 341, pl. 44 (fig. 5).
? 1921 Baculites Bailyi Woods; van Hoepen, p. 18, pl. 3 (figs 9-10).
1921 Baculites bailyi H. Woods; Spath, p. 261.
1922 Baculites bailyi Woods; Spath, p. 146.
y 1930 Baculites Bailyi Woods; Besairie, p. 223, pl. 21 (fig. 7 only, non 6).
1963 ~=Baculites bailyi Woods; Matsumoto & Obata, p. 35, pl. 20 (figs 1-2), pl. 21
(fig. 5), text-figs 88-89, 116-120, 140-142.
1969 ~— Baculites bailyi Woods; Collignon, p. 21, pl. 520 (fig. 2051).
1977 — Baculites bailyi Woods; Klinger & Kennedy, p. 75, fig. 5D.
1978 Baculites bailyi Woods; Ward, p. 1148, pl. 1 (figs 5-7), text-fig. SA-D.
1984 ~=Baculites bailyi Woods; Olivero, p. 57, pl. 1 (figs 1-5), text-fig. la—b.
1985 Baculites bailyi Woods; Klinger, p. 5, fig. 4E-H.
? 1988 Baculites cf. kirki Matsumoto; Riccardi & Aguirre-Urreta, p. C389, pl. 3
(figs 4-8).
Types
Holotype, by original designation of Woods (1906: 342) is the specimen
figured by Baily (1855, pl. 11 (fig. 5a—b)), BMNH C11372 (herein refigured as
Fig. 13C-E), from an unspecified horizon at the type section of the Mzamba
Formation, Mzamba Estuary, Pondoland, Transkei. Probable paratypes are
SAM- 4822 and SAM-13103 (Fig. 67M), both also from an unspecified horizon
at the Mzamba Estuary.
Material
We have more than one hundred specimens from the following localities:
(1) Locality 1, Mzamba Formation, Pondoland, Transkei, Santonian II.
(2) Locality 10, Zululand (locality d of Spath 1921¢ 221-222) 35S aeons
Formation; the locality extends from Coniacian II at the base to probably as
high as Campanian.
(3) Locality 13, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian II or HI.
(4) Locality 72, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian III.
(5S) Locality 73, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV (associated with
Peroniceras (Zuluiceras) modestum).
(6) Locality 74, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, the section extends from
Santonian I to Campanian I.
(7) Locality 77, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian V.
(8) Locality 78, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian I-II.
(9) Locality 80, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian V.
(10) The top of the section at locality 92, Zululand, St Lucia Formation,
Coniacian III.
Fig. 14 (see facing page). Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906. A-I. SAM-PCZ8391.
J-Q. SAM-PCZ8357. Both from locality 99, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian I]
or II. A-D, J-M x 1, E-H, N-Q x 2,1 x 4.
33
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
vl
‘Sly
34 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(11) Locality 96, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian V or Santonian I.
(12) Locality 98, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian 71.
(13) Locality 99, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian I or II.
(14) Locality 100, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian I.
(15) Locality 101, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian II or III.
(16) Field locality H40, small exposure at pump house on the banks of the
Nyalazi River, on Nyalazi Sugar Estate, 2 km east of Nyalazi River Settlement,
Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian 71.
(17) Field locality H135, loose concretions next to railway line, near Lake View
siding, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian ?V.
(18) Dredge samples off the Natal South Coast.
Dimensions
A list of dimensions is given in the appendix.
Max. Wb. (mm) MxWb/MxWh MnWb/MnWh Ti
0-4.9 OF5 0.71 5.3
5.0-9.9 OMS 0.76 5.4
10.0-14.9 0.76 0.75 4.15
15.0-19.9 0.77 0.76 Zot ‘
Description
Woods’s (1906: 341) original description is as follows: ‘Shell increasing in
diameter very slowly. Section oval, compressed, rather narrower on the
siphonal than on the antisiphonal side. A small carina is seen in specimens
which have the shell well-preserved. Lobes and saddles narrow and rather deep
. Ornamentation consists of small, inconspicuous ribs, which bend rapidly
backwards from the siphonal margin; below the middle of ‘the Shell they curve
round and pass forward over the anti-siphonal margin.’
Our material shows that this is essentially an inornate species with ovoid
whorl section, which, in typical specimens, has a venter that is narrower than
the dorsum and may even be acute; but in some, the whorl section may be near-
circular. Lateral ornament consists of fine striae only, which may strengthen on
the ventral half of the flanks and cross the venter with a distinct chevron, and,
in the process, form distinct corrugations, which may be present even on
internal moulds. Irregularly developed, weak dorsolateral nodes occur in a few
specimens.
One of the notable features of B. bailyi (and other baculitids as well) is that
it often occurs in great concentrations in single concretions, sometimes in more
or less parallel arrangement. In some of these concretions, e.g. SAM-PCZ8390
from locality 13, the preservation is exquisite, with original shell material and
protoconchs preserved (Figs 17A-B, 18A-B).
Early whorls with protoconchs are preserved in PCZ8390 (Fig. 17A),
PCZ8390z (Fig. 18A), PCZ8390m (Fig. 18B), PCZ83900, PCZ8390e and
PCZ7213-4. The small diameter of the early coiled section is less than 0.5 mm,
and explains why exposed protoconchs on fracture surfaces of concretions are
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 35
Fig. 15. Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906. A-C. SAM-PCZ8359, exact locality unknown,
probably Mkweyane (Umkwelane Hill), Zululand. Note distinct ventral corrugation.
D-F. SAM-PCZ8346. G-I. SAM-PCZ8345. J-L. SAM-PCZ8344 (microconch), all from
locality 99, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian I or II. All x 1.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
36
Lees,
e
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA a7
extremely rare. A slight nick-point in the early shaft is also conspicuous. The
presence and preservation of baculitids with protoconchs probably indicate very
low energy levels in this depositional environment.
The whorl section is elliptical at very early diameters, c. 2 mm, and sub-
sequently becomes ovoid, with a narrow to acute vénter, and maximum whorl
breadth just dorsal of mid-flank (Figs 19B-C, F, 20A-I, 21A-I, 22B-E). The
whorl section is quite variable. In some, the section is distinctly tear-shaped,
with a nearly acute venter, often accentuated by chevron ribbing over, and dis-
tinct corrugation of the venter. In others the venter may remain broadly rounded
to large diameters, resulting in a near-circular whorl section.
Details of the ornament vary considerably, partly due to preservation.
Ornament consists of fine striae which cross the whole periphery of the shell
(Fig. 14J—Q), but are generally strongest on the ventral half of the flanks, where
they curve and are strongly prorsiradiate. In some, the striae may be raised in
sheaves on the dorsal part of the flanks, forming slight, crescentic, incipient
tubercles (Fig. 14A—-H). Over the venter some striae may thicken periodically,
separated by weaker ones, or all may thicken. Both types of ornament produce
distinct crenulation and chevron ribbing over the venter (e.g. Figs 1SA-C,
16I-L, 23D-G, P-R).
In the majority of specimens, ornament on the body chamber and phragmo-
cone is the same. In some, however, irregularly spaced dorsolateral nodes may
appear on the body chamber. In PCZ8350 (Fig. 16A-D), albeit slightly patho-
logic, crescentic ribs appear on the body chamber. On PZC8353 (Fig. 34H-I) a
single pair of tubercles occurs; on PCZ8387 (Fig. 34M-O) two pairs of
distantly-spaced tubercles occur. We are not quite sure if these are, indeed,
atypical forms of B. bailyi or weakly ornamented variants of B. capensis—we
suspect the former.
Unfortunately preserved apertures are rare, but the disparate sizes of some
apparently adult specimens (compare e.g. Figs 15G-I and I15J-L) suggest that
the species may be dimorphic.
The suture lines (Figs 19A, D, 22A) of our specimens vary in details, but
are relatively simple with open saddles and lobes.
Discussion
For several reasons, B. bailyi is difficult to interpret on the basis of the
Pondoland material alone. Of the original type series, only the holotype and two
very poorly preserved paratypes remain. The exact stratigraphic location of the
holotype at the type section of the Mzamba Formation is unknown and, despite
being amongst the first ammonites recorded from Mzamba, B. bailyi is
extremely rare there. Most probably the biggest obstacle in referring smooth
Coniacian and Santonian Baculites from Zululand and Pondoland to B. bailyi, as
we had indeed done earlier (Kennedy & Klinger 1975: 278-279), is the
seemingly atypical suture line of B. bailyi as figured by Woods (1906, pl. 44
Fig. 16 (see facing page). Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906. A-D. SAM-PCZ8350 (note
irregular ornament on body chamber). E-H. SAM-PCZ8349 (arrow points to lateral
tubercle). Both from locality 99, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian I or II.
I-L. SAM-PCZ8356 from locality 100, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian I.
All <r
38
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
einnteon nan
Fig. 17
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 39
(fig. 5)) (herein Fig. 13A) and taken from a specimen in the Griesbach
collection. None of our smooth Baculites from Zululand have as narrow saddles
as the specimen in Woods’s figure.
The Griesbach collection was originally housed in the Hamburg Museum
(Woods 1906: 275). This collection could not be traced and, according to Prof.
C. Spaeth (letter 2.2.1992) was probably destroyed during aerial bombardment
of the Museum in 1943. There is thus no way of ascertaining whether the suture
line figured by Woods was indeed accurate or not. Unfortunately, the holotype,
through being septate throughout, still has the shell preserved. Without
damaging the shell, it is impossible to determine whether it has a suture like that
of the material described here, or of the lost Griesbach specimen.
Woods (1906: 432) also mentioned that ‘Several other specimens were col-
lected by the (Cape of Good Hope Geological) Survey.’ Only two of the Survey
specimens (SAM-13103, 4822) could be traced in the collections of the S.A.
Museum. These are poorly preserved internal moulds and do not show the
sutures.
As mentioned above, B. bailyi is a rarity at Mzamba. All our specimens of
B. bailyi from Mzamba were collected in the basal beds, where it occurs with
B. capensis. Most of these specimens are small but we are reasonably confident
that these are indeed consistently smooth Baculites and not merely smooth forms
of B. capensis. Those specimens from which sutures could be traced, e.g.
PCP6765 (Fig. 19A) and PCP8729 (Fig. 19E), show considerable variation in
sutural details, but none are quite like Woods’s figure.
Apart from our own material, the largest fossil collection from Mzamba to
date was made by Van Hoepen in 1919 and is housed in the Transvaal Museum
(Van Hoepen 1921). Unfortunately, no precise stratigraphic data are available
for this collection; the locality is merely given as Mzamba Estuary. The Van
Hoepen collection is of extreme interest in that it contains a baculitid assem-
blage that we had not encountered at the type section. Six of these baculites
were tentatively referred to B. bailyi by Van Hoepen, “There is, however, still
an element of doubt’ (Van Hoepen 1921: 18). These are all juvenile specimens
with whorl sections varying from circular to elliptical. It is impossible to ident-
ify them any more precisely as Baculites. All the other baculitids were referred
to B. sulcatus by Van Hoepen. Details of these are given below (p. 114). What
is important, however, is that these differ from typical B. sulcatus from the
uppermost beds at Mzamba, and can possibly be regarded as early forms
connecting with B. capensis from the basal beds. Ornament in these specimens
of B. sulcatus varies from individuals with extremely strong lateral nodes
projected forwards over the flanks and over the venter as strong ribs and with
Fig. 17 (see facing page). Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906. A. SAM-PCZ8390.
B. SAM-PCZ8390b. Parts of same concretion showing protoconchs. Both from locality 13,
Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian II or III. C. SAM-PCZ8039. D-F. SAM-
PCZ8367 from locality 99, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian I or II. G-H.
SAM-PCZ8390j from locality 13, Zululand. I. SAM-PCZ8020 from locality 101, Zululand,
St Lucia Formation, Santonian II or IJ. (Note weak tubercle.) J-K. SAM-PCZ8364b from
locality 80, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian V. Scale bar for size for A and B;
D-F. IEK x I: G-H «2;
40 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 18. Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906. A. SAM-PCZ8390z. Concretion crowded with
juvenile specimens. B. SAM-PCZ8390m. SEM photograph of barrel-shaped protoconch and
early straight shaft. From locality 13, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian II or III.
Axes Bel:
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 4]
Fig. 19. Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906. Whorl section and suture lines.
A-B. SAM-PCP6765. C-D. SAM-PCP6766. E. SAM-PCP8729.
F. NMBD108. Venter in whorl section pointing downward. Scale bar for size.
numerous ventral intercalatories, to specimens with smooth flanks and only
Suggestions of ventral corrugations. The suture line of one of the latter (smooth
specimens), TM 540m (Fig. 70C) is nearly identical to that figured by Woods of
the specimen of B. bailyi in the (now lost) Griesbach collection. This suggests—
but it is impossible to prove—that the suture line figured by Woods may
possibly have been taken from a smooth form of B. sulcatus.
Three baculitids (Fig. 13F-K) dredged off the Natal South Coast (Klinger
1985) are derived from what are probably offshore equivalents of the Mzamba
Formation. They occur in a faunal assemblage similar to that described from
42 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
G
O 10 mm
Fig. 20. Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906. Whorl sections.
A-D. SAM-PCZ8710. E. SAM-PCZ9845. F. SAM-PCZ8356.
G. SAM-PCZ8374. H. SAS H28/3. I. SAM-PCZ9943.
Venter pointing downward. Scale bar for size.
Mzamba by Van Hoepen (1920, 1921). As far as whorl section and lack of
ornament is concerned, they are unmistakably B. bailyi when compared to the
holotype. Unfortunately only parts of the suture are visible in two of the
specimens but the tops of the saddles appear wider than in Woods’s figure.
These rather inconclusive data from the type locality of B. bailyi indicate
that the species is coeval with B. capensis in the Middle Santonian, and may
occur as late as the early Campanian, where it is partly coeval with B. sulcatus.
The suture line figured by Woods does not seem to be characteristic of typical
B. bailyi. In all likelihood, it was either drawn incorrectly, or is from a.smooth
form of B. sulcatus.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 43
This interpretation of B. bailyi seems to verify Matsumoto & Obata’s (1963:
35), Ward’s (1978: 1148) and Olivero’s (1984: 57) records of this species from
the Upper Santonian of Hokkaido, Upper Santonian to Lower Campanian of
British Columbia and Lower Campanian of James.Ross Island, respectively.
Furthermore, none of the figured suture lines of their specimens has narrow
saddles and lobes, as in Woods’s figure. Matsumoto & Obata (1963: 37) also
commented that the sutures of their specimens of B. bailyi differed from the
Pondoland material. The two sutures illustrated by Matsumoto & Obata (1963,
text-figs 88-89) also show minor differences in the width of the individual
elements.
A B
Cc D E
G H :
F
O 10 mm
Fig. 21. Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906. A. Whorl sections.
A. SAM-PCZ8389. B. SAM-PCZ8346. C. SAM-PCZ8345.
D. SAM-PCZ8373. E. SAM-PCZ8347. F. SAM-PCZ8375.
G. SAM-PCZ8384. H. SAM-PCZ8384. I. SASH135.
Venter pointing downward. Scale bar for size.
mi ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
L |
5 U
A
€.
B
O 5 mm
ie ee ee
D
:
0 5 mm
EARDAEe Coen aire ees |
Fig. 22. Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906. Suture line and whorl sections.
A-C. SAM-PCZ83901. D-E. SAM-PCZ8390a. Venter in whorl
section pointing downward. Scale bar for size.
Collignon (1969: 21, pl. 520 (fig. 2051)) confirmed the rarity of the species
in Madagascar, where only two specimens are known, from the Lower
Campanian. Earlier records of B. bailyi from the Santonian of the Montagne de
Francais (Madagascar) by Besairie (1930: 223, pl. 21 (figs 6-7)) are probably
partially incorrect. One of these specimens (Besairie’s fig. 6) has distinct
dorsolateral ribbing and definitely does not belong here; the other is probably
B. bailyi.
Fig. 23 (see facing page). Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906. A-C. SAM-PCZ8379.
D-G. SAM-PCZ8354. H-I. SAM-PCZ8353. J-M. SAM-PCZ8355. Note lateral tubercle
in H. N-O. SAM-PCZ12782, all from locality 98, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian
2V. P-R. SAM-PCZ8016 from locality 96, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian V or
Santonian I. S-U. SAM-PCZ8390 from locality 13, Zululand, St Lucia Formation,
Coniacian II-III. All x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 23
45
46 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
In contrast to Pondoland, B. bailyi is locally very common in Zululand,
especially on the north-eastern part of the floodplain of the Hluhluwe River at
Nkundusi, where it occurs in the uppermost Coniacian and/or Lower Santonian.
Elsewhere in Zululand, B. bailyi first occurs in the second or third divisions of
the Coniacian. Initially we thought that these smooth Coniacian specimens of
Baculites were the same as B. besairiei from Madagascar. However, as dis-
cussed above, B. besairiei (including B. roedereri and B. latelobatus) is a
synonym of B. yokoyamai. We admit that it is difficult to separate isolated
specimens of B. yokoyamai, B. bailyi and smooth or juvenile B. capensis;
identification is mainly by association. These three species have overlapping
Stratigraphic ranges and morphologies in the Coniacian, but they generally do
not occur together. The whorl section of B. yokoyamai is predominantly
elliptical, whereas that of B. bailyi is generally ovoid to circular. Completely
smooth specimens of B. capensis are rare, but can generally be distinguished
from B. bailyi by the more elliptical whorl section. Juvenile specimens of some
early forms of B. capensis, where tuberculation only develops in late stages
of growth—e.g. Figure 49J, are difficult to impossible to separate from
B. bailyi.
It is equally difficult or impossible, on external morphology alone, to dis-
tinguish between B. bailyi and Baculites sp. aff. B. rectus (see p. 47). Both are
completely smooth and have similar whorl sections. Suturally, however, they
are totally different. Even small phragmocone fragments of Baculites sp. aff.
B. rectus show the highly complex suture that immediately distinguishes it from
B. bailyi as figured by Woods (1906), Matsumoto & Obata (1963), Ward (1978)
or Olivero (1984).
Baculites uedae Matsumoto & Obata (1963: 40, pl. 20 (figs 5-7), pl. 21
(figs 1, 3, 6), text-figs 91-92, 121-129), from the Santonian of Hokkaido,
appears indistinguishable from our Zululand B. bailyi. It is virtually identical to
some Santonian microconchs of B. bailyi (see e.g. Fig. 1SJ-L) from Zululand
and we suspect that they may be synonyms. According to Matsumoto & Obata
(1963: 43), B. bailyi and B. uedae are nearly contemporary in Hokkaido but, in
all cases except one, occur at different localities. This seems to fit the general
pattern of Baculites distribution in Zululand, where individual variants of the
Same species are generally clustered at different localities but at the same
stratigraphic level.
Baculites kirki Matsumoto (1959: 143, pl. 43 (figs 1-3), text-figs 53a—b,
54-57, 58a—-b) from the Santonian of California and possibly Hokkaido (Matsu-
moto & Obata 1963: 65, pl. 18 (fig. 2), text-fig. 114) resembles some of our
specimens of B. bailyi with an acute venter, but in that species a distinct
rounded ventral keel develops. However, the specimens figured by Riccardi &
Aguirre Urreta (1988, pl. 3 (figs 4-8)) as Baculites cf. B. kirki from the San-
tonian of Cerro Indice in Patagonia are indistinguishable from some of our
B. bailyi with very narrow venters, e.g. NMBD1075/1, and are probably con-
specific, as are probably the Santonian specimens from James Ross Island,
figured by Olivero (1992, pl. 1 (figs 1-3)).
Baculites fuchsi Redtenbacher (1873: 134, pl. 30 (fig. 15); see also Summes-
berger 1979: 113, pl. 1 (figs 2-4), text-figs 2-3; Immel er al. 1982: 28, pl. 11
(fig. 8)), from the Santonian of the Gosau Beds of Austria, is indistinguishable
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 47
from B. bailyi. Unfortunately, the Austrian species is too poorly known for
definite comments. However, the association of smooth B. fuchsi with nodose
B. incurvatus in the Gosau Beds is remarkably similar to the Pondoland associ-
ation of B. bailyi with B. capensis. Given more material, it is possible that these
European species may prove to be senior synonyms of B. bailyi and B. capensis
(see also p. 92 onwards).
Baculites nugssuaquensis Birkelund (1965: 48, pl. 4 (fig. 1), pl. 5
(figs 1-4), pl. 6 (figs 1-2), text-figs 35-41), from the Santonian of West Green-
land, is a homoeomorph of B. bailyi. Some specimens of B. nugssuaquensis
with smooth flanks and ventral corrugations (e.g. Birkelund 1965, pl. 6 (fig. 2))
are indistinguishable from similarly ornamented B. bailyi, e.g. PCZ8359
(Fig. 1SA-C). This species, however, belongs to the northern extension of the
U.S. Western Interior baculitid lineage and any resemblance is due only to
convergence.
Occurrence
Middle Santonian to Lower Campanian of Pondoland, offshore Natal Coast,
Coniacian IJ to Campanian I of Zululand, Lower Campanian of Madagascar,
James Ross Island, Antarctica, Upper Santonian of Hokkaido and Upper
Santonian to Lower Campanian of British Columbia.
Baculites sp. aff. B. rectus Marshall, 1926
Figs 24-26
Compare
1926 Baculites rectus Marshall, p. 154, pl. 19 (fig. 1), pl. 32 (figs 9-10).
1953 Baculites aff. rectus Marshall; Spath, p. 19, pl. 7 (fig. 2a—c).
1970 Baculites rectus Marshall; Henderson, p. 23, pl. 3 (figs 2-3), text-
fig. 6.
1984 Baculites rectus Marshall; Olivero, p. 64, pl. 1 (figs 6-9), text-
nes lc, 2.
Material
SAM-PC5068, glauconitic concretion with numerous baculitid fragments,
labelled ‘Sugar Terminus Foundations, Durban—Donated’. This locality is
probably the same as ‘Maydon Wharf Sugar Terminal Site’ referred to by
Kennedy ef al. (1973) and later (Kennedy & Klinger 1975: 282) as locality 5 of
the Mzamba Formation, and dated as Santonian III and Campanian 7]; several
horizons are clearly represented (Kennedy & Klinger 1975: 282).
Description
The concretion contains numerous baculitids with whorl heights ranging
from c. 2 mm to more than 20 mm. The whorl section (Fig. 25E-F) is typically
ovoid, in some with a very narrow venter. Different sizes of body chambers
Suggest dimorphism. The aperture is slightly flared. The body chambers are all
smooth.
48 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 24. Baculites sp. aff. B. rectus Marshall, 1926. A-B. Parts of same concretion,
SAM-PC5068 from Maydon Wharf, Sugar Terminal site, locality 5, Mzamba Formation,
imprecisely dated as Santonian I]J-Campanian I. Both x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 49
O mm 5
Fig. 25. Baculites sp. aff. B. rectus Marshall, 1926. A-B. SAM-PC5068b.
C-D. SAM-PC5068a. A-B x 2; C-D x 1. E-F. Whorl sections. Venter pointing upward.
Scale bar for size.
The majority of specimens are smooth, but several phragmocone fragments
have low, rib-like swellings on the dorsal half of the flanks, and distinct,
prorsiradiate sulci on the ventral half.
The suture is very complex, dendritic, with saddles and lobes with narrow
stems and some phylloid folioles (Fig. 26).
Discussion
We initially thought that this was a concretion with B. bailyi, but the
complex suture line immediately rules out this identification. Even small
specimens can easily be distinguished as being totally different from B. bailyi on
the basis of the sutural complexity. Unfortunately, we do not have a definite age
50 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
E L U i
L
1"
O 5
eee
mm
Fig. 26. Baculites sp. aff. B. rectus Marshall, 1926.
Suture line of SAM-PC5068. Scale bar for size.
for these specimens but we assume them to be younger than the highest beds
exposed at the Mzamba Cliff, above the level of B. sulcatus. The association of
an inflated pachydiscid nucleus possibly confirms this. At any rate, the degree of
complexity of the suture line is greater than that of any of the other smooth
baculitids yet known from southern Africa. The origins of this species are —
obscure. The similar whorl sections suggest derivation from B. bailyi,
Fig. 27 (see facing page). Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. A-C. SAM-4825b,
paralectotype. D-H. SAM-4823, lectotype. I-K. SAM-PCP8753. L. SAM-PCP8050.
All from the basal beds at locality 1, Pondoland, Transkei, Mzamba Formation, Santonian II.
All’ > +1’.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 51
are case ee
Sy ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
associated with a sudden increase in sutural complexity. Alternatively, it could
be regarded as an immigrant.
There are several smooth baculitid species with complex sutures with which
our specimens can be compared.
Closest affinity seems to be with B. rectus Marshall (1926: 154, pl. 19
(fig. 1), pl. 32 (figs 9-10)), best known, but imprecisely dated, as Campanian-
Maastrichtian from New Zealand (see also Henderson 1970: 23, pl. 3 (figs 2-
3), text-fig. 6). Spath (1953: 19, pl. 7 (fig. 2a-e)) also tentatively recorded the
species from Graham Land, Antarctica. Olivero (1984: 64, pl. 1 (figs 6-9), text-
figs lc, 2) also reported the species from the Campanian of James Ross Island,
Antarctica. Collignon’s (1977: 10) Baculites sp. indet. from the Campanian of
New Caledonia may also belong here. None of these specimens has quite as
complex a suture line as the Durban specimens—that figured by Olivero (1984,
text-fig. 2) is the closest match. The suture figured by Spath (1953, pl. 7
(fig. 3)) has very narrow saddles, and resembles that of B. bailyi as figured by
Woods (1906, pl. 44 (fig. 5)), but is more finely incised.
Baculites chicoensis Trask (1856: 85, pl. 2 (fig. 2)) from the Upper Cam-
panian of California and British Columbia, and possibly southern Saghalin (Gra-
bovskaya 1984) has a comparable complex suture line, but the whorl section is
different—an incipient ventral keel appears in later growth stages. Baculites
chicoensis yezoensis Matsumoto & Miyauchi (1984: 70, pl. 25 (figs 1-5), text-
figs 11B-C) from the Lower Campanian of Hokkaido is closer to the Durban
specimens in retaining a narrow but not perceptibly keeled venter, as in the
nominate subspecies. : :
Baculites rex Anderson (1958: 191, pl. 49 (fig. 2)) from the Upper Cam-
panian and Maastrichtian of California, British Columbia and Hokkaido has a
more ‘lytoceratine’ or jagged suture and apparently grows to enormous size, as
the name implies.
Baculites hochstetteri Liebus (1902: 119, pl. 6 (figs 4-6)), imprecisely dated
as Upper Senonian of the Silesian Carpathian region, has sutures indistinguish-
able from our specimens. Unfortunately, this species is known only by the
figured syntypes and further comparisons are impossible. The types, originally
housed in Munich are lost, presumably destroyed during World War II.
Baculites regina Obata & Matsumoto (1963: 85, pl. 22 (figs 3-6), pl. 23
(figs 1-2), pl. 24 Cfigs 1-5), pl. 25 (figs 3-5), pl. 27 (figs 1, 6-7, 9), text-
figs 191-196, 200-214) from the Campanian of Honshu, has a similarly com-
plex suture line, but the adult, subpentagonal whorl section is immediately
distinctive.
Baculites duharti Hiinicken (in Hiinicken et al. 1975: 116, pl. 1 (figs 1-4),
pl. 2 (figs 1-2), pl. 3 (figs 5-8), text-figs 2a-d, 3a-c, 4-5)), from the Middle
and/or Upper Campanian of Tierra del Fuego, and also from the Middle
Campanian of Zululand (p. 178), is superficially similar to Baculites sp. aff.
B. rectus, but has a much simpler suture line, and the elliptical whorl section
typical of the B. capensis group.
Occurrence
Campanian s.1. of Durban.
1906
1907
1907
1921
1971
1921
1921
1921
1922
1923
? 1925
? 1930
1931
1931
1931
1931
1932
1936
1936
1958
1958
1959
1959
1959
1963
1966
1966
1966
non 1973
1977
?non 1988
1991b
Types
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 39
Baculites capensis Woods, 1906
Figs 27-33, 34A-L, ?34M-R, 35-54
Baculites capensis Woods, p. 342, pl. 44 (figs 6-7).
Baculites vagina Forbes; Boule, Lemoine & Thevenin, p. 65(45), pl. 15
(fig. 3-3a).
Baculites sp. Crick, p. 240.
Baculites capensis H. Woods; Spath, p. 257, pl. 24 (figs 6-7).
Baculites sp. aff. capensis H. Woods; Spath, p. 258.
Baculites cf. aspero-anceps Lasswitz; Spath, p. 259, pl. 24 (figs 4, 4a).
Baculites cf. brevicosta Schluter; Spath, p. 260, pl. 24 (figs 5, 5a).
Baculites sp. cf. sulcatus Baily; Spath, p. 260.
Baculites capensis Woods; Spath, p. 146.
Baculites capensis Woods; Spath, p. 13, text-fig. 3d.
Baculites sp. ind. Spath, p. 31, pl. 1 (fig. 1).
Baculites Bailyi Woods; Besairie, p. 223 (pars), pl. 21 (fig. 6) only.
Baculites cf. aspero-anceps Lasswitz; Collignon, p. 22, pl. 3 (figs 7, 7a),
pl. 9 (fig. 12).
Baculites aff. capensis Woods; Collignon, p. 22, pl. 3 (fig. 6).
Baculites cf. brevicosta Schluter; Collignon, p. 34, pl. 5 (fig. 1, la), pl. 9
(fig. 13).
Baculites Boulei Collignon, p. 35, pl. 5 (fig. 2, 2a), pl. 9 (fig. 14).
Baculites capensis Woods; Besairie, p. 50.
Baculites capensis Woods; Venzo, p. 116 [58].
Baculites capensis Woods var. umsinenensis Venzo, p. 116 [58], pl. 10 [6]
(figs 11-12).
Baculites buttensis Anderson, p. 191, pl. 49 (fig. 6, 6a, 6b).
Baculites aff. B. capensis Woods; Anderson, p. 192, pl. 48 (fig. 8, 8a).
Baculites schencki Matsumoto, p. 113, pl. 32 (figs la-c, 2a-c, 3a-b, 4a-b,
S5a-c, 6a-c), text-figs 12a—-b, 13a—-c, 14a-b, 15-21, 22a-b, 23a-c, 24-25.
Baculites boulei Collignon; Matsumoto, p. 118, pl. 32 (fig. 7a-c), pl. 33
(figs 4a-c, 5a—b, 6a-d, 7a—-b), text-figs 27a—b, 28-32.
Baculites capensis Woods; Matsumoto, p. 121, pl. 33 (figs la-d, 2a—-c, 3a-b),
pl. 45 (figs la-d, 2a-d, 3a-d, 4a-d), text-figs 33a—b, 34a-b.
Baculites capensis Woods; Matsumoto & Obata, p. 47, pl. 14 (fig. 2), pl. 15
(figs 3-5), pl. 19 (fig. 2), text-figs 95-96, 147-151.
Baculites capensis Woods; Collignon, p. 6, pl. 457 (fig. 1862).
Baculites capensis Woods var. tenuetuberculata Collignon, p. 6, pl. 457
(figs 1863).
Baculites malagasyensis Collignon, p. 7, pl. 457 (fig. 1865).
Baculites sp. group of B. capensis Woods; Kennedy & Klinger, p. 101, pl. 4
(figs 1-5), pl. 5 (fig. la-d), pl. 6 (figs 4-5). (= B. vanhoepeni)
Baculites capensis Woods; Klinger & Kennedy, p. 71, figs 2A-F, 3G.
Baculites capensis Woods; Cooper, p. 210, fig. 1G-I.
Baculites capensis Woods; Kennedy & Cobban, p. 182, figs 6: 4,; 8: 1-8; 10:
7-10. 1D=14=512: 25.
Woods based this species on at least four syntypes, which survive in the col-
lections of the South African Museum. Lectotype, by subsequent designation of
Matsumoto & Obata (1963: 48), is the smaller of the two specimens figured by
Woods (1906, pl. 44 (fig. 6a—b)), from an unknown horizon at the type section
of the Mzamba Formation at the Mzamba Estuary, Transkei, South Africa,
SAM-4823—herein refigured as Figure 27D-H. Paralectotypes are SAM-4824,
4825 and 4825b, all from the same locality.
54 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
We have several hundred catalogued and uncatalogued specimens from the
following localities:
(1) Basal beds and foreshore exposures at locality 1 at the Mzamba River
Estuary, Pondoland, Mzamba Formation, Santonian II.
(2) Locality 6, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian II-III to Campanian I.
(3) Locality 15, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV.
(4) Locality 16, Zululand, Coniacian ?III.
(5) Bed B at locality 22, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV.
(6) Locality 24, Zululand,St Lucia Formation, Coniacian II-V.
(7) Locality 26, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, ?Santonian.
(8) Locality 72, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian III.
(9) Locality 73, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV-V, ?Santonian I.
(10) Locality 80, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian V.
(11) Locality 83, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV.
(12) Locality 85, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian I.
(13) Locality 88, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV-V, ?Santonian I.
(14) Localities 89 and 90, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV.
(15) Locality 91, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV or V.
(16) Locality 92, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian II and III.
(17) Locality 93, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian II.
(18) Locality 94, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian V—Santonian I.
(19) Locality 98, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian ?V.
(20) Field locality H51, Mpisene Creek, east of Nyalazi River Trading Store,
Zululand, St Lucia Formation, ?Santonian.
(21) Field locality H40, exposure at pump house on Nyalazi River, west of
Nyalazi River Trading Store, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian 71.
Dimensions
A full list of dimensions is given in the appendix.
Max Wb (mm) MxWb/MxWh MnWb/MnWh Ti Tubs/Wh
0-4.9 0.63 0.6 ae) 2
5-9.9 O83 0.74 6.48 Zon
10-14.9 0.73 Ol 3292 pS
IS='9)9) 0.75 0.75 5.64 2.18
20-21 OMT O:73 — 2
Fig. 28 (see facing page). Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. A. Plaster cast of exposed
surface of basal beds of Mzamba Formation on south side of the Mzamba River estuary.
B-E. SAM-4824, paralectotype figured by Woods (1906, pl. 44 (fig. 7a-c)).
F. SAM-4825, unfigured paralectotype. All from the basal beds of the Mzamba Formation
at locality 1, Pondoland, Transkei, Santonian II. All x 1.
Fig. 29 (see overleaf). Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. All specimens from the basal beds
of the Mzamba Formation at locality 1, Pondoland, Transkei, to illustrate the variation
in ornament. A-C. SAM-PCP8664. D. SAM-PCP8665. E. SAM-PCP8755.
F-H. SAM-PCP8663. I. SAM-PCP8360. J. SAM-PCP8052. K. SAM-PCP8053.
L. SAM-PCP8051. M. SAM-PCP8054. N-P. SAM-PCP8241. All x 1:
55
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 28
56
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 29
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 57
DU.
Clete
OOO
Fig. 30. Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. Whorl sections of type
series and topotype material. A-B. SAM-4824. C-D. SAM-4823
Gectotype). EF. SAM -—PCP8754. F. SAM-PCP8756.
G. SAM-PCP8662. H. SAM-PCP8665. Venter pointing downward.
Scale bar for size.
Description
This is the most common baculitid in Zululand, Natal and Pondoland, and is
very variable, as here interpreted. In order to illustrate the variation of the
Species, we first describe the types and topotype material collected at the type
locality, the Mzamba River estuary in Pondoland.
58 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 31. Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. Whorl sections of specimens
from the type locality. A. SAM-PCP8360/10. B. SAM-PCP8360/13.
C. SAM-PCP8052. D. SAM-PCP8241. E. SAM-PCP8051.
F. SAM-PCP8644. G. SAM-PCP8663. H. SAM-PCP8663.
I. SAM-PCP6767. Venter pointing downward: Scale bar for size.
Description of type specimens. The lectotype, SAM-4823 (Fig. 27D-—H) is
part of a phragmocone, partially filled with sparry calcite and glauconitic silt.
SAM-4824 (Fig. 28B-E) is non-septate, and, at the larger end, has part of the
aperture preserved. SAM-4825 (Fig. 28F) is a fragment of which the one flank
is corroded. SAM-4825b (Fig. 27A-C) is a large body chamber and, to date,
the largest specimen of B. capensis recorded from the Mzamba Formation.
Woods’s figures of the lectotype and paralectotype are quite accurate and
show the characteristic features of the species—an elliptical whorl section with
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 59
the venter as wide as, or only slightly narrower than the dorsum, and parallel
flanks with a shallow, longitudinal depression situated immediately ventral of
the tubercles. This depression is very shallow, as different angles of illumination
of the lectotype illustrate (Fig. 27D-E). In the lectotype (SAM-4823) and para-
lectotypes (SAM-4824, 4825) the tubercles are characteristically pinched and
clavate.
Paralectotype SAM-4825b (Fig. 27A-C) is part of an internal mould of a
body chamber. As mentioned above, it is the largest specimen of B. capensis
known to us from the Mzamba Formation and is obviously a macroconch. Here
the tubercles are much weaker than on the lectotype and conical to bullate,
rather than clavate. The longitudinal depression at midflank is not as prominent
as in the other specimens. Distinct, forwardly projected ribs are visible on the
venter (on the internal mould).
Decriptions of topotype Pondoland material. We have several specimens of
B. capensis, all from the basal beds of the Mzamba Formation, at Mzamba
Chiff.
Juveniles. The juveniles are fortuitously preserved in a small concretion
(SAM-PCP8360) containing about 20 individuals (Fig. 291) and the impressions
of others. The smallest diameter preserved is 1.7 mm. The whorl section in the
early stages is oval (Fig. 31A-B), with the venter as wide, or only slightly
narrower than the dorsum. The appearance of tubercles is variable. On
PCP8360/10 (Fig. 291), an internal mould, the surface of the flanks is perfectly
smooth up to a whorl height of about 5 mm, when weak, crescentic dorsolateral
tubercles start appearing. Faint ribbing over the venter starts appearing at a
slightly earlier stage. In other, larger specimens, the flanks are still smooth,
ornamented by faint striae only. In PCP8360/3 the venter is distinctly crenulated
on the internal mould and the flanks bear low, rounded tubercles.
Adult stage. The whorl section shows some variation, depending on whether
seen in nodal or internodal view, and also whether taken on an internal mould
or on the external surface of the shell (Figs 30-31). They are generally near-
elliptical, with parallel flanks and the venter only slightly narrower than the dor-
sum. In some, however, e.g. PC P8644 (Fig. 31F), the whorl section is trigonal,
with a narrowly rounded venter. In others, the venter may be slightly fastigiate,
e.g. SAM-4823 (Fig. 27H).
The size, shape and spacing of the tubercles varies considerably; again this
is partially determined by whether the shell is preserved, or whether seen on the
internal mould. Typical ornament associated with the name B. capensis consists
of longitudinally elongated, either oblongly rounded or dorsoventrally pinched
tubercles, situated near the dorsal quarter of the flanks, e.g. lectotype
SAM-4823 (Fig. 27D-E), paralectotype SAM-4824 (Fig. 28B-C)—this shows
the tuberculation on the internal mould and in shelly preservation, and
Figure 28A—a plaster cast of a large phragmocone. These longitudinally
elongated tubercles are generally bordered at mid-flank by a very shallow,
longitudinal depression. This depression is hardly visible in transverse (whorl
section) view, but is quite clear under oblique, low lighting. Compare, for
example, Figure 27D-E of the same (lectotype) specimen under different
60 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
illumination. In typical B. capensis, the spacing of tubercles numbers about two
per whorl height.
In some specimens, the tubercles are distinctly conical to rounded, e.g.
SAM-8753 (Fig. 27I-K) or PCP8050 (Fig. 27L), and in others low and
rounded, e.g. PCP8052 (Fig. 29J) and PCP8665 (Fig. 29D). In a few, e.g.
PCP8662 or PCP8241 (Fig. 29N-P), the tubercles are extremely feebly
developed, so as to be near-absent. In PCP8054 (Fig. 29M) the tubercles are
closer and irregularly spaced.
The surface of the shell bears fine striae, e.g. PCP8050 (Fig. 27L), and
PCP8052 (Fig. 29J). In some, e.g. PCP8664 (Fig. 29A-C), these are quite
strongly developed, and even visible on internal moulds, e.g. SAM-4825b
(Fig. 27A-C). Ventral corrugations are variably developed, ranging from absent
to extremely prominent, even on internal moulds.
Parts of the aperture are preserved in paralectotype SAM-4824 (Fig. 28C);
paralectotype SAM-4825b (Fig. 27A-C)) is a larger body chamber; both are
perfectly straight. PCP8050 (Fig. 27L) is a smaller, slightly curved body
chamber. The former two are probably macroconchs; the latter a microconch.
Description of Zululand material. In Zululand, B. capensis may be defined
aS a predominantly nodose baculitid with elliptical to ovoid whorl section; size
and shape of nodes varies, from absent, through weakly conical to strongly
conical, weakly to strongly crescentic, longitudinally elongated, obliquely
elongated, close, widely or irregularly spaced; some with shallow longitudinal
depression at midflank. Suture simple.
As can be deduced from this definition, the material is extremely variable
(see e.g. Fig. 33) and several morphotypes, based primarily on the presence and
shape of the tubercles, can be recognized. Some of these morphotypes appear to
be related to stratigraphic occurrence—others are conspicuous at particular
Fig. 32 (see facing page). Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. Two specimens to illustrate
extremes of variation in ornament. A-C. NMBD1052/1 from locality 72, Zululand, St
Lucia Formation, Coniacian III. D-F. SAS A2101 from locality 73, Zululand, St Lucia
Formation, Coniacian IV-V. Both x 1.
Fig. 33 (see overleaf). Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. Diverse specimens to illustrate
variation in strength and shape of tuberculation. A-C. SAM-PCZ11999 from locality 91,
Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV or V. D. SAM-PCZ12000. E. SAM-
PCZ8676, both from locality 83, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian TV. F. SAM-—
PCZ12001 from locality 85, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian I. G. SAM-4832
from locality 1, Pondoland, Mzamba Formation, Santonian II. H. NMBD1028/3.
I. SAS A361. J. SAS A333. L. SAM-PCZ8013, all from locality 72, Zululand, St Lucia
Formation, Coniacian II]. K. SAS Z1795f. M. SAS Z1795g. Both from locality 85.
All <i
Fig. 34 (see overleaf). A-L. Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. A-C. SAM-5454.
D-F. SAM-5480. G. SAM-5458. H. SAM-5486. I. SAM-5461. J. SAM-5472.
K. SAM-PCZ8674b. L. SAS A1610a. All from Mkweyane (‘Umkwelane Hill’), probably
locality 10, Zululand, St Lucia Formation. All specimens with ‘brevicosta’ or ‘schencki’
type of ornament. M-R. Two specimens with atypical, widely spaced tubercles. It 1S
uncertain if these are atypical B. capensis (form 12) or nodose variants of B. bailyi.
M-O. SAM-PCZ8387. P-R. SAS PCZ8349. Both from locality 98, Zululand, St Lucia
Formation, Coniacian V, associated with typical B. bailyi fauna. All x 1.
61
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
%E Sly
62
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 33
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 34
63
64 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
localities. These morphological types are merely convenient reference points on
which to base the descriptions of this material and have no taxonomic status
whatsoever. Some have, in the past, been given varietal or specific names, and
we try as far as possible to identify our morphotypes with these names. Their
stratigraphic and phylogenetic relationships are discussed below.
Form | (= Baculites sp. aff. B. capensis Spath, 1921: 258). Predominantly
smooth to feebly ornamented forms. These have the whorl section of typical
B. capensis, but lack lateral ornament, e.g. NMBD1052/1 (Fig. 32A-C). In
some, e.g. SAM-5467 (Fig. 48J), ornament consists of ventral corrugations
only (= Baculites sp. cf. sulcatus of Spath 1921: 260). In others, e.g.
SAM-PCZ8760 (Fig. 421), NMB D1124 (Fig. 42J) and SAM-PCZ8027
(Fig. 42K-M), feeble lateral ornament may occur, as far as can be seen, on the
body chamber only. Specimens reach maturity at very different sizes, e.g.
SAM-5484c at Wh = 10 mm and PCZ7210 at Wh = 20 mm.
Form 2 (= Baculites cf. brevicosta Spath, 1921: 260, pl. 24 (fig. 5, 5a));
(= B. schencki Matsumoto, 1959: 113, pl. 32 (figs la-c, 2a—c, 3a—b, 4a—b,
Sa-c, 6a-c), text-figs 12a—b, 13a—-c, 14a—b, 15-21, 22a—b, 23a—c, 24-25). Small
forms with closely spaced, crescentic tubercles situated near the dorsolateral
edge of the flanks and ovoid whorl section (Fig. 34I-L, 36M-N, 42E). The
tubercles may be narrow and pinched, or broad and low. Dorsally and ventrally
the tubercles fade into fine striae. Whorl section generally ovoid.
Form 3 (= Baculites cf. asperoanceps Spath, 1921: 259, pl. 24 (fig. 4, 4a)).
Small forms with closely spaced, generally conical to low, rounded tubercles
situated near the dorsolateral edge of the flanks, e.g. SAM-PCZ8691 (Fig. 35A)
and SAM-PCZ8699 (Fig. 35E). Forms with more widely spaced tubercles cor-
respond to B. boulei Collignon (1931: 35, pl. 5 (fig. 2), pl. 9 (fig. 14)). A weak
longitudinal groove may be visible at mid-flank. e.g. SAM-5480 (Fig. 34D-F),
SAM-PCZ8675 (Fig. 35F) and PCZ8674b.
Form 4 (= ‘incurvatus’). Generally large forms with prominent conical to
rounded tubercles, situated near the dorsal third of the flanks, e.g. SAM-
PCZ9974 (Fig. 42A-D), SAS Z1795a-f (Fig. 44A-F) and SAS Z632a-c
(Fig. 45A-E, I-J).
Fig. 35 (see facing page). Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. A. SAM-PCZ8691.
B. SAM-PCZ8692. C. SAM-PCZ8749. D. SAM-PCZ8682. E. SAM-PCZ8699.
F. SAM-PCZ8675. All from locality 83, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV.
G. SAM-PCZ8725. H. SAM-PCZ8720. J-K. SAM—PCZ8715. L. SAM-PCZ8711.
M. SAM-PCZ8713. N-P. SAM-PCZ8717. Q. SAM-PCZ8762. R. SAM-PCZ8747.
All from locality 85, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian I. All x 1.
Fig. 36 (see overleaf). Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. A-C. SAM-PCZ12002.
D-F. SAM-PCZ12003. G-I. SAM-PCZ12004. J-L. SAM-PCZ12005. O. SAS A1493b.
All from locality 22, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV. M. SAM-PCZ12006.
N. SAM- 16026, both from Mkweyane (‘Umkwelane Hill’), probably locality 10, Zululand.
All x 1
Fig. 37 (see overleaf). Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. A-B. SAM-PCZ8674, concretion
to show co-occurrence of smooth and weakly nodose (boulei) forms of B. capensis. From
locality 83, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV. Both x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 35
65
66
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 67
68 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
E |
O 10
A a dite Es)
mm
|
L U
E
B ) 5
eee |
mm
E
|
C
Fig. 38. Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. Suture lines and whorl
section. A. SASH13/6. B. SAS A335. C. SAM-1670b. Venter in
whorl section pointing downward. Scale bar for size.
Form 5 (= var. tenuetuberculata Collignon, 1966: 6, pl. 457 (figs 1863-4).
Generally large forms with weak conical to rounded tubercles, e.g. SAM-
PCZ12002 (Fig. 36A-C). These are probably only large forms (macroconchs)
of form 3.
Form 6. Generally large forms with prominent conical to crescentic, or
transversely elongated tubercles, situated near dorsal third of flanks, e.g.
NMB D1052a (Fig. 43A-C), NMB D1052c (Fig. 43F-H), SAS Z1795a
(Fig. 46A-C) and SAS A353 (Fig. 47A-B).
Form 7 (= capensis typical form). Generally large forms with rounded to
longitudinally elongated tubercles near the dorsal third of the flanks. Longi-
tudinal depression often present near midflank; whorl section varies from sub-
trigonal to distinctly elliptical, e.g. SAM-4823 (Fig. 27D-H) and SAM-4824
(Fig. 28B-E). In some, e.g. SAS Z632a (Fig. 45A-C), the transition from
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 69
conical (‘incurvatus’) to longitudinally elongated (capensis) tubercles can be
observed on the same specimen.
Form 8 (= B. capensis in Collignon 1966: 6, pl. 457 (fig. 1862)). Tubercles
extremely elongated longitudinally, assuming crescentic outline in dorsal view,
e.g. NMBD1028/3 (Fig. 50A-C).
Form 9 (= var. umsinenensis Venzo, 1936: 116 [58], pl. 10 [6] (figs 11-
12)). Tubercles elongated obliquely, some with shallow, longitudinal depression
at mid-flank. Tubercles closely or widely spaced, generally situated high on the
flank or near the dorsolateral edge, e.g. SAM-PCZ12016 (Fig. SOG-H), SAM-
PCZ12017 (Fig. SOM), NMB D1028/12 (Fig. SON) and SAS A361 (Fig. 33],
49C-E). Some specimens with very large tubercles, e.g. NMB D1028/3
(Fig. SOA-C), are transitional between forms 8 and 9.
Form 10 (= B. malagasyensis Collignon, 1966: 7, pl. 457 (fig. 1865)).
Tubercles are of the capensis or incurvatus type, but irregularly spaced or
doubled.
EC:
Fig. 39. Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. Suture lines and whorl
sections. A. SAM-PCZ12007. B. SAM-PCZ12006. C. SAM-
PCZ12008. Venter in whor! sections pointing downward.
Scale bar for size.
70 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Ze Wi
Fig. 40. Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. Suture lines and whorl
sections. A. SAS A2101. B. SAM-PCZ8039. C. SAM-PCZ12009.
Venter in whorl sections pointing downward. Scale bar for size.
Form 11. (= ?B. sparsinodosus Collignon, 1969: 23, pl. 521 (figs 2052-
2054)). Rare, ?7Lower Campanian forms with large, rounded, distantly spaced
tubercles, e.g. SAM-PCZ8022 (Fig. 544A), SAM-PCZ9971 (Fig. 54B) and
SAM-PCZ9972 (Fig. 54C-E). |
?Form 12. Rare Santonian specimens with very widely spaced tubercles,
e.g. SAM-PCZ8387 (Fig. 34M-O) and SAM-PCZ8349 (Fig. 34P-R). We are
not quite sure if these are true B. capensis or merely rare, tuberculate B. bailyi;
faunal association suggests the latter.
Apertures and dimorphism
The aperture, or part thereof, is preserved in numerous (about 35) speci-
mens (Figs 51A-N, 52A-D). It is simple, consisting of a short, rounded dorsal
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA WA
Fig. 41. Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. Suture lines and whorl
section. A. SAM-PCZ9974. B-C. NMBD1028g. Venter in whorl
section pointing downward. Scale bar for size.
rostrum, a prominent lateral sinus and a long, ventral rostrum. The dorsal
rostrum may curve slightly outwards, i.e. away from the longitudinal axis of the
shell, whereas the ventral rostrum may curve inwards.
The diameter at which apertures are formed and maturity presumably sets
in, is quite variable (Fig. 53). The smallest whorl height at which indications of
an aperture are present, is 9 mm, whereas some shells reach maximum whorl
heights of 31 mm on the body chamber without having formed an aperture.
Even though specimens at the smaller and larger ends of the distribution range
may be distinguished as micro- and macroconchs respectively, there is no
distinct break in size between them. An alternative interpretation is that this
indicates a variable range of maturation size.
Most body chambers are perfectly straight, but some (e.g. NMB D1052c)
(Fig. 43F-H) are slightly curved.
Tz ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Suture lines
Details of the sutures are shown in Figures 38A-C, 39A-B, 40A, C, and
41A-B. The suture is very simple with open saddles and lobes.
Discussion
According to our interpretation, B. capensis is a predominantly nodose
baculitid, which first appears in the second or third division of the Coniacian of
Zululand, and persists to the second division of the Santonian in Pondoland and
possibly to the first division of the Campanian in Zululand.
From the descriptions above, and the figures, it can be seen that the pres-
ence and shape of the lateral tubercles is extremely variable. This variation was
already noticed by Spath (1921) in material from Mkweyane (Umkwelane Hill)
collected by A. L. du Toit. Even though he referred several of the morphotypes
present to extant species in open nomenclature, e.g. Baculites sp. aff. capensis,
Baculites cf. aspero-anceps, Baculites cf. brevicosta and Baculites sp. cf.
sulcatus, he admitted that all of these forms were probably only varieties of
B. capensis. Our material not only confirms, but further illustrates the wide
variety of ornament in B. capensis.
The ornament of the different morphotypes suggests that B. capensis could
be derived from smooth B. yokoyamai through strengthening of groups or
sheaves of striae near the dorsolateral parts of the flanks, thus forming weak,
crescentic (‘brevicosta-schencki’) tubercles, as in form 2. Strengthening of these
crescentic nodes could lead to form 3 type of ornament, and further strength-
ening and wider spacing to type 4. Longitudinal elongation of these tubercles
could lead to typical B. capensis-type of ornament. Oblique arrangement of
typical B. capensis tubercles could lead to form 9 “‘umsinenensis’-type of
ornament and ultimately to B. menabensis—B. tanakae to be discussed below.
Alternatively, ‘umsinenensis’-type of ornament could be transitional between
form 2 brevicosta and form 7 (typical capensis). The suggested evolution of
capensis-type ornament from smooth B. yokoyamai is outlined in Figure 55.
Unfortunately, the answer is not that simple. This transition does not involve
a simple change from a population of smooth baculitids through crescentic to
conically nodose to longitudinally elongated tuberculate baculitids. Instead, the
transition seems to involve subtle shifts in proportions of the population. The
appearance and disappearance of distinct morphological features are not strictly
synchronous. Thus, the first appearance of nodose baculitids does not mean that
all smooth forms disappear (see e.g. Figs 29, 37)—instead, smooth forms con-
tinue to exist at least until the first appearance of typical capensis forms. Typical
capensis forms first appear together with weakly nodose forms, long before
Fig. 42 (see facing page). Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. A-D. SAM-PCZ9972.
E. NMBD1124/4. F-G. NMBD1028. H. SAM-PCZ12010. I. SAM-PCZ8760.
J. NMBD1124. K-M. SAM-PCZ8027, all from locality 72, Zululand, St Lucia Formation,
Coniacian III. All x 1.
Fig. 43 (see overleaf). Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. Body chambers.
A-C. NMBD1052a. D-E. NMBD1052d. F-H. NMBD1052c (note slight curvature).
All from locality 73, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV-V. All x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA We
Fig. 42
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
74
ep “3Id
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 75
Fig. 44. Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. A. SAS Z1795a. B. SAS Z1795c.
Cy SAS Z1795f. D. SAS Z1795. E. SAS Z1795d. F. SAS Z17951. All from locality 85,
Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian I. All x 1.
76
Fig. 45.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. A-C. SAS Z632a. D-E. SAS Z632b.
F-H. SAS Z632e. I-J. SAS Z632c. All presumably from locality 91, Zululand, St Lucia
Formation, Coniacian IV or V. All x 1. :
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA Fl
Fig. 46. Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. A-C. SAS Z1795a. Macroconch with part of the
aperture preserved. From locality 85, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian I. All x 1.
78 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
capensis-type of ornament reaches its peak. Also, many of these different mor-
phological types, even though stratigraphically contemporaneous, seem to be
concentrated at different localities (see e.g. Fig. 35 (Coniacian IV), Fig. 43
(Coniacian IV-V), Fig. 44 (Coniacian IV-V), Fig. 45A-E, I-J (Coniacian IV or
V), Figs 49C-E, 50A-C, N (Coniacian IV-V), etc.). Thus it is very common
for baculitids from a single locality all to be the same, but different from those
from another locality at more or less the same stratigraphic level.
Forms 1-3, i.e. smooth or with small crescentic or weakly conical tubercles
situated near the dorsolateral edge of the flanks, are most common amongst the
first representatives of the species in the second and third divisions of the Coni-
acian, but typical capensis forms with elongated tubercles also occur. This
includes most of the baculitids described from Umkwelane Hill (Mkweyane)
by Spath (1921). A similar early capensis baculitid assemblage occurs at
locality 15. In the fourth division of the Coniacian tuberculate forms of group 3
(boulei) dominate, but smooth forms still persist, often in the same nodule
(Fig. 37); in addition, typical forms of capensis, including forms 4—9 occur.
In the later part of the Coniacian and in the first two divisions of the San-
tonian, forms 4-9 dominate, but weakly ornamented forms still occur. Normally
we find that, at a given locality, the baculitids will not occur as a random mix-
ture of the different morphological types, but that one form will be dominant
(see e.g. specimens Z1795a, c-f (Figs 44A-F), Z632a-b, e (Fig. 45A—J) and
D1052a, c-d (Fig. 43A-H), all from more or less the same stratigraphic level
but different localities). Based purely on morphological criteria, each of these
morphotypes could be given a different name, but-from a stratigraphic point of
view, this would be illogical.
One morphotype that seems to be most common at, but not exclusively
restricted to, the outcrops along the Mzinene River at localities 71 and 73, is
form 9 (umsinenensis). Typical forms with distinct obliquely elongated tubercles
are best known, and first recorded by Crick (1907: 240) and later by Venzo
(1936: 116 [58], pl. 10 [6] (figs 11-12)) from this locality, but similar
specimens are also known from localities 22, 91, and 83.
Specimens with extremely elongated tubercles (form 8) are rare (Figs 33H,
50A). Forms with extremely distant tuberculation (form 11) are also rare and
have thus far only been found in rubble from excavations at locality 6, which
yielded a mixed Santonian II-III and/or Campanian I fauna. We think that these
baculitids are from the Campanian section of the excavations, but are not sure.
The ornament is comparable to material from the Lower Campanian of Mada-
gascar described by Collignon (1969) as B. sparsinodosus.
Form 12 is extremely rare and is mostly found in association with abundant
Santonian specimens of B. bailyi. Because of this, we suspect that these may
rather be atypical, nodose B. bailyi than B. capensis, but again we cannot be
completely sure.
Form 11 (malagasyensis) is merely a capensis with irregular spacing of the
tubercles.
Fig. 47. Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. Body chamber specimens. A-B. SAS A353.
C. SAM-PCZ8011. D-F. SAM-PCZ12011. All from locality 73, Zululand, St Lucia
Formation, Coniacian IV or V. All x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
80 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Affinities and comparisons
Our interpretation of B. capensis is very broad, and consequently it is very
difficult or in cases impossible to separate it satisfactorily from similar, contem-
porary species known only from a few individuals and where the range of varia-
tion is unknown.
The first problem is separating B. capensis from B. bailyi. It is easy to name
the first nodose specimens B. capensis, but what should we call the smooth
variants? We consider it expedient to regard these smooth specimens as variants
of early B. capensis, albeit mainly by their co-occurrence with these nodose
forms. Fortunately, these smooth forms of B. capensis are generally larger than
B. bailyi, and have the whorl section of the former species, but separation of
isolated specimens remains difficult. Also, in some of the early forms of B. cap-
ensis, e.g. SAM-PCZ8030 (Fig. 49J), tubercles only appear at a relatively late
stage. The early, non-tuberculate parts of these shells are indistinguishable from
B. yokoyamai or B. bailyi.
Contemporary, nodose baculitids appear to be separated into three distinct
bio(?)geographic regions:
A. Indo-Pacific Region
1. Baculites boulei Collignon (1931: 35, pl. 5 (fig. 2, 2a), pl. 9 (fig. 14)).
il. Baculites schencki Matsumoto (1959: 113, pl. 32 (figs 1-6), text-figs 12a—-b,
13a—-c, 14a—b, 15-21, 22a—b, 23a—c, 24-25).
B. Western Interior of North America
i. Baculites codyensis Reeside (1927: 4, pl. 2 (figs 6-9)).
Fig. 48 (see facing page). Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. A. SAM-PCZ7198a from
locality 73, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV or V. B. SAM-PCZ12012
(H200/84), body chamber with part of aperture preserved. From locality 83, Zululand, St
Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV. C. SAM-PCZ12013, body chamber showing transition
from conical to elongate, capensis tuberculation. From locality 16, Zululand, St Lucia
Formation, Coniacian ?III. D. SAM-PCZ12014 from locality 22, Zululand, St Lucia
Formation, Coniacian IV. E. SAM-PCZ7210, body chamber with hardly perceptible
tubercles from locality 72, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian HI. F-H. SAM-5443
from Mkweyane (‘Umkwelane Hill’), Zululand. I. SAM-PCZ12015 from locality 89,
Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV. J. SAM-5467, body chamber with no
tuberculation; the original of Spath’s (1921: 260) Baculites sp. cf. sulcatus from Mkweyane
(‘Umkwelane Hill’), Zululand. All x 1.
Fig. 49 (see overleaf). Baculites. capensis Woods, 1906. A-B. SAS A334.
C-E. SAS A361—specimen with typical ‘umsinenensis’ type of ornament.
F-I. SAS A137—specimen showing shallow longitudinal groove under oblique lighting. All
from locality 73, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV-V. J. SAM-PCZ8030,
microconch, showing transition from smooth to weakly tuberculate ‘brevicosta’ type of
ornament. From locality 15, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV. All x 1.
Fig. 50 (see overleaf). Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. A-C. NMBD1028/3.
D-F. SAS A606. G-I. SAM-PCZ12016. J-L. SAS A335. M. SAM-PCZ12017.
N. NMBD1028/12. A-C, G-I, M-N—all specimens with obliquely elongated tubercles of
the ‘umsinenensis’ form 9 type, but note the variation in strength; A-C is closest to form 8;
D-F, with irregularly spaced, incipiently doubled tubercles, as in B. malagasyensis.
ls
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 81
Fig. 48
82
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 49
83
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 50
84 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
C. European Tethyan and Boreal Region
1. Baculites incurvatus Dujardin (1837: 232, pl. 17 (fig. 13)).
il. Baculites brevicosta Schluter (1876: 141, pl. 39 (figs 9-10)).
A. Indo-Pacific. Baculites boulei—Collignon established this species based on
nine syntypes. The lectotype, by subsequent designation of Matsumoto (1959:
118), is the specimen figured by Collignon (1931, pl. 5 (fig. 2, 2a)) (herein
Fig. 12J—L) from Mahagaga, Madagascar.
Baculites boulei has been interpreted in various, contradictory ways,
including by Collignon himself. As discussed above (p. 27), B. boulei was
described from a ferruginous conglomerate north-north-east of Mahagaga. Five
other ‘species’ of Baculites were found in association with B. boulei, one with
arcuate lateral tubercles—, Baculites cf. B. brevicosta Schluter (Collignon 1931:
34, pl. 5 (fig. 1, la), pl. 9 (fig. 13) (3 specimens), and four non-tuberculate
‘species’: B. sulcatus Baily (Collignon 1931: 36, pl. 5 (figs 3-5), pl. 9 (fig. 15))
(24 specimens), B. besairiei Collignon (1931: 37, pl. 5 (figs 6-9), pl. 9
(fig. 16)) (150 specimens), B. roedereri Collignon (1931: 38, pl. 5 (fig. 10,
10a), pl. 9 (fig. 17)) (1 specimen), and B. Jatelobatus Collignon (1931: 38, pl. 5
(figs 11-12), pl. 9 (fig. 18)) (3 specimens). The latter four smooth ‘species’ are
all considered synonyms of B. yokoyamai, as stated above.
. According to Collignon’s (1931: 35) original diagnosis, B. boulei is orna-
mented every 7-8 mm by a large low tubercle, which is arched and concave,
and elongated forward into a thin rib; between two successive tubercles, there
are 4-5 intercalatory ribs, which are visible only in the siphonal region and in
the immediate vicinity of the flanks. The species is similar to B. capensis, but,
according to Collignon (1931: 36) differs by its whorl section being distinctly
oval.
According to Collignon’s description and, judging by the faunal association
and age, it is clear that B. boulei is an early form of B. capensis as here inter-
preted, thus corresponding to form 3.
Collignon later recorded B. boulei (1938: 88, pl. 6 (figs 6-6b)), together
with Baculites incurvatus (Collignon 1938: 88, pl. 6 (figs 4, 4a-5, 5a)) and
Baculites cf. B. aspero-anceps (Collignon 1938: 89, pl. 6 (fig. 7-7b)) from
unequivocal Campanian strata at Andimaka. This is clearly incorrect, as is
Forster’s (1975: 168, pl. 4 (figs 3, 9), text-fig. 37) record of B. boulei from the
Lower Campanian of Mozambique. The suture figured by Forster as that of
B. boulei is more complex than that of Collignon’s original figure. Baculites cf.
B. asperoanceps has a trigonal whorl section, and seems close to B. nibelae sp.
nov. (see p. 162) from the Upper Campanian of Zululand or perhaps B. incre-
scens. (True B. asperoanceps Lasswitz (1904: 16 (236), pl. 3 (15) (fig. la—b))
(lectotype figured herein Fig. 129) is a Campanian species and possibly a
synonym of B. obtusus.)
Fig. 51 (see facing page). Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. Various specimens with parts
of the aperture preserved. A-C. NMBD1028/4. F. NMBD1124. K-N. NMBD1024/10,
all from locality 72, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian II or II. D. SAS Z632e from
locality 91, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV or V. G. SAM-1621b from an
unrecorded locality. H-J. SAM-PCZ12018 from locality 83, Zululand, St Lucia Formation,
Coniacian [V. All x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 51
85
86 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A
Fig. 52. Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. Two specimens with preserved apertures at
disparate sizes to illustrate dimorphism. A-C. Microconch. NMBD1075 from locality 73,
Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV or V. D. Macroconch. SAS Z1795a from
locality 85, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian J. Both x 1.
Matsumoto (1959: 118, pl. 32 (fig. 7a-c), pl. 33 (figs 4a—c, 5a-b, 6a-—d,
7a—-b), text-figs 27a—b, 28-32) recorded B. boulei from California, the first
record of the species outside Madagascar. Some of the Californian specimens
were reported together with B. schencki, from ‘Member V of the Redding
area’, which was dated as Coniacian. According to Haggart (1984) and Haggart
& Ward (1989: 226), however, all the Californian occurrences of B. boulei are
Santonian.
Haggart & Ward (1989: 226, fig. 3.7-3.10)) recorded a single specimen of
Baculites cf. B. boulei from the Santonian—Campanian of Vancouver Island.
Ornament is of the brevicosta form 2 type of B. capensis, but this is mainly an
early Coniacian form. As Haggart & Ward (1989: 226) suggested, the
Vancouver specimen resembles B. tanakae and is probably a late form of
B. capensis transitional to B. tanakae.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 87
15
op)
a
i
2; 10
WwW
a
op)
LL
eo)
c
Ww
:
= 5
; E < eT
5 10 15 20 25 30
MAXIMUM WHORL HEIGHT IN MM
Fig. 53. Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. Histogram illustrating distribution of maximum
whorl height. Solid circles represent specimens with the aperture preserved. Note the absence
of a sharp break between apparent macro- and microconchs suggesting, perhaps, a uniform
variable range of maturation sizes.
Matsumoto & Obata (1963: 43, pl. 13 (figs 3, 5), pl. 15 (fig. 6), text-
figs 93, 152-155) subsequently described B. boulei from Hokkaido, where it is
partly coeval with both B. capensis and B. schencki, i.e. Coniacian and San-
tonian (Matsumoto & Obata, text-fig. 216).
Kennedy (1986b: 112) regarded B. boulei as having a stouter whorl section
than B. capensis and more closely spaced tubercles, which lie nearer to the
dorsum than in the latter species.
Baculites schencki Matsumoto (1959: 113, pl. 32 (figs la-c, 2a-c, 3a-b,
4a-b, 5a-c, 6a-c), text-figs 12a—b, 13a—c, 14a—b, 15-21, 22a—b, 24-25) typi-
cally has an ovoid whorl section, and closely spaced, crescentic lateral nodes. It
differs in typical forms from B. boulei by the weaker lateral ornament, and the
narrower venter, but intermediate forms occur. This is very similar to, or ident-
ical with what we regard as form 2 of early B. capensis.
According to Matsumoto (1959: 120), the stratigraphic ranges of the two
species overlap in California: B. schencki is more common in the lower part
(of Member IV and V of the Redding area), whereas B. boulei is relatively
common in the upper part.
In comparing B. boulei and B. schencki with B. capensis, Matsumoto (1959:
125) remarked that in California ‘the three species, B. schencki, B. boulei and
B. capensis are nearly contemporary, but their stratigraphic positions of the
88
yY
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
‘ty tig “iy ty iy
yj
Fig. 54
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 89
maximum abundance are arranged in ascending order’. Our Zululand material
partially confirms this, although the B. schencki-type of ornament is not as
common here as in California. (According to Haggart (1984: 232) no further
Seecmmens Of B. boulei or of B. schencki were collected in the Chico
Formation.) Our material confirms that the stratigraphic ranges of these forms
are largely overlapping.
Thus on stratigraphic grounds alone, there is no justification for formally
separating B. schencki, B. boulei and B. capensis. We admit that, in some
areas, one of the morphologies may be more common, but if different
morphologies are to be the criterion for separating B. schencki and B. boulei
from B. capensis, then we may as well regard all the varieties of B. capensis
described above as different species. We thus regard B. schencki and B. boulei
as synonyms of B. capensis. A case could be argued to refer to B. schencki,
B. boulei and B. capensis as early, intermediate and typical forms but, as noted
above, these morphologies are partly co-eval, and this terminology would be
confusing.
B. Western Interior of North America. In his original description of B. cap-
ensis, Woods (1906: 343) remarked on the similarities between the former and
B. asper Morton (1834: 43, pl. 1 (figs 12-13), pl. 13 (fig. 2)), stating that the
latter differed ‘in having larger and transversely elongated tubercles’. Spath
(1921: 257) also referred to the resemblance between B. capensis and B. asper.
According to Spath, the specimen figured by Meek (1876, pl. 39 (fig. 10a only))
and a specimen from Mississippi in the British Museum ‘are close to the South
African species in all characters but the suture line’. Matsumoto (1959: 125)
also commented on the similarities between B. capensis and B. asper, conclud-
ing that it was ‘probably a parallelism between the entirely separated biogeo-
graphic provinces’. Similarities between the two species were again referred to
by Matsumoto & Obata (1963: 50).
Unfortunately, B. asper appears to be uninterpretable at present. According
to Morton (1834: 44), B. asper was initially discovered by Mr Nuttal at
Cahawba, Alabama, and later found by Mr Conrad at Prairie Bluff, also in
Alabama. These localities are both appreciably younger than the Coniacian-
Santonian range of B. capensis. Cahawba is 1n the Selma Chalk, which is Late
Campanian, and the Prairie Bluff Chalk is Maastrichtian.
Reeside (1962: 116) mentioned that only one of Morton’s specimens sur-
vived. This had a label in Morton’s handwriting that states the locality as being
Prairie Bluff—i.e. Maastrichtian. Reeside concluded that Conrad’s locality data,
accepted by Morton, was erroneous, and interpreted B. asper as a Coniacian,
Santonian and early Campanian species.
Kennedy & Cobban (1991a: 72), on the other hand, regarded all the Ameri-
can Coniacian-Santonian records of ‘B. asper’ non Morton as B. codyensis
Fig. 54 (see facing page). Baculites capensis, form 11. Compare with B. sparsinodosus
Collignon, 1969. A. SAM-PCZ8022. B. SAM-PCZ9971. C-E. SAM-PCZ9972. All
from rubble from excavations at locality 6, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian II-III to
Campanian I; presumably from the Campanian. Note the absence of tubercles on the body
chambers in A and B. All x 1.
90 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
e F
Fig. 55. Baculites capensis Woods, 1906. Suggested evolution of ornament, from
B. yokoyamai (A), through B. brevicosta (B), schencki (C), boulei (D), to typical capensis
(E) and umsinenensis (F), and ultimately to B. menabensis type (Fig. 57) (see p. 93).
Reeside (1927a: 4, pl. 2 (figs 6-19)). Typical forms of B. codyensis are easily
distinguished from all varieties of B. capensis. These have crescentic, rib-like
lateral tubercles, which may be projected prominently over the venter, super-
ficially resembling B. sulcatus. Atypical forms of B. codyensis, previously mis-
identified as B. asper, have strong, distant bullae and a stouter whorl section
(see e.g. Kennedy & Cobban 1991a, pl. 16). These are identical to some of our
B. capensis, referred to as form 6 (see e.g. Fig. 43A-H, 47A-F) by their
strong, crescentic dorsolateral tubercles. Even though some representatives of
B. capensis and B. codyensis appear identical, the populations as a whole are
very distinctive. No known specimens of B. capensis ever develop as strong and
regular crescentic lateral ribbing as in typical B. codyensis, and no forms of
B. codyensis ever develop longitudinally elongated lateral tubercles and a slight
depression at mid-flank as in typical B. capensis.
An as yet unnamed baculitid fauna from the Upper Turonian—Lower Coni-
acian of Mossamedes, Angola, collected by Dr M. R. Cooper and now in the
collections cf the S.A. Museum, is of interest in apparently linking smooth
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
oi
B. yokoyamai and ornate B. codyensis. These specimens all have dorsolaterally
situated, closely spaced, crescentic tubercles (Figs 131N-R, 132A-F). These
are very similar to our form 3 or B. schencki, and seem to suggest that acquisi-
tion of lateral ornament took place in a similar manner in both B. codyensis and
{
Pe COREL 4
co
3
Fig. 56. Baculites incurvatus Dujardin, 1837. Numbers 13a-d: copy of
Dujardin (1837, pl. 17 (figs 13a-d)). Numbers 8-10: copy of D’Orbigny (1842,
pl. 139 (figs 8-10)). Note the apparent ventral keel in both figure 13c of
Dujardin and figure 9 of D’Orbigny.
92 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
B. capensis, albeit at different times. Lateral ornament in the B. codyensis
lineage first appears in the Lower Coniacian, whereas that of B. capensis occurs
later, in the Middle or Upper Coniacian as shown by the Zululand and the
Madagascan Mahagaga fauna.
C. European Region. Less easy to resolve are the relationship between the
Indo-Pacific and the European nodose baculitids. In contrast to the Western
Interior and the Indo-Pacific regions, baculitids are not as common in the
European Tethys and are poorly preserved, and consequently the species are
poorly known.
The relevant species are B. incurvatus Dujardin, 1837, and B. brevicosta
Schluter, 1876. The former name has, on occasions, been used indiscriminately
for European Baculites with widely spaced nodes; the latter has been used for
specimens with closely spaced, slightly oblique tubercles near the dorsolateral
edge of the flanks.
Baculites incurvatus was recently reviewed by Immel ef al. (1982), and
Kennedy (1984), based on Austrian (Gosau) and French material respectively.
Dujardin based this species on a series of fragments. The largest, a curved body
chamber, was designated lectotype by Immel et al. (1982: 27). The lectotype
(MNHP R1025a) and paralectotypes (MNHP R1025b-c (?e in WJK p. 143))
were refigured by Kennedy (1984, pl. 33 (figs 4-6, 15, 19-22)).
It is difficult to reconcile Dujardin’s original figures (herein Fig. 56—13a-—d)
and descriptions on the one hand, and the type material on the other. Dujardin
(1837: 232) gave the following diagnosis: ‘Testa vaginaeformi, compresa,
versus basim aliquantum incurvata; dorso nunc carinato, nunc rotundo, rugoso
aut laevi, utrinque tuberculis evanescentibus instructa’. In his illustrations, two
whorl sections are figured. The smaller (pl. 17 (fig. 13d)) is distinctly ovoid, but
the larger (pl. 17 (fig. 13c)) shows distinct lateral sulci on either side of the
venter, suggesting either a ventral keel, or a row of ventral (siphonal)
tubercles—although the latter seems to be unlikely. If there were ventral
tubercles on the body chamber, surely these would have shown up in the lateral
view of the body chamber. The lectotype, MNHP R1025a, however, shows no
trace whatsoever of a ventral keel.
Fig. 57 (see facing page). Baculites menabensis Collignon, 1969. Plaster cast of the
holotype, GD 12036, the original of Collignon (1969, pl. 518 (fig. 2036)) from the Lower
Campanian of gisement 307, km 15600 Coupe Ampolypoly-Antsirasira-Behamotra (Belo sur
Tsiribihina), Madagascar. x 1.
Fig. 58 (see overleaf). A-C. Baculites falcatus Collignon, 1969. Plaster cast of the
holotype, GD 12045, the original of Collignon (1969, pl. 520 (fig. 2045)) from the Lower
Campanian of gisement 303, km 15000 Coupe Ampolypoly-Antsirasira-Behamotra (Belo sur
Tsiribihina), Madagascar. D-F. Baculites ventroplanus Collignon, 1969. Plaster cast of the
holotype, GD 12048, the original of Collignon (1969, pl. 520 (fig. 2048)) from the same
locality as above. Both x 1.
Fig. 59 (see overleaf). A-C. Baculites antsirasiraensis Collignon, 1969. Plaster cast of the
holotype, GD 12040, the orginal of Collignon (1969, pl. 519 (fig. 2040)) from the Lower
Campanian of gisement 304, km 15200 Coupe Ampolypoly-Antsirasira-Behamotra (Belo sur
Tsiribihina) Madagascar. D-F. Baculites subtilis Collignon, 1969. Plaster cast of the
holotype, GD 12042, the original of Collignon (1969, pl. 519 (fig. 2042)) from the same
locality as above. Both x 1.
93
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
La
ie Aare
"Re BRM
sy rs
Fig. 57
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
94
gc 314
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 59
25)
96 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A B
Fig. 60. Baculites sparsinodosus Collignon, 1969. Plaster cast of the holotype, GD 12052,
the original of Collignon (1969, pl. 521 (fig. 2052)) from the Lower Campanian of
gisement 302, km 14200, Coupe Ampolypoly-Antsirasira-Behamotra (Belo sur Tsiribihina),
Madagascar. x 1.
D’Orbigny’s (1842: 564, pl. 139 (figs 8-10)) (herein Fig. 56-8-10) sub-
sequent description and illustration of B. incurvatus is better known than that of
Dujardin. Again, D’Orbigny’s figure shows a baculitid with a curved body
chamber, and a whorl section that is ovoid on the phragmocone, but distinctly
carinate on the body chamber. Two specimens in D’Orbigny’s collection, pre-
sumably used in his reconstruction of B. incurvatus, survive and were refigured
by Kennedy (1984, pl. 33 (figs 1-3, 16-18)). Neither shows any trace of a
ventral keel. We suspect that D’Orbigny’s figure of B. incurvatus may have
been based more on Dujardin’s original figures than on his own material...
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 97
E
LW)
A L
ae
0 10 mm
piers eae ee
E en
B
@) 10 mm
ibe ase Se ey
E L
. |
c
0 5 mm
pee ee
Fig. 61. Suture lines. A. Baculites sparsinodosus. Collignon, 1969 (see
Fig. 60). B. Baculites falcatus Collignon, 1969 (see Fig. 58A-C).
C. Baculites subtilis Collignon, 1969 (see Fig. 5S9D-F). Scale bar for size.
Subsequent interpretations of B. incurvatus are confused. Meek (1876: 392)
divided the genus Baculites into two groups. His group b was defined as
follows: ‘?b. Shell straight posteriorly, but with the non-septate part gently
arcuate; aperture a little oblique; appendage of siphonal side of lip arching
slightly with the general curvature of the non-septate part, but not curving over
the aperture—(B. incurvatus Dujardin)’. Spath (1926: 80) subsequently
introduced the new baculitid genus Euhomaloceras as follows: ‘the new genus
Euhomaloceras gen. nov. is proposed for Meek’s group b (Invertebr. Cret. and
Tert. Fossils, U.S. Geol. Surv. Territ., vol. ix, 1876, p. 392) with B. incurvatus
98 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
E L
mre 3
A
|
U
C O 5 mm
[ea ae bee
Fig. 62. Suture lines. A. Baculites ambatryensis Collignon, 1971 (see
Fig. 128). B. Baculites antsirasiraensis Collignon, 1969 (see Fig. 59A-C).
C. Baculites menabensis Collignon, 1969 (see Fig. 57). Scale bar for size.
Dujardin (in D’Orbigny, Pal. Franc., Terr. Cret., vol. 1, 1842, p. 564, pl. 139
(fig. 8)) as genotype.’ Spath’s concept of Euhomaloceras is difficult to interpret.
Both Dujardin and D’Orbigny’s figures show a curved body-chamber, and it
was this feature that defined Meek’s group b; Meek did not refer to the whorl
section at all. Wright (1957: L218) provided the first, and only diagnosis of
Euhomaloceras as: ‘Bodychamber gently curved with distinct rounded siphonal
and laterodorsal tubercles.’ The mention of siphonal tubercles is based on a mis-
interpretation of the cross section in the figures of Dujardin and D’Orbingy.
Fig. 63 (see facing page). Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. A-B. BMNH C35625, the
lectotype, and impression of paralectotype, from an unrecorded horizon at locality 1,
Pondoland, Mzamba Formation—presumably from the upper parts of the section,
Campanian ?J. x5. Photograph courtesy of Natural History Museum, London.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
99
100 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Subsequent examination of Baculites has shown that curvature of the body
chamber is a very variable and inconsistent feature, and is certainly not of
generic significance. The name Euhomaloceras is thus unnecessary as discussed
by Immel ef al. (1982: 27-28).
As mentioned above, none of the surviving specimens on which Dujardin
and D’Orbigny based their figures shows any indications of a ventral keel on the
body chamber. Why both Dujardin and D’Orbigny figured a ventral keel on the
body chamber of B. incurvatus remains a mystery. We suspect that Dujardin
may have erred, and that D’Orbigny’s artist merely copied the error.
In France, B. incurvatus first occurs in the Middle Coniacian in Touraine
and Aquitaine, and persists through the Upper Coniacian into the Santonian, a
stratigraphic range nearly identical to that of B. capensis. In Austria it occurs in
the Lower Santonian. |
Younger Campanian records of B. incurvatus, e.g. Holzapfel (1887: 64,
pl. 4 (figs 5-6), pl. 5 (fig. 10)) from the Vaals Formation at Aachen, Germany;
Muller & Wollemann (1906: 4, pl. 2 (figs 2-5)) from Braunschweig and
Broitzem in northern Germany, and Collignon (1938: 88, pl. 6 (figs 4-5)) from
the Campanian of Andimaka in Madagascar, are all probably misidentifications.
The specimens referred to B. incurvatus by Holzapfel and Muller & Wollemann
were considered the same as Baculites sp. 1 by Kennedy (1986b: 110, pl. 17
(figs 7-9, 13-15, 21-23), pl. 18 (figs 18-22), pl. 23 (figs 1, 7), text-fig. 8A—C),
from the Upper Campanian of France. However, Muller & Wollemann’s speci-
mens show distinct longitudinally to obliquely elongated tubercles, whereas
Kennedy’s Baculites sp. 1 has transversely elongated tubercles. In this respect,
the German specimens seem closer to some of the baculitids from the Lower
Campanian of Madagascar described by Collignon (1969); all are probably
synonyms of B. menabensis Collignon or B. tanakae Matsumoto & Obata,
1963, as discussed below (p. 109).
The Campanian B. incurvatus of Collignon (1938) has a distinct trigonal
whorl section and is closer to B. bassei Besairie or B. nibelae sp. nov., to be
described below.
Fig. 64 (see facing page). Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. Typical forms. A. SAM-7043.
Specimen on back of block with Hauericeras figured by Klinger & Kennedy (1980, fig. 5b),
collected by T. Gevers from the top bed, T2. B-D. SAM-PCP5695. E-G. SAM-PCP5684.
H-I. BMNH C35625, the lectotype. J. SAM-PCP8420. K. SAM-PCP8656. L-N. SAM-
PCP5684. A-G, J-N, all from the top beds at Mzamba Cliff, Pondoland, Mzamba
Formation, Campanian I. A-D, H-N x 1; E-G ~x 2.
Fig. 65 (see overleaf). Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. All weakly ornamented forms.
A-C. SAM- PCP8653. D-F. SAM-PCP8361. G-H. SAM-PCP8656. I-K. SAM-—
PCP8153b. L-N. SAM-PCP8422. O-Q. SAM-PCP8153. R. SAM-PCP8660. All from
the upper beds at the type section of the Mzamba Formation, Campanian I. All x 1.
Fig. 66 (see overleaf). Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. Early forms—Van Hoepen
collection, Transvaal Museum. A-B. TM540g. C-E. TM548c. F. TM540f. G-I.
TM 548a (microconch with part of aperture preserved). J-L. TM540a. M-O. TM 540b.
O-P. TM 540d. All from an unspecified horizon at locality 1, Pondoland, Mzamba
Formation, presumably below the level of typical forms figured in Figures 64-65.
axitll Se Ay
101
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
. 64
1g
E
102 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 65
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 103
Fig. 66
104 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
It is difficult to distinguish satisfactorily between B. capensis and
B. incurvatus. Curvature of the body chamber, initially used to separate
B. incurvatus (as Euhomaloceras) from the other baculitids, is of little
significance, and indeed is shown only by the lectotype and by one other
specimen figured to date (Kennedy 1984, pl. 33 (figs 4-6, 7-9)). Curved and
straight body chambers occur in both species; occurrence of curved body
chambers is apparently random.
As Woods (1906: 342) had already noticed, typical B. capensis differs from
B. incurvatus by the longitudinal elongation of the tubercles, and by the pres-
ence of a shallow sulcus at mid-flank. A single specimen of B. incurvatus
figured by Kennedy (1984: 143, pl. 33 (12-14)) has doubled tubercles and a
Shallow lateral groove, which, apart from being smaller, is very similar to
Collignon’s (1966: 7, pl. 457 (fig. 1865)) B. malagasyensis, here regarded a
synonym of B. capensis s.s. Apart from this specimen, which was regarded by
Kennedy as possibly being pathologic, no specimens of B. incurvatus are as yet
known with typical B. capensis ornament.
However, the majority of specimens of B. capensis with rounded, conical or |
slightly crescentic tubercles are indistinguishable from contemporary
B. incurvatus.
Woods (1906: 342), Spath (1921: 257-258) and Matsumoto (1959: 125) all
commented on minor differences in suture lines of B. capensis and B. incurv-
atus. We can see absolutely no significant difference between the sutures of
B. capensis and B. incurvatus (Kennedy 1984, text-fig. 42F-H).
Immel et al. (1982: 28) also considered the whorl sections to be different—
that of B. capensis being more elliptical, with wide venter and flat flanks.
Again, typical forms of B. capensis do have elliptical whorl sections, but many
have whorl sections indistinguishable from those of known B. incurvatus (see
lees 30), SIL).
It is interesting to note that some specimens of B. incurvatus are virtually
smooth and lack tubercles, and show a similar range of variation in this respect
as B. capensis.
Clearly, on the basis of the disparate sizes in population of B. capensis—
numbering several hundred specimens, and B. incurvatus—numbering perhaps
30 specimens, no final decision can be taken as to whether B. capensis should
be regarded as a junior synonym of B. incurvatus. However, given their similar
ages, but apparent geographic separation, it might eventually be feasible to
regard them as a subspecies (of B. incurvatus).
Fig. 67 (see facing page). A-D, H-N. Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. Early forms.
Van Hoepen Collection, Transvaal Museum. Smooth to weakly ribbed specimens.
A-B. TM548a. Microconch with aperture. C-D. TM548e. H-J. TM548d. Microconch
with complete aperture. Note long, slightly inwardly-curved linguiform ventral rostrum and
short, outwardly-curved dorsal rostrum. All from an unspecified horizon at locality 1,
Pondoland, Mzamba Formation, presumably below the level of typical forms figured in
Figure 64. E-G. Baculites furcillatus (Blanckenhorn, 1905). SAM -PCI8573 from the
Campanian of Israel (ex Z. Lewy collection). K-Q. Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906.
K-L. SAM-PCP6766. M. SAM-13103. Specimen from Geological Commission collection,
one of Woods’ paratypes of B. bailyi. N. SAM-PCP6765. O-Q. SAM-PCP8729, all from
the basal beds at locality 1, Mzamba Formation, Santonian II. A-J, M x 1; K-L, N-Q x 2.
105
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 67
106 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
C
; \
( \
ew \
D O 10 mm
ee S|
aa CLE
Fig. 68. Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. Typical form. Whorl sections,
suture line and ornament. A. SAM-PCP8421. B. SAM-PCP8420.
C. SAM-PCP5685. D. SAM-PCP5684., E. SAM-PCPS42
F. SAM-PCP8419. Venter in whorl sections pointing downward.
Scale bar for size.
The other European baculitid that falls within the morphological limits of
B. capensis is B. brevicosta Schliiter. Unfortunately, the only unequivocal
record of this species is the original description from northern Germany given
by Schliter (1876: 141, pl. 39 (figs 9-10)). Schliiter based this species on
several specimens (not just two as claimed incorrectly by Kennedy 1984: 146).
The original of Schliiter (1876, pl. 39 (figs 9-10)) was designated lectotype by
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 107
L U
E
O 5 mm
A | ba aa
L U |
E
O 5 mm
B pe pear ai
|
C
Fig. 69. Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. Typical form. Suture lines.
A. SAM-PCP8152. B. SAM-PCP8153. C. SAM-PCP8661.
Scale bar for size.
Kennedy (1984: 146). Unfortunately, neither the lectotype nor any of the other
paralectotypes could be traced by us in the collections in Bonn, and we have to
assume that they are lost.
Subsequent records of B. brevicosta all have to viewed with caution. The
specimens from the Lower Senonian of Sweden (with Actinocamax quadrata)
from Eriksdal, Sweden, described and figured by Moberg (1885: 37, pl. 4
(figs 5-6)) have very weak, crescentic lateral ribs, rather than dorsolaterally
situated tubercles as in B. brevicosta, and they do not seem to belong to this
species.
The specimens from Mkweyane (Umkwelane Hill), Zululand, described and
figured by Spath (1921: 146, pl. 24 (fig. 5)) as Baculites cf. brevicosta are
identical to Schluter’s figures, as also noted by Spath (1921: 260) ‘since it
probably only represents a variety of B. capensis . . . its exact agreement with
Schliter’s species may be a case of heterochronous homoeomorphy’. The
108 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
relationship of this (Zululand) specimen to typical B. capensis is probably the
same as that of European B. brevicosta to B. incurvatus. Their relative strati-
graphic occurrences in France (Kennedy 1984) seem to confirm this.
Kaplan & Kennedy (1994: 59, pl. 40 (figs 15-19)) described and figured
alleged B. brevicosta from the Coniacian of Westphalia. These show some
B. brevicosta to have distinct ventral ribbing and weak lateral ornament, which
places it closer to B. undulatus than to B. capensis. Nevertheless, it is still a
rare species and the extent of variation is not fully known.
A closer analogue to B. brevicosta is B. schencki Matsumoto, 1959, as
discussed above (see p. 87). Baculites schencki, here regarded as an early form
of B. capensis, was said to differ from B. brevicosta merely by the strength of
the tubercles (Matsumoto 1959: 117). The association of B. schencki and
B. capensis is the same as that of B. brevicosta and B. incurvatus, thus further
suggesting that the relationship of B. capensis and B. incurvatus is very close,
and that separation at subspecific level only is probably justifiable.
In Zululand and Pondoland, the typical B. capensis lineage ends in the
Middle Santonian, although some atypical forms (form 11, B. sparsinodosus?)
may occur in the Lower Campanian of Zululand. These last representatives
include typical B. capensis forms with longitudinally elongated tubercles, with
the middle part of the flanks flat or slightly depressed and with a round or
fastigiate venter.
In Pondoland, B. capensis is succeeded by B. sulcatus in the Lower
Campanian, and in Zululand by B. increscens—B. vanhoepeni in the Middle
Campanian—both with typical rib-like or auricular lateral ornament. Morpho-
logically these seem far removed from the B. capensis type of ornament.
Some of the baculitids from Pondoland, described as B. sulcatus by Van
Hoepen (1921: 18, pl. 3 (figs 7-8)) and later referred to Baculites vagina var.
vanhoepeni by Venzo (1936: 116 [58], pl. 10 [6] (figs 11-12)) (see Fig. 66),
could possibly be seen as a link between B. capensis and B. sulcatus + B. van-
hoepeni as is to be discussed below (p. 150).
Fortunately, Collignon (1969) has described a rich baculitid fauna from
the Lower Campanian of Madagascar that seems to continue the B. capensis
lineage. This fauna includes: B. menabensis Collignon (1969: 15, pl. 518
(figs 2036-7)) (herein Fig. 57); B. antsirasiraensis Collignon (1969: 18, pl. 519
(figs 2040-2041)) (herein Fig. 59A-C); B. subtilis Collignon (1969: 18, pl. 519
(figs 2043-2044)) (herein Fig. S9D-F); B. falcatus Collignon (1969: 20, pl. 520
(figs 2045-2046)) (herein Fig. 58A-C); B. ventroplanus Collignon (1969: 20,
pl. 520 (figs 2048-2050)) (herein Fig. 58D-F) and B. sparsinodosus Collignon
(1969: 23, pl. 521 (figs 2052-2054)) (herein Fig. 60). With the exception of
B. sparsinodosus, all these species have dorsoventrally compressed, longitudi-
nally elongated tubercles of the B. capensis type. They differ from typical
B. capensis mainly in that the tubercles are more pinched, slightly oblique and
situated nearer to the dorsum. Also, the whorl section becomes more com-
pressed, and in some, e.g. B. ventroplanus, the venter becomes distinctly
fastigiate. The ornament of these Lower Campanian Madagascan species is
nearly identical to that of form 9 or ‘umsinenensis’ type of B. capensis, which
makes its first appearance in the Upper Coniacian of Zululand.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 109
E
A
E fi U
B
= L
U
Cc
O 5 mm
CS es ae eee!
Fig. 70. Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. Suture lines. A. SAM-PCP12019.
B. SAM-PCP8361. C. TM540m—note similarity to Woods’ figured suture
line of B. bailyi (1906, pl. 44 (fig. 5)). Scale bar for size.
With the possible exception of B. sparsinodosus, all these Lower Campanian
Madagascan Baculites are probably synonyms; as first revising authors, we
select B. menabensis as the name of this species.
As far as lateral ornament is concerned, Madagascan B. menabensis is indis-
tinguishable from similarly dated specimens described as B. incurvatus from
Braunschweig in Germany by Miller & Wollemann (1906: 4, pl. 2 (figs 2-5))
and the Vaals Formation on the Belgian—Dutch border by Holzapfel (1887: 64,
pl. 4 (figs 5-6)). More and precisely located material is needed to resolve the
true identity of these European specimens.
Baculites tanakae Matsumoto & Obata (1963: 51, pl. 13 (fig. 4), pl. 16
(figs 1-5), pl. 17 (figs 1-5), pl. 18 (figs 1, 3-4), pl. 19 (figs 1, 4), text-figs 97-
113, 115)) from the Lower Campanian of Hokkaido is probably a senior syn-
onym of B. menabensis as here interpreted. According to Matsumoto & Obata
110 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
OBEY
D E
|
|
O 5 mm
F ' ee ee |
Fig. 71. Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. Early form. Whorl sections.
A-B. TM540g. C. TM540h. D. TM540a. E. TM540b. F. TM 540c.
Venter pointing downward. Scale bar for size.
(1963: 54), B. tanakae occurs above the beds with B. capensis in Hokkaido.
The roof-shaped (fastigiate) venter and the shape of the tubercles that varies
from ‘asymmetrically crescentic or obliquely elongated to longitudinally
elongated, as in B. capensis’ (Matsumoto & Obata 1963: 52-53) in B. tanakae
is identical to that of the Madagascan B. menabensis. We can see no valid
grounds for maintaining B. tanakae and B. menabensis as separate species.
Baculites tanakae differs from B. capensis by the fastigiate venter, and the
predominance of obliquely or longitudinally elongated tubercles that are situated
higher up on the flanks than in typical B. capensis. As mentioned above, this
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA hit
style of ornament is very similar to that of form 9 or var. ‘umsinenensis’ in
B. capensis. This seems to indicate that the first appearance of B. tanakae-
B. menabensis type of ornament already occurs in the Upper Coniacian, but that
dominance of this type of ornament only takes place much later, in the Lower
Campanian. Unfortunately, we have no records of B. capensis from the Upper
Santonian of Pondoland or Zululand, but we suspect that in Hokkaido, where
the species occurs throughout the Santonian, specimens with this type of orna-
ment should be found. Alternatively, the occurrence of ‘umsinenensis’ type of
ornament has to be regarded as iterative; we cannot say for sure.
Occurrence
Mainly Middle Coniacian to Middle Santonian of Zululand, but possibly
also Lower Campanian, and Upper Coniacian to Lower Santonian of Mada-
gascar, Middle Santonian of Pondoland, Santonian of Hokkaido and California,
Upper Santonian of U.S. Gulf Coast, and, doubtfully, Lower Campanian in
Angola.
Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855
Figs 63-66, 67A-D, H-N, 68-77, 78C
1855 = Baculites sulcatus Baily, p. 457, pl. 11 (fig. 5c only, non 5a-b) (= B. bailyi
Woods).
1906 = Baculites sulcatus Baily; Woods, p. 341, pl. 44 (fig. 4).
1921 Baculites sulcatus Baily; van Hoepen, p. 18, pl. 3 (figs 7-8).
non 1921 ~~ Baculites sp. cf. sulcatus Baily; Spath, p. 260 (= B. capensis Woods).
1922 Baculites sulcatus Baily; Spath, p. 146.
? 1930 Baculites Bailyi Woods; Besairie, p. 223, pl. 21 (fig. 6 only).
non 1931 ~~ Baculites sulcatus Baily; Collignon, p. 36, pl. 5 (figs 3, 3a, 4, 4a, 5, 5a, 13,
13a), pl. 9 (fig. 15). (= ?B. yokoyamai Tokunaga & Shimizu).
non 1963 Baculites n. sp. (?) aff. B. sulcatus Baily; Matsumoto & Obata, p. 46, pl. 12
(fig. 6), text-figs 94, 130.
1977 = Baculites sulcatus Baily; Klinger & Kennedy, p. 75, figs 3B-E, J-L.
Type
Baily (1855) apparently based this species on more than one specimen—
Woods (1906: 341) refers to (the) * . . . only specimens seen are the types
.... Matsumoto & Obata (1963: 46) claimed that Woods did not designate a
lectotype. They accordingly designated the specimen figured in ventral view by
Baily (1855, pl. 11 (fig. 5c)) as lectotype. However, Woods (1906, pl. 44
(fig. 4)) referred to this same specimen (which he figured in lateral view) in the
plate explanation as ‘The Type, Museum of the Geological Society of London’.
In our view, this is a perfectly valid lectotype designation.
The lectotype, in the collections of the Natural History Museum, London,
BMNH C35625 from an unspecified horizon at the type section of the Mzamba
Formation at Mzamba Cliff is here refigured as Figures 63A-B, 64H-I.
Material
In addition to the lectotype, we have SAM-PCP5684, 5686, 8152-8154,
8361la, 8419-8422, 8653-7, 8660, SAM-7043, all from Bed A15 at locality 1
i ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(see Klinger & Kennedy, 1980 figs 1-2), Pondoland, Transkei, Mzamba Forma-
tion, Campanian I; NMB D1663 from, an unspecified horizon at the same
locality. In addition, we also have examined the material collected by Van
Hoepen in 1919 and described in 1921, in the collections of the Transvaal
Museum, TM 540a~g, 548a-c, all from an unspecified horizon at this locality.
Recent excavations for a car park at the Wild Coast Casino a few kilometres
north of the Mzamba Estuary, have yielded additional specimens (Cooper
collection, MRC 1-39).
Dimensions
Spec. MxWb MxWh Wb/Wh MnWb MnWh Wb/Wh D_ Ti Ri
PCZ8660 4.0 Dal 0.7 1.5 1.6 0.9 IA MAS) 2 ==
PCZ8361 6.2, 8.6 OZ 4.1 5/5 0.74 32) OR Das)
PCZ5684 6.9 8.7 0.79 523 7.4 OZ LT 26 25
PCZ8656 TOF NOVO 0.7 5.0 6.9 0.73 31 OO as
PCZ8654 70 9.0 0.78 4.7 6.4 0.73 23 ihe
PEZ8i532.0 5 726) Ow 0.76 6.5 8.1 0.8 19° TiOe es
PCZ8421 Tad 9.8 0.79 1 8.0 0.84 18 10.0 —
PCZ8152 sol NAS 0.7 7.4 10263 07 19° 10:0) 23
PCZ8420 9.0 11.0 0.82 TD IOS OWS 24 4.2 3
PCZ8422 9.0 14.0 0.64 8.8 IZ OT 16 ~ 10:09 5
PEZ8AN9 ile le 0.73 8.3 Le Oeral 38 yar _-
RECZSi53b) 12a nO 0.72 9.1 SO OL 7/ 39. 10.2025
D1663 OW P1459 OZ 8.0 WO A078 34 Lies
TM 540e 120 8.4 0.83 Doll dell 0.8 36> -326 —
T™M 540c WV 9.8 0.74 5.6 7.9 0.71 28 6.9 —
TM 540a 8.0 10.6 OMS 6.0 Ut 0.83 38 89 2
TM 540g 0) SI OWS 7.0 9.0 0.78 2 Gee 2
TM 540b VAR to) 0.75 1007 1323 s0ei6 AZ Ss OD
MRC 6 POE AG) 0.64 — 9.0 — 34. 329 D
MRC 28 8.0 10.0 0.8 6.0 120 0.86 24. 25s
MRC 13 93, “1320 Oma Tell Os On 72 26n abes 2
MRC 12 EO Use) 0.81 — — — —_- — —
MRC 8 MMOe Maes 0.79 8.0 [120 0273 35 8.6 0.5
MRC7 14.0 19.0 0.74 WO SIO Osa 46 4.3 0
MRC 1 19.0 24.0 0.79 ARO) IO 0). 72! 67. Is PME
Description
Lectotype. The lectotype is a small individual, 22 mm long with a whorl
height of approximately 7 mm, partially embedded in soft, green silty matrix
Fig. 72 (see Hae page). Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. ?Late forms. A. MRC 24.
B. MRC6. C. MRC9. D. MRC 18. E-F. MRC17. G-H. MRC7. Note slight curvature
in A and E. a from excavation for new car park at Wild Coast Casino, Pondoland,
Mzamba Formation, Campanian. All x 2
Ms
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
2 12
18
IF
114 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(Figs 63, 64H-I). The main features are the strong lateral ornament. The ribs
are crescentic, strongest on the dorsolateral part of the flanks, weaker on the
lower half and sweep forwards over the venter, forming a distinct chevron. The
impression of another (paralectotype) individual is present in the block of
matrix.
Topotype material. The initial discovery of B. sulcatus by Capt. Garden was
serendipitous. Detailed collecting by us yielded identical specimens only in the
topmost beds at the Mzamba Cliff. However, the underlying beds are difficult to
reach at this locality, and it is quite possible that B. sulcatus already occurs
lower down in the section, probably above the Santonian—Campanian boundary.
The following description is based on material from these topmost beds exposed
at the Mzamba Cliff, collected by us and the late Prof. T. Gevers, respectively.
SAM-7043 is part of a concretion with a complete specimen of Hauericeras
on the one side (Klinger & Kennedy 1980, fig. 5B), and a large body chamber
and part of a phragmocone of B. sulcatus on the other side (Fig. 64A). The
phragmocone fragment is identical to the lectotype, and we have no doubts in
identifying B. sulcatus from this bed. Another phragmocone fragment from the
same concretion, SAM-7043a shows the transition from the smooth to the
laterally ribbed stage at a whorl height of 7.5 mm.
Ornament in the rest of the material varies considerably—from extremely
robust, circumperipheral ribbing to virtually smooth. Ornament associated with
typical B. sulcatus is shown in PCP5684 (Fig. 64E-G), PCP5695 (Fig. 64B-D)
and PCP5684 (Fig. 64L-N), consisting of almost circumperipheral ribbing; ribs
strongest on the dorsal half of the flanks, and, in:sweeping forwards over the
ventral half of the flanks, bifurcate or occur with intercalatories, forming dis-
tinct chevrons and loops over the venter (Fig. 68D). Dorsally the ribs weaken
and curve broadly forward.
On the body chamber, as shown in SAM-7043 (Fig. 64A), ornament seems
to weaken, especially on the ventral half of the flanks. Lateral ornament consists
of two to three crescentic ribs per whorl height.
Other specimens have less prominent ornament, e.g. PCP8656 (Figs 64K,
65G-H), and only the upper half of the crescentic lateral ribs is visible and less
prominent than in the above-mentioned specimens. D1663 (Fig. 76D-E), a body
chamber fragment, also has very weak ribbing.
In the last group, e.g. PCP8361 (Fig. 65D-F) and PCP8653 (Fig. 65A-C),
ornament is very faint. PCP8153b (Fig. 65I-K) is a body chamber fragment
with part of the last septum preserved. Here, lateral ornament is practically
absent and only visible under very oblique, low lighting.
Transvaal Museum, Van Hoepen collection. Van Hoepen (1921: 18, pl. 3
(figs 7-8)) described and figured as B. sulcatus part of a collection of 22 speci-
mens. Unfortunately, we do not know exactly where in the Mzamba Cliff these
specimens were collected. Judging by the preservation, we presume them to be
Fig. 73 (see facing page). Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. ?Late forms. A-C. MRC 23.
D. MRC 22. E. MRC 34. F-H. MRC 28. I. MRC14. J. MRC30° Ko Mkee
L. MRC 19. M. MRC39. All from excavations for new car park at Wild Coast Casino,
Pondoland, Mzamba Formation, Campanian. All x 2.
115
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
ig. 73
IE
116 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
from below the topmost beds with typical B. sulcatus, but also well above the
basal beds with B. capensis. These specimens differ from typical B. sulcatus
mainly in that the lateral ribs form a more or less distinct tubercle on the dorsal
half of the flanks. In addition, in some of these specimens the whorl section
appears to be more elliptical, with the venter as wide as the dorsum and with
parallel flanks, reminiscent of B. capensis rather than ovoid as in typical
B. sulcatus.
However, as in typical B. sulcatus described above, strength and presence
of ornament is extremely variable. TM 540a (Fig. 66J-—L) and TM 540d
(Fig. 66O-P) have extremely strong ornament; that of TM 540g (Fig. 66A-B) is
much weaker, whereas TM 540e, TM 548a (Fig. 66G-I) and TM 548e
(Fig. 67C-D) are all practically smooth, save for ventral ribbing. TM 548c
(Fig. 67E-G) and TM 548d (Fig. 67H-J) are completely smooth. TM 548d
(Fig. 67H-J) and TM 548a (Fig. 66G-I) have parts of the aperture preserved.
This consists of a prominent dorsal rostrum, raised by a slight step, a very deep
lateral sinus, and a very prominent and long, spoon-shaped ventral rostrum.
Part of another aperture is preserved in TM 548b. These are all microconchs.
TM 540b (Fig. 66M-O), a body chamber, is a macroconch.
The suture lines of several specimens are exposed, e.g. Figs 68E, 69A-C,
7OA-C. These show some variation, but the saddles and lobes are distinctly
more incised and complex than those of B. capensis; in some, the bases of the
saddles and lobes are slightly constricted, resulting in a subtriangular shape.
The suture of one of the specimens, TM 540m (Fig. 70C), has rather narrow
saddles and resembles the suture of B. bailyi—as figured by Woods (1906,
pl. 44 (fig. 5)) and as mentioned above (p. 41).
Material from excavations at the Wild Coast Casino. Excavations for a new
car park at the Wild Coast Casino, north of the Mzamba River estuary,
yielded—amongst others—numerous baculitids best referable to B. sulcatus.
Again, ornament is quite variable, but in the majority of specimens consists of
distinct, widely spaced, crescentic ribs. These are strongest on the upper part of
the flanks, decrease in strength and width ventrally, and often cross the venter
as distinct lirae. In addition to these latter, intercalatory ribs or lirae may cross
the venter, some branching near the venter, forming distinct looped chevrons
over the venter (Figs 72-75, 76A-C).
In a few specimens, e.g. MRC 39 (Fig. 73), lateral ornament is as strong as
in typical B. sulcatus. In another group of about five specimens, lateral orna-
ment consists of obliquely elongated tubercles and ventral ribs, e.g. MRC 12_
(Fig. 75A-C), MRC 9, and MRC 4 (Fig. 73K). In others, e.g. MRC 24
(Fig. 72A), MRC 6 (Fig. 72B), MRC 20 (Fig. 74A) and MRC 16 (Fig. 74F),
lateral ornament consists of auricular, dorsolateral tubercles, projected ventrally
into ribs of variable strength. In a few specimens, e.g. MRC 35 (Fig. 74G),
ornament is completely absent.
Fig. 74 (see facing page). Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. ?Late form. A. MRC 20.
B. MRC 25. C. MRC la. D. MRC13. E. MRC38. F. MRC16. G. MR@35> Allizem
excavations for new car park at Wild Coast Casino, Pondoland, Mzamba Formation,
Campanian. All x 2, except C x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 7
Fig. 74
118 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
D
Fig. 75. Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. ?Late form. A-C. MRC 12. D. MRC8, body
chamber specimen with aperture. Note distinct curvature of latter. Both from excavations
for new car park at Wild Coast Casino, Pondoland, Mzamba Formation, Campanian.
All ole
Two nearly complete apertures are preserved: MRC 1 (Fig. 76A-C) and
MRC 2 at maximum whorl heights of 20 mm and 24 mm, respectively. Most of
the specimens show a slight to pronounced curvature on the body chamber, e.g.
MRC 32, 33, 8 (Fig. 75D), MRC 24 (Fig. 72A), MRC 25 (Fig. 74B), MRC 2,
MRC 13, MRC 20 and MRC 1 (Fig. 76A-C). At first we thought that this was
due to diagenetic deformation, but it seems to be a primary feature. In others,
however, e.g. MRC 12 (Fig. 75A-C), the body chamber is perfectly straight.
For descriptive purposes, the specimens in the Transvaal Museum may be
regarded as early forms of B. sulcatus; those from the top of Mzamba cliff as
typical forms, and those from the Casino site as ?late B. sulcatus.
The suture lines and whorl sections of the latter are shown in Figure 77.
Discussion
Klinger & Kennedy (1977: 76) mentioned that B. sulcatus was a relatively
rare and poorly understood species. So far it is only definitely known from the
Campanian of the Mzamba Formation in Pondoland and from borehole material
in Richards Bay, Zululand. As yet, we have not found typical B. sulcatus in
outcrop in Zululand. Reports of B. sulcatus from Zululand (Mkweyane
(Umkwelane Hill)) by Spath (1921: 260) are incorrect; these are smooth forms
of B. capensis. Records of B. sulcatus from Madagascar (Collignon 1931: 36,
pl. 5 (figs 3-5, 13), pl. 9 (fig. 15)) are also wrong. These Madagascan
specimens are of late Coniacian age and probably variants of B. besairiei (=
B. yokoyamai).
We (Klinger & Kennedy 1975: 280) initially thought that B. vanhoepeni
Venzo, best known from Zululand, was a synonym of B. sulcatus. Indeed,
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 119
Fig. 76. Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. A-C. ?Late form. MRC 1, from excavations
for car park at Wild Coast Casino, Pondoland, Mzamba Formation, Campanian.
D-E. NMBD1663, ex Van Hoepen collection. Typical form from an unrecorded horizon
at locality 1, Pondoland, Mzamba Formation, Campanian. Both x 1.
Venzo (1936: 116 [58]) included the specimens described by Van Hoepen
(1921: 18, pl. 3 (figs 7-8)) as B. sulcatus in the synonymy of B. vanhoepeni.
Part of the problem in distinguishing between these two species lies in the
disparate sizes. Almost all our specimens of B. sulcatus are small whereas
nearly all our specimens of B. vanhoepeni are large. Very few specimens of
both species are of equal size for comparison. Small specimens of B. van-
hoepeni, e.g. Figure 109H, show lateral ornament comparable to that of typical
forms of B. sulcatus, but none shows as strong ventral or dorsal ribbing as in
typical B. sulcatus. Adult forms are easily distinguished: B. vanhoepeni has
typical widely spaced, auricular, lateral tubercles and grows to much larger size
than any known B. sulcatus. Lateral ornament in typical B. vanhoepeni is very
similar to that of ?late B. sulcatus, but again, none of these late forms of
120 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
OOO
UQ9
G
O 5 mm
ea Sea ete
Fig. 77. Baculites sulcatus Baily, 1855. Late form. Whorl sections
and suture line. A-B. MRC7. C. MRC6. D. MRC3. E. MRC21.
F. MRC 23. E. MRC20. Venter in whorl sections pointing downward.
Scale bar for size.
B. sulcatus grows to as large a size as B. vanhoepeni, nor is ornament ever as
prominent. Also, the two species appear to differ in age: B. sulcatus appears
restricted to the Lower Campanian, whereas B. vanhoepeni is a typical Middle
or even partly Upper Campanian species, occurring in association with
Australiella and Menabites.
The origins of B. sulcatus are not quite clear. The early forms of B. sul-
catus, with distinct lateral nodes and elliptical whorl section, are very remi-
niscent of B. capensis. The occurrence of the latter in the basal beds of the
Mzamba Formation would support the derivation of B. sulcatus from
B. capensis. It is possible that the transition from B. capensis to B. sulcatus
took place via some of the forms described from the Lower Campanian of
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 12
Madagascar by Collignon (1969)—as B. cf. tanakae (Collignon 1969: 23,
pl. 521 (fig. 2055)) or B. sparsinodosus Collignon (Collignon 1969: 23, pl. 521
(figs 2056-8 only)), with crescentic dorsolateral tubercles.
Looking at typical forms of B. sulcatus, however, especially the weakly
ornamented forms, it would alternatively seem possible to derive the former
from late forms of B. bailyi. Some specimens of B. bailyi from the basal beds of
the Mzamba Formation, e.g. SAM-PCP8729 (Fig. 670-Q), look remarkably
like weakly ornamented B. sulcatus.
The specimens of ?late B. sulcatus from the Casino excavations bear a strik-
ing resemblance to an Upper Santonian baculitid fauna recently described from
the U.S. Gulf Coast region by Kennedy & Cobban (1991b) as B. capensis and
Boehmoceras arculus. Kennedy & Cobban used the name B. capensis (1991b:
182, figs 6: 4, 8: 1-8; 10: 7-10, 12-14; 12: 2.5) for straight baculites with
dorsolateral nodes, and Boehmoceras arculus (1991b: 182, figs 6: 2, 8; 8: 9-15,
18-22; 9: 1-2, 11-52; 10: 20-21, 24-26; 12: 3) (a senior synonym of Boehmo-
ceras loescheri Riedel, 1931) for predominantly curved specimens with distinct,
crescentic to auricular lateral bullae that extend across the dorsolateral half to
two thirds of the flanks.
As far as lateral ornament is concerned, the Pondoland specimens are indis-
tinguishable from the Gulf Coast material. MRC 1 (Fig. 76A-C) or MRC 8
(Fig. 75D) are indistinguishable from specimens assigned to B. arculus by Ken-
nedy & Cobban (19915, fig. 9: 50-52 or fig. 9: 46), but none of our specimens
has as distinct curvature as the Gulf Coast material to merit assignation to the
genus Boehmoceras.
It is obvious that in both assemblages we are dealing with a baculitid popu-
lation morphologically transitional between Baculites and Boehmoceras, with
both having their origins in B. capensis. As shown above (p. 71), some
specimens of B. capensis have slightly curved body chambers. In the majority
of the Pondoland specimens, ornament is of the Boehmoceras arculus or
Baculites sulcatus type, but curvature is restricted to the body chamber, as in
B. capensis, and they still belong to Baculites s.s. In the Gulf Coast material,
lateral ornament is the same, but the curvature is more distinct and already
occurs on the phragmocone, and they are referable to Boehmoceras. In both
populations, more or less straight specimens with B. capensis-like ornament
occur associated with the curved specimens, indicating an origin in the latter
species. It is tempting to link B. capensis to the Gulf Coast Boehmoceras fauna
via the Pondoland specimens but, lacking a precise date for the latter
assemblage, this is not advisable at present. Affinities of ?late B. sulcatus with
typical forms of B. sulcatus, rather suggests that the Pondoland and Gulf Coast
faunas have a common origin in the Upper Santonian in B. capensis, and
subsequently acquired similar ornament, but developed in parallel. The Gulf
Coast fauna became progressively more curved and gave rise to true
Boehmoceras, whereas the Pondoland fauna remained in the strict Baculites
lineage.
Baculites increscens Collignon (1970: 3, pl. 607 (figs 2266-2268)) from the
Middle Campanian of Zululand and Madagascar resembles ?late B. sulcatus, but
lateral ornament in the former is more prominent, and transitional to the
prominent auricular B. vanhoepeni type.
122 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 78. A-B. Baculites bailyi Woods, 1906. A. SAM-PCZ8358, concretion with B. bailyi
and Premuniericeras from locality 98, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Santonian II.
B. SAM-PCZ7214, concretion crammed with juvenile B. bailyi from locality 73, Zululand,
St Lucia Formation, Coniacian IV or V. C. B. sulcatus Baily, 1855. SAM -PCP836l,
concretion from locality 1, Pondoland, Mzamba Formation, Campanian I. ©
Ae
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 123
Strongly ornamented forms of typical B. sulcatus bear superficial
resemblance to Trachybaculites columna (Morton, 1834) (see Cobban &
Kennedy 1992c for a recent review). Trachybaculites columna, however, is a
Maastrichtian species known from the Prairie Bluff Chalk of Alabama, the
Corsicana Marl of the Navarro Group of Texas, Trail City Member of the Fox
Hills Formation in South Dakota, and also from the Ganzas Formation of the
San Joaquin Valley, California (Matsumoto 1959: 163). Ribbing seems to be
more uniform, and stronger on the dorsum and venter than in B. sulcatus. Also,
the suture is distinctly simple compared to that of B. sulcatus.
Baculites furcillatus (Blanckenhorn, 1905, pl. 6 (fig. 2)) (herein Fig. 67E-F)
has ornament similar to that of some B. sulcatus. This is a rare species in the
Maastrichtian of Israel, and more material is needed for definite comment.
According to Picard (1929: 441), B. furcillatus ‘is only a strongly ribbed form
of B. palestinensis’. Ribbing in B. furcillatus is stronger over the venter and
dorsum than in B. sulcatus, and thus seems closer to 7. columna.
Baculites thomi Reeside (1927b: 13, pl. 12 (figs 9-14)) from the Elk Basin
Sandstone member of the Telegraph Creek Formation of the U.S. Western
Interior, is superficially similar to some typical B. sulcatus in the strong, cir-
cumperipheral ribbing. However, a recent review of the species by Cobban &
Kennedy (1991la: C1-C8, pls 1-2) showed that Reeside’s original figures of the
holotype were retouched. According to Cobban & Kennedy (1991a), B. thomi
first appears in the Upper Santonian, where it reaches its peak, and persists into
the Lower Campanian. Ornament in B. thomi is far more regular than in
B. sulcatus, with very regular ventral corrugations developing in typical forms.
Also, the suture line (Cobban & Kennedy 1991a, fig. 2A—B) is less complex.
Some representatives of two baculitid species from the Coniacian of
the U.S. Western Interior are very similar to B. sulcatus. These are B. sweet-
grassensis Cobban, 1951 (see Kennedy & Cobban 1991la: 70, pl. 14
(figs 24-25, 29-34, 38-42)) and B. codyensis Reeside (see Kennedy & Cobban
1991a: 72, pl. 15 (figs 1-30), pl. 16 (figs 1-13), pl. 17 (figs 1-8), text-fig. 25F).
Baculites sweetgrassensis is a Middle Coniacian species, and, in typical
forms, has widely spaced, crescentic bullae that are projected ventrally into
sharp, forwardly direct ribs. Superficially some of these (e.g. Kennedy &
Cobban 1991a, pl. 14 (fig. 40-41)) resemble early forms of B. sulcatus; others,
(e.g. Kennedy & Cobban 1991a, pl. 14 (figs 30, 38)) resemble ?late B. sulcatus.
Baculites codyensis first appears in the Middle Coniacian, and ranges up to
the Middle Santonian. Typical forms have regular, concave, concentric ribs,
and these, together with the age difference clearly separate B. codyensis from
B. sulcatus. Some of the more coarsely ornamented forms of B. codyensis (see
e.g. Kennedy & Cobban 199la, pl. 16 (fig. 12)) resemble ?late forms of
B. sulcatus, but again, this is mere homoeomorphy.
Some specimens of B. ovatus Say, recently figured by Kennedy & Cobban
(1993c, fig. 15. 9-12), are remarkably similar to our ?late B. sulcatus, but
B. ovatus is a younger species, and typically has weaker ornament than
B. sulcatus.
Baculites oberholzeri Bohm (1909: 52, pl. 1 (fig. 9a—b)), imprecisely dated
from the Senonian of Switzerland, appears to have similar lateral ornament, but
this species is based on a crushed fragment, about 11 mm long, and is best
regarded as a nomen dubium.
124 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Some specimens described and figured by Birkelund (1965: 58, pl. 8
(fig. 1), pl. 9'iigs 1-3), pl. 10: Gig. 1), pl. 11) Gigs 1-2), pl. 12 Gigs Ie 2)alans
(figs 1-2), pl. 14 (fig. 1), text-figs 47-52) as Baculites obtusus Meek from the
Lower Campanian of West Greenland resemble B. sulcatus, but none of the
specimens develops as strong ornament as typical representatives of the latter.
Typical forms of B. sulcatus are also nearly identical with some
B. leopoliensis Nowak (see e.g. Kennedy 1986e, pl. 2 (figs 11—12)); this,
however, is an Upper Campanian species, and typical forms have more regular,
thin, crescentic ribs.
Occurrence
To date, B. sulcatus has only been recorded from the Lower Campanian of
Pondoland and in subsurface deposits at Richards Bay, Zululand.
Baculites increscens Collignon, 1970
Figs 79A-L, N-O, 80A-B, 82
1970 ~~ Baculites increscens Collignon, p. 3, pl. 607 (figs 2266-2268), p. 5, pl. 608
(fig. 2269).
1970 —_ Baculites tanakaeformis Collignon, p. 2, pl. 607 (figs 2263-2265).
1970 — Baculites androtsyensis Collignon, p. 5, pl. 608 (figs 2270-2272).
1970 = Baculites mamillatus Collignon, p. 7, pl. 609 (figs 2273-2274).
Type |
Holotype, by original designation, the specimen figured by Collignon (1970,
pl. 607 (fig. 2266)) from the Middle Campanian, Zone of Pachydiscus
grossouvrei, subzone of Eupachydiscus lamberti, gisement 177, Coupe
d’ Ankilizato (Belo sur Tsiribihina), Madagascar, housed in the collections of the
Institut des Sciences de la Terre, Université de Dijon, GD 12266, here refigured
as Figure 82.
Material
SAM-PCZ11986-11996, all from locality 102, Zululand, St Lucia
Formation, Campanian II.
Description
All of our material is fragmentary, but the specimens range in size from
juveniles to large body chamber sections, covering all the growth stages.
PCZ11992 (Fig. 79I-J) is a juvenile and shows distinct crescentic,
dorsolateral nodes. PCZ11995 at similar whorl height has less conspicuous
nodes but shows a distinct trigonal whorl section. PCZ11996, at whorl height
Fig. 79 (see facing page). A-L, N-O. Baculites increscens Collignon, 1970.
A-D. SAM-PCZ11988. E. SAM-PCZ11991. F-H. SAM-PCZ11997. I-J. SAM—
PCZ11992. K-L. SAM-PCZ11987. N-O. SAM-PCZ11993, all from locality 103,
Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian ?IJ. M. Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936.
SAM-PCZ11998 from locality 110, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian II or III.
Al x A:
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
125
Fig. 79
126 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
O 10 mm
ie eet sterner |
E
D
Fig. 80. Whorl sections and suture lines. A-B. Baculites increscens Collignon,
1970. A. SAM-PCZ11995. B. SAM-PCZ11986. C-D. Baculites duharti
Hiinicken, 1965. C. SAM-PCZ7685. D. SAM-PCZ7685. Venter in whorl
section pointing upward. Scale bar for size.
12 mm, shows a similar rounded, trigonal whorl section. PCZ11993
(Fig. 79N—-O) and PCZ11986 show typical phragmocone ornament consisting of
prominent, dorsolaterally situated auricular nodes, projected ventrally into thin
lirae that cross the venter, accompanied by intercalated lirae. Slightly more than
two nodes occur per whorl height. The whorl section is compressed ovoid
(Fig. 80A—C)with the dorsum flat to slightly rounded, and the venter narrowly
rounded. PCZ11990 is a fragment, and has large, rounded, instead of crescentic
dorsolateral nodes.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 127
UPPER CAMPANIAN
Zone of Delawarella subdelawarensis ae taylorensis Adkins
and B. ankilizatensis sp. nov.
(153-159)
Australiella australis B. rectangulatus sp. nov.
(156-157)
Sub- B. ankilizatensis sp. nov.
oe (first: 153-159)
Pachydiscus bassae Foe ae Nowak
Zone of
B. coagmentatus sp. nov.
(177-156)
B. increscens
(last: 177)
B. androtsyensis sp. nov.
Eupachyoiscus 180 & 327-328-329)
B. mamillatus sp. nov.
lamberti (181-326)
B. increscens
(first: 180-181)
B. tanakaeformis sp. nov.
(326-327 & 180-181)
Pachydiscus grossouvrei Sub-zone of
z
=
z
= 4
o.
=
<
O
Ww
a
Q
=
=
Top of Lower Campanian:
Sub-zone of Termiericeras /enticulare
LOWER CAMPANIAN
Fig. 81. Biostratigraphic zonation of the Middle Campanian and distribution of
Baculites spp. at Menabe, Madagascar after Collignon (1969).
PCZ11991 (Fig. 79E), PCZ11988 (Fig. 79A-C) and PCZ11989 are body.
chamber fragments. Lateral ornament varies from closely spaced crescentic
ribs, to low and rounded nodes. Some fragments appear to have been smooth.
Discussion
Baculites increscens is but one of several baculitids described by Collignon
(1970) from the Middle Campanian of Madagascar. Our material fits the
description of B. increscens best, but several features ascribed to the other
Madagascar species are also present, and it is necessary to comment on the
latter.
According to Collignon’s (1970) stratigraphy of the Middle Campanian of
Menabe, Madagascar (Fig. 81) the majority of Baculites species occur in the
lower part of the substage, in the Zone of Pachydiscus grossouvrei, Subzone of
Eupachydiscus lamberti. These include B. coagmentatus Collignon (1970: 7,
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
128
on, 1969. Plaster cast of the holotype, GD12266, the
2266)) from the Middle Campanian of
Fig. 82. Baculites increscens Collign
ur Tsiribihina), Madagascar. * 1
original of Collignon (1970, pl. 607 (fig.
gisement 177, Coupe d’ Ankilizato (Belo s
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 129
pl. 609 (figs 2275-2276)) (herein Fig. 88); B. increscens Collignon (1970: 3,
pl. 607 (figs 2266-2268)) (herein Fig. 82); B. androtsyensis Collignon (1970: 5,
pl. 608 (figs 2270-2272)) (herein Fig. 83), B. mamillatus Collignon (1970: 7,
pl. 609 (figs 2273-2274)) (herein Fig. 84A-C) and B. tanakaeformis Collignon
(1970: 2, pl. 607 (figs 2263-2265)) (herein Fig. 84D-F).
The order of their listing below suggests that this is the order of their occur-
rence, but this is not strictly so. If they are arranged according to their
occurrence at the different localities or horizons (Collignon’s ‘gisements’), it is
clear that these species are contemporary to a large extent.
‘Gisement’
183 Baculites cf. B. taylorensis
153 Baculites ankilizatensis
Baculites coagmentatus
156 Baculites rectangulatus
Baculites leopoliensis
LS7 Baculites rectangulatus
159 Baculites ankilizatensis
Nyy Baculites leopoliensis
Baculites coagmentatus
Baculites increscens
180 Baculites androtsyensis
Baculites increscens
Baculites tanakaeformis
181 Baculites mamillatus
Baculites increscens
Baculites tanakaeformis
329 Baculites androtsyensis
328 Baculites androtsyensis
32] Baculites androtsyensis
Baculites tanakaeformis
326 Baculites tanakaeformis
Baculites mamillatus
According to Collignon (1970: 2), B. tanakaeformis occurs at the base of the
Middle Campanian, and B. androtsyensis is the oldest of the series of baculitids
that dominates the Middle Campanian (Collignon 1970: 5). Both occur together
at gisement 327; at gisement 181 they occur together with B. increscens; and at
326 and 181 B. tanakaeformis occurs with B. mamillatus.
On the basis of their co-occurrence, it would seem logical to regard the
above-mentioned four species, B. tanakaeformis, B. increscens, B. androt-
syensis and B. mamillatus as a single, variable species. However, Collignon
130 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
based these species on large assemblages—B. tanakaeformis (87 specimens),
B. androtsyensis (50 specimens) and B. increscens (50 specimens), and they
cannot summarily be dismissed as synonyms.
Fig. 83. Baculites androtsyensis Collignon, 1969. Plaster cast of the holotype, GD12270,
the original of Collignon (1970, pl. 608 (fig. 2270)), from the Middle Campanian
of gisement 329, Coupe Ampolypoly-Antsirasira-Behamotra (Belo sur Tsiribihina),
Madagascar. x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 131
All four species have a subtriangular whorl section in common, with faint
indications of longitudinal depressions on either side of the venter, indicating an
incipient ventral keel. Lateral ornament varies from strong crescentic to
mammiform in B. increscens, weaker in B. androtsyensis (with more
compressed whorl section), distinct mammiform in B. mamillatus, conical to
obliquely elongated in B. tanakaeformis. The suture lines of B. mamillatus and
B. androtsyensis (Figs 85A, C) are very similar.
We do not doubt that these four broad morphological groups can be
identified in large collections, and that some morphotypes probably are more
common at certain localities than others in Madagascar. However, our Zululand
material from locality 102 shows that even though the majority of specimens
are identifiable with B. increscens, some specimens could be referred to either
of the other three species, e.g. PCZ11993 (Fig. 79N-O) and PCZ11986 have a
more compressed whorl section as in B. androtsyensis; PCZ11988
(Fig. 79A—-D) has rounded tubercles as in B. mamillatus; those of PCZ11991
(Fig. 79E) are as in B. tanakaeformis. Because of this, we doubt if it is justi-
fiable to maintain formal specific names for these different, yet overlapping
and co-eval morphotypes and, as first revising authors, we select
Baculites increscens as the name of this species.
Baculites coagmentatus Collignon (1970: 7, pl. 609 (figs 2275-2276))
(Fig. 88) appears to be slightly younger than most of the baculitids of the group
of B. increscens, but co-occurs with the last appearance of B. increscens at
Collignon’s locality 177. The whorl section is still subtriangular as in
B. increscens, but the ornament of B. coagmentatus consists essentially of thin,
closely spaced, crescentic ribs—a mode of ornament found in some of the
Durban specimens of B. vanhoepeni to be described below. Baculites
leopoliensis Collignon (1970: 10, pl. 610 (figs 2277-2278) non Nowak) (herein
Fig. 86) has a more ovoid whorl section, but similar lateral ornament as in
B. coagmentatus and they are probably synonyms. Baculites leopoliensis Nowak
(1908: 328, pl. 14 (figs 1-5, 10, 211), text-figs 1-5 on p. 329, ?text-figs 5-10
on p. 331) is a typical Upper Campanian species (see Hancock & Kennedy
1993: 165) and not Lower Maastrichtian as recorded earlier by, for example,
Kennedy (1986c: 1013). The ornament consists of lateral ribs that break down
into riblets and striae on the venter, whereas intercalated ribs develop over the
venter. This style of ornament is quite characteristic and unlike that of the
Madagascar material. Baculites leopoliensis Collignon non Nowak is here
renamed B. collignoni nom. nov. Baculites coagmentatus and B. collignoni have
a style of ornament similar to some forms of B. vanhoepeni (see e.g.
Fig. 111A-—C), and these two species can probably be regarded as ?early forms
(and junior synonyms?) of B. vanhoepeni.
Fig. 84 (see overleaf). A-C. Baculites mamillatus Collignon, 1970. Plaster cast of the
holotype, GD12273, the original of Collignon (1970, pl. 609 (fig. 2273)) from the Middle
Campanian of gisement 181, Coupe d’Ankilizato (Belo sur Tsiribihina), Madagascar.
D-F. Baculites tanakaeformis Collignon, 1970. Plaster cast of the holotype, GD12263, the
Original of Collignon (1970, pl. 607 (fig. 2263)) from the Middle Campanian of
gisement 326, Coupe Ampolypoly-Antsirasira-Behamotra (Belo sur Tsiribihina), Madagascar.
Both x 1.
132
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 133
l é EN
ql b§ Bide
E L
U I
O 10 mm B
E
ob ie
Mt Slae
een fs
Fig. 85. Suture lines. A. Baculites mamillatus Collignon, 1970. GD12273.
(see Fig. 84A-C). B. Baculites ankilizatensis Collignon, 1970. GD12282
(see Fig. 89). C. Baculites androtsyensis Collignon, 1970. GD12270 (see
Fig. 83). Scale bars for size.
Baculites rectangulatus Collignon (1970: 12, pl. 611 (figs 2279-2281))
(herein Fig. 87) is a late representative of the group of B. increscens as far as
Ornamentation is concerned. The whorl section, however, is more compressed
and subrectangular. Baculites ankilizatensis Collignon (1970: 13, pl. 612
(figs 2282-2284)) (herein Fig. 89) is a large baculitid with reduced lateral
ornament.
In Zululand, B. increscens appears to occupy an intermediate position
between B. sulcatus, especially the material from the Casino excavations, and
B. vanhoepeni. Juvenile specimens of B. increscens are virtually
indistinguishable from ?late B. sulcatus. Baculites increscens differs from
B. sulcatus mainly in having stronger lateral ornament in the adult stage, and
from B. vanhoepeni in being weaker ornamented. To be quite frank, the main
reason for separating B. increscens in Zululand is probably because of its
isolated occurrence at locality 102.
134 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 86. Baculites collignoni nom. nov. Plaster cast of GD12277, the original of Baculites
leopoliensis non Nowak in Collignon (1970, pl. 610 (fig. 2277)) from gisement 156, Coupe
d’Ankilizato (Belo sur Tsiribihina), Madagascar. x 1. )
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 135
Fig. 87. Baculites rectangulatus Collignon, 1970. Plaster cast of the holotype, GD12279,
the original of Collignon (1970, pl. 611 (fig. 2279)) from the Middle Campanian of
gisement 157 of Coupe d’Ankilizato (Belo sur Tsiribihina), Madagascar. x 1.
136 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 88. Baculites coagmentatus Collignon, 1970. Plaster cast of the holotype, GD12275,
the original of Collignon (1970, pl. 609 (fig. 2275)) from the Middle Campanian of
gisement 177, Coupe d’Ankilizato (Belo sur Tsiribihina), Madagascar. x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 137
Fig. 89. Baculites ankilizatensis Collignon, 1970. Plaster cast of the holotype, GD12282,
the original of Collignon (1970, pl. 612 (fig. 2282)) from the Middle Campanian of
gisement 153, Coupe d’Ankilizato (Belo sur Tsiribihina), Madagascar. x 1.
138 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Baculites nibelae sp. nov., described below (p. 162) is younger than typical
B. increscens, lateral ornament is similar, but the whorl section is character-
istically wedge-shaped,trigonal, with a flat dorsum and a narrow venter.
Occurrence
Middle Campanian of Zululand and Madagascar.
Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936
Figs 79M, 91-115
1936 Baculites vagina Forbes var. van Hoepeni Venzo, p. 116 [58], pl. 10 [6]
(figs 11-12).
1973 ~Baculites sp. group of Baculites capensis Woods; Kennedy & Klinger, p. 100,
pl. 4 (figs 1-5), pl. 5 (fig. la-d), pl. 6 (figs 4-5).
1975 — Baculites sulcatus (non Baily); Kennedy & Klinger, p. 280.
? 1970 —Baculites coagmentatus Collignon, p. 7, pl. 609 (figs 2275-2276).
v 1970 Baculites leopoliensis non Nowak, Collignon, p. 10, pl. 610 (figs 2277-2278)
(= B. collignoni nom. nov.)
1977 —Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo; Kennedy & Klinger, p. 73, figs 2G-K, 3A, H-I,
4A-C, 5C.
Kwa-Nibela
109B—>>*
KOSIE—=—|
Hell's Gate
1000 2000 Metres
Fig. 90. Localities on Nibela Peninsula referred to in text, but
not included in Kennedy & Klinger (1975).
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 139
Type
Venzo (1936: 116 [58]) based this species on several specimens. Klinger &
Kennedy (1977: 73) designated the larger of the two specimens figured by
Venzo (1936, pl. 10 [6] (fig. 1la—b)) from ‘False Bay’, Zululand, as lectotype.
It is housed in the Department of Geological Sciences, University of Bologna,
no. | GO243.
Material
We have more than 150 specimens from localities on the Nibela Peninsula
(Fig. 90), Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian II-III.
Dimensions
A list of dimensions is given in the appendix.
Max Wb (mm) MxWb/MxWh MnWb/MnwWh Ti Ri
10-14.9 0.71 0.69 5.32 0.81
fs—19.9 0.71 O73 4.7 0.8
20-24.9 O77 0.76 4.9 ferles
25-27.9 0.77 0.79 328 1.28
30-34.9 Doe Osi 6.2 l
37 0.80 _ — _
Description
This species is conspicuous by its large size; the largest available specimen
(D1302b, Fig. 103) has a whorl height of 55 mm. Unfortunately, the early
stages are poorly known—almost all our specimens are large. This is probably
due to taphonomic and/or diagenetic factors.
Early stages of growth are shown in PCZ7714 (Fig. 109H). Here the whorl
section is more or less ovoid, with a narrow venter. Ornament consists of
dorsolaterally situated crescentic ribs which are projected ventrally and
aperturally over the venter, numbering about 2.5 per whorl height.
All the characteristic features of the species are shown in PCZ8764
(Fig. 91A-C). The bullae are typically crescentic to auricular, with sharp to
rounded lateral crests, and are situated on the dorsal half of the flanks.
Ventrally, they are projected acutely forwards and over the venter as thin
riblets. In addition, a variable number of intercalatories arises on the ventral
half of the flanks, and these also cross the venter with distinct, albeit variable
corrugation.
Fig. 91 (see overleaf). Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A-C. SAM-PCZ8764.
D-F. SAM-PCZ7717. G-I. SAM-PCZ7415. J-L. SAM-PCZ7707. M-O. SAM-
PCZ7091. Note the irregular occurrence of ventral corrugations. All from locality 110,
Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian II-?1II. All x 1.
Fig. 92 (see overleaf). Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A-C. NMBD1467.
D. SAS Z1911. E-F. NMBD1467a. G-H. SAS Z1863e. Note the aperture in D and H. All
from locality 110, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian II-?III. All x 1.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
140
Wy “yg
Vy j
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 14]
Fig. 92
142 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 93. Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A-C. SAS A2035. Large, adult specimen
with typical prominent auricular lateral tubercles. From locality 110, Zululand St Lucia
Formation, Campanian II-?III. x 1.
Fig. 94 (see facing page). Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A-C. SAS A2032.
D. SAS A477. E. SAM-PCZ7411. F. SAM-PCZ8765. All from locality 110, Zululand,
St Lucia Formation, Campanian I]-?111. All x 1. iy
143
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
? Fh 3
ema
He
Fig. 94
144 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 95. Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A-C. SAM-PCZ7635. D-F. SAS A2034.
Both from locality 110, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian II-?III. Both x 1.
Fig. 96 (see facing page). Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A. SAM-PCZ7640.
B. NMBD1302b. C-E. NMBD1302a. All from locality 110, Zululand, St Lucia
Formation, Campanian II-?1II. All x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 145
Fig. 96
146 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The dorsal projection of the bullae is striking. Viewed dorsally, their outline
is pointed, mammiform and, together with the dorsal ribbing, forms an open-
ended, inverted V. The whorl section varies from ovoid at the smaller end to
elliptical at the larger.
The essential features of this species are the widely spaced, dorsolateral
auricular bullae. In the adult stage, they are distinctly auricular in lateral view
and conical mammiform in dorsal view. (Figs 96D, 99C). These are generally
widely spaced, about one per twice the whorl height, but in some specimens,
especially on the body chamber, they may be more closely spaced—up to three
per whorl height (e.g. SAS A477—Fig. 94D), or even more widely spaced
(e.g. PCZ9404, Fig. 102C), but this is exceptional.
There is some variation in the shape of the bullae. At the one extreme they
are reduced to thin riblets on the flanks, e.g. Fig. 111A—C; at the other they are
low and rounded to bullate, rather than transversely elongated, e.g. SAS A2034
(Fig. 9SD-F), PCZ7640 (Fig. 96A), and Figures 110A-C, 112A-C, D, E-F.
Specimens from locality 109A (Fig. 114A-—C) have more widely spaced, smaller
and rounded tubercles. We suspect that these are slightly older than typical
forms at locality 109 and 110. These could also possibly be referred to as ?early
forms of B. vanhoepeni, or, given more material, possibly be separated
specifically.
The presence of riblets on the ventral half of the flanks and accompanying
corrugation on the venter is an extremely variable feature and of no apparent
taxonomic value. In some examples, e.g. PCZ8764 (Fig. 91A-C), PCZ7717
(Fig. 91D-F), PCZ1860h (Fig. 101D), PCZ1911 (Fig. 101F), these are vqume
distinct, but in the majority of specimens they are absent or very faint. The
majority of specimens with ventral ribbing are small, but as shown in Figure 91,
other specimens of similar size totally lack these ventral ribs. In short, ventral
ribbing appears to be a variable character, sometimes, but not always associated
with early stages of growth, and taxonomically of no significance in
B. vanhoepeni.
The aperture is preserved in several specimens, e.g. Z1911 (Fig. 92D),
Z1863e (Fig. 92G-H), Z2077 and consists of a short, rounded dorsal rostrum, a
prominent lateral sinus and a longer ventral rostrum. Distribution of maximum
whorl height (Fig. 113) suggests that B. vanhoepeni is dimorphic, but that some
overlap in size occurs between macro- and microconchs. In one specimen,
SAM-PCZ7091 (Fig. 91M-O) part of the body chamber is distinctly flared.
This is very similar to a specimen of B. obtusus figured by Birkelund (1965,
pl. 9 (fig. 3a—c)).
Fig. 97 (see facing page). Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A. SAS Z1860a.
B. SAS A2029b. C. SAM-PCZ7655. D. SAS Z1860b. All from locality 110, Zululand,
St Lucia Formation, Campanian II-?III. All x 1.
Fig. 98 (see overleaf). Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A. SAS Z1190. B. SAS Z1860c.
Both from locality 110, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian II-?III. Both x 1.
Fig. 99 (see overleaf). Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A. SAS Z1911. Specimen with
typical adult lateral ornament. D. SAS A2029a. E. SAM-PCZ12020. F. NMBD1302a.
All from locality 110, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian IJ-?11I. All x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AERICA
147
Fig. 97
148 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 98
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 149
Fig. 99
150 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The suture line of B. vanhoepeni (Figs 104-108) is slightly more complex
than that of the majority of the Lower and Middle Campanian baculitid species
from Madagascar (Figs 61-62, 85) and quite variable. The lateral lobe (L) tends
to become constricted. In some, e.g. Z1923 (Fig. 108A), the suture is highly
incised and dendritic, with narrow-stemmed saddles and a prominent,
asymmetrically trifid, constricted lateral lobe, whereas in others (e.g.
SAM-PCZ7706—Fig. 104A) it is relatively simple with quadrate saddles and
lobes with open (unconstricted) lobes.
Discussion
This species was originally described as B. vagina var. van Hoepeni by
Venzo (1936: 116 [58], pl. 10 [6] (figs 11-12)). Venzo incorrectly included the
Pondoland specimens described and figured by Van Hoepen (1921: 18, pl. 3
(figs 7-8)) as B. sulcatus in the synonymy of this species. Baculites vagina is a
typical Maastrichtian Eubaculites, and totally different from the present species,
bituberculate, with a tabulate venter (see e.g. Klinger & Kennedy 1993).
Baculites sulcatus, as here interpreted, is an older species, occurring in the
Lower Campanian of Pondoland, and typically lacks the strong lateral ornament
of B. vanhoepeni.
Baculites vanhoepeni is easily identified by the distinct, auricular
dorsolateral ornament, especially in the adult stage, and, most conspicuously,
by its large size, which distinguishes it from all the older Lower and other
Middle Campanian baculitid species of Zululand and Madagascar.
Juvenile stages of B. vanhoepeni are rare, probably for taphonomic and/or
diagenetic reasons. Available specimens (Fig. 109H) are indistinguishable from
similarly sized specimens of B. increscens (Fig. 79I-J) or B. sulcatus (Fig. 731).
This suggests a phylogenetic lineage starting with B. capensis, via B. sulcatus
and B. increscens or similar forms, to B. vanhoepeni. The adult stages,
however, are clearly different—both in terms of ornament and maximum adult
SIZe.
As mentioned above, there is some variation in lateral ornament. Typical
specimens have widely spaced, auricular bullae but, in some, the bullae are
reduced to thin lateral riblets (Fig. 111A-D), or the bullae are more closely
spaced and sharp crested (Fig. 94D), whereas in some the bullae are large and
rounded and mammiform (Figs 95D-F, 96A). Some of these morphologies are
already present in some of the Lower and Middle Campanian baculitids of
Madagascar described by Collignon (1969, 1970).
Fig. 100 (see facing page). Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A-B. SAS Z1860d.
C-E. SAM-PCZ7645. Both from locality 110, Zululand, St Lucia Formation,
Campanian II-?HI. Both x 1.
Fig. 101 (see overleaf). Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A. SAM-PCZ7786.
B. SAM-PCZ7690. C. SAS A2036a. D. SAS Z1860h. E. SAS A2036. F. SAS Z1911.
G. SAS Z1923. H. SAS Z1860f. All from locality 110, Zululand, St Lucia Formation,
Campanian II-?1T. All x 1.
Fig. 102 (see overleaf). Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A-B. SAS Z1860b.
C. SAM-PCZ9404. Both from locality 110, Zululand, St Lucia Formation,
Campanian II-?1II. Both x 1. ,
151
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
OO! “SI
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
lay
153
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 102
154 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
MB D1320b. One of the largest. specimens
ation, Campanian i-7l, a
Venzo, 1936. N
0, Zululand, St Lucia Form
Fig. 103. Baculites vanhoepeni
of this species from locality 11
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 155
Large, mammiform nodes already occur in Lower Campanian B. sparsi-
nodosus (Fig. 60) and are well developed in B. mamillatus (Fig. 84A-C) in the
Middle Campanian. Thin, rib-like ornament, albeit very closely spaced, occurs
in B. coagmentatus (Fig. 88) and B. leopoliensis Collignon non Nowak
(= Baculites collignoni nom. nov.) (Fig. 86) in the Middle Campanian of
Madagascar.
We initially thought (Klinger & Kennedy 1977: 74) that B. tanakae
Masumoto & Obata (1963: 51, pl. 13 (fig. 4), pl. 16 Gigs 1-5), pl. 17
(figs 1-5), pl. 18 (figs 1, 3-4), pl. 19 (figs 1, 4), text-figs 97-113, 115) was a
synonym of B. vanhoepeni, but now rather regard it as being closer to
B. capensis than to B. vanhoepeni as discussed above (p. 109), and probably a
senior synonym of B. menabensis Collignon.
E
0) 5 mm
(oe ee
Fig. 104. Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936.
Suture lines. A-B. SAM-PCZ7706.
Scale bar for size.
Baculites taylorensis Adkins (1929: 204, pl. 5 (figs 9-11)), recently revised
by Kennedy & Cobban (1993a: 93, figs 10.1-10.9, 10.11-10.12, 10.16,
10.18-10.19; 11.1-11.2; 1993d: 143, pl. 6 (figs 1-9), pl. 7 (figs 1-6, 10-13),
text-fig. 8b, d), from the Middle Campanian Taylor Formation of Texas and the
Annona Chalk in Arkansas, is indistinguishable from B. vanhoepeni on the basis
of the original descriptions and figures of Adkins. The specimens figured by
156 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Kennedy & Cobban, however, all seem to be consistently more weakly
ornamented than B. vanhoepeni and more like B. sparsinodosus.
Matsumoto & Obata (1963: 55) also noted the parallelism between the
lineages of B. capensis—B. tanakae in the Indo-Pacific region, and B. codyensis
(as B. asper)-B. taylorensis in the Gulf—Atlantic region. In both lineages, which
cover more or less the same time interval, there is a progressive increase in
size, and coarsening and wider spacing of ornament.
O 10 mm
Fig. 105. Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. Suture lines.
A-B. NMBD1302. C. SAM-PCZ7640.
Scale bar for size.
Baculites sp. (in Stephenson 1941: 407, pl. 76 (figs 7-8)) has similar lateral
ornament, but the dorsum seems more flattened—as in B. nibelae sp. nov.
According to Matsumoto (1959: 126), the former may be a representative of
B. lomaensis Anderson (1958: 191, pl. 48 (figs 5-6)). The latter, however,
apparently occurs in the Lower Maastrichtian of California.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA [57
ee,
0 5 mm
Fig. 106. Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. Suture lines.
A-B. NMBD1302. C. SAS Z1191.
Scale bar for size of B and C.
A similar convergent lineage occurs in the Middle Campanian of the U.S.
Western Interior, consisting of B. obtusus-B. maclearni-B. asperiformis. The
latter part of this lineage, B. asperiformis, is remarkably similar to
B. vanhoepeni; compare e.g. B. asperiformis in Cobban (1962, pl. 106
(figs 10-11)) and Figure 91. The lateral ornament is identical, as is the
occurrence of ventral ribbing. The sutures are also similar, although some
specimens of B. vanhoepeni may have a more complex, dendritic suture.
However, the early part of this lineage, B. obtusus, has closely spaced
158 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
dorsolateral crescentic ribs and a strongly corrugated venter—quite unlike any
of the Indo-Pacific material. Baculites vanhoepeni can perhaps be considered
analogous to B. obtusus, but there are sufficient differences to separate them.
E
L
A
0) 5 mm
ee eee
E
B
rad
E
D
Fig. 107. Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. Suwtunewinnes
A-D. SAS Z1923. Specimen with complex suture line and constricted
lateral lobe (L). See also Fig. 108.
Scale bar for size.
As far as the ornament is concerned, small specimens of B. vanhoepeni
show a remarkable similarity to Boehmoceras arculus from the U.S. Gulf Coast
described by Kennedy & Cobban (1991b), already referred to above (p. 121).
Apart from the lack of the distinct curvature, specimens of B. vanhoepeni, e.g.
Figure 91A-O are indistinguishable from B. arculus in Kennedy & Cobban
(e.g. 1991b: fig. 9.11-52). Some specimens of B. vanhoepeni, e.g. PCZ8764
(Fig. 91A-C), do show slight curvature, but nowhere as pronounced as in
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 159
0) 5 mm
Oo 10mm
O 10 mm
nl
Fig. 108. Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. Suture lines.
A. SAS Z1923. Extremely complex, dendritic suture compared to other
specimens. B. SAS A2029. C. SAS A2034.
Scale bar for size.
Boehmoceras arculus. Apart from the curvature, B. arculus is an older species,
occurring in the Upper Santonian, whereas B. vanhoepeni is definitely younger,
occurring in the Middle to Upper Campanian of Zululand.
It thus appears that three, apparently unrelated baculitid lineages in the Indo-
Pacific, the Gulf Atlantic and the U.S. Western Interior, respectively, gave rise
in the Middle Campanian to remarkably similar forms with prominent, widely
spaced arcuate bullae, viz. B. vanhoepeni, B. taylorensis and B. asperiformis.
Another lineage gave rise to similar ornament in Boehmoceras in the Upper
Santonian. This is a remarkable example of both isochronous and hetero-
chronous homoeomorphy. It also illustrates the difficulties in trying to identify
baculites on isolated specimens on the basis of ornament alone. A fuller
discussion on these aspects of baculitid evolution is covered in Klinger &
Kennedy (in press).
160 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 109. Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A-C. SAS Z1868. D-E. SAM-PCZ7705.
H. SAM-PCZ7714, all from locality 110, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian II-III.
F-G. From the collections of the Geology Department, University of Natal, from locality 4,
Durban, Mzamba Formation, Campanian II. All x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 161
Fig. 110. Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A-I. Three unregistered specimens in the
collections of the Geology Department, University of Natal, from locality 4, Durban,
Mzamba Formation, Campanian IJ. All x 1.
162 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Kennedy (1986b: 110, pl. 17 (figs 7-9, 13-15, 21-23), pl. 18 (figs 18-22),
pl. 23 (figs 1, 7), text-fig. 8A, C) informally described a baculitid from the
Upper Campanian of France as Baculites sp. 1. Baculites vanhoepeni was
regarded as being closest to this informally named baculitid. In addition,
Holzapfel’s (1888: 64, pl. 4 (figs 5-6)) and Miller & Wollemann’s (1906: 4,
pl. 2 (figs 2-5)) Baculites incurvatus were regarded as belonging to this species.
As discussed above, B. incurvatus is a Coniacian—-Santonian species, and the
German records from the Lower Campanian are obvious misidentifications.
They seem closer to the Madagascan B. menabensis, which in turn is probably a
synonym of B. tanakae.
Some of the larger French specimens figured by Kennedy (e.g. 1986b,
pl. 18 (figs 18-22)) have ornament comparable to that of B. vanhoepeni, but
more material is necessary for definite comparisons.
Occurrence
Baculites vanhoepeni typically occurs with a Middle Campanian texanitid
fauna of Australiella and Delawarella, but we suspect that it ranges into the
Upper Campanian by its association with Hoplitoplacenticeras howarthi, both at
locality 110 in Zululand (Klinger & Kennedy 1989), and at Somtseu, Durban
(Kennedy & Klinger 1973).
Baculites nibelae sp. nov.
Figs 116-120
? 1970 = Baculites cf. taylorensis Adkins; Collignon, p. 13, pl. 612 (fig. 2285).
a) 1970 Baculites sp. (nov.?) cf. aquilaensis Reeside; Collignon, p. 81, pl. 639
(fig. 2358).
Type
Holotype is SAM-PCZ9148b from locality 111, cliff section just east of the
Nibela Peninsula, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III.
Material
Paratypes are SAM-PCZ7570, 7578, 7625, 7629, 7644, 7698a-e, 7702,
7850, 9155, 9163 and 9166, all from locality 109C; SAM-PCZ7569 from
locality 1O9A, SAM-PCZ763la, 7699, 7630, 7632, 7700 and 7701, from
locality 109D, all on the western shores of the Nibela Peninsula, Zululand, St
Lucia Formation, Campanian III; and SAM-PCZ9146, 9147, 9148a-e,
9149a-f, 9150a-g and 9151-9154, all from locality 111, St Lucia Formation,
Campanian III.
Fig. 111 (see facing page). Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. Two unregistered specimens
in the collections of the Geology Department, University of Natal, from locality 4, Durban,
Mzamba Formation, Campanian II. Note similarity of A-C to Baculites collignoni nom.
nov. (sce Fig. 96). Allx i
Fig. 112 (see overleaf). Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. Three unregistered specimens in
the collections of the Geology Department, University of Natal, from locality 4, Durban,
Mzamba Formation, Campanian II. Note similarity to Baculites mamillatus
(see Fig. 84A-C). All x 1. ;
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
163
Figs 111
164 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 112
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 165
10 Size distribution in Baculites vanhoepeni
Ojindicates distribution of specimens with preserved
apertures.
NUMBER OF SPECIMENS
20 30 40 50
MAXIMUM WHORL HEIGHT IN MM
Fig. 113. Histogram illustrating maximum size distribution in Baculites
vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. Open circles indicate specimens with the aperture
preserved.
Dimensions
Specimen MxWb MxWh Wb/Wh MnWb MnWh Wb/Wh D_ Ti Ri
Porvs5'6 26.0 34.0 0.76 — — ~—
PCZ9148b 22.0 29.0 0.76 1La0: 26.0) 070 96y 3.1 2,
PCZ7698a 21.0 29.0 0:72 — — — —_- — —
PoZ1699 = =«©21.0 29.0 0.72
PCZ9148a_ 20.0 27.0 0.74 1720 220 OT COm Wet ~
meets) 20.0 30.0 0.67 19.0> 228.0) (0:68 63 7.1 214
PCZ9149b 18.0 23.0 0.78 16:0) 23.0" 10:7 52. — Pap
meee 16.0 25.00 0.72 — — — —- — —
eegese 17.5 24.0. 0.73 — — — —- — —
PCZ9149a — 5.0 — — 12.0 — 540550 22
meevisse 10.0 14.0 0.71 9.0 135.0); 0-61 60 1.7 pM ps
Diagnosis
Baculitid with subtrigonal whorl section and arcuate lateral ornament.
Description
The maximum observed whorl height is 34 mm. In typical forms the whorl
section is subtrigonal with a distinctly flattened dorsum and flanks converging to
a rounded venter (Fig. 118B-G). In juvenile specimens the whorl section is
distinctly ovoid to tear-shaped with the venter much narrower than the dorsum.
166 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 114. Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. ?Early forms. A-B. SAM-PCZ9255.
C. SAM-PCZ9252. Both from locality 109A, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian II.
Al
Fig. 115 (see facing page). Baculites vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936. A-C. Typical form,
SAM-PCZ9284 from locality 110. D-F. SAM-PCZ9131, ?early form, from locality 109A.
Both x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 167
168 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 116. Baculites nibelae sp. nov. The holotype, SAM-PCZ9148, from locality Pos
St Lucia Formation, Campanian III. x 1.
Fig. 117 (see facing page). A-D, F-I. Baculites nibelae sp. nov. A. SAM-PCZ9148a.
B. SAM-PCZ9149a. C-D. SAM-PCZ9150e. Specimen with part of aperture preserved.
F-H. SAM-PCZ9153. I. SAM-PCZ7631. All from locality 111, St Lucia Formation,
Campanian III. E. Baculites duharti Hinicken, 1975. SAM-PCZ9873c, from concretion at
base of cliff at locality 110, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian II.
Allee.
169
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
wee
Fig. 117
170 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 118. Baculites nibelae sp. nov. Partial suture line and whorl sections.
A. SAM-PCZ7630. B. SAM-PCZ7631. C. SAM-PCZ7701.
D. SAM-PCZ7644. E. SAM-PCZ7/630. EF. SAM-=PCZ7Goae
G. SAM-PCZ7698. Venter in whorl section facing upward.
Scale bar for size.
Fig. 119 (see facing page). Baculites nibelae sp. nov. A. SAM-PCZ7702. B-D. SAM-
PCZ736la. E-F, I. SAM-PCZ7578. G. SAM-PCZ7698. H. SAM-PCZ9153. All from
locality 109, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III. All x 1.
A. SAM-PCZ7630. B-D. SAM-
Fig. 120 (see overleaf). Baculites nibelae sp. nov.
All from
PCZ12021. E. SAM-PCZ9149. F. SAM-PCZ7698. G. SAM-PCZ9148e.
locality 109, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III. All x 1.-
171
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 119
LZ ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 120
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 173
Lateral ornament consists of crescentic ribs of variable strength,
which cover the dorsal two thirds of the flanks—occurring at a frequency of
2-3 per whorl height. In some, e.g. PCZ7630 (Fig. 120A) and PCZ7701,
the flanks are virtually smooth; in others, e.g. PCZ7702 (Fig. 119A), the ribs
are quite prominent. In the latter, the costal whorl section is conspicuously
trigonal to cuneate. In some specimens the venter appears to be slightly
undulating.
The aperture is preserved in PCZ9150e (Fig. 117C-D). The dorsal rostrum
is short, and the ventral rostrum only a little longer, and distinctly spoon-
shaped.
The suture is only partially exposed in a few specimens, e.g. PCZ9150h and
PCZ7630 (Fig. 118A). It shows narrow lateral saddles and a splayed lateral
lobe (L).
Fig. 121. A-C. Baculites sp. (?nov.) cf. B. aquilaensis Reeside. Plaster cast of GD12358,
the original of Collignon (1970, pl. 639 (fig. 2358)), from the Upper Campanian, zone of
Hoplitoplacenticeras marroti of gisement 227-2, Mokotibe (Antsalova), Madagascar.
D-E. Baculites bassei Besairie, 1930. Copy of the lectotype illustrated in Besairie (1930,
pl. 22 (fig. 8-8a)), from the Upper Campanian or Lower Maastrichtian, of north of
Trangahy, Madagascar. Both x 1.
Discussion
The subtrigonal whorl section clearly distinguishes B. nibelae from
B. vanhoepeni, the latter having a typically elliptical whorl section. The shape
of the lateral ribs in both species is similar but those of B. vanhoepeni are much
more robust, and the latter species grows to a much larger size than B. nibelae.
The occurrence of B. nibelae at locality 111, east of 110, suggests that it is
younger than B. vanhoepeni, but still in the Campanian.
174 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The subtrigonal whorl section of B. nibelae places this species close to the
group of baculitids described by Collignon (1970) from the lower part of the
Middle Campanian of Madagascar. The closest match is probably B. rectangu-
latus Collignon (1970: 12, pl. 611 (figs 2279-2281)) (herein Fig. 87), but the
whorl section of B. nibelae is more prominently triangular and, in typical
forms, it has stronger lateral ornament.
The specimen described by Collignon (1970: 13, pl. 612 (fig. 2285)) from
the upper part of the Middle Campanian of Madagascar as Baculites cf.
taylorensis is probably the same as B. nibelae. Baculites sp. (nov.?) cf.
B. aquilaensis in Collignon (1970: 81, pl. 639 (fig. 2358)) (Fig. 121A—-C) from
the Upper Campanian of Madagascar has stronger ornament than any of our
B. nibelae, but the whorl section suggests that it is closely allied. Baculites
bassei Besairie (1930: 222, pl. 22 (fig. 8, 8a)) (herein Fig. 121D-E), from the
Upper Campanian or Lower Maastrichtian of north of Trangahy (Maintirano) in
Madagascar, is known from a single specimen only. It is also very similar to
B. nibelae. Given more and precisely located material from Madagascar,
B. bassei may prove to be a senior synonym of B. nibelae.
The Campanian baculitid from Andimaka described by Collignon (1938) as
B. aspero-anceps (Collignon 1938: 89, pl. 6 (fig. 7)), also has a trigonal whorl
section similar to that of B. nibelae, and may belong to this species.
In terms of lateral ornament and to a lesser extent, the whorl section,
B. nibelae is similar to B. subanceps Haughton (Figs 130, 131A—H) (see also
Howarth 1965: 368, pl. 5 (fig. 3), pl. 6 (figs 6-7), pl. 7 (fig. 1), text-figs 4,
13-15). In the latter species, however, the venter tends to become flat and, in
some specimens, even forms an incipient tabulate ventral keel as in typical
Eubaculites.
The whorl section and ornament of B. nibelae are very similar to those of
Eubaculites labyrinthicus (Morton), recorded from the Lower Maastrichtian of
Madagascar by Collignon (1971: 18, pl. 646 (fig. 2395)) (as Eubaculites
otacodensis Stol.). As yet undescribed baculitids from the Upper Campanian of
Israel, with even more angular trigonal whorl section and prominent lateral
ribbing, are even closer to E. labyrinthicus. Baculites lomaensis Anderson
(1958: 191, pl. 48 (figs 5, 5a-6)) (see also Matsumoto 1959: 126, pl. 34
(figs la-c, 2a-c), text-figs 35-38, 39-41), from the Lower Maastrichtian of
California, has a similar trigonal whorl section, but apparently weaker
dorsolateral bullae. We doubt if B. nibelae, B. lomaensis and the Israeli
baculitids are ancestral to E. labyrinthicus, but the style of ornament and whorl
section are remarkably similar.
The evolution of baculitids with a*trigonal whorl section, as in E. laby-
rinthicus, appears to be a wide-spread feature near the Campanian-
Maastrichtian boundary, as already noticed by Lewy (1986: 5) (see also Klinger
& Kennedy in press).
Fig. 122 (see facing page). Baculites duharti Hiinicken, 1975. A-D. SAM-7683 from
locality 109H, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian II. E-G. SAM-PCZ9873a from
locality 110, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian II.
A, E-G x 1; B-D x 0.75.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA Ys)
176 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Cc D E
Fig. 123. Baculites duharti Hiinicken, 1975. A-B. SAM-PCZ7703a. C-F. SAM-
PCZ7685, both from locality 109G, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian II. Both x 1.
Fig. 124 (see facing page). Baculites duharti Hinicken, 1975. Concretion, SAM-
PCZ9873, from base of cliff at locality 110, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian II.
All x 1.
17
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
178 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Occurrence
Campanian III of Zululand.
Baculites duharti Hinicken, 1975
Figs 122-127
1975 Baculites duharti Hunicken, in Hinicken et al. 1975, p. 116, pl. 1 (figs 1-4),
pl. 2 (figs 1-2), pl. 3 (figs 5-8), text-figs 2a-d, 3a-c, 4-5.
1980 Baculites duharti Hunicken; Hiinicken, Charrier & Lahsen, p. 224, pl. 1
(figs la—b, 2), pl. 2 (figs la-c, 2, 3a-b, 4-5, 6a-b), text-figs 3-9.
Type
Holotype is the specimen figured by Hunicken (in Hunicken et al. 1975,
pl. 1 (figs 1-4), text-figs 2c-d, 4a) from the Middle and/or Upper Campanian of
Member ‘e’ of the Cerro Matero Formation, at Rio Sur, Tierra del Fuego,
Chile, CPC D1127.
Material
More than 100 specimens from a single concretion, SAM-PCZ9873,
9873a-v, found at the base of the section at locality 110, Nibela Peninsula,
Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian III; SAM-PCZ7683, 7685, and
7703, from locality 109G; and SAM-PCZ7689 from locality 109H, Nibela
Peninsula, Zululand (Fig. 90), St Lucia Formation, Campanian II.
Dimensions
Spec. MxWb MxWh Wb/Wh MnWb MnWh Wb/Wh D_ Ti
PCZ987 3a) 12209 1720) 0 8.67 | 12-07 0572 48 10.4
PCZ7689 22.0 31/0") 2071 20s 280 a Ors 64 4.69
PCZ7685.. 22:0' 29:0 O56) 9 2030) eo Ue Oy) 57 26
PCZ7683 «34.0 43.0 079 23.5. 38.0 0:76.) 200siane
PCZ7703:. 135.0") 58:0 4) 70:60 — = ae
Description
A large concretion from the base of the section at locality 110 is crammed
with more than 100 specimens of a smooth baculitid (Figs 124-126), differing
markedly from the heavily ornamented B. vanhoepeni from the higher parts of
the section. Four other smooth baculitids from the south-western part of the
Nibela Peninsula at localities 109G and 109H (Figs 122A-D, 123A-F) are much
larger than those from locality 110, but we assume they belong to the same
species—being of more or less the same age.
Fig. 125 (see faing page). Baculites duharti Hiinicken, 1975. Concretion, SAM-PCZ9873,
from the base of cliff at locality 110, Zululand, St ‘Lucia Formation, Campanian iL.
Note slight wavy venter on top right. x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 179
Fig. 125
180 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 126. Baculites duharti Hiinicken, 1975. Concretion, SAM-PCZ9873, from base of
cliff at locality 110, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian I]. -
Note wavy venter at top left. x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 181
The whorl section (Figs 123B, F, 127) is distinctly elliptical, to ovoid, with
the venter only very little narrower than the dorsum. Lateral ornament consists
of very fine striae only, but in some specimens, e.g. PCZ9873a (Fig. 122E-G),
low, fold-like ribs develop over the ventral half of the flanks. In some of the
larger specimens, where the shell is preserved (Figs 125, 126), the venter is
ornamented with scale-like undulations.
A slight constriction is visible on the venter of SAM-PCZ7685
(Fig. 123C-F). The species grows to a large size—the maximum whorl height
measured is 60 mm (Fig. 123A-B). The suture is finely incised with open
saddles and lobes (Fig. 127A-C).
L
U
E
A
E iE
O 10 mm
Yop Po .
|
ie
E U C
| a
D 0) 5mm G a
Fig. 127. Baculites duharti Hiinicken, 1975. Suture lines and whorl sections.
Venter facing upwards. Scale bar for size.
182 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
a gs :
Fig. 128. Baculites ambatryensis Collignon, 1971. Plaster cast of the holotype, GD12392,
the original of Collignon (1971, pl. 645 (fig. 2392)) from the Lower Maastrichtian of
gisement 400, Cote d’Ambatry (Betioky), Madagascar. All x 1.
Discussion
The elliptical whorl section and relatively simple suture show that this
baculitid belongs to the group of B. vanhoepeni. However, the total absence of
lateral ornament in more than a hundred specimens clearly shows that this is
indeed a consistently smooth baculitid species and not merely a smooth variant
of B. vanhoepeni.
As discussed above, identifying or separating smooth Baculites species is
very difficult unless the whorl section and sutures are very distinctive, or if the
exact age is known.
The closest match we could find both in morphology and age is B. duharti
first described from Tierra del Fuego by Hiinicken (in Hiinicken et al. 1975:
116, pl. 1 (figs 1-4), pl. 2 (figs 1-2), pl. 3 (figs 5-8), text-figs 2a—d, 3a—c), 4-5)
and imprecisely dated as Campanian—Maastrichtian. Later, Hunicken ef al.
(1980: 224, pl. 1 (figs la-b, 2), pl. 2 (figs la—-c, 2, 3a—b, 4-5, 6a-b),
Fig. 129 (see facing page). Baculites asperoanceps Lasswitz, 1904. Plaster cast of the
lectotype, nr 3045 s (k), MGUWr, from Austin, Texas, in the collections of the Henryk
Teisseyre Geological Museum of the Institute of Geological Sciences of the University of
Wroclaw. x l.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 183
184 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
text-figs 3-9) described additional material, also from Tierra del Fuego, but
more precisely dated as Middle to Late Campanian. The drawings of the suture
lines by Hunicken ef al. (1980, text-figs 3-9) show a suture more complex and
phylloid than ours, but photographs of the sutures (e.g. their pl. 2 (figs 3-6)) are
much simpler and comparable to the Zululand material. From a palaeobio-
geographical point of view, the record of B. duharti from Zululand also is
acceptable.
Baculites duharti differs from the older B. bailyi mainly in being much
larger and having a predominantly elliptical, rather than ovoid, whorl section.
We do not think that B. duharti is derived from the B. bailyi lineage; instead we
regard it as a smooth offshoot of the B. capensis—B. vanhoepeni lineage.
Baculites duharti clearly differs from B. rectus in having a much simpler
suture.
The only Middle Campanian Madagascan baculitid species with which
B. duharti could possibly be compared, is B. ankilizatensis (Collignon 1970: 13,
pl. 612 (figs 2282-2284)) (herein Fig. 89), especially as far as maximum size is
concerned. However, some specimens of B. ankilizatensis show distinct, albeit
low, lateral ornament.
Some specimens of B. subanceps in the collections of the South African
Museum, e.g. SAM-6829a (Figs 130D-F) are indistinguishable from
B. duharti, but this species includes forms with distinct lateral ornament, and
the whorl section is quite distinctive in some specimens, tending to form a
tabulate ventral keel.
Our material also resembles Baculites smooth species of Cobban (1962:
714, pl. 108 (figs 1-4), text-figs li-j) from the Middle Campanian of eastern
Wyoming. This species was renamed B. cobbani by Khakimov (in Atabekian &
Khakimov 1976: 98, pl. 11 (figs 2-7)) for material from the Lower Campanian
of Central Asia.
The largest of our specimens (Fig. 123A-B) is superficially similar to
B. knorrianus Desmarest, 1817 (recently reviewed by Kennedy &
Summesberger 1987: 32, pl. 4 (figs 4-6), pl. 5 (figs 1-14), text-fig. 2;
Birkelund 1993: 52, pl. 13 Ciigs 12-14) and’ Kennedy 1993-3109 3sgiees
(figs 13-22), pl. 6 (figs 11-13, 18-23), text-fig. 5a-c). However, B. knorrianus
is restricted to the Lower Maastrichtian, and has a far more compressed whorl
section and a more complex suture line.
Fig. 130 (see facing page). Baculites subanceps Haughton, 1925. A-C. SAM-6824, the
lectotype. D-F. SAM-6829a. G. SAM-6829b. All from the Upper Campanian-Lower
Maastrichtian of Carimba, Angola.
Fig. 131 (see overleaf). A-H. Baculites subanceps Haughton, 1925. A-C. SAM-6829c.
D-G. SAM-6829d. H. SAM-6829e. All from the Upper Campanian—Lower Maastrichtian
of Carimba, Angola.
I-M. Baculites anceps Lamarck, 1822. I-K. SAM-6145b. L. SAM-6145c.
M. SAM-6748, from the ?7Lower Maastrichtian east of Capolo. N-R. Baculites sp. from the
uppermost Turonian or basal Coniacian at Mossamedes, Angola. The oldest tuberculate
baculite. Unregistered specimens from Cooper collection, SAM.
A-C, G, I-R x 1; D-F ~x 0.5.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
185
"htecnnianatatbtitetne
Fig. 130
186 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 131
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 187
Baculites ambatryensis Collignon (1971: 14, pl. 645 (fig. 2392)) (herein
Fig. 128) from the Lower Maastrichtian of Madagascar is also superficially
similar, but has a more compressed whorl section at comparable diameters
(Wb: Wh 19.5: 29), and coarse corrugations over the venter.
Baculites eliasi Cobban (1958: 663, pl. 91 (figs 1-11), text-figs 1f-g, i-j)
from the Lower Maastrichtian of the U.S. Western Interior also has a more
complex suture with a constricted lateral lobe (L).
A B C D
Fig. 132. Baculites sp. from the uppermost Turonian or basal Coniacian at Mossamedes,
Angola. The oldest tuberculate baculite. Cooper Collection, S.A. Museum.
A. SAM-1742. B-D. SAM-1743. E. SAM-1733. F. SAM-1745.
Allo< I:
Baculites fuchsi Redtenbacher (1873: 134, pl. 30 (fig. 15)) is difficult to
interpret (see above, p. 47) but it is older, Santonian, being associated with
B. incurvatus.
Baculites inornatus Meek (1862: 316) (see especially Matsumoto 1959: 155,
pl. 38 (fig. la-c), pl. 43 (fig. 5a—c), text-figs 72a—b, 73a—d, 74-79; Ward 1978:
1151, pl. 1 (figs 1-2), text-fig. 5) is a predominantly smooth species from the
Lower Campanian of California, British Columbia and Hokkaido. Records of
B. inornatus from the Coniacian of Venezuela by Renz (1982: 105, pl. 34
(figs 3-4, 5a—b, 6), text-fig. 80) are obvious misidentifications. The suture of
B. inornatus is complex, with phylloid folioles, clearly differing from our
material.
Baculites kotanii Matsumoto ef al. (1980: 408, figs 1-2) from the Upper
Campanian of Shikoku, Japan, is nearly smooth, with only faint subcostae on
the flanks. Again, the suture appears to be more complex with narrower saddles
and lobes than the Zululand material.
Baculites vertebralis Lamarck, 1801, is a compressed, smooth species from
the Upper Maastrichtian of Europe and North Africa, and resembles our largest
specimen. Age difference apart, it also has a far more complex suture line (see
e.g. Kennedy 1986a, text-fig. 7D-E).
188 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Occurrence
Middle and/or Upper Campanian of Tierra del Fuego, and Campanian III of
Zululand.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Financial assistance to H. C. Klinger by the Foundation for Research
Development (S.A.) and to W. J. Kennedy by the Natural Environment
Research Council, U.K.) is gratefully acknowledged. We also thank Sally
Dove, Jacque Blaeske and Samantha Black for their technical and artistic
assistance.
For access to, or information about collections in their institutions, we are
indebted to numerous colleagues: Dr W. A. Cobban (Denver), Prof. M. R.
Cooper (University of Durban-Westville), Dr N. Eldridge (Washington),
Dr J. Gorzyca-Skala (Wroclaw), Dr M. K. Howarth (London), Prof. H. Immel
and Dr G. Schairer (Munich), Dr K. Larsson (Lund), Dr U. Leppig (Freiburg),
Dr R. Ragaini (Pisa), Prof. H. Remy (Bonn), Prof. S. Ritzkowski (G6ttingen),
Dr Carlo Sarti (Bologna), Dr F. Thackeray (Pretoria) and Dr J. Thierry
(Dijon).
We thank the Natal Parks Board, especially Mr R. Taylor, for access to
areas under their control and for assistance with transportation around the Lake
St Lucia area during the field season of 1992.
REFERENCES
ADKINS, W. S. 1929. Some Upper Cretaceous Taylor ammonites from Texas. Bulletin.
University of Texas, Austin 2901: 203-211.
AL-HARITHI, T. & IBRAHIM, K. 1992. Some Cephalopoda from Maastrichtian outcrops of
Wadi Usaykhim, Al Azraq area in east Jordan. Senckenbergiana lethaea 71 (5-6):
427-437.
ANDERSON, F. M. 1958. Upper Cretaceous of the Pacific coast. Memoirs. Geological
Society of America 71: 1-378.
ATABEKIAN, A. A. & KHAKIMOV, F. CH. 1976. [Campanian and Maastrichtian ammonites
from Central Asia.] Akademia Nauk Tadchikskoi SSR Institut geologii 1976: 1-146.
[In Russian. }
BaiLy, W. H. 1855. Description of some Cretaceous fossils from South Africa; collected
by Capt. Garden of the 45th Regiment. Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society of
London 11: 454-465.
BESAIRIE, H. 1930. Recherches géologiques a Madagascar. Bulletin de la Société d’histoire
naturelle de Toulouse 60: 1-272. 7
BESAIRIE, H. 1932. Fossiles caractéristiques du nord et du nord-ouest de Madagascar.
Annales géologiques du Service des mines, Madagascar 2: 37-53.
BESAIRIE, H. & COLLIGNON, M. 1959. Le Systeme Crétacé a Madagascar. 20th Inter-
national Geological Congress, Mexico City, 1956. El Systema Cretacico 2: 135-198.
BesNosov, N. V. & MIKHAILOVA, I. A. 1991. Higher taxa of Jurassic and Cretaceous
Ammonitida. Paleontological Journal 25 (4): 1-19.
BIRKELUND, T. 1965. Ammonites from the Upper Cretaceous of West Greenland. Meddel-
elser om Gronland. Udgivne af Kommissionen for Videnskabelige undersogelser i
Gronland 179 (7): 1-192.
BIRKELUND, T. 1979. The last Maastrichtian ammonites. Jn: BIRKELUND, T. & BROMLEY,
R. G. eds. Cretaceous-Tertiary boundary events. Symposium, 18-24 September 1979 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 189
The Maastrichtian and Danian of Denmark: 51-57. Copenhagen: University of
Copenhagen. |
BIRKELUND, T. 1993. Ammonites from the Maastrichtian White Chalk of Denmark. Bull-
etin of the Geological Society of Denmark 40: 33-81.
BLANCKENHORN, M. 1905. Geologie der naheren Umgebung von Jerusalem. Zeitschrift des
Deutschen Paldstinavereins 28: 75-120.
BOHM, J. 1909. Neue Untersuchungen uber die Senonbildungen der Ostlichen Schweizer-
alpen. Abhandlungen der Schweizerischen paldontologischen Gesellschaft 36: 20-61.
BouLe, M., LEMOINE, P. & THEVENIN, A. 1906-1907. Paléontologie de Madagascar. III.
Céphalopodes crétacés des environs de Diego-Suarez. Annales de paléontologie 1:
173-192 (1-20); 2: 1-56 (21-76).
BREISTROFFER, M. 1940. Révision des ammonites du Vraconien de Salazac (Gard) et con-
sidérations générales sur ce sous-étage albien. Travaux du Laboratoire de géologie de la
Faculté des sciences de l'Université de Grenoble 22: 1-101.
BREISTROFFER, M. 1947. Sur les zones d’ammonites dans |’ Albien de France et d’Angle-
terre. Travaux du Laboratoire de géologie de la Faculté des sciences de |’Université de
Grenoble 26: 1-88.
BRETON, G. & BAVENT, M. 1985. Baculites undulatus d’Orbigny, 1850 du Turonien
d’Elet6t pres Fécamp (Seine-Maritime). Bulletin trimestriel de la Société géologique de
Normandie et des Amis du Muséum du Havre 72: 101-102.
BRUNNSCHWEILER, R. O. 1966. Upper Cretaceous Ammonites from the Carnarvon Basin of
Western Australia. I: The heteromorph Lytoceratina. Bulletin. Bureau of Mineral
Resources, Geology and Geophysics, Australia 58: 1-58.
CIESLINSKI, S. 1959. The Albian and Cenomanian in the northern periphery of the Swiety
Krzyz Mountains. Travaux du Service géologique de la Pologne / Instytut Geologiczny,
Prace 28: 1-95. [In Polish with English and Russian summaries. ]
CopBAN, W. A. 1951. New species of Baculites from the Upper Cretaceous of Montana
and South Dakota. Journal of Paleontology 25 (6): 817-821.
CosBBAN, W. A. 1958. Two new species of Baculites from the Western Interior region.
Journal of Paleontology 32 (4): 660-665.
CoBBAN, W. A. 1962. Baculites from the lower part of the Pierre Shale and equivalent
rocks in the Western Interior. Journal of Paleontology 36 (4): 704-718.
CosBBAN, W. A. 1974. Ammonites from the Navesink Formation at Atlantic Highlands,
New Jersey. Professional Papers. United States Geological Survey 845: ii + 1-21.
CoBBAN, W. A. 1983. Molluscan fossil record from the northeastern part of the Upper
Cretaceous sea-way, Western Interior. Professional Papers. United States Geological
Survey 1253A: 1-25.
CoBBAN, W. A. 1984. Molluscan record from a Mid-Cretaceous borehole in Weston
County, Wyoming. Professional Papers. United States Geological Survey 1271: 1-24.
CoBBAN, W. A. 1986. Upper Cretaceous molluscan record from Lincoln County, New
Mexico. Southwest Section of the American Association of Petroleum Geologists, Trans-
actions and Guidebook of 1986 Convention, Ruidoso, New Mexico: 79-89.
CoBBAN, W. A. 1990. Ammonites and some characteristic bivalves from the Upper Cret-
aceous Frontier Formation, Natrona County, Wyoming. Bulletin of the United States
Geological Survey 1917-B: B1-B13.
CoBBAN, W. A. 1994. Diversity and distribution of late Cretaceous ammonites, Western
Interior, United States. Special Papers. Geological Association of Canada 39: 435-451.
CopBAN, W. A. & Hook, S. C. 1979 (dated 1980). Collignoniceras woolgari woolgari
(Mantell) ammonite fauna from Upper Cretaceous of Western Interior, United States.
Memoirs. New Mexico State Bureau of Mines and Mineral Resources 37: 1-51.
CoBBAN, W. A. & Hook, S. C. 1983. Mid-Cretaceous (Turonian) ammonite fauna from
Fence Lake area of west-central New Mexico. Memoirs. New Mexico State Bureau of
Mines and Mineral Resources 41: iv + 5-50.
CosBBAN, W. A., Hook, S. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1989. Upper Cretaceous rocks and
ammonite faunas of southwestern New Mexico. Memoirs. New Mexico State Bureau of
Mines and Mineral Resources 45: iv + 5-137.
CoBBAN, W. A. & KENNEDY, W. J. 199la. Baculites thomi Reeside, 1927, an Upper Cret-
aceous Ammonite in the Western Interior of the United States. Bulletin of the United
190 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
States Geological Survey. Shorter Contributions to Paleontology and Stratigraphy 1934:
C1-C8.
CoBBAN, W. A. & KENNEDY, W. J. 19915. Upper Cretaceous (Maastrichtian) ammonites
from the Nostoceras alternatum Zone in southwestern Arkansas. Bulletin of the United
States Geological Survey. Shorter Contributions to Paleontology and Stratigraphy 1985:
E1-EF6.
CoBBAN, W. A. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1992a. Campanian Trachyscaphites spiniger ammonite
fauna in north-east Texas. Palaeontology 35 (1): 63-93.
CoBBAN, W. A. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1992b. Campanian ammonites from the Upper Cret-
aceous Gober Chalk of Lamar County, Texas. Journal of Paleontology 66 (3): 440-454.
CoBBAN, W. A. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1992c. The last Western Interior Baculites from the
Fox Hills Formation of South Dakota. Journal of Paleontology 66 (4): 682-684.
CoBBAN, W. A. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1993. Middle Campanian ammonites and inoceramids
from the Wolfe City Sand in northeastern Texas. Journal of Paleontology 67 (1):
71-82.
CoBBAN, W. A. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1995. Maastrichtian ammonites cheifly from the Prairie
Bluff Chalk in Alabama and Mississippi. Memoirs. Paleontological Society 44: 1-40.
CoBBAN, W. A. & REESIDE, J. B. yr. 1952. Correlation of the Cretaceous Formations of
the Western Interior of the United States. Bulletin of the Geological Society of America
63: 1011-1044.
CoBBAN, W. A. & ScoTT, G. R. 1972. Stratigraphy and ammonite fauna of the Graneros
Shale and Greenhorn Limestone near Pueblo, Colorado. Professional Papers. United
States Geological Survey 645: v + 1-108.
COLLIGNON, M. 1931. Faunes Sénoniennes du Nord et de l’?Ouest de Madagascar. Annales
géologiques du Service des mines, Madagascar 1: 7-64.
COLLIGNON, M. 1933. Fossiles Cénomaniens d’Antsatramavelona (Province d’ Analalava,
Madagascar). Annales géologiques du Service des mines, Madagascar 3: 53-79.
COLLIGNON, M. 1938. Ammonites Campaniennes et Maestrichtiennes de l’ouest et du sud
de Madagascar. Annales géologiques du Service des mines, Madagascar 9: 55-118
(1-65).
CoLLIGNON, M. 1964. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) 11.
(Cénomanien). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COLLIGNON, M. 1965. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) 13.
(Coniacien). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COLLIGNON, M. 1966. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) 14.
(Santonien). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COLLIGNON, M. 1969. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) 15.
(Campanien inférieur). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
CoLLIGNON, M. 1970. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) 16.
(Campanien moyen, Campanien supérieur). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COLLIGNON, M. 1971. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) 17.
(Maestrichtien). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COLLLIGNON, M. 1977. Ammonites néocrétacées de la Nouvelle-Caledonie. Bulletin du
Bureau de Recherches Géologiques et Miniéres (2. ser., sect. 4) 1: 7-36.
Cooper, M. R. 1988. Lower Campanian (Cretaceous) ammonites from Angola. South
African Journal of Geology 91 (2): 207-211.
Cooper, M. R. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1977. A revision of the Baculitidae of the Cambridge
Greensand. Neues Jahrbuch fiir Geologie und Paldontologie. Monatshefte 1977 (11):
641-658.
Crick, G. C. 1907. The Cephalopoda from the tributaries of the Manuan Creek, Zululand.
Report of the Geological Survey of Natal and Zululand 3: 235-249.
DELAMETTE, M. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1991. Cenomanian ammonites from the condensed
deposits of the Helvetic Domain (Western Alps, France and Switzerland). Journal of
Paleontology 65 (3): 435-465.
DESMAREST, A. G. 1817. Mémoire sur deux genres de coquilles fossiles cloisonnées et a
siphon. Journal de Physique de Chimie et d’Histoire naturelle 85: 42-51.
DUJARDIN, F. 1837. Mémoire sur les couches du sol en Touraine et description des
coquilles de la craie et des faluns. Mémoires de la Société géologique de France (2) 2
(9): 211-311.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 191
ETHERIDGE, R. 1904. Cretaceous fossils of Natal. 1. The Umkwelane Hill deposit. Report
of the Geological Survey of Natal and Zululand 1: 71-93.
ForBeEs, E. 1846. Report on the fossil Invertebrata from Southern India, collected by Mr
Kaye and Mr Cunliffe. Transactions of the Geological Society of London (2) 7 (3):
97-174.
FORSTER, R. 1975. Die geologische Entwicklung von Siid-Mozambique seit der Unterkreide
und die Ammoniten-Fauna von Unterkreide und Cenoman. Geologisches Jahrbuch
(B) 12: 3-324.
FRITSCH, A. & SCHLOENBACH, U. 1872. Cephalopoden der Bohmischen Kreideformation.
Prague: The Authors.
GILL, T. 1871. Arrangement of the families of mollusks. Smithsonian Miscellaneous
Collections 227: i-xvi, 1-49.
mmNneVvsKAIA, V. S. 1984. In: ZAKHAROV, YU. D., GRABOVSKAJA,: V. S. &
KALISHEVICH, T. G. [Late Cretaceous succession of marine communities in
South Sakhalin, and climatic peculiarities of north-East Pacific]. {Academy of Sciences
USSR Far Eastern Scientific Centre, Biological-Earth Institute, Vladivostok] 1984:
41-90.
Haas, O. 1943. Some abnormally coiled ammonites from the Upper Cretaceous of
Angola. American Museum Novitates 1222: 1-19.
HAGGART, J. W. 1984. Upper Cretaceous (Santonian-Campanian) ammonite and ino-
ceramid biostratigraphy of the Chico Formation, California. Cretaceous Research 5:
225-241.
HAGGART, J. W. & WarRD, P. D. 1989. New Nanaimo Group ammonites (Cretaceous,
Santonian—Campanian) from British Columbia and Washington State. Journal of
Paleontology 63 (2): 218-227.
HAMAMA, H. H. & Kassas, A. S. 1990. Upper Cretaceous ammonites of Duwi Formation
in Gabal Abu Had and Wadi Hamama, Eastern Desert, Egypt. Journal of African Earth
Sciences 10 (3): 453-464.
HANcocK, J. M. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1993. The high Cretaceous ammonite fauna from
Tercis, Landes, France. Bulletin de l'Institut Royal des sciences naturelles de Belgique
(Sciences de la Terre) 63: 149-209.
HANcOcK, J. M., KENNEDY, W. J. & KLAUMANN, H. 1972. Ammonites from the trans-
gressive Cretaceous on the Rhenish Massif, Germany. Palaeontology 15 (3): 445-449.
HATTIN, D. E. 1975. Stratigraphy and depositional environment of Greenhorn Limestone
(Upper Cretaceous) of Kansas. Bulletin. Kansas University Geological Survey 209:
1-128.
HATTIN, D. E. & SIEMERS, C. T. 1978. Upper Cretaceous stratigraphy and depositional
environments of western Kansas. Guidebook Series. Kansas Geological Survey,
University of Kansas 3: 1-102.
HAUGHTON, S. H. 1925. Notes on some Cretaceous fossils from Angola (Cephalopoda and
Echinoidea). Annals of the South African Museum 22 (1): 263-288.
HAUGHTON, S. H. 1926. Notes sur quelques Fossiles crétacés de l’Angola. Comunicacdes
dos servico geolégicos de Portugal 15: 5-32.
HAUGHTON, S. H. 1936. Account of the geology of the Cretaceous Beds of northern Zulu-
land. Annals of the South African Museum 31 (3): 283-294.
HENDERSON, R. A. 1970. Ammonoidea from the Mata Series (Santonian—Maastrichtian) of
New Zealand. Special Papers in Palaeontology 6: iv + 1-82.
HENDERSON, R. A. 1973. Clarence and Raukumara Series (Albian-Santonian) Ammonoidea
from New Zealand. Journal of the Royal Society of New Zealand 3 (1): 71-123.
HoePEN, E. C. N. vAN. 1920. Description of some Cretaceous ammonites from Pondo-
land. Annals of the Transvaal Museum 7: 142-147.
Hoepen, E. C. N. vAN. 1921. Cretaceous Cephalopoda from Pondoland. Annals of the
Transvaal Museum 8: 1-48.
HOLZAPFEL, E. 1887. Die Mollusken der Aachener Kreide. Palaeontographica 34:
29-180.
HorvaTH, A. 1983. Ammonite stratigraphy of the Pénzeskut Marl Formation. Jn: KOLL-
MANN, H. ed. Contributions to the stratigraphy and paleogeography of the Middle Cret-
aceous in Central Europe. Schriftenreihe der Erdwissenschaftlichen Kommissionen.
Osterreichische Akademie der Wissenschaften 7: 149-171.
N92 7 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
HowartTH, M. K. 1965. Cretaceous ammonites and nautiloids from Angola. Bulletin of the
British Museum (Natural History) (Geology) 10 (10): 337-412.
HUNICKEN, M. 1965. Algunos Cefalo6podos Supracretacicos del Rio Turbio (Santa Cruz).
Revista de la Facultad de Ciencias exactas, fisicas y naturales, Universidad Nacional de
Cordoba (Serie Ciencias Naturales) 26: 49-100.
HUNICKEN, M. A., CHARRIER, R. & LAHSEN, A. 1975. Baculites (Lytoceratina) de la
Provincia de Magellanes, Chile. Actas. I Congreso Argentino de Paleontologia y
bioestratigrafia, Tucuman, Agosto de 1975 2: 115-140.
HUNICKEN, M. A., CHARRIER, R. & LAHSEN, A. 1980. Baculites (Lytoceratina) de la base
de la Formacion Fuentes (Campaniano medio-superior) de la Isla Riesco, Provincia de
Magellanes, Chile. Boletin de la Academia nacional de ciencias en Cordoba 53 (3-4):
221-235.
Hupscu, J. W. C. A. F. 1768. Neue in der Naturgeschichte des Niederdeutschlands
gemachte Entdeckungen einiger selten und wenig bekannten versteinerten Schaaltiere.
Frankfurt & Leipzig: Metternichischhe Buchhandlung.
Hyatt, A. 1894. Phylogeny of an acquired characteristic. Proceedings of the American
Philosophical Society 32: 349-647.
IMMEL, H., KLINGER, H. C. & WIEDMANN, J. 1982. Die Cephalopoden des Unteren Santon
der Gosau von Brandenberg/Tirol, Osterreich. Zitteliana 8: 3-32.
IMMEL, H. & SEYED-EMAMI, K. 1985. Die Kreideammoniten des Glaukonitkalkes (O. Alb-
O. Cenoman) des Kolah-Qazi-Gebirges siidéstlich von Esfahan (Zentraliran). Zitteliana
12: 87-137.
Ivanov, N. 1991. Albian ammonite biostratigraphy in northwest Bulgaria. Geologica
balkanica 21: 17-53.
JAHN, J. J. 1895. Ejinige Beitrage zur Kenntniss der BOhmischen Kreideformation.
Jahrbuch der Kaislerlich-Koniglichen geologischen Reichsanstalt, Wien 45: 125-218.
JAKOWLEW, B. 1875. [Hemiptera and Homoptera of the Russian Fauna.] Bulletin de la
Société des Naturalistes de Moscou 49: 248-285. [In Russian. ]
Jones, D. L. 1963. Upper Cretaceous (Campanian and Maestrichtian) ammonites from
southern Alaska. Professional Papers. United States Geological Survey 432: iv + 1-53.
JUIGNET, P. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1976. Stratigraphie compareé du Cénomanien du sud de
l’Angleterre et de Haute Normandie. Bulletin trimestriel de la Société Géologique de
Normandie et des Amis du Museum du Havre 63 (2): 1-193.
KAPLAN, U., KELLER, S. & WIEDMANN, J. 1983. Ammonite and inoceramid zonation of the
North German Cenomanian. Jn: KOLLMANN, H. ed. Contributions to the stratigraphy
and paleogeography of the Middle Cretaceous in Central Europe. Schriftenreihe der
Erdwissenschaftlichen Kommissionen. Osterreichische Akademie der Wissenschaften 7:
307-347. ‘
KAPLAN, U. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1994. Ammoniten des westfalischen Coniac. Geologie und
Paldontologie in Westfalens 31: 1-155.
KENNEDY, W. J. 1971. Cenomanian ammonites from southern England. Special Papers in
Palaeontology 8: 1-133.
KENNEDY, W. J. 1977. Ammonite evolution. Jn: HALLAM, A. ed. Patterns of evolution:
251-330. Amsterdam, Oxford, New York: Elsevier.
KENNEDY, W. J. 1984. Systematic palaeontology and stratigraphic distribution of the
ammonite faunas of the French Coniacian. Special Papers in Palaeontology 31: vi +
1-160.
KENNEDY, W. J. 1986a. The ammonite fauna of the Calcaire a Baculites (Upper
Maastrichtian) of the Cotentin Peninsula (Manche, France). Palaeontology 29 (1):
25-83.
KENNEDY, W. J. 19865. Campanian and Maastrichtian ammonites from northern Aquitaine,
France. Special Papers in Palaeontology 36: 1-145.
KENNEDY, W. J. 1986c. In: KENNEDY, W. J., BiLotre, M., LEPICARD, B. & SEGURA, F.
Upper Campanian and Maastrichtian ammonites from the Petites-Pyrénées, southern
France. Eclogae geologicae Helvetiae 79 (3): 1001-1037.
KENNEDY, W. J. 1988. Late Cenomanian and Turonian ammonite faunas from North-east
and Central Texas. Special Papers in Palaeontology 39: 1-131.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 193
KENNEDY, W. J. 1993. Campanian and Maastrichtian ammonites from the Mons Basin and
adjacent areas (Belgium). Bulletin de |’Institut Royal des sciences naturelles de Belgique
(Sciences de la Terre) 63: 99-131.
KENNEDY, W. J., CHAHIDA, M. R. & DJAFARIAN, M. A. 1979. Cenomanian cephalopods
from the glauconitic limestone southeast of Esfhanan, Iran. Acta palaeontologica
polonica 24: 3-50. .
KENNEDY, W. J. & CoBBAN, W. A. 1988. Mid-Turonian ammonite faunas from northern
Mexico. Geological Magazine 125 (6): 593-612.
KENNEDY, W. J. & COBBAN, W. A. 199la. Coniacian ammonite faunas from the United
States Western Interior. Special Papers in Palaeontology 45: 1-96.
KENNEDY, W. J. & COBBAN,, W. A. 1991b. Upper Cretaceous (Upper Santonian) Boehmo-
ceras fauna from the Gulf Coast region of the United States. Geological Magazine 128
(2): 167-189.
KENNEDY, W. J. & CoBBAN, W. A. 1993a. Campanian ammonites from the Annona Chalk
near Yancy, Arkansas. Journal of Paleontology 67 (1): 83-97.
KENNEDY, W. J. & COBBAN, W. A. 19936. Maastrichtian ammonites from the Corsicana
Formation in northeast Texas. Geological Magazine 130 (1): 57-67.
KENNEDY, W. J. & CoBBAN, W. A. 1993c. Ammonites from the Saratoga Chalk (Upper
Cretaceous), Arkansas. Journal of Paleontology 67 (3): 404-434.
KENNEDY, W. J. & CoBBAN, W. A. 1993d. Upper Campanian ammonites from the Ozan-
Annona Formation boundary in southwestern Arkansas. Bulletin of the Geological
Survey of Denmark 40: 115-148.
KENNEDY, W. J. & COBBAN, W. A. 1993e. Lower Campanian (Upper Cretaceous)
ammonites from the Merchantville Formation of New Jersey, Maryland and Delaware.
Journal of Paleontology 67 (5): 828-849.
KENNEDY, W. J., COBBAN, W. A. & Hook, S. C. 1989. Biostratigraphy of the Chispa
Summit Formation at its type locality: a Cenomanian through Turonian reference section
for Trans-Pecos, Texas. Bulletin of the Geological Institution of the University of
Uppsala (n.s.) 15: 39-119.
KENNEDY, W. J. & JUIGNET, P. 1983. A revision of the ammonite faunas of the type
Cenomanian. 1. Introduction, Ancyloceratina. Cretaceous Research 4: 3-83.
KENNEDY, W. J., KAUFFMAN, E. G. & KLINGER, H. C. 1973. Upper Cretaceous
invertebrate faunas from Durban, South Africa. Transactions of the Geological Society
of South Africa 76 (2): 95-111.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1973. Jn: KENNEDY, W. J., KAUFFMAN, E. G. &
KLINGER, H. C. Upper Cretaceous invertebrate faunas from Durban, South Africa.
Transactions of the Geological Society of South Africa 76 (2): 95-111.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1975. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal,
South Africa. Introduction, Stratigraphy. Bulletin of the British Museum (Natural
History) (Geology) 25 (4): 263-315.
KENNEDY, W. J. & SUMMESBERGER, H. 1986. Lower Maastrichtian ammonites from
Neuberg, Steiermark, Austria. Beitrdge zur Paldontologie von Osterreich 12: 181-242.
KENNEDY, W. J. & SUMMESBERGER, H. 1987. Lower Maastrichtian ammonites from
Nagoryany (Ukrainian SSR). Beitrdge zur Paldontologie von Osterreich 13: 25-78.
KENNEDY, W. J. & WRIGHT, C. W. 1994. Baculites (Protobaculites) Collignon, 1964
(Cretaceous Ammonoidea) is a synonym of Hemiptychoceras Spath, 1925. Journal of
Paleontology 68 (6): 1414-1415.
KHAKIMOV, F. C. 1976. In: ATABEKIAN, A. & KHAKIMOV, F. CH. [Campanian and
Maastrichtian ammonites from Central Asia.] Akademia Nauk Tadchikskoi SSR Institut
geologii 1976: 1-146. [In Russian. ]
KLINGER, H. C. 1976. Cretaceous heteromorph ammonites from Zululand. Memoirs.
Geological Survey, Republic of South Africa 69: 1-142.
KLINGER, H. C. 1985. Upper Cretaceous Cephalopoda from offshore deposits off the Natal
south coast, South Africa. Palaeontologia africana 26 (1): 1-12.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1977. Upper Cretaceous ammonites from a borehole
near Richards Bay, South Africa. Annals of the South African Museum 72 (5): 69-107.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1980. The Umzamba Formation at its type section,
Umzamba Estuary (Pondoland, Transkei), the ammonite content and palaeogeographical
distribution. Annals of the South African Museum 81 (6): 207-222.
194 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1989. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal,
South Africa. The ammonite family Placenticeratidae Hyatt, 1900, with comments on the
systematic position of the genus Hypengonoceras Spath, 1926. Annals of the South
African Museum 98 (9): 241-408.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1993. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal,
South Africa. The ammonite genus Eubaculites Spath, 1926. Annals of the South
African Museum 102 (6): 185-264.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. in press. Stratigraphic and geographic distribution,
phylogenetic trends and general comments on the ammonite family Baculitidae Gill,
1871 (with an annotated list of species referred to the family). Annals of the South
African Museum.
KULLMANN, J. & WIEDMANN, J. 1970. Significance of sutures in phylogeny of
Ammonoidea. Paleontological Contributions. University of Kansas 47: 1-32.
LAMARCK, J. P. B. A. DEM. DE. 1799. Prodrome d’une nouvelle classification des
coquilles. Mémoires de la Société d'Histoire naturelle de Paris for 1799: 63-90.
LAMARCK, J. P. B. A. DEM. DE. 1801. Systéme des Animaux sans vertebrés. Deterville,
Paris: The Author.
LEANZA, A. F. 1964. Los estratos con ‘Baculites’ de elcin (Rio Negro, Argentina) y sus
relaciones con otros terrenos supracretacicos argentinos. Revista de la Facultad de
Ciencias exactas, fisicas y naturales, Universidad Nacional de Cordoba (serie Ciencias
Naturales) 25 (3-4): 93-107.
LEANZA, A. F. 1967. Los Baculites de la Provincia de La Pampa con notas acerca de la
edad del piso Rocanense. Boletin de la Academia nacional de Ciencias en Cordoba 46:
53-58.
LEANZA, A. F. 1970. Ammonites nuevos 0 pocos conocidos del Aptiano, Albiano y Cefio-
maniano de los andes Australes con notas acerca de su posicion estratigrafica. Revista de
la Asociacion geologica argentina 25 (2): 197-261.
LEFELD, J. & UBERNA, J. 1992. A new species of Nostoceras (Ammonites: Nostoceratidae)
in northern Libya and its affinities with other global finds. Jn: SALEM, M. J. et al. (eds.)
The geology of Libya 4-7: 1383-1388. Amsterdam: Elsevier.
Lewy, Z. 1986. Anaklinoceras reflexum Stephenson in Israel and its stratigraphic
significance. Newsletters in Stratigraphy 16 (1): 1-8.
Ligpus, A. 1902. Uber einige Fossilien aus der Karpathischen Kreide. Beitrdge zur
Paldontologie und Geologie Osterreich-Ungarns u. des Orients 14: 113-130.
LuGER, P. & GROSCHKE, M. 1989. Late Cretaceous ammonites from the Wadi Qena area in
the Egyptian Eastern Desert. Palaeontology 32 (2): 355-407.
Luppov, N. P. & DRuSCHCHITS, V. V. (eds.) 1958. [Fundamentals of Palaeontology] 6.
Moscow.
MANTELL, G. A. 1822. Fossils of the South Downs. London: Lupton Relfe.
MARCINOWSKI, R. 1980. Cenomanian ammonites from German Democratic Republic,
Poland, and the Soviet Union. Acta geologica polonica 30 (3): 215-325.
MARCINOWSKI, R. & WALASZCZYK, I. 1983. Middle Cretaceous deposits and biostratigraphy
of the Annapol section, Central Polish Uplands. Jn: KOLLMANN, H. ed. Contributions
to the stratigraphy and paleogeography of the Middle Cretaceous in Central.Europe.
Schriftenreihe der Erdwissenschaflichen Kommissionen. Osterreichische Akademie der
Wissenschaften 7: 27-33.
MARSHALL, P. 1926. The Upper Cretaceous ammonites of New Zealand. Transactions of
the New Zealand Institute 56: 129-210.
Matsumoto, T. 1959. Upper Cretaceous Ammonites of California. Memoirs of the
Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (series D, Geology) 8 (4): 91-171.
Matsumoto, T. 1973. Late Cretaceous Ammonoidea. Jn: HALLAM, A. (ed.) Atlas of
palaeobiogeography: 421-429. London, New York: Elsevier.
MATsuMoTo, T., HASHIMOTO, H. & FuRuicH!l, M. 1980. An interesting species of Bacu-
lites (Ammonoidea) from the Cretaceous Izumi Group of Shikoku. Proceedings of the
Japanese Academy 56 (series B): 408-413.
Matsumoto, T. & Miyaucul, T. 1984. Part II]. Some Campanian ammonites from the
Soya Area. Jn: MATsuMoTO, T. Some ammonites from the Campanian (Upper
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 195
Cretaceous) of Northern Hokkaido. Special Papers. Palaeontological Society of Japan
27: v + 1-93.
Matsumoto, T. & OBATA, I. 1963. A monograph of the Baculitidae from Japan. Memoirs
of the Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (Series D, Geology) 13 (1): 1-116.
MEEK, F. B. 1862. Descriptions of new Cretaceous fossils collected by the North-Western
Boundary Commission, on Vancouver and Sucia Islands. Proceedings of the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia 1861 (10): 314-318.
MEEK, F. B. 1876. A report on the invertebrate Cretaceous and Tertiary fossils of the upper
Missouri country. Jn: HAYDEN, F. V. Report of the United States Geological Survey of
the Territories 9: \xiv + 1-629.
Mitiu, R. 1984. Heteromorphous ammonites in the Moesian Platform Albian. Revue
Roumaine de géologie, géophysique et géographie, Bucarest (serie géologie) 28: 83-92.
MoserG, J. C. 1885. Cephaloderna i Sveriges Kritsystem. II. Artbeskrifning. Sveriges
geologiska undersokning. Afhandlingar och uppsatser (ser. C) 73: 1-64.
MoncrieEFF, A. C. & KELLy, S. R. A. 1993. Lithostratigraphy of the uppermost Fossil
Bluff Group (early Cretaceous) of Alexander Island, Antarctica: history of a regression.
Cretaceous Research 14: 1-15.
Morrow, A. L. 1935. Cephalopods from the Upper Cretaceous of Kansas. Journal of
Paleontology 9 (6): 463-473.
Morton, S. G. 1834. Synopsis of the organic remains of the Cretaceous group of the
United States. Philadelphia: Key & Biddle.
MULLER, G. & WOLLEMANN, A. 1906. Die Molluskenfauna des Untersenon von
Brauschweig und Ilsede. II. Die Cephalopoden. Abhandlungen der K6niglichen
Preussischen geologischen Landesanstalt (n.f.) 47: 1-30.
Nowak, J. 1908. Untersuchungen uber die Cephalopoden der oberen Kreide in Polen.
I. Teil. Genus Baculites Lamarck. Bulletin international de l’Académie des sciences et
des lettres de Cracovie (Classe des Sciences mathématiques et naturelles) 1908 (4):
326-353.
OBATA, I. & MATsUMOTO, T. 1963. Part II. Some baculitids from Honshu. Jn:
Matsumoto, T. & OBATA, I. A monograph of the Baculitidae from Japan: 75-92.
Memoirs of the Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (series D, geology) 13 (1): 1-116.
OLIVEIRA, P. E. DE. 1957. Invertebrados cretacicos do fosfato de Pernambuco. Boletim.
Divisdo de geologia e mineralogia, Ministério da agricultura, Brasil 172: 7-29.
OLIvVERO, E. B. 1984. Nuevos amonites Campanianos de la Isla James Ross, Antartida.
Ameghiniana. Revista de la Asociaci6n paleontolégica argentina 21 (1): 53-84.
OLIVERO, E. B. 1992. Asociaciones de amonites de la Formacion Santa Marta (Cretacico
tardio), Isla James Ross, Antartida. Jn: RINALDI, C. A. (ed.). Geologia de la Isla James
Ross: 47-75. Buenos Aires: Instituto Antartico Argentino.
OrRBIGNY, A. D’. 1840-42. Paléontologie francaise: Terrains Crétacés. 1. Céphalopodes.
Paris: Victor Masson.
OrRBGNY, A. D’. 1850. Prodrome de Paléontologie stratigraphique universelle des animaux
mollusques et rayonnés 2. Paris: Masson.
PERVINQUIERE, L. 1907. Etudes de paléontologie tunisienne. 1. Céphalopodes des terrains
secondaires. Carte géologique de la Tunisie: v + 1-438.
PERVINQUIERE, L. 1910. Sur quelques Ammonites du Crétacé algérien. Mémoires de la
Société géologique de France (Paléontologie) 42: 1-86.
PICARD, L. 1929. On Upper Cretaceous (chiefly Maestrichtian) Ammonoidea from
Palestine. Annals and Magazine of Natural History (10) 3: 433-456.
PicTeT, F. J. & CAMPICHE, G. 1858-1864. Description des Fossiles du Terrain Crétacé des
environs de Sainte-Croix. Mareriaux pour la Paléontologie Suisse 1 (1858-60): 1-380;
2 (1861-64): 1-752.
REDTENBACHER, A. 1873. Die Cephalopodenfauna der Gosauschichten in den nordostlichen
ii Abhandlungen der Kaiserlich-Koniglichen geologischen Reichsanstalt, Wien 5:
1-140.
REESIDE, J. B. JR. 1927a. Cephalopods from the lower part of the Cody Shale of Oregon
Basin, Wyoming. Professional Papers. United States Geological Survey 150-A: 1-10.
REESIDE, J. B. 3k. 1927b. The Cephalopods of the Eagle Sandstone and related Formations
in the Western Interior of the United States. Professional Papers. United States
Geological Survey 151: 1-87.
196 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
REESIDE, J. B. JR. 1962. Cretaceous ammonites of New Jersey. Jn: RICHARDS, H. G. et al.
The Cretaceous fossils of New Jersey. Bulletin of the New Jersey Division of Geology
61 (2): 113-137.
RENZ, O. 1968. Die Ammonoidea im Stratotyp des Vraconnien bei Sainte-Croix (Kanton
Waadt). Schweizerische palaeontologische Abhandlungen, Basel 87: 1-97.
RENZ, O. 1982. The Cretaceous ammonites of Venezuela. Basel, Boston, Stuttgart:
Birkhauser Verlag. :
REYMENT, R. A. 1958. 1. Uber einige Ammoniten aus dem Coniak Kolumbiens und
Venezuelas, Sudamerika. Stockholm Contributions in Geology 2: 1-25.
RICCARDI, A. C. & AGUIRRE URRETA, M. B. 1988. Bioestratigrafia del Cenomaniano-
Santoniano en la Patagonia Argentina. V Congreso Geologico Chileno, Santiago, 8-12
Agosto de 1988 2: C375-C394.
RieDEL, L. i931. Zur Stratigraphie und Faciesbildung im Oberemscher und Untersenon am
Sudrande des Beckens von Munster. Jahrbuch der Preussischen geologischen
Landesanstalt u. Bergakademie zu Berlin 51: 605-713.
ROMAN, F. & MAZERAN, P. 1913. Monographie paléontologique de la faune du Turonien
du bassin d’Uchaux et de ses dépendances. Archives du Muséum d’histoire naturelle de
Lyon 12: 1-137.
SCHLUTER, C. 1871-1876. Cephalopoden der oberen deutschen Kreide. Palaeontographica
21: 1-24 (1871); 21: 25-120 (1872); 24: 1-144 (121-264) (1876).
SCHOLZ, G. 1971. Uj Lechites faj. bakonyi felsoalbai rétegekbol. Fd6ldtani kézlény 101:
431-433.
SCHOLZ, G. 1978. Beitrag zur Kenntniss des ostalpinen Alb. 1. Oberalb-Ammoniten aus
dem Kampenwaldvorland (Chiemgauer Alpen). Mitteilungen der Bayerischen Staats-
sammlung fiir Paldontologie und historische Geologie 18: 39-44.
SCHOLZ, G. 1979. Die Ammoniten des Vracon (Oberalb, dispar-Zone) des Bakony-
Gebirges (Westungarn) und eine Revision der wichtigsten Vracon-Arten der West-
Mediterranen Faunenprovinz. Palaeontographica 165A (1-2): 1-80.
SHUMARD, B. F. 1861. Description of new Cretaceous fossils from Texas. Transactions of
the Academy of Sciences of St Louis 1: 590-610.
SoRNAY, J. 1955. Baculites undulatus. Palaeontologia universalis (n.s.) 15.
SPATH, L. F. 1921. On Cretaceous Cephalopoda from Zululand. Annals of the South
African Museum 12 (7): 217-321.
SPATH, L. F. 1922. On the Senonian ammonite fauna of Pondoland. Transactions of the
Royal Society of South Africa 10: 113-147.
SPATH, L. F. 1923-1945. A monograph of the Ammonoidea of the Gault. Palaeonto-
graphical Society Monographs.
SPATH, L. F. 1925. On Senonian Ammonoidea from Jamaica. Geological Magazine 62 (1):
28-32.
SPATH, L. F. 1926. On new ammonites from the English Chalk. Geological Magazine 63:
77-83.
SPATH, L. F. 1953. The Upper Cretaceous Cephalopod fauna of Graham Land. Scientific
Report. British Antarctic Survey 3: 1-60.
STEPHENSON, L. W. 1941. The larger invertebrates of the Navarro Group of Texas
(exclusive of corals and crustaceans and exclusive of the fauna of the Escondido Forma-
tion). Bulletin. University of Texas, Austin 4101: 1-641.
STINNESBECK, W. 1986. Zu den faunistischen und palokologischen Verhdaltnissen in der
Quiriquina Formation (Maastrichtium) Zentral-Chiles. Palaeontographica 194A:
99-237. |
STRAND, E. 1929. Zoological and palaeontological nomenclatorial notes. Latvijas
augstskolas raksti 28: 1-29.
SUMMESBERGER, H. 1979. Eine obersantone Ammonitenfauna aus dem Becken von Gosau
(Ober6sterreich). Annalen des Naturhistorischen Museums in Wien 82: 109-176.
SUMMESBERGER, H. 1992. Ammoniten aus dem Turon (Oberkreide) der nordlichen
Kalkalpen (Osterreich). Annalen des Naturhistorischen Museums in Wien 94A: 103-133.
SzAsz, L. 1986. Lower Turonian ammonite assemblage in the Maramures Mountains (East
Carpathians-Romania). Institul de Geologie si Geofizica. Dari de seama ale sedintelor
70-71/3: 117-134.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 197
TAUBENHAUS, H. 1920. Die Ammoneen der Kreideformation Palastina und Syriens.
Zeitschrift des Deutschen Paldstinavereins 43: 1-58.
THOMEL, G. 1992. Ammonites du Cenomanien et du Turonien du sud-est de la France. 1.
Le Cenomanien des Chaines subalpines meridionales et de la Provence orientale. (Alpes
de Haute-Provence, Alpes-Maritimes, var. Elements de hiostratigraphie (Ammonites).
Nice: Serre Editeur.
THOMSON, M. R. A. 1984. Report on Anatarctic field work. Preliminary ammonite
zonation of the Mid-Cretaceous rocks of James Ross Island. Bulletin. British Antarctic
Survey 64: 85-91.
TOKUNAGA, S. & SHIMIZU, S. 1926. The Cretaceous formation of Futaba in Iwaki and its
fossils. Journal of the Faculty of Science, Imperial University of Tokyo (Section II.
Geology, Mineralogy, Geography, Seismology) 1: 181-212.
TRASK, J. B. 1856. Description of new species of ammonite and baculite from the Tertiary
rocks of Chico Creek. Proceedings of the California Academy of Natural Sciences 1:
85-86.
VENZO, S. 1936. Cefalopodi del Cretaceo medio-superiore dello Zululand. Palaeonto-
graphia italica 36: 59-133 (1-75) pls 5-12 (1-8).
WarD, P. D. 1978. Baculitids from the Santonian—-Maestrichtian Nanaimo Group, British
Columbia, Canada and Washington State, USA. Journal of Paleontology 52 (5):
1143-1154.
WarD, P. D. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1993. Maastrichtian ammonites from the Biscay Region
(France, Spain). Memoirs. Paleontological Society 34: 1-58.
WEDEKIND, R. 1916. Uber Lobus, Suturallobus und Inzision. Zentralblatt fiir Mineralogie,
Geologie und Paldontologie (B) 8: 185-195.
WIEDMANN, J. 1962a. Ammoniten aus der Vascogotischen Kreide (Nordspanien). 1,
Phylloceratina, Lytoceratina. Palaeontographica 118A: 119-237.
WIEDMANN, J. 19625. Unterkreide-Ammoniten von Mallorca. 1. Lieferung: Lytoceratina,
Aptychi. Abhandlungen. Mathematisch-naturwissenschaftliche Klasse, Akademie der
Wissenschaften und der Literatur, Mainz 1962 (1): 1-148.
WIEDMANN, J. & DIENI, I. 1968. Die Kreide Sardiniens und ihre Cephalopoden. Palae-
ontographia italica 64: 1-171.
Woops, H. 1906. The Cretaceous fauna of Pondoland. Annals of the South African
Museum 4 (7): 275-350.
WRIGHT, C. W. 1957. Cephalopoda, Ammonoidea. /n: Moore, R. C. ed. Treatise on
invertebrate paleontology. Part L, Mollusca 4: xxii, 1-490. New York and Lawrence:
Geological Society of America and University of Kansas Press.
WRIGHT, C. W. 1979. The ammonites of the English Chalk Rock (Upper Turonian).
Bulletin of the British Museum (Natural History) (Geology) 31 (4): 281-332.
WRIGHT, C. W. 1981. Cretaceous Ammonoidea. /n: House, M. R. & SENIOR, J. R. The
Ammonoidea. Systematics Association Special Volume 18: 157-174.
WRIGHT, C. W. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1981. The Ammonoidea of the Plenus Marls and the
Middle Chalk. Palaeontographical Society Monographs 134: 1-148.
WRIGHT, C. W. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1987. 7. Ammonites. Jn: SMITH, A. B. ed. Fossils of
the Chalk. Palaeontographical Association field guides to fossils 2: 141-182.
WRIGHT, C. W. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1995. The Ammonoidea of the Lower Chalk. Part 4.
Palaeontographical Society Monographs 149 (599): 295-319.
198
APPENDIX
List of material and dimensions of Baculites bailyi, Baculites capensis, and Baculites vanhoepeni.
Baculites bailyi
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
MnWb = MnWwh_ Wb/Wh Ti
MxWb MxWh Wb/Wh
Specimen
Ww xt 00 or NnoSotaAnutHu lat la
Oe | | SPWPOSOCMAANTOSO | 00 | - |
ASm AMNOAANANTAMNAM !AAQ! +
One DAMMM 70 = ttm 4 ©
Cer | | eee oor. Sera,
SsS solo lel eaienl Siaim(elis iS C
ANY | | Sow Qe VODs AQik= oe
Vallalte) OSH esSesSA |aid |= |
= — =
COD |) | MMAAMNOCGOMES |; 09 1 |
oot ala) WM t+ ANN OO 0C0'O0F- 00 § COD
MTN AANOOSOAFCOKNTFTONTFMOROAM
CORR RR RR RRR ORR OBR RRR OR
So
SSeCoocoeooeeoooeoooceoee
FNODONMNOOMNE DOTFTOO MOONS
GG WWARAANANNOSCSHTAANTOOHN
eee ed est es et eI
CO COOONEOODONTODDOOANGMAOS
T+HFOOOOSKK KK KK WOMOONAROOCO—
N
aSo SSS4natQrnewoant9oonm
DAG RBAODATHNNHNSOSsrHeOCACOr
~~ oN 01 ON OM OM OM MH 1, ANOMMNM Sawa
\O 00 \O go GO 00 CO 00 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO
MNGMONNANNNNNANNNANNNNNNAN
OUUSTOUULUUU0 4€£UULULUUUUOEeSe
B“KAamOMaAMAAMAAnee eee ee eee
Baculites bailyi (cont.)
Ti
MnWb = MnWh_ Wb/Wh
Wb/Wh
MxWb MxWh
Specimen
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Pea eo ei Set
MNOMO—+t 'O
peat TOs es |
ATOt SH ! +
ANDAOO Oo
eco etc | |
Soooooo oS
TrToOooOomc§ :
lnuatas lo |
ees eet eS eS Set
entoon
a —oeo er
14.4
~A oOo oot
t~ 00 co oom Mr 00
Soooocmooooe
SNomeoonce
WS Ww Or Om Oa
OmOonooeonvoeo
En Ke Keoloakcel’ altel a
ee ee et eet ee eet Beet est =
aroao-nGan
torFOto TON
C9 CD ON GCA CN CD CD 9 DN ON
CO CO O1 00 CO CO CO CORN OD
NNNNNNNNNN
VVVVVVVVVY
aWa0g-0y-0y-0 07-07-07 07-8
Baculites capensis
Tu/Wb
MnWb = MnWh_ Wb/Wh
MxWb MxWh ~~ Wb/Wh
Specimen
—OOMN
Noll eal oll ell Saal Sas
Soceooo
NoOorotro
IN ~\Or tr 00
MOMM TO
NFO
tONMOO
TODO OnE
D1124/8
H200/15
H149/19
D1124/7
H200/61
H200/29
199
200
Baculites capensis (cont.)
Tu/Wb
MnWb MnWh Wb/Wh
MxWb MxWh Wb/Wh
Specimen
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
" "
si va) nv Inn mn nN WH Ta)
AAMAMNMANNANANAAN AANAANAAANNA
\O co oo [—~ \O \O WOW) To
KMOnntANoe oo KRMAHE OOK ONG |
DOM SAM OSHENOTSTOTHOTmMOTN
Sil
47
30
33
38
0.66
0.67
COCOTOTNNOMNOCOTOCOOrteOOCUuo |
ONM~H NON ONO OOM rr 1000r OOF KL 0000
DN FANT MAM COC AS FANDNANANANMNMNN
ee)
SSSCSCOOCOoOSCOoOCeoooeoooeoocooeSeee
ASS ASSES IIA DIA IDO SBS Saya SS
S OO @ Sov = OS S'S) Qi SS CO SS CDG AICOIGN CO) Gain Ga oem
wees eS et ot ed eee eee ee a i et et
CONMAAPTNMNOCCSCSTOOCOCCOCONMMNNwS
el el el ed oo olvolnoloKo Ko ono loo Koo foontonton
m~wFAOoOnONn ANMmmIMNATHNAR MSY wt Ot pve
DNDMHNBDOODNADODOANPVH OOPS OOANMO
OnaOooooeo Oooo NGOOoOonNnN f=]e47 one
ANAAANANANADTANNADDOUANQQNQVLUTTAA STON
ao @)sopao app co sean (M@yan ac jaa) Sy ay ahacpan, an (atjac en ee) oc) 1
201
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Z Ge I€ IL'0 O'rl 0'0I €L'0 O'SI O11 ¢S/007H
e 662 67 180 bil 76 8/0 9°€] 9°01 L/TOTH
GGG 0G) ae $90 Ctrl C6 EL'0 O'SI O11 9/€O7TH
= = e = = eS €L'0 eb COI 66/007H
Gee SEO) 97 LEO eel 9°6 IL'0 O'rT 0°01 €/pT1 1d
0S c€ +9'0 O'rl 0'6 L9'0 O'S] 0°01 I/pT11d
= [Ge (ba Z9'0 0°71 Cry, bL'0 CE] 0°01 €7/A1H
= eo = = = = 9L°0 O'€l 0°01 6£08Z0d
r* OFZ LE 190 OE! 0'8 IL'0 O'rl 0°01 a: Bs
E 08 Cc +9'0 Or! 0'6 L9°0 O'S] 0°01 8Z0Id
CC Oe IZ 69'0 Oe] 0'6 IL'0 O'+rl 0°01 Or/007TH
€ Gs C7 8c'0 TET 9'L IL'0 O'rl 0°01 101/007H
0 61 €L'0 0°71 8°8 €8°0 Oe 0°01 €¢/007H
is O'b (erg 690 O'€I 0'6 ILO O'+rI 0°01 61/107TH
Z O'b CZ 120 La 06 €L'0 Ll 0°01 €7/10CTH
= (ONE €7 EL O O'€] 0°01 bL'0 Hey 0°01 9b/€O7TH
cc 0 b7 OL'0 O'rl 0°01 IL'0 Or 0°01 Z1/SOCTH
& Lor SZ 99'0 O'€] 9°8 cL'0 CE] 0°01 t998d0d
@ L‘9 O¢ L9'0 fall 0'8 IL'0 Or] 0°01 €998d 0d
C=e'¢ L‘9 IZ €L'0 pT 0'°6 LL‘0 gE] 0°01 7998d 0d
0 O'€ 07 cL 0 aa 0'6 EEO O'€] 0°01 IpT8d Od
EG Cp cc LS‘0 O'€I ae 690 Cr 0°01 99d
(é CY €7 99'0 O'€] fee: IL'0 O'+rl 0°01 ET8Pb-INVS
Cre ob 6£ LL'‘0 O'€l 0°01 890 8b] 0°01 ®//7OCTH
CWE oe oie | 67 CL'0 0'7I 0'6 8/0 era 8°6 11/ZOCTH
Ca tee 87 Lew 0°71 76 pL'0 O'€] 9°6 C/PT11G
QM /"L 1 d UM/IM YUMUN IMU YUM/IM = UMXW IM XW uauioad¢
(WU0d) SIsuadDd SajljnIvg
202
Baculites capensis (cont.)
Tu/Wb
MnWb MnWh Wb/Wh
MxWb MxWh Wb/Wh
Specimen
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
nm nm QO
| Piao ye | te
MANN MOAN NMANAANN NANM NN —
WOON \OmMm a LV ae al @N EL ) O Or
NMAN LV a Oa YN aN gi orn oO WY wT Oo Oa aM
S22 | AeotesS WM FN WN — 0O WH FN D © &'6aico
NO MNNWN MANMMNMNAN WMwFTnnan WON ON OY
On CO COmmnWY ve) ioe)
Oxo |OERh | moenoer | Rtn i meee
eo oQOoQoqoqg GoeQoqaoo eoqQoqo moos]
NOS), Soot MOONNS ,CCSSO ,OMSCO
— be BD ee cee | eee a oat et Dee BD eee BR cee BR ce aes et et
DSO SS 2S Ss 2S 2S Oa SB SS SS
TFHNNNNHNNNHE HOOK OHOOOSKEONEEH
eee eee eee eee ee ees es ae
SoooeeeocoMersescoopeooooSeSoSoSooN
BANANA AAA ANAAANAAAA
ete eee es ss es es a
GUS) Two =) ON C00
OOo ra OD =o (=) M\ON-— a on
== = Own O>rone Oh SONS SS oes 92)
~~ ~— 00 Am o~ 00 =~ ~~~ 00 00 ow 2ATO
SONAR amo esasertasesseags ANnNAXO
SSOGFNMMATOSSCOSOSSSCSCOONGDO=NS
ANS HOUTMMOMAANANAANAANAA Ss ]OO082 S83 zazN0
LhOAMnmeoNnOAS Lae aL Leata Aaaiaise
Baculites capensis (cont.)
Tu/Wb
MnWb = MnWh_ Wb/Wh
MxWb MxWh ~ Wb/Wh
Specimen
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
el lt me eanih lee
cn a a ANAAAANN ANNANA TNA
on Netsgle) ven We OlAtS man
Meco | [eee ee ee es Pe
Gon aii: g ANOF MEOH AMMAN FNM
fa '2 | | |] | wmeoceroay | | Qnetre tot
— ol 4 MNO SAE + AMOM MMO
ation THAMMA HAN =r aMr ODN
ft | fe) ft eeeorr eo | [eee eee
Ss © Slololelelelere) Seqoqcoqgneoo]oe
Se oO Oooocoon SVSleoere) a7)
Iw lw l ll leer |! lkKowrKr
— — eee es ss eee ee es st
Sr > Soma oco Ss oooCcoooco
— — ON Oe ee es se Seni aren fi seen ith seen fi cen i cen ih eee I
DBDOODONADANA BOATS TOTTO FTO TNH UM
ee Oe er er rice ee
SS) Ss sleleleloleleljoloelo) ejalole\oalelolajealelerel=)
WOOoocouoooeoonenoooocoooonNnooe
WU 00 00 ~ 00 \0 00 00. OF COM F CD OONDOONONAACOCO
ee Ot ON OS OS as
MOmooDoooooooom Nnoeooo0oooconne
ANAAKNHHNHNHKHNKHKNKNMNOKntttt¢t¢¢ttttHN
ee es a et ed
PCP8052
H201/9
PCZ8004
H203/4
H201/12a
H205/18
H202/5
H201/26
H201/21
H200/14
Z.1795d
PCZ8027
203
204
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
= os = aS == At 8L 0 IEG O01? 81 CLZ0d
= =| eg a = = 08 0 0-97 O01? 8¢/1OCH
a - = '3 a5 a vL 0 OL? 002 VECE/OE
@ 0 De fe) OC 0 ol LIL) 097¢ 0'0¢ CC/8COT
= = Fé ae 3 oe OL 0 OLE 06! qcSO1d
a <— ie me = = 89 0 0 87¢ 061 ¢v/lOcH
SG OS OV 70) OVC (0) ZBI roll, 0) (0) IG 061 Gees
SCG ae 08 SL 0 00¢ OSI IL 0 0-9¢ C81 ECEOZ
ee ee =e ss as c8 0 0 CC 081 8£08ZO0d
= 8S I S6 1 O One OST LL O SG 081 78/00CH
Gs |! Cv 08 68 0 0 0¢ OLI i) Dte€ 081 SC8P-NVS
SC 99'S 06 GLY 0 81 One vL 0 OxEC OLI SOLIZ
© eo 8S SLO L 8 OVI vL 0 7 CC 991 CSeV
= DS te L8 OL 0 9°61 Ih toll (ele, LOG COI 1/cSOTd
0 WIL LC vl, 0 61 OVI 6L 0 OI? Shh O¢/SOCH
0) 8 TI be vl O 061 OVI 69 0 8 CC LSI yolld
C Qiee vs 8L 0 0 81 OVI 8L 0 0'0¢ CSI 4¢1/10CH
g i Lb 6V 8L 0 VSI OCI 8L 0 06! 0ST CSOT
¢C 99°¢ cs cL O 0 81 Otol IL 0 O) Ve OSI JSOLIZ
0 EOD vs 9L 0 v LI fe, (5 50 OIC 0 SI qcL A
G bev 69 69 0 091 Oat 6L 0 0 ol 0ST C€08ZO0d
© Ge G eV vLO 0 61 OVI SL 0 0-0¢ OSI L1/lOCH
G 896 Ke 180 Ol 0) foil 6L 0 06! OSI S1/10CH
dM/"L WD d YM/IM = YUMYN = UIMYW YM/4M = YUMXIN = IM XW uauioads
(‘JUOD) Sisuadvd salljnovg
Baculites vanhoepeni
Tu/Wb
MnWb MnWwh Wb/Wh
MxWb MxWh Wb/Wh
Specimen
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Orne tHt tAKR+t+HONO a Ya) Nt Fm
W\O x~F 0O <+F NMN\OM Sie aiGn) on! a) coo 4 CO CO \O
AOD NH OAM CO CIN st rT +4 C~ t~ nS)
Set | (Ree |scrrm (fee ler | feoer
S S'o'\o Solo’ SoS SIS) S\S) Sle
fee eee eee Sas ha) Sa eas
—_— — ws oe eo —_—_ ee — —
AMNONO =O NAG RHANHNTM ONHAN NOx x
WR RRR RRR OR KEE EE ORK EEE OF OF Ee
2 2S elersojelelele) ole) slololerealevele) ololeyeo:
OMMOOTONCOMmMOOCCCONNGTOOCCCCoCo
ONnNNn~rKo- —=ANnO— attMNtonrrwdoonnonan
ss st GN GN GNIIQN GIUGAIGCI GG GiGi Qi QI QIGAGaicn Gaicn
RRS t ee
\O t~ [~ OW SI) (ex | Ne) Orn WY Sic DY
Sa ES SOOS KH SHED S8s4¢6
Bene CR OQSKKroSSrornteSeno
SRN oe SNS CHN NER SNEED SND N ES
lal. 0 t-te e—e a
205
206 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
= eile sea) fa pees | ea
eS = =m ONNSO — —
co | C010 eA 7 REO 1
Bet |) > eoecill ate een aoc tet ee ediaes We Ald
Q C0 ]1ND | |MMar |oeM |S | | |
~ lum Mm~tnoo |! Mw ! oO
= \O Wma NeNM N © |
tS [cor], | coat ie | coco | |) |
= S Ss SEeS SO Sc
Slo. SoOSOe Se 6
S AN oman AAMAM MMH O-
= S SOSoe (oo ©
Sl ve ee ele ee
S N AN AN AN A
oSoooseoeoesseessooosesco
AMMAAMN NM ANMNOONNDWM OO
GB GG) GO CG) Ga)! GG) Ga) GaGa)! Ga)! Ga) Ga) Ga) sir astpostn O@ ote
Soooooooeseseosoosoescsse
WWW \O \O [~~ C~ C~ F~ CO CO COCO SH HNN
NANANAANAANIAAAAANMAMMNAMNM
MxWb MxWh Wb/Wh
Specimen
Z1860
PCZ7635
A2034
A477
A2039
109b
D1302b
Z1860b
Z1190b
PCZ8630
PCZ7417
PCZ7406
PCZ8638
A2029b
PCZ7411
Z1860d
PCZ7407b
Baculites vanhoepeni (cont.)
Z1860
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed
by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov.,
etc. The name of the taxon should be followed, without intervening punctuation, by the author’s name
(not abbreviated) and the year of publication; a comma must separate author’s name and year. The
author’s name and date must be placed in parentheses if a species or subspecies is transferred from its
original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must be separated from the
scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be either according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order,
with all references to that name following in chronological order (see example 1), or according to
chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the year is placed in front of each entry, and the
synonym repeated in full for each entry (see example 2). The author should adopt one style or the
other throughout a paper.
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Example 1
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871, pl. 2 (fig. 8a-b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example: comma separates author's name and year; semicolon separates more than
one reference by the same author; full stop separates references by different authors; figures of plates are enclosed in
parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures; dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers.
Example 2
1845 Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, p. 37.
1856 Leda plicifera A. Adams, p. 50.
1859 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, p. 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73).
1861 Nucula largillierti Philippi, p. 87.
1871 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould): Sowerby, pl. 2 (fig. 8a-b).
1950 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, p. 163, fig. 301.
1955 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, p. 110.
1964 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Barnard, p. 234, figs 8-9.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens
mentioned in the original description are to be designated allotype (if applicable) and/or paratypes;
additional material not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data
(registration number, depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype
and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype. SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s
Beach, Port Elizabeth (33°51°S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text, e.g. *. . . the Figure depicting
C. namacolus .. .’, or *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10). . .’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded by initials or full
names: e.g. Du Toit, but A. L. du Toit: Von Huene, but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary. Reference to the author should
preferably be expressed in the third person. Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except
when forming part of the title of a book or article, e.g. ‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII.
Amphipoda.’. A specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its
abbreviation to initial capital letter (except at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph), provided the
same generic name is used consecutively. The name of new genus or species should not be included
in the title; it should be included in the abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet
the requirements of Biological Abstracts.
8. GENERAL. Once referees’ reports have been received by the editor, these will be discussed by the
editorial committee. If the paper is considered acceptable after minor or major revision, the reports
will be forwarded to the author who must then thoroughly revise in accordance with the referees’
Suggestions. Final acceptance of the revised manuscript will be considered by the editorial committee.
In the case of major revision being necessary, the committee reserves the right to consult one or more
referees regarding the revised manuscript.
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND >
NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA. THE AMMONITE
FAMILY BACULITIDAE GILL, 1871
(EXCLUDING THE GENUS EUBACULITES)
VOLUME 105 PART 2 FEBRUARY 1997
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of: title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of
new genera or species; Author’s(s’) name(s); address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out);
number of illustrations and tables
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary (if paper is lengthy)
(g) Acknowledgments
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
3. MANUSCRIPT should be typed, double spaced with adequate margins. Four copies should be
provided. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of figure captions should be
typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are centred small capitals;
second subheadings are shouldered small capitals; third subheadings are shouldered italics; fourth sub-
headings are indented, shouldered italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration
(never roman numerals) of headings and abbreviations. Footnotes should be avoided unless they are
short and essential. All generic and specific names should be underlined or italicized.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12.5 x 18.5 cm (19.5 cm including
caption); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated in pencil on the reverse of the
figure; originals larger than 36 x 48 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular
in shape and final size. The size of illustrated objects may be indicated by a metric scale on the figure
(if appropriate), or the enlargement or reduction should be given in the caption; if the latter, then the
final reduction or enlargement should be taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not
printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items
of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; labelling on all figures should be non-serif
lettering (e.g. Helvetica, Univers) of uniform style, in lower-case whenever possible, and of appropri-
ate size taking into account the final size. The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil
on the back of each illustration, together with an indication of the desired reduction or enlargement.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the
paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) described. . .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) described...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year; pagination indicated by colon, not p. (except in synonymies, see
example 2); names of joint authors connected by ampersand; ef al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names
of all authors given in list of references.
(b)Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within
each name, with suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in
that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal articles give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scientific periodicals.
4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses (if pagination
discontinuous), pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88:
100-140.
FISCHER, P. H., DUVAL, M. & RAFFY, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines.
Archives de zoologie expérimentale et générale 74: 627-634.
KOHN, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Annals and Magazine of Natural History (13) 2: 309-320. :
KOHN, A. J. 1960b. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bulletin of the Bingham Qceanographic Collection, Yale University 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungreise im westlichen und zentralen Stid Afrika ausgefihrt in den
Jahren 1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16:
269-270.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 105 _ Band
February 1997 Februarie
Part 2 Deel
WO:
Aun NOVI pene
A LOWER CRETACEOUS PLIOSAUROID
FROM SOUTH AFRICA
By
ARTHUR R. I. CRUICKSHANK
Cape Town Kaapstad
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles,
revisions and review articles in anthropology, archaeology, palaeontology,
geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology, and marine and freshwater
biology.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in
part, with material from the collections of the South African Museum. Other
contributions are also considered provided at least one of the authors is a staff
member of the Museum. In the case of descriptions of new species not already
part of the Museum's collections, the holotype and, if possible, part of the
paratype series must be deposited in the South African Museum. Authors whose
contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Committee prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper
accepted is published as a separate part at irregular intervals as material
becomes available; parts are priced individually.
Editorial committee
Dr P. A. Hulley (Chairman) Dr H. C. Klinger Elizabeth Louw (Editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000 South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Publications Office.
OUT OF PRINT
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 4(1), 51-3, 5, 7-9), 6(1, 2, t.-p.i.),
7(1-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3), 111-2, 5, 7, t.-p.i.), 141-3), 15(4-5),
24(2, 5), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 45(1), 49(1), 67(5, 11), 84(2)
ISBN 0 86813 169 5
D5223
Printed in South Africa by
The Rustica Press (Pty) Ltd,
Old Mill Road, Ndabeni, Cape
A LOWER CRETACEOUS PLIOSAUROID
FROM SOUTH AFRICA
By
ARTHUR R. I. CRUICKSHANK
Earth Sciences Section, Leicestershire Museums Service, The Rowans,
College Street, Leicester LE2 OJJ, United Kingdom*
and Geology Department, University of Leicester, University Road,
- Leicester LE] 7RH
(With 6 figures and 1 table)
[MS accepted 22 July 1996]
ABSTRACT
A revised account is given of the skull and partial skeleton of a small plesiosaur from the
Lower Cretaceous (Upper Valanginian) Sundays River Formation of the Algoa Basin, South
Africa. The specimen was originally described as Plesiosaurus capensis by C. W. Andrews
in 1911, nominally as a ‘small-headed’ form of plesiosaurian, but is in fact a member of the
‘large-headed’, predaceous Pliosauroidea. Its apparent closest relative is the English
‘Wealden’ (Barremian) species, Leptocleidus superstes Andrews, 1922. Both specimens seem
to be very similar to, but smaller than, the Liassic genus Rhomaleosaurus. The Sundays
River Formation is of shallow marine to estuarine-lagoonal provenance. A brief review is
included of other, particularly Southern Hemisphere, occurrences of marginal and non-
marine Plesiosauria.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Tam Aoi ce cle antes w SUN wan dae ens Ph ege cues ease dower tse oone 207
ESOT fee I. sm, See ohh tnw we Shows e bam ok eaelce sacs dea desacdhawusees 209
Meee HOA OPICAl MOTIZOM: << 5.50)..0 2. <ccecnweneaeedees suniag sc nontesaieseasueenenaesse 209
aI READ Fg 85 She De Ls oe Nee eR a MRI EAS he ue A ina dw Ehaid nd oa a 209
a RE ROR ODE hho octane ha ere mee Paice nin cd ws OS als < Dae ohne 210
MEM RONEN TICCN INN 2 os clon coo dpomenin tence dp eiasomemc <u Atab anne se esie'c sce viebonmesnene 211
aI ere ne hc orem nas ca ya Ae Glo eas Societe wan 211
IRMA IO no One, en em ae eat em na Aha Lhe One cette a sew Leo ta catbeaan mente 216
Ue RTM NMA IMR et ee AOS ert Ne miaig, Ghose See ymecaids osiieceiemaad obedience cuss 219
ep IETS CIELO EO eke es oe ee ee I eee 220
a pan E RIP aN 8 2 SEL ia viw kc cicisionisietd Ce Rnrere dale ond wialw hens baw ale vcs uddawieeaceags 220
RNIN PITRE UISTOMIS 80-5. 220.8 - ao tinlen fide on pe nals aWat acini ve de wouciobubw deed shncis casewseacdee 223
EER ISI ON Shere ah GG. Sa tier gece sha kaa cteaw at edhe es < akendis a. wiehmeRennee 223
IRE TI ir hae es ete ka he ee ae Ney Te Me eae 224
I URITRRE OES Os Sleno L mE Man oA 1c CALNE! ciartlarals Sere che dia Stale CARLO elolonan ale Res 225
INTRODUCTION
The value of well-curated fossil collections is nowhere better displayed than
in the specimen redescribed here. Very nearly one hundred years ago, Rogers
& Schwarz (1901: 8-9) reported the recovery of the remains of a plesiosaurian
*—address for correspondence.
208 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
reptile. It had been discovered by Schwarz in a cliff at the locality Picnic Bush,
in the Zwartkops River Valley, south of Uitenhage. In the terminology of the
day it was therefore ascribed to the Sundays River Beds of the Uitenhage
Series. An age of Upper Valanginian to Lower Hauterivian was assumed, corre-
sponding to the upper part of the ‘Wealden’ succession of England (Andrews
1911), but see below for further discussion. So far as is known this remains the
only record of a plesiosaurian from southern Africa, although their remains are
relatively common in Australia and New Zealand (Welles & Gregg 1971;
Molnar 1982, 1984). The well-preserved, semi-articulated nature of this speci-
men encourages the hope that more may yet be found in the late Mesozoic rocks
of Eastern Cape Province and KwaZulu-Natal.
Andrews (1911) assigned the specimen to a new species, Plesiosaurus
capensis, and therefore by inference, to the small-headed superfamily Plesio-
sauroidea (Brown 1981). Several years later Andrews (1922) described a very
similar specimen from the English Wealden (Berwick Brick Pit, Sussex) under
the name of Leptocleidus superstes, and drew attention to close similarity of the
Algoa Basin specimen to his new species, although the skull of L. superstes was
lacking most of its structure anterior to the orbits. Stromer (1935) thought the
South African specimen to be sufficiently different to warrant a distinct genus to
itself, and created the genus Peyerus for it. However, Persson (1963) pointed
out that Andrews original comparisons were sufficient to place P. capensis into
the genus Leptocleidus, and that therefore Stromer’s genus was effectively a
subjective junior synonym for Leptocleidus. This course will be followed in this
paper. The specimen is therefore Leptocleidus capensis (Andrews, 1911).
The specimen is of particular interest from several points of view. Firstly, it
is a member of the superfamily Pliosauroidea, family Pliosauridae (Brown
1981)—aquatic animals showing extreme adaptations towards a predatory way
of life, with skulls about half the length of the neck and large, conical, striated
teeth adapted for piercing and tearing. It does not belong with the Plesiosaur-
oidea, the contrasting group within the Plesiosauria, which show adaptations
towards feeding on small or soft-bodied prey, and which possess heads very
much less than half the length of the neck and slim elongate teeth. Secondly, the
general structure of the skull of Leptocleidus is very close to that of the Liassic
(Lower Jurassic) genus Rhomaleosaurus (Taylor 1992a, 1992b; Cruickshank
1994a). Thirdly, the palaeoenvironment of the sediments in which the specimen
was found indicates close inshore, perhaps lagoonal, conditions (McLachlan &
McMillan 1976; McMillan in press). A brief literature survey shows that sev-
eral plesiosaurs, particularly those from southern continents, have originated
from non-marine sediments, and hence a totally marine association of these
predaceous aquatic reptiles is not necessarily to be expected (Bartholomai 1966;
Molnar 1982, 1984; Rich et al. 1991). This paper will address these points,
firstly by redescribing the specimen in the aftermath of further preparation, and
by reviewing some occurrences of similar fossils.
Material referred to in the text is lodged in the following institutions: Palae-
ontology Department, Natural History Museum, Cromwell Road, London
(BMNH); and Palaeontology Collections, Earth Sciences Division, South
African Museum, Cape Town (SAM).
LOWER CRETACEOUS PLIOSAUR FROM SOUTH AFRICA 209
MATERIAL AND METHODS
LOCALITY AND GEOLOGICAL HORIZON
The specimen is recorded as having been discovered on the face of the cliff
overlooking the farm Redhouse, in the Zwartkops (Swartkops) River Valley,
from between the two upper mudstone beds, in a nodular clay limestone (Rogers
& Schwarz 1901: 8-9; Rogers & Du Toit 1909). The locality is approximately
33°49’S 25°33’E (South African Topocadastral Series, sheet 3325). The speci-
men originally comprised ‘portions of the shoulder girdle and some fifteen
vertebrae, embedded in a nodule with the accompanying jaws (and ?skull),
teeth, cervical vertebrae, hind limb bones and bones of the fore-arm and paddle
loosely embedded in the dark grey clay’ (Rogers & Schwarz 1901: 8-9).
The sediments are those of the Sundays River Formation, a lagoonal to
shallow marine succession (McLachlan & McMillan 1976; McMillan in press),
which forms the upper component of the Uitenhage Group of the Eastern Cape
South Coastal Belt. The age of the Sundays River Formation has been variously
reported as ranging from the “Lower Greensand’ to Liassic, but the general
consensus of opinion holds that it is of Upper Valanginian-Lower Hauterivian
age (Lower Cretaceous) (McLachlan & McMillan 1976: 205-206). This is
confirmed by a recent analysis of the foraminiferans (McMillan in press), which
shows that the Picnic Bush locality lies at the top of his new Biozone Bb, and is
placed by him in the Uppermost Valanginian. From an associated palaeoeco-
logical study, McMillan shows that Biozone Bb equates with his Transgressive
Zone. The entire Valanginian sequence of the Sundays River Formation is
characterized, to a greater or lesser extent, by the presence of freshwater
foraminiferans . The probability is that Biozone Bb was laid down under
estuarine or marginal marine conditions. Leptocleidus capensis possibly lived,
and was certainly preserved, in an inshore environment.
PRESERVATION
The remains of the shoulder girdle, forearm and teeth are no longer in the
collections of the South African Museum. Nine posterior cervical and sixteen
dorsal vertebrae run in an unbroken sequence but, at what appears to be the
cervical—pectoral junction, there is a marked break in their line. Andrews
(1911) recorded that the left side of the skull was obscured by the neural spines
of six (?anterior) dorsal vertebrae—but which six is no longer clear, as they
have all been cleared from the skull and may be among the several fragmeuts
that accompany the specimen.
The break in the line of the vertebrae may indicate that the animal was
essentially complete when its carcass came to rest on the bottom, only the head
becoming detached and coming to lie alongside the vertebral column. One
paddle must have been close by, as it donated a phalange to lie within the left
temporal arcade, and a carpal(?) to lie inside the left orbit. The presence of hind
limbs (two femoral shafts, two fibulae and a tibia) reinforces the idea that the
skeleton was nearly complete at the time of burial, and had suffered minimal
damage through scavenging and current action. A situation not unlike that
reported by Taylor (1992a) for Rhomaleosaurus zetlandicus is a strong
possibility for this specimen.
210 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The skull has been symmetrically squashed dorso-ventrally, but mainly over
the parietal region. The snout seems undistorted, but a pair of symmetrically
placed depressions (dep) on either side of the mid-nasal ridge (dmc) might also
be taphonomic damage, although not shown as such in the reconstructions
(Figs 1, 2). As a result of the distortion of the parietal crest, the sidewall of the
braincase is no longer easily interpreted (Fig. 2).
In summary, what is currently preserved of the specimen is as follows: an
almost complete skull, portions of both jaws rami, but not the symphysis,
22 cervical and 16 dorsal vertebrae, two fibulae, one tibia, the remains of two
femora, several carpals/tarsals and the bulk of a paddle.
SYSTEMATIC PALAEONTOLOGY
Class REPTILIA
Subclass SAUROPTERYGIA Owen, 1860
Order PLESIOSAURIA de Blainville, 1835
Superfamily PLIOSAUROIDEA (Grey, 1825) Welles, 1943
Family Pliosauridae Seeley, 1874
Genus Leptocleidus Andrews, 1922
Type species. Leptocleidus superstes Andrews, 1922: 285-298, pls 14-15,
based on specimen BMNH R4824, from the Berwick Brick Pit, near Lewes,
Sussex, United Kingdom, Upper Weald Clay (= Barremian), Lower
Cretaceous.
Remarks
The classification of the Plesiosauria is at present in a state of flux. Hitherto,
a clear-cut division of the order into two superfamilies, the Pliosauroidea and
Plesiosauroidea, seemed to offer a stable solution to their classification (Brown
1981). However, recent descriptions of plesiosaurians from the Rhaeto-Liassic
_of England indicate that this simple relationship can no longer be held (Brown
1993; Storrs & Taylor 1993; Cruickshank 1994a, 1994b; Brown & Cruickshank
1995). In many of the characters of the skull, the genus Leptocleidus is very
close to Rhomaleosaurus from the Liassic of Europe, but as the critical region
of the lower jaw symphysis is not known with certainty in Leptocleidus, its final
position must remain undecided for the present (see Table 1).
Leptocleidus capensis (Andrews, 1911)
1911 Plesiosaurus capensis Andrews, p. 309.
1922 Leptocleidus capensis Andrews, p. 291.
1935 Peyerus capensis Stromer, p. 44.
1963 Leptocleidus capensis Persson, p. 19.
LOWER CRETACEOUS PLIOSAUR FROM SOUTH AFRICA 211
Material
SAM-K5822, from Picnic Bush site, Swartkops River Valley, Cape
Province, overlooking Redhouse Farm, 33°49’S 25°33’E, Sundays River
Formation (= Uppermost Valanginian).
Diagnosis
Pliosauroid plesiosaur very similar to, but smaller than, Rhomaleosaurus,
having a subtriangular skull outline, possessing a dorsomedian foramen on the
midnasal ridge of the premaxillae, dorsomedian troughs on the articulars and
prearticulars, expanded lateral rami of the pterygoids, strong descending post-
orbital flanges, a snout bearing a rosette of procumbent teeth; teeth conical,
circular in section with striae and weak carinae. It differs from Rhomaleosaurus
in having a relatively shorter snout, fewer teeth in both upper and lower jaws,
and a recurved crest on the forward-facing part of the vertex.
Remarks
Stromer (1935) created the genus Peyerus to accommodate Plesiosaurus
capensis, but Andrews (1922) had already strongly suggested that P. capensis
and Leptocleidus superstes were congeneric. This route was followed by
Persson (1963), who formally incorporated P. capensis into the genus Lepto-
cleidus. The genus Peyerus therefore becomes a subjective junior synonym for
Leptocleidus. Persson (1963: 19) also made the point that L. capensis was
‘. . . a Rhomaleosauroidean genus’, pointing out that the skull was well
preserved, was comparatively large, and had a distinct constriction at the
maxillo—premaxillary suture.
DESCRIPTION OF SPECIMEN
Skull (Figs 1-3)
The skull is that of an adult, the sutures being very difficult to distinguish in
places and none of the bones show any sign of disarticulation (Cruickshank
1994b). This interpretation is reinforced by an examination of the vertebrae,
where the neural arches are seen to be firmly fused to their centra, an accepted
indication of adulthood (Brown 1981).
The skull is about 310 mm long on the dorsal midline, and 172 mm across
the quadrates, giving a length: width ratio of 1.7: 1. It appears little damaged,
but some bone is missing from the lower rim of the right orbit (orb) and
adjacent palate, and most of the right cheek-bar is reconstructed in plaster-of-
Paris. The now fragile occiput has been strengthened by a layer of plaster-of-
Paris, which has obscured its details. However, most of the “fixed points’ can be
determined to give the outline as illustrated in the figures.
The bones of the left side and anterior of the palate are clear, although seve-
ral of the sutures on the skull roof are not at all easily seen. In particular, it is
not certain if there is a lacrimal in this species, and the outline of the frontals
(fr) and postfrontals (pof), where they meet, has had to be interpreted. Andrews
(1911, fig. 1) reconstructed the palate from information contained on the
Pu) ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
\
Fig. 1. Skull of Leptocleidus capensis (Andrews, 1911) in dorsal view.
For abbreviations to this and other figures see p. 225.
Scale bar = 50 mm.
LOWER CRETACEOUS PLIOSAUR FROM SOUTH AFRICA 213
damaged right side, and indicated that the ectopterygoid (ec) was an antero-
posteriorly elongated bone. However, using the clear outlines of the bones now
exposed on the left side of the palate, it is clear that the ectopterygoid is a leaf-
like bone applied to the ventral surface of the lateral ramus of the pterygoid
(Irpt), and elongated from side-to-side, with a connecting process linking it to
the jugal (j).
The internal nares (in) are very similar to those of Rhomaleosaurus, having
steeply-walled posterior limits, connected to a shallow channel (ch), which runs
towards the diastema (dia) at the maxilla-premaxillary suture. Unlike Rhoma-
leosaurus and other pliosauroids, there do not seem to be any auxiliary foramina
or channels associated with the narial system in this animal. The internal nares
are positioned anterior to the external nares (en), and seem to have been part of
an underwater olfactory system as described by Cruickshank ef al. (1991) and
Taylor & Cruickshank (1993).
A difference from the palates of species of Rhomaleosaurus is the proportion
and placing of the parasphenoid (ps). In pliosauroids recently described (Taylor
1992b; Cruickshank 1994a), the parasphenoid is a relatively wide plate that
spans the midline of the posterior interpterygoid vacuity (piv), and which
effectively covers the bulk of the basioccipital and basisphenoid (bo, bs), with
the exception of a small rim of basioccipital on the posterior limit of the palate,
and the occipital condyle. In Leptocleidus, the parasphenoid is a narrow rod
running back from a wedge inserted between the posterior portions of the
anterior rami of the pterygoids, exposing the basicranium. In this specimen it is
not possible to distinguish the suture between the basi- and parasphenoids, nor
that between the basisphenoid and basioccipital in the region of the posterior
interpterygoid vacuity. A similar structure of the rear of the palate is known in
Liopleurodon and the plesiosauroid plesiosaurs (Andrews 1910-1913). The
significance of this variation is not known at present.
The lateral ramus of the pterygoid descends below the line of the cheek
bar, but is not at all robust, and does not have the ‘boss’ that is so strongly
developed in Rhomaleosaurus. The postorbital bar (pob) has a very marked
descending flange, very similar to that in Rhomaleosaurus, composed of ele-
ments of the parietals (p), postorbitals (po) and postfrontals (pof). However, the
structure of this flange differs in two respects from that of Rhomaleosaurus. The
postorbital itself has a very much reduced exposure on the descending flange,
when compared with Rhomaleosaurus species (Taylor 1992a; Cruickshank
1994b), an area taken over by the postfrontal in L. capensis, but in turn the
postorbital has a well-developed ‘footplate’ (pofp) running backwards over the
junction of the jugal (j) and squamosal (sq). The descending flange also seems to
be much deeper than in Rhomaleosaurus, closely approaching the dorsal surface
of the palatal bones.
The articular surfaces of the quadrates (q) are missing, but the breaks seem
to have been made only just above the joint surfaces, where the line of the
medial surfaces of the quadrates start to turn outwards, as is indicated in the
reconstructions (Figs 1-3).
Some post-mortem damage to the parietal crest (psc) has caused the line of
the crest to be depressed, which has also damaged the side-walls of the brain-
case. However, impressions of the jaw adductor muscles seem to be apparent on
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
214
\
"WU QS = Ieq 9[eIS
“MOIA OPIS Ul (T [6] ‘SMoIpUY) S2suadDdd SnpiajI0jdaT JO [INAS *Z “Sst
LOWER CRETACEOUS PLIOSAUR FROM SOUTH AFRICA 215
iS —
Pa rer
7
ed
‘
ae
OE i SS
oe RLS COA bow
$e 21
Fig. 3. Skull of Leptocleidus capensis (Andrews, 1911) in palatal view.
Scale bar = 50 mm.
216 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the surface of the parietals (mpst?, mame?) in very much the same situation as
interpreted by Taylor (1992b) for Rhomaleosaurus zetlandicus. The midline of
the vertex (vx) of the occiput has been drawn out to form a ‘cock’s-comb’-like
process, which is also seen in L. superstes. Preparation damage from the time
of discovery or the original descriptions has eroded the ventral rim of the
posterior processes of the maxillae (mx), so that the tooth sockets are indistinct.
Mandible (Figs 4, 5)
There are five pieces of the lower jaw. The left ramus is represented by
a length of dentary (d), and associated bones (c, sp), with 16 tooth positions
preserved, and the posterior portion of the ramus from about the coronoid
eminence (ce) to the retroarticular process (rap), with five tooth positions
35? atrc
31? ce Es gl
AR ptrc
salv lor
228
7?
Fig. 4. Leptocleidus capensis (Andrews, 1911). A. Posterior portion of left
ramus of lower jaw, outer view. B. Posterior portion of left ramus of lower jaw,
inner view. C. Mid-region of lower jaw, dorsal view. Scale bar = 50 mm.
72) (9)
LOWER CRETACEOUS PLIOSAUR FROM SOUTH AFRICA
"WU OS = Ieq Z]eOS
‘suorjiod Zuissiu MOYs 0} (T [6] “SMoipuy) sisuadvo snpiajz0idaT Jo Mel JaMOT YO] JO UONONI}sUO.EI ONRUIRIZeIP-1WIag *¢ *SIy
218 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
preserved. The right ramus is represented by three portions: a short piece from
just behind the symphysis (i.e. a mirror image of the very anterior of the
anterior part of the other ramus); a badly broken piece from the mid-dentary
region; and the very end of the ramus from just in front of the glenoid (gl) to the
retroarticular process. Only the left jaw remnants are figured.
It is important to try to estimate how much of the front of the jaw is missing,
as significant taxonomic decisions are made on the nature of the jaw symphysis
(Tarlo 1960; Brown 1981). Also, it is of interest to try to calculate the amount
missing from the ramus between the two portions, as this would help in arriving
at a tooth-count for this species.
Neither of the anterior-most portions of the jaw have any indication of a
symphyseal facet, but they both show the characteristic swelling that occurs in
Rhomaleosaurus for at least two tooth positions behind the symphysis. There-
fore, if the relationship with Rhomaleosaurus is appropriate and a symphyseal
tooth-count of five is to be expected, then the first preserved tooth position
cannot be more anterior than the sixth. In Rhomaleosaurus, the symphysis
slopes backward ventrally and covers about one more tooth position after the
fifth. Behind this the outer edges of the jaw rami are still parallel, to at least the —
seventh position, where the teeth start to reduce in diameter (Taylor 19925,
fig. 6; Cruickshank 1994a, figs 7, 9). Assuming the swelling to cover only one
tooth position behind the symphysis would make the first preserved position the
sixth, with an expectation of there being evidence for the remnants of the sym-
physis preserved on the lower edge of the jaw fragment; this is not evident. In
order to be cautious, and assuming that the spatulate swelling of the anterior of
the jaw covered more than seven positions, the first preserved tooth position is
marked as the seventh.
Placing the jaw fragment in what appears to be a natural resting position
against the upper jaw allows the swelling on the lower jaw to fit just behind the
diastema (dia), leaving a distance sufficient to accommodate about five or six
teeth to the front. Placing the glenoid against the (broken) end of the quadrate
on the left side leaves a gap of about 75 mm on the lower edge of the jaw, into
which about eight teeth could fit. Assuming that these approximations are nearly
correct in their values, gives a tooth count of (6) + 16 + (8) + 5 = 35 for the
lower jaw, a value within the known range for pliosauroids (Taylor 1992a).
| The remainder of the jaw fits the general pliosauroid pattern, with, on the
inner surface, a large coronoid (c) and substantial prearticular (pa) on each side.
The splenial (sp) wedges between the prearticular and angular (a), and the pre-
articular runs under the medial flange of the articular (ar), to a point well behind
the glenoid (Taylor 1992b; Cruickshank 1994a, 1994D).
No part of the Meckelian fossa is preserved, but a cleft (cl) between the
prearticular and surangular (sa) marks the position of insertion of a portion of
the jaw adductors (Taylor 1992b). A well-defined dorsomedian trough (dmt) is
seen on the anterior faces of the articular and prearticular, as in Rhomaleo-
saurus, and which is believed to be characteristic of that genus (Taylor 1992a;
Cruickshank 1994a) and its close relatives.
The mandible is a slender box-beam, with a low coronoid eminence lying
fairly far back relative to the temporal fossa, just under the dorsally expanded
vertex. A component of the external mandibular adductor muscles may have
LOWER CRETACEOUS PLIOSAUR FROM SOUTH AFRICA 219
originated in this pocket under the vertex and inserted in the cleft just in front of
the glenoid. Such a muscle would act at its most efficient when the jaw was
some way open, and enhance the speed at which it closed—a useful attribute in
a generalized predator. This proposed muscle would be an addition to the main
mass of the external mandibular adductor (mame’?). °
Dentition (Fig. 6)
In the upper jaw there is room for about 16 teeth in each maxilla, and five
in each premaxilla, giving a total of 21 for the upper dentition. As calculated
above, there seem to be about 35 teeth in each ramus of the lower jaw. These
counts are within the known range for pliosauroids (Brown 1981; Taylor
1992a).
In the upper jaw, the first five teeth on each side commence with a very
small tooth, which appears to have protruded almost horizontally, followed by
four of increasing size, but also procumbent. In the upper jaw there is a
diastema, at the maxilla—premaxilla junction, which is followed by a smaller
tooth, behind which they enlarge again over two or three positions. However,
damage to the maxillae behind this point has removed much information, and
only what can be seen is indicated on the reconstruction—a run of substantial
teeth extending to the limit of each maxilla. Little can be said of the mandibular
dentition; the mesial part of the symphyseal region (in common with Rhoma-
leosaurus) shows several large tooth positions, followed by a marked decrease
in size from about the postulated tenth position, to the end of the dentary. As
judged from the visible replacement teeth (rto), each tooth is a substantial,
slightly recurved cone, with strong striae on the lingual surfaces, and weak
mesio-distal carinae. None of the teeth referred to by Andrews (1911) has sur-
vived, but he illustrated (pl. 18 (fig. 4)) a small (= ?posterior) tooth with a very
much greater curvature to its tip. The implication is that the anterior teeth are
simple cones, such as are found in Rhomaleosaurus, but that the posterior teeth
were acting to help prey be swallowed, as is common in many modern reptiles,
Fig. 6. Camera lucida drawings of selected teeth of Leptocleidus capensis (Andrews, 1911).
A. Base of third left premaxillary replacement tooth. B. Apex of eighth right dentary
replacement tooth. C. Apex of first right premaxillary replacement tooth. D. Cross-section
of tenth right mature dentary tooth. E. ?Tenth left dentary mature tooth.
Scale bars (all to left of figure) = 5 mm.
220 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and which condition has been described in the Upper Jurassic pliosauroid,
Pliosaurus brachyspondylus (Taylor & Cruickshank 1993).
The form of the teeth corresponds closely to Massare’s (1987) ‘generalist’
predator type, being adapted to apprehending active, struggling prey (Taylor
1992b), or being capable of dismembering large carcasses by gripping strongly,
and wrenching out mouthfuls by ‘twist-feeding’ (Taylor 1987), each mouthful
being swallowed whole.
Postcranial skeleton
Andrews (1911) described the postcranial elements very well, and no further
attempt will be made here to amplify his comments, except to note some items
regarding the vertebrae.
A total of 38 vertebrae have been identified during this study, one more
than originally described, but which can be accounted for by taking into account
half centra on the ends of the preserved sequences. They comprise 22 cervicals
and 16 dorsals (which is where the count differs from that of Andrews). Eleven
of the cervicals occur in four dissociated groups, and two single, damaged
vertebrae. Nine posterior cervicals are articulated with the 16 dorsals. All ver-
tebrae show their neural arches firmly fused to their centra and are, therefore,
from an adult animal (Brown 1981). All the centra are as long as they are wide,
an unusual state for a Cretaceous pliosauroid (Brown 1981).
Leptocleidus capensis had at least 22 cervicals but, as neither atlas nor axis
are represented here, the count must rise to a minimum of 24. The known range
of cervicals for Rhomaleosaurus is 28-32, and hence a value within that range
is possible for Leptocleidus capensis. This is unusual to say the least, as it is
assumed that within the Pliosauroidea, by the Cretaceous, the cervical count has
diminished to about 13 highly compressed vertebrae (Brown 1981). It is
impossible to see whether the rib-heads are single or double.
The smallest (anterior) cervical vertebrae have zygapophyses orientated
almost horizontally. The larger, posterior, cervicals and the dorsals have their
zygapophyses orientated at about 50° to the horizontal. Within the limits
allowed by connective tissues and similar constraints, this might indicate that the
posterior of the neck was less mobile, horizontally, than was the anterior
_ (Evans, MS 1993). A certain amount of vertical movement, both above and
below the horizontal is presumed, but controlled largely by relative interference
by the neural spines with one another.
DISCUSSION
Leptocleidus is very similar to Rhomaleosaurus (Taylor 1992a, 1992b;
Cruickshank 1994a; Table 1 herein). Twenty-six characters can be evaluated
under the headings of (a) gross similarities, (b) gross differences, (c) size-
related differences, (d) those characters of uncertain validity and (e) characters
not known or which are unpreserved in Leptocleidus.
(a) Head shape, the expanded lateral ramus of the pterygoid, the snout with
rosette of intermeshing teeth, and the general tooth shape and character are all
probably plesiomorphic and therefore not significant. What may prove to be
LOWER CRETACEOUS PLIOSAUR FROM SOUTH AFRICA 221
TABLE 1
Comparisons of Rhomaleosaurus and Leptocleidus. Similarities: head subtriangular;
dorsomedian foramen between facial processes*; dorsomedian trough on anterior face of
articular and prearticular*; expanded lateral ramus of pterygoid; strong descending flange on
postorbital bar*; snout with rosette of intermeshing teeth; teeth conical, circular in section;
teeth with weak caninae.
Rhomaleosaurus Leptocleidus
GROSS DIFFERENCES
Lower Jurassic age Lower Cretaceous age
Skull profile smooth Vertex with dorsal notch
Boss on lateral ramus of pterygoid No boss
Postorbital = postfrontal on postorbital bar Postorbital smaller than postfrontal
Wide exposure of parasphenoid on palate Narrow parasphenoid
Postorbital lacks ventral footplate Postorbital with footplate
Teeth uniform shape Posterior teeth slightly recurved
Teeth striated all round Buccal surface of teeth smooth
Accessory grooves on anterior of palate No accessory grooves on palate
SIZE-RELATED DIFFERENCES
Skull length-to-width ratio—2: 1 eg aan
Tooth count in upper jaw—30 21
A DIFFERENCE OF UNCERTAIN VALIDITY
Lacrimal present Lacrimal absent
UNPRESERVED OR NOT KNOWN FOR LEPTOCLEIDUS
Moderately large; > 5 m Overall length of 2 m, based on skull
length 310 mm
Head 15 per cent of overall length*
5 teeth in lower jaw symphysis < 7 teeth in symphysis*
Symphysis spatulate/elongate Symphysis shape not known
Neck 28-32 vertebrae Neck at least 24 vertebrae
Presacral vertebrae 58 Presacral count not known
Neck 25 per cent overall length Neck length not known
*—possible autapomorphies for rhomaleosaurids
autapomorphies for Rhomaleosaurus and its close allies are the possession of
dorsomedian foramina between the facial processes of the premaxillae and
dorsomedian troughs on the anterior faces of the articulars and prearticulars,
allied with strong descending flanges on the postorbital bars.
(b) The eight gross differences noted between the two genera might all be
considered the result of the time difference between the two; six of these are
concerned with the reaction of the skull to feeding stresses (Taylor 19925). In
jpn ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Leptocleidus, the extension of the vertex is seen as allowing a slip of the
external adductor muscles (mame) to grow slightly longer, and hence add to the
speed of closure of the jaw. The lack of a boss on the lateral ramus of the
pterygoid, and reduction of the pterygoid flange, indicates that the gullet was
being opened up to enhance the speed of ingestion of food (cf. Pliosaurus—
Taylor & Cruickshank 1993). The weakening of the skull in this region against
lateral forces, as a result of that process, has been partially compensated for by
the deepening of the ventral flange on the postorbital bar, and the change in
proportions of the postorbital and postfrontal bones. This is associated with the
development of the footplate on the postorbital, where it overlaps the jugal and
squamosal; the maxilla is already known to have overlapped the jugal-—-
squamosal junction by the Lower Jurassic (Cruickshank 1994a). As far as the
teeth are concerned, there is a tendency for them to lose their ornament on the
outer (buccal) surfaces, and to adopt a triangular section (Tarlo 1960). In
addition the smaller, posterior teeth tend to become recurved, or hooked, to aid
passing prey down the throat. Leptocleidus has teeth with unornamented buccal
surfaces, and has slightly recurved small (?posterior) teeth, but they retain a
circular section. In these ways it is advanced over Rhomaleosaurus, but only
slightly. The lack of accessory grooves on the anterior palate—the significance
of which is unknown—is a difference from Rhomaleosaurus (Cruickshank et al.
1991) and the reduced exposure of the parasphenoid on the palate is similar to
the condition in the Plesiosauroidea, and may be a size-related factor.
(c) Other size-related factors are the skull length-to-width ratios and the number
of teeth in the upper jaw. It is believed that the smaller animal would naturally
have a relatively ‘wider’ skull than the larger, and with less space, the upper
jaw at least would have fewer teeth.
(d) A character of unknown validity is the lack of an observed lacrimal in
Leptocleidus, bearing in mind its occurrence even in late Jurassic forms (Taylor
1992b; Taylor & Cruickshank 1993; Cruickshank 1994a).
(e) Characters that cannot be commented on with certainty are those which are
missing or which cannot be calculated, such as the relative size of the head in
Leptocleidus, the number of teeth in its lower jaw symphysis, its count of neck
vertebrae, the total number of presacrals and the relative length of its neck.
However, circumstantial evidence can be brought to bear to indicate that all
these characters are most likely to be ‘rhomaleosaurid’ in character.
Another point of significance is that Leptocleidus capensis was recovered
from sediments with freshwater foraminifers—probably lagoonal or close
inshore in character (McMillan in press). The animal was about the size of a
seal, and may have lived very much in the same way, hunting fish and other
modest-sized prey in the inshore zone of a shallow sea.
Other localities which have yielded ‘non-marine’ plesiosaurs include Ber-
wick Brick Pit, Sussex, England, Wealden (= Barremian) (L. superstes—
Andrews 1922), near Mount Morgan Copper Mine, Queensland, Australia,
Lower Jurassic (Leptocleidus cf. L. superstes—Bartholomai 1966; Molnar
1982), south-eastern Australia, Lower Cretaceous (isolated teeth and ribs—Rich
et al. 1989), Coober Pedy, South Australia, Lower Cretaceous (Leptocleidus cf.
L. superstes—Ritchie 1991), Nanning, Kwangsi, China, Lower Cretaceous
LOWER CRETACEOUS PLIOSAUR FROM SOUTH AFRICA 223
(Sinopliosaurus fusinensis—Hou et al. 1975) and Bishopliosaurus also from the
Chinese Lower Jurassic. The Antarctic record includes elasmosaurids and
cryptoclidids from Late Cretaceous nearshore marine and coastal-deltaic
sediments (Chatterjee & Small 1989).
The probability is that some pliosauroids, perhaps the smaller species at
least, were exploiting the inshore habitat (Hudson 1966) and this would explain
the apparent anomaly of a conventionally marine group having such a strong
freshwater character. One can speculate that the (less advanced) representatives
of the original pliosauroid stock were forced under competition to seek refuge in
a relatively protected environment in the inshore shallows, whereas their
replacements worked their way into the resulting vacant niches. One other area
of mystery in the plesiosaurs is the lack of juveniles in the fossil record.
Perhaps these inshore records reflect the result of unsuccessful egg-laying
forays up rivers or on to sandbars?
SUMMARY & CONCLUSIONS
The skull of the pliosauroid plesiosaur Plesiosaurus capensis Andrews,
1911, from the uppermost Valanginian (Lower Cretaceous) Algoa Basin, South
Africa, is figured and redescribed.
Plesiosaurus capensis shares many of its characters with Leptocleidus
superstes Andrews, 1922, from the Barremian of the Weald Basin, England,
and therefore can be ascribed to the latter genus, as suggested by Persson
(1963). The name therefore becomes Leptocleidus capensis (Andrews, 1911).
Both these forms seems similar to undescribed Lower Cretaceous pliosaur-
oids from Australia. Leptocleidus is close to and may be derived from the
Lower Jurassic Rhomaleosaurus Seeley, 1874.
All three Lower Cretaceous forms come from lagoonal, or very shallow,
close inshore, marine facies.
A brief review of the literature shows that several plesiosaurian finds are
from freshwater facies in both Jurassic and Cretaceous age sediments.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
It is my pleasure to acknowledge the help of the following individuals and
organizations: Dr M. A. Raath, Port Elizabeth Museum, for drawing my
attention to the specimen; Drs M. A. Cluver, G. M. King, R. M. H. Smith, and
Mrs J. Goodall and S. Kaal, for hospitality and assistance while working at the
South African Museum; Ian McLachlan for kindly providing accommodation in
Cape Town, without which I could not have completed this project; and finally
the Royal Society of London for travel and subsistence funds.
224 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
REFERENCES
ANDREWS, C. W. 1910-1913. A descriptive catalogue of the marine reptiles of the Oxford
Clay. Parts I and 2. London: British Museum (Natural History).
ANDREWS, C. W. 1911. Description of a new plesiosaur (Plesiosaurus capensis, sp. nov.)
Hom the Uitenhage Beds of Cape Colony. Annals of the South African Museum 1:
ANDREWS, C. W. 1922. Description of a new plesiosaur from the Weald Clay of Berwick
(Sussex). Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society of London 78: 285-295.
BARTHOLOMAI, A. L. 1966. The discovery of plesiosaurian remains in freshwater sediments
in Queensland. Australian Journal of Science 28 (11): 437-438.
Brown, D. S. 1981. The English Upper Jurassic Plesiosauroidea (Reptilia) and a review of
the phylogeny and classification of the Plesiosauria. Bulletin of the British Museum
(Natural History) (Geology) 35: 253-347.
Brown, D. S. 1994. A taxonomic revision of the families Cryptoclididae and
Elasmosauridae (Reptilia: Plesiosauroidea). Révue de Paléobiologie Special volume 7:
9-16.
Brown, D. S. & CRUICKSHANK, A. R. I. 1995. The skull of the Callovian plesiosaur
Cryptoclidus eurymerus, and the sauropterygian cheek. Palaeontology 37: 937-941.
CRUICKSHANK, A. R. I. 1994a. Cranial anatomy of the Lower Jurassic pliosaur
Rhomaleosaurus megacephalus (Stutchbury) (Reptilia: Plesiosauria). Philosophical
Transactions of the Royal Society of London (series B) 343: 247-260. |
CRUICKSHANK, A. R. I. 1994b. A juvenile plesiosaur (Plesiosauria: Reptilia) from the
Lower Lias (Hettangian: Lower Jurassic) of Lyme Regis, England: a pliosauroid-
plesiosauroid intermediate? Zoological Journal of the Linnean Society of London 112:
151-178.
CRUICKSHANK, A. R. I., SMALL, P. G. & TayLor, M. A. 1991. Dorsal nostrils and
hydrodynamically driven underwater olfaction in plesiosaurs. Nature, London 352:
Evans, M. 1993. The neck in plesiosaurians. Unpublished M.Sc. thesis, University
College, University of London.
Hou, LIAN-HI, YEH, HSIANG-KAEI & ZHAO, XI-JIN. 1975. Fossil reptiles from Fusui,
Kwangshi. Vertebrata Palasiatica 13: 23-33.
Hupson, J. D. 1966. High Miller’s Reptile Bed and the Mytillus shales, Middle Jurassic,
Isle of Eigg, Scotland. Scottish Journal of Geology 2: 265-281.
McLACHLAN, I. R. & MCMILLAN, I. K. 1976. Review and stratigraphic significance of
southern Cape Mesozoic palaeontology. Transactions of the Geological Society of South
Africa 79: 197-212.
McMILLAN, I. K. (in press). The foraminifera of the Late Valanginian to Hauterivian (Early
Cretaceous) Sundays River Formation of the Algoa Basin, Eastern Cape Province, South
Africa. Annals of the South African Museum.
MassarRE, J. M. 1987. Tooth morphology and prey preference of Mesozoic marine
reptiles. Journal of Vertebrate Paleontology 7: 121-137.
Mo.Lnar, R. E. 1982. A catalogue of fossil amphibians and reptiles in Queensland.
Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 20: 613-633.
MoLnarR, R. E. 1984. Palaeozoic and Mesozoic reptiles and amphibians from Australia.
In: ARCHER, M. & CLAYTON, G. eds. Vertebrate zoogeography and evolution in
Australia: 000-000. Carlisle, WA: Hesperian Press.
PERSSON, P. O. 1963. A revision of the classification of the Plesiosauria, with a synopsis of
the stratigraphical and geographic distribution of the group. Lunds Universitets Arsskrift
(2) 59: 1-60.
RicH, T. H., RicH, P. V., WAGSTAFF, B., MCEWEN-Mason, J., DouTHITT, C. B. &
Grecory, R. T. 1989. Early Cretaceous biota from the northern side of the Australo-
Antarctic rift valley. In: CRAME, J. A. ed. Origins and evolution of the Antarctic
biota. Special Publication. Geological Society of London 47: 121-130.
RiTcHiE, A. R. 1991. Return of the great sea monsters. Australian Natural History 23:
538-545.
Rocers, A. W. & Du Toit, A. L. 1909. An introduction to the geology of the Cape
Colony. London: Longmans, Green.
LOWER CRETACEOUS PLIOSAUR FROM SOUTH AFRICA 225
Rocers, A. W. & SCHWARZ, E. H. L. 1901. Appendix 1. Report on the survey of parts of
the Uitenhage and Port Elizabeth divisions. Annual Report of the Geological
Commission of the Cape of Good Hope for 1900: 1-18.
Storrs, G. W. & TAyLor, M. A. 1993. Cranial anatomy of a plesiosaur from the Triassic/
Jurassic boundary of Street, Somerset, England. Journal of Vertebrate Paleontology 13
(3): S9A. ;
STROMER, E. 1935. Ergebnisse der Forschungsreissen Prof. E. Str6mer in den Wiisten
Agyptens. 2. Wirbeltierreste der Baharije-Stufe (unteres Cenoman). 15. Plesiosauria.
Abhandlungen der Bayerischen Akademie der Wissenschaften (N.F.) 26: 1-55.
TARLO, L. B. H. 1960. A review of the Upper Jurassic pliosaurs. Bulletin of the British
Museum of Natural History (Geology) 4: 147-189.
TAYLOR, M. A. 1987. How tetrapods feed in water: a functional analysis by paradigm.
Zoological Journal of the Linnean Society of London 91: 171-195.
TAYLOR, M. A. 1992a. Taxonomy and taphonomy of Rhomaleosaurus zetlandicus
(Plesiosauria, Reptilia) from the Toarcian (Lower Jurassic of the Yorkshire coast.
Proceedings of the Yorkshire Geological Society 49: 49-55.
TAYLOR, M. A. 1992b. Functional anatomy of the head of the large aquatic predator
Rhomaleosaurus zetlandicus (Plesiosauria, Reptilia) from the Toarcian (Lower Jurassic)
of Yorkshire, England. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London
(series B) 335: 247-280.
TAYLOR, M. A. & CRUICKSHANK, A. R. I. 1993. Cranial anatomy and functional
morphology of Pliosaurus brachyspondylus (Reptilia: Plesiosauria) from the Upper
Jurassic of Westbury, Wiltshire. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of
London (series B) 341: 399-318.
WELLES, S. P. & Grecc, D. R. 1971. Late Cretaceous marine reptiles of New Zealand.
Records of the Canterbury Museum 9: 1-111.
ABBREVIATIONS
(USED IN TEXT AND FIGURE CAPTIONS)
a angular gl glenoid fossa
alv anterior interpterygoid vacuity in internal naris
ar articular j jugal
ars anterior ramus of the squamosal lgr longitudinal groove on dentary
atrc anterior transverse crest of the ling lingual surface of tooth
glenoid fossa Irpt lateral ramus of pterygoid
bo basioccipital mame? m. adductor mandibulae externus
bs basisphenoid mpst? m. pseudotemporalis
buc buccal surface of tooth mto mature tooth
c coronoid no notch
car carina of tooth nuch? origin of nuchul ligament
ce coronoid eminence orb orbit
ch channel p parietal
cl cleft pra prearticular
cond occipital condyle pal palatine
cr crest palv primary alveolus
d dentary pfo parietal foramen
dep depression piv posterior interpterygoid vacuity
dia diastema pmx __ premaxilla
dmc dorsomedian crest po postorbital
dmfo dorsomedian foramen pob postorbital bar
dmt dorsomedian trough pof postfrontal
drs dorsal ramus of the squamosal pofp _ footplate to postorbital
ec ectopterygoid ppr paroccipital process
en external naris prf prefrontal
fac facial process of the premaxilla ps parasphenoid
fr frontal psc parasagittal crest
226 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
pt pterygoid salv secondary alveolus
ptf pterygoid flange sof suborbital fenestra
ptrc posterior transverse crest to sp splenial
glenoid sq squamosal
q quadrate stf subtemporal fenestra
qrpt quadrate ramus of the pterygoid tf temporal fenestra
rap retroarticular process Vv vomer
rto replacement tooth vx vertex
sa surangular 1-35 tooth positions
Mechanical stipple—matrix; horizontal lines—openings in skull; diagonal lines—broken or
eroded bone.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed
by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov.,
etc. The name of the taxon should be followed, without intervening punctuation, by the author’s name
(not abbreviated) and the year of publication; a comma must separate author’s name and year. The
author’s name and date must be placed in parentheses if a species or subspecies is transferred from its
original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must be separated from the
scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be either according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order,
with all references to that name following in chronological order (see example 1), or according to
chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the year is placed in front of each entry, and the
synonym repeated in full for each entry (see example 2). The author should adopt one style or the
other throughout a paper.
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Example 1
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example: comma separates author's name and year; semicolon separates more than
one reference by the same author; full stop separates references by different authors; figures of Pee are enclosed in
parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures; dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers.
Example 2
1845 Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, p. 37.
1856 Leda plicifera A. Adams, p. 50.
1859 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, p. 118, pi. 228 (fig. 73).
1861 Nucula largillierti Philippi, p. 87.
1871 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould): Sowerby, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
1950 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nickles, p. 163, fig. 301.
1955 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, p. 110.
1964 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Barnard, p. 234, figs 8-9.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens
mentioned in the original description are to be designated allotype (if applicable) and/or paratypes;
additional material not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data
(registration number, depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype
and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype. SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s
Beach, Port Elizabeth (33°51°S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text, e.g. ‘. . . the Figure depicting
C. namacolus .. .’, or *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10). . .’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded by initials or full
names: e.g. Du Toit, but A. L. du Toit: Von Huene, but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary. Reference to the author should
preferably be expressed in the third person. Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except
when forming part of the title of a book or article, e.g. ‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII.
Amphipoda.’. A specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its
abbreviation to initial capital letter (except at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph), provided the
Same generic name is used consecutively. The name of new genus or species should not be included
in the title; it should be included in the abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet
the requirements of Biological Abstracts.
8. GENERAL. Once referees’ reports have been received by the editor, these will be discussed by the
editorial committee. If the paper is considered acceptable after minor or major revision, the reports
will be forwarded to the author who must then thoroughly revise in accordance with the referees’
Suggestions. Final acceptance of the revised manuscript will be considered by the editorial committee.
In the case of major revision being necessary, the committee reserves the right to consult one or more
referees regarding the revised manuscript.
ARTHUR R. I. CRUICKSHANK
A LOWER CRETACEOUS PLIOSAUROID
FROM SOUTH AFRICA —
Y
VOLUME 105 PART 3 FEBRUARY 1997 ISSN 0303-2515
———— an
‘OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of: title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of
new genera or species; Author’s(s’) name(s); address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out);
number of illustrations and tables
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary (if paper is lengthy)
(g) Acknowledgments
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
3. MANUSCRIPT should be typed, double spaced with adequate margins. Four copies should be
provided. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of figure captions should be
typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are centred small capitals;
second subheadings are shouldered small capitals; third subheadings are shouldered italics; fourth sub-
headings are indented, shouldered italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration
(never roman numerals) of headings and abbreviations. Footnotes should be avoided unless they are
short and essential. All generic and specific names should be underlined or italicized.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12.5 x 18.5 cm (19.5 cm including
caption); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated in pencil on the reverse of the
figure; originals larger than 36 x 48 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular
in shape and final size. The size of illustrated objects may be indicated by a metric scale on the figure
(if appropriate), or the enlargement or reduction should be given in the caption; if the latter, then the
final reduction or enlargement should be taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not
printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items
of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; labelling on all figures should be non-serif
lettering (e.g. Helvetica, Univers) of uniform style, in lower-case whenever possible, and of appropri-
ate size taking into account the final size. The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil
on the back of each illustration, together with an indication of the desired reduction or enlargement.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the
paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) described...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) described...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year; pagination indicated by colon, not p. (except in synonymies, see
example 2); names of joint authors connected by ampersand; et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names
of all authors given in list of references.
(b)Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within
each name, with suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in
that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 1969) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal articles give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scientific periodicals.
4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses (if pagination
discontinuous), pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88:
100-140.
FISCHER, P. H., DUVAL, M. & RAFFY, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines.
Archives de zoologie expérimentale et générale 74: 627-634. :
KOHN, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Annals and Magazine of Natural History (13) 2: 309-320. ;
KOHN, A. J. 1960b. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bulletin of the Bingham Qceanographic Collection, Yale University 17 (4): 1-51. 7
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungreise im westlichen und zentralen Stid Afrika ausgefihrt in den
Jahren 1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16:
269-270.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 105 Band
February 1997 Februarie
Part) 43% «Deel
<> <B>
BO”
Aoyip NOVI pn
ON THE AFFINITIES OF
MADAGASCARITES ANDIMAKENSIS
COLLIGNON, 1966,
AND ALLIED UPPER CRETACEOUS
HETEROMORPH AMMONITES
By
H. C. KLINGER
&
W.J. KENNEDY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles,
revisions and review articles in anthropology, archaeology, palaeontology,
geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology, and marine and freshwater
biology.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in
part, with material from the collections of the South African Museum. Other
contributions are also considered provided at least one of the authors is a staff
member of the Museum. In the case of descriptions of new species not already
part of the Museum's collections, the holotype and, if possible, part of the
paratype series must be deposited in the South African Museum. Authors whose
contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Committee prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper
accepted is published as a separate part at irregular intervals as material becomes
available; parts are priced individually.
Editorial committee
Dr P. A. Hulley (Chairman) Dr H. C. Klinger Elizabeth Louw (Editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000 South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Publications Office.
OUT OF PRINT
1, 21-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 4(), 5-3, 5, 7-9), 6(1, 2, t.-—p.i.),
71-4), 8, 90-2) 7), 10123), 110-2,,5, 7, pu), 1adesyeda 5)
24(2, 5), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 45(1), 49(1), 67(5, 11), 84(2)
ISBN 0 86813 1709
D5224
Printed in South Africa by
The Rustica Press (Pty) Ltd,
Old Mill Road, Ndabeni, Cape
ON THE AFFINITIES OF MADAGASCARITES ANDIMAKENSIS
COLLIGNON, 1966, AND ALLIED UPPER CRETACEOUS
HETEROMORPH AMMONITES
By
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
Division of Earth Sciences, South African Museum, Cape Town
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Geological Collections, University Museum, Oxford
(With 17 figures)
[MS accepted 19 August 1996]
ABSTRACT
Coiling in the Santonian heteromorph ammonite genus Madagascarites Collignon, 1966
(type species M. andimakensis Collignon, 1966), was originally compared to that of
Nipponites Yabe, 1904. This is shown to be incorrect. Hyphantoceras ingens Collignon,
1966, is regarded as a synonym of M. andimakensis. Material from the Turonian of Japan
ascribed to the genus Madagascarites clearly does not belong to this genus and is referred to
Ryuella gen. nov., with Madagascarites ryu Matsumoto & Muramoto, 1967, as type species.
Heteroceras amapondense van Hoepen, 1921, which was also tentatively referred to
Madagascarites, is here referred to Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) subgen. nov. of which
it is the type species.
CONTENTS
PAGE
EEECERTIIONS ATIC CISCUSSIONS 3.20.00. 20c0cecseseeccecnccencscccssoectnerscccdedccesssss 221
RE eee re Nec eG oe ode cu sccceawehiedacen adcacnmeececsides copie sac cuwettos 246
oe he oki cuits bork veetyldnd vciawt od winnie oncaideectavhs slecmonuncistincdoodienseuses 246
SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTIONS AND DISCUSSIONS
We (Klinger & Kennedy in prep.) are at present revising the Upper
Cretaceous heteromorph ammonites from Zululand described by Klinger (1976)
on the basis of additional and new material. Our views on the systematics and
phylogeny of these heteromorphs will be discussed fully in this revision. For the
present we restrict ourselves to the affinities of the poorly known genus
Madagascarites Collignon, 1966, and allied forms.
The genus Madagascarites Collignon, 1966, with type species Madagas-
carites andimakensis Collignon, 1966 (p. 26, pl. 465 (figs 1897-1898)) from the
Middle Santonian of Madagascar was introduced (Collignon 1966: 26) as
follows: ‘MADAGASCARITES ANDIMAKENSIS nov. gen. nov. sp. G.T. Il s’agit
d’une Ammonite a déroulement aussi désordonné que celui de Nipponites
. mais en différant par |’ornamentation, puisque Nipponites n’a pas des cétes
tuberculées.
227
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 105 (3), 1997: 227-247, 17 figs.
228 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Ici, les cOtes serrées, annulaires, minces et tranchantes, sont groupées par
5-7 environ, et sont encadrées de cétes 4 boucles a 4 tubercules, comme chez
Hyphantoceras ingens nov. sp. Mais les cétes 4 boucles commencement dés le
début et ne sont pas limitées a la chambre d’habitation. Le mode de déroulement
est aussi bien différent et permet, 4 mon sens, de séparer ces divers
échantillons, celui d’Antsoha se rattachent naturellement 4 Hyphantoceras, au
moins pour le moment, car des séries d’exemplaires de toutes tailles pourraient
peut-étre permettre de les rattacher les uns aux autres dans le genre Madagas-
carites qui serait alors caractérisé aussi bien par son ornamentation que par son
mode particulier de déroulement.’
Fig. 1. Madagascarites andimakensis Collignon, 1966. The holotype, from the Middle
Santonian, zone of Texanites hourcqi at gisement 734, Sud Ambiky (Belo sur Tsiribihina),
Madagascar. This specimen cannot, at present, be traced in the collections of the Université
de Bourgogne in Dijon. x 1.
ON THE AFFINITIES OF MADAGASCARITES ANDIMAKENSIS 229
According to Collignon’s diagnosis, Madagascarites thus has (irregular)
coiling as in Nipponites, but ornament throughout as on the body chamber of
Hyphantoceras ingens.
Apart from the holotype, Collignon (1966: 26, pl. 465 (fig. 1898)) figured a
second specimen consisting of part of a helical whorl and the succeeding,
ascending body chamber.
Several questions have to be addressed:
1. The relationship between Madagascarites and Nipponites.
2. The relationship between Madagascarites andimakensis and Hyphantoceras
ingens.
3. Affinities with Hyphantoceras.
4. The identity of Madagascarites ryu Matsumoto & Muramoto, 1967.
5. The affinities of Hyphantoceras (Madagascarites?) amapondense (van
-~Hoepen).
Fig. 2. Madagascarites andimakensis Collignon, 1966. The holotype, from the Middle
Santonian, zone of Texanites hourcqi at gisement 734, Sud Ambiky (Belo sur Tsiribihina),
Madagascar. This specimen cannot, at present, be traced in the collections of the Université
de Bourgogne in Dijon. x 1.
230 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The holotype of Madagascarites andimakensis has two early whorls, which
are situated at an angle to each other (Figs 1-4). Having examined the holotype,
Klinger (1976: 71) suggested that this may be due to post-mortem fracture of the
Shell; the totally crushed, ascending body chamber may confirm this. These
early whorls suggest helical coiling, either contiguous or slightly separated, and
are succeeded by a final helical whorl and an ascending body chamber that
reaches at least to the top of the early whorls—a mode of coiling analogous to
that of the Upper Campanian genus Anaklinoceras Stephenson, 1941.
Fig. 3. Madagascarites andimakensis Collignon, 1966.
Line drawing based on Figure 1. x 1.
Unfortunately, the holotype of M. andimakensis cannot, at present, be
located in the Collignon collection at Dijon (J.-H. Delance—pers. comm.
31 August 1994). When last seen and photographed by Klinger in 1973, it was
displayed in General Collignon’s study. We suspect that it may have been
misplaced during the transfer of the Collignon collection to Dijon. However,
another specimen (757), with a label in Collignon’s handwriting and which
ON THE AFFINITIES OF MADAGASCARITES ANDIMAKENSIS 231
identifies it as Madagascarites andimakensis (Figs 5-6A), is present amongst
the undescribed material at Dijon. This specimen is much smaller than the
holotype and lacks the early whorls. The last part of the phragmocone is poorly
preserved and tubercles, if present, are either very weak or absent. Tubercles
are only prominent on the ascending part of the body chamber.
Fig. 4. Madagascarites andimakensis Collignon, 1966.
Line drawing based on Figure 2. x 1.
1. As discussed above, the preserved early whorls of the holotype of Madagas-
carites andimakensis suggest a helical mode of coiling in the early, but not
earliest, part of the phragmocone, and ends in a final helical whorl, followed by
an ascending body chamber, which may embrace the helical phragmocone.
Coiling in well-preserved Nipponites is very distinctive, consisting of a series of
U-shaped sections, comparable to the sutures on a tennis ball, and ends in a
looped or U-shaped body chamber, suspended below the phragmocone
(Okamoto 1989; herein Fig. 7). The genus is thus far only known from the
Middle Turonian to Lower Coniacian with records from Japan, Saghalien,
Kamchatka and Oregon (see Matsumoto 1977). Similarities between the coiling
of Madagascarites and Nipponites, as suggested by Collignon (1966: 26),
cannot be sustained.
232 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
B
Fig. 5. Madagascarites andimakensis Collignon, 1966. Undescribed specimen from
the Middle Santonian, zone of Texanites hourqi at gisement 757, km 8500 Coupe S.
Beantaly, Souromarinaro (Belo sur Tsiribihina), Madagascar. A. View from top,
looking down on ascending part of body chamber. B. Lateral view, with ascending
part of body chamber pointing upwards. Both x 1.
ON THE AFFINITIES OF MADAGASCARITES ANDIMAKENSIS 233
2. Madagascarites andimakensis and Hyphantoceras ingens have identical body
chamber ornament. This consists of several simple, non-tuberculate ribs
separating looped ribs with four rows of tubercles. According to Collignon
(1966: 26), these looped, quadrituberculate ribs already occur on the early
whorls of M. andimakensis but only appear on the body chamber of H. ingens.
Both species are dated as Middle Santonian, but the types are from different
localities. However, we have a specimen (SAM-GMC737, Fig. 6B-C)
identified as H. ingens by General Collignon from the same locality as the
figured paratype of M. andimakensis. Hyphantoceras ingens and M. andi-
makensis are thus, in part at least, coeval. The early whorls of H. ingens are not
known, but the last part of the body chamber of the holotype (Fig. 8) and
specimen SAM-GMC737 (Fig. 6B-C) show signs of an upward curvature,
suggesting a final mode of coiling similar to that of M. andimakensis.
The holotype of H. ingens (Fig. 8) is nearly twice the size of that of the
holotype of M. andimakensis (Figs 1-4). SAM-GMC737 (Fig. 6B-C) shows
indications of the onset of upward coiling of the body chamber at a diameter
similar to that of the holotype of M. andimakensis. On the other hand, the third
specimen of M. andimakensis (Figs 5, 6A) is only about one-half the size of the
holotype.
These observations suggest that the holotype of H. ingens is merely a large
form of Madagascarites andimakensis. In addition, the third, and smallest
specimen of M. andimakensis appears to lack tubercles on the phragmocone—a
feature originally thought to be characteristic of Hyphantoceras ingens.
We believe H. ingens and Madagascarites andimakensis to be synonyms, as
suggested earlier (Klinger & Kennedy 1977: 79) and, as first revising authors,
select the name andimakensis for the species. Thus interpreted, M. andi-
makensis shows a wide range in adult size, some specimens being twice as large
as others, presumably a reflection of dimorphism. In addition, the ontogenetic
stage at which ornament changes (from uniform simple ribbing to simple ribs
separating periodic quadrituberculate major ribs) is quite variable.
3. Hyphantoceras, as interpreted in terms of the type species Hyphantoceras
reussianum (d’Orbigny, 1850) (see Kaplan & Schmid 1988; Metzdorf 1993, for
full reviews) (Figs 9, 16D), has flared quadrituberculate ribs throughout and we
would prefer to retain this name for those ornamented forms with helical
coiling, a low apical angle, and a retroversal body chamber.
Madagascarites can probably be derived from Hyphantoceras on the basis
of the common presence of flared quadrituberculate ribs. An origin could be
less probably sought in Schlueterella of the group of S. compressus Klinger,
Fig. 6 (see overleaf). A. Madagascarites andimakensis Collignon, 1966. Undescribed
specimen from the Middle Santonian of gisement 757 at km 8500 Coupe S. Beantaly, Souro-
marinara (Belo sur Tsiribihina), Madagascar. Lateral view, showing last part of helical
phragmocone whorl and ascending part of body chamber at top. B-C. Undescribed specimen
of Hyphantoceras ingens SAM-GMC733, ex Collignon collection, from the Middle
Santonian, zone of Texanites hourcqi at gisement 733, Coupe d’Ambikity, Andimaka (Belo
sur Tsiribihina), Madagascar, the same locality as the paratype of M. andimakensis Collignon
(1966, pl. 465 (fig. 1898)). All x 1.
Fig. 7 (see overleaf). Nipponites mirabilis (Yabe). Cast of specimen figured by Matsumoto
(1977, pl. 56 (fig. 1)), GK H5846 from locality T1022p, Saku-gakko-no-sawa, Saku area,
Hokkaido. x 1.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
234
Fig. 6
ON THE AFFINITIES OF MADAGASCARITES ANDIMAKENSIS
235
Fig. 7
236 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 8. The holotype of ‘Hyphantoceras ingens’ Collignon, 1966, from the Middle
Santonian, zone of Texanites hourcqi at gisement 230, Ansoha (Antsalova), Madagascar.
x 0:85:
ON THE AFFINITIES OF MADAGASCARITES ANDIMAKENSIS 237
A B C
Fig. 9. Hyphantoceras reussianum (d’Orbigny, 1850). Cast of the original of Schliter
(1876, pl. 32 (fig. 18)). Unregistered specimen in the collections of the Geological and
Palaeontological Institute, Gottingen, Germany. x 1.
1976, of the Lower Santonian. The quadrituberculate ornament of the latter (see
especially Immel ef al. 1982: 25, pl. 9 (fig. 3), pl. 10 (figs 1-4), pl. 11 (fig. 3))
is remarkably similar to that of M. andimakensis, although the modes of coiling
are quite different.
4. Matsumoto & Muramoto (1967: 362, pl. 19 (fig. 3), pl. 22 (fig. 1), pl. 23
(figs 1-4)) described Madagascarites ryu from the uppermost Turonian of
Hokkaido. The species (Figs 10-11) has coiling as in Nipponites bacchus
Matsumoto & Muramoto, 1967, with the major part of the shell consisting of U-
shaped sections, terminating in a hook-shaped body chamber suspended below
the early part of the shell. Tanabe et al. (1981) showed details of coiling in
M. ryu, especially of the early growth of the shell, which include an initial
straight shaft (Fig. 11). But instead of simple ribbing as in Nipponites, M. ryu
has quadrituberculate major ribs and finer intermediary ribs (Figs 10-11). It is,
in fact, a Nipponites with Hyphantoceras-like ornamentation, and not a rep-
resentative of Madagascarites. We presume that Madagascarites ryu arose from
238 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Hyphantoceras in a manner analogous to that of Nipponites from Eubostrycho-
ceras japonicum (Yabe, 1904), as suggested by Okamoto (1989: 133). Apart
from differences in coiling, there is a considerable time gap between Late
Turonian Madagascarites ryu and Middle Santonian M. andimakensis. We
regard them as heterochronous homoeomorphs in terms of ornament (but not
coiling) and do not consider them to be congeneric.
We here propose the genus Ryuella gen. nov. for this Japanese species, with
type species Madagascarites ryu Matsumoto & Muramoto, 1967. The diagnosis
is as follows: coiling in major part of phragmocone as in Nipponites, consisting
Fig. 10. Ryuella ryu (Matsumoto & Muramoto, 1967). Plaster cast of a paratype
figured by Matsumoto & Muramoto (1967, pl. 23 (fig. la-c)), Muramoto collection
9100B, from the uppermost Turonian, zone of Reesidites minimus at Ikushumbets,
Hokkaido. x 1.
ON THE AFFINITIES OF MADAGASCARITES ANDIMAKENSIS 239
a Be ec B
Fig. 11. Ryuella ryu (Matsumoto & Muramoto, 1967). A. Sketch of
phragmocone showing typical Nipponites-like coiling. Scale = 10 mm.
B. Sketch of early stage of ontogeny. Scale = 5 mm.
Both after Tanabe er a/. 1982, text-fig. 4.
Fig. 12 (see overleaf). Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) amapondense (van Hoepen, 1921).
A-C. SAM-4820, the specimen described and figured by Woods (1906: 340, pl. 44
(fig. 3a-c)) as Hamites (Anisoceras). E-F. Cast of the holotype, Transvaal Museum
collections, both from an unspecified horizon at the type locality of the Mzamba Formation
at the Mzamba River Estuary, probably uppermost Santonian or basal Campanian.
D. Specimen labelled Hyphantoceras ex Collignon collection from the Santonian of
gisement 147-148, Mitraiky, north of Manimbilo, Madagascar.
All x 1.
Fig. 13 (see overleaf). A-C. Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) amapondense (van Hoepen,
1921). SAM-PCZ7328 from locality 105, Zululand, St Lucia Formation, Campanian I.
All x 1.
Fig. 14 (see overleaf). A. Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) amapondense (van Hoepen,
1921). Catalogue and locality data as in Figure 13. B-—C. Eubostrychoceras (E.) auriculatum
(Collignon, 1965). SAM-GMC335 from the lower Coniacian at gisement 335, Beantaly
(Belo sur Tsiribihina), Madagascar.
All x 1.
Fig. 15 (see overleaf). A-E. Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) amapondense (van Hoepen,
1921). A-B. SAM-PCZ12881 (ex H126E/1) from Bed E, locality 105, Zululand,
St Lucia Formation, Campanian I. C-D. SAM-PCZ12882 (ex Cape of Good Hope
Geological Commission collection) from an unspecified horizon at the type locality of
the Mzamba Formation at the Mzamba River Estuary, probably uppermost Santonian or
basal Campanian. E. ‘Allocrioceras’ sp. SAS-Z2071. Latex peel showing hamitid early
irregular whorls and part of body chamber with bituberculate flared ribs. From an
unknown horizon at locality 105.
All x1.
240 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 12 =
ON THE AFFINITIES OF MADAGASCARITES ANDIMAKENSIS
241
Fig. 13
242 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
BRS
3
PRY
x
i
y
Fig. 14
243
ON THE AFFINITIES OF MADAGASCARITES ANDIMAKENSIS
iyi
‘dd dediie
on te
Ki, & {
Fig: 15
244 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A B Cc D
Fig. 16. ‘Allocrioceras’ sp., SAM-Z2071 from locality 105, Zululand, St Lucia Formation,
uppermost Santonian or basal Campanian. Note the distinct bituberculate flared ribs. x 1.
of an initial straight shaft, followed by a helical whorl and a series of closely
connected U-shaped sections, ending in a retroversal body chamber hook. Orna-
ment as in Hyphantoceras with major quadrituberculate ribs and intermediary,
fine, non-tuberculate ribs. The genus is thus far only known from the Upper
Turonian of Hokkaido.
It differs from Nipponites by the Hyphantoceras-like ornament, and from the
latter genus by its distinctive coiling.
5. Klinger (1976: 71, pl. 32 (fig. 5a-b), pl. 33 (figs 2-3), text-fig. 10d-e)
identified Van Hoepen’s (1921: 17, pl. 4 (figs 1-2)) Heteroceras amapondense
from the uppermost Santonian and basal Campanian of Pondoland and Zululand
as Hyphantoceras (Madagascarites?) amapondense. The lower Campanian
Madagascan species described as Anaklinoceras? stephensoni by Collignon
(1969: 50, pl. 532 (fig. 2096)) was regarded as a synonym of the former.
Klinger’s reasons for this identification were that the ascending body chamber of
H. amapondense was reminiscent of that of Madagascarites, whereas the orna-
mentation of the late growth stage with periodic flared ribs, was reminiscent of
Hyphantoceras. This tentative generic and subgeneric designation was followed
by Summesberger (1979, 1980), Lewy (1983), Klinger (1985), Immel (1987),
Kennedy & Cobban (1991) and Wright (1996).
Comparison with the type species of Hyphantoceras and Madagascarites
shows that Heteroceras amapondense belongs to neither genus. It
lacks the quadrituberculate ornament of both; instead, it has Hamites- or
Eubostrychoceras-like ornament on the early whorls, with periodic flared ribs
appearing at later growth stages. Klinger (1976: 72) stated that well-preserved
H. amapondense had flared ribs with two rows of fine tubercles and that the
ON THE AFFINITIES OF MADAGASCARITES ANDIMAKENSIS 245
early whorls showed irregular coiling (e.g. Klinger 1976, pl. 33 (figs 2-3))
(herein Fig. 15E). Newly collected specimens of H. amapondense show that
this is not so. Coiling in the early stages of H. amapondense is helical (see
Lewy 1983, figs 4-6), and the flared ribs never bear tubercles. Fragments with
tuberculate, flared ribs and irregular early whorls that occur with H. amapona-
ense were regarded as late Upper Santonian or basal Campanian representatives
Fig. 17. A-C. Eubostrychoceras (Amapondella) amapondense (van Hoepen, 1921).
A. Specimen labelled ‘Hyphantoceras’, SAM-GMC252, ex Collignon collection from
gisement 252, Coupe de Bevaho (Belo sur Tsiribihina), Lower Campanian, Zone
of Anapachydiscus wittekindi and Eulophoceras jacobi. B. SAS-Z1455 from locality 105,
Zululand, St Lucia Formation, uppermost Santonian or basal Campanian. C. SAM-
PCP6890 from bed 7 at locality 1, the type section of the Mzamba Formation, Santonian III.
D. SAM-PCZ12883 Hyphantoceras reussianum (d’Orbigny, 1850) from the abandoned
limestone quarry Annelise near Bad Rothenfelde, northern Germany. All x 1.
246 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
of Allocrioceras by Cooper (1994: 362). Whether these are indeed Allocrioceras
or Santonian—Campanian homoeomorphs is impossible to tell at this time. Some
fragments (Fig. 15E) consist of hamitid early whorls and planispiral later whorls
as in some Didymoceras, e.g. Didymoceras binodosum (Kennedy & Cobban
(see Cobban & Kennedy in press). The early whorls of H. amapondense differ
in no significant respects from those of Eubostrychoceras species, and we
interpret it as a late subgenus of the latter characterized by the development of
flared ribs and a distinctive coiling of the body chamber at maturity.
We here propose the subgenus Amapondella, with type species Heteroceras
amapondense van Hoepen, 1921. The diagnosis is as follows: major part of
phragmocone coiled in a low helix with the whorls touching or slightly
impressed; the body chamber curves upwards and embraces the flanks and apex
of the helix. Early ornament consists of uniform ribbing only; later ornament
has intercalated, flared ribs and occasional constrictions. The stage at which the
flared ribbing starts appearing is quite variable; in some it may appear on the
very early parts of the helix. Variation in size is probably due to dimorphism. It
is known from the Upper Santonian of south-west France, Israel, Austria,
Mississippi, Upper Santonian and Lower Campanian Pondoland and Zululand,
offshore south coast of Natal, and Lower Campanian of Madagascar. Eubostry-
choceras auriculatum (Collignon, 1965) (Fig. 14B-C) is possibly a related form
in that it acquires flared ribs on the body chamber, but it has an acute apical
angle and lacks the ascending body chamber of Amapondella amapondensis.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We thank Professors J. Thierry and J.-H. Delance (Dijon) for access to the
collections of the late General M. Collignon. General Collignon kindly donated
some of the material figured here to Klinger during a visit to Moirans in 1973.
Financial aid to Klinger from the Foundation for Research Development, South
Africa, and to Kennedy from the Natural Environment Research Council,
United Kingdom, are gratefully acknowledged. Samantha Black and Ingrid
Klinger helped with the illustrations and photography. For critical comments we
thank Dr Zeev Lewy, although we disagree on a number of points.
REFERENCES
CoBBAN, W. A. & KENNEDY, W. J. in press. Campanian (Late Cretaceous) Ammonites
from the Bergstrom Formation in Central Texas. Bulletin. United States Geological
Survey. Shorter Contributions to Paleontology and Stratigraphy 1994.
COLLIGNON, M. 1965. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) 13.
Coniacien. Tananarive: Service Géologique.
CoLLiIGNoN, M. 1966. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) 14.
Santonien. Tananarive: Service Géologique.
COoLLIGNON, M. 1969. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) 15.
Campanien inférieur. Tananarive: Service Géologique.
Cooper, M. R. 1994. Towards a phylogenetic classification of the Cretaceous ammonites.
Iv. Phlycticriocerataceae. Neues Jahrbuch fiir Geologie und Paldontologie.
Abhandlungen 194: 361-378.
HoepeNn, E. C. N. vAN.. 1921. Cretaceous Cephalopoda from Pondoland. Annals of the
Transvaal Museum 8 (1): 1-48.
IMMEL, H. 1987. Die Kreideammoniten der nérdlichen Kalkalpen. Zitteliana 15: 3-163.
ON THE AFFINITIES OF MADAGASCARITES ANDIMAKENSIS 247
IMMEL, H., KLINGER, H. C. & WIEDMANN, J. 1982. Die Cephalopoden des Unteren Santon
der Gosau von Brandenberg/Tirol, Osterreich. Zitteliana 8: 3-32.
KAPLAN, U. & SCHMID, F. 1988. Die heteromorphen Ammoniten der Gattungen
Eubostrychoceras and Hyphantoceras aus dem Turon NW-Deutschlands. Geologie und
Paldontologie in Westfalen 12: 47-87.
KENNEDY, W. J. & CoBBAN, W. A. 1991. Upper Cretaceous (upper Santonian) Boehmo-
ceras fauna from the Gulf Coast region of the United States. Geological Magazine 128:
167-189
KENNEDY, W. J. & CoBBAN, W. A. 1993. Campanian ammonites from the Annona Chalk
near Yancy, Arkansas. Journal of Paleontology 67: 83-97.
KLINGER, H. C. 1976. Cretaceous heteromorph ammonites from Zululand. Memoirs.
Geological Survey, Republic of South Africa 69: 1-142.
KLINGER, H. C. 1985. Upper Cretaceous Cephalopoda from offshore deposits off the Natal
south coast, South Africa. Palaeontologia africana 26 (1): 1-12.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1977. Upper Cretaceous ammonites from a borehole
near Richard's Bay, South Africa. Annals of the South African Museum 72 (5): 69-107.
Lewy, Z. 1983. A well-preserved Upper Santonian heteromorph ammonite from Israel.
Current Research, Geological Survey of Israel 1982, 1983: 24-27.
Matsumoto, T. 1977. Some heteromorph ammonites from the Cretaceous of Hokkaido.
Memoirs of the Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (series D, Geology) 23 (3):
303-366.
MATsuMoTo, T. & MuRAMOTO, T. 1967. Two interesting heteromorph ammonoids from
wee of the Faculty of Science, Kyushu University (series D, Geology) 18
(2): 361-
METZDoRF, R. 1993. Die innerartliche Variationsbreite von Hyphantoceras reussianum
(d’ Orbigny, 1850) aus dem Bereich des Hyphantoceras-Event (Ober-Turonium) von
Halle/Westf. und dem Ostwestfalendamm (Bielefeld). Bericht des Naturwissen-
schaftlichen Vereins, Bielefeld und Umgegend 34: 177-215.
OKAMOTO, T. 1989. Comparative morphology of Nipponites and Eubostrychoceras
(Cretaceous nostoceratids). Transactions and Proceedings of the Palaeontological
Society of Japan (new series) 154: 117-139.
ORBIGNY, A. D’. 1850. Prodrome de Paléontologie stratigraphique universelle des animaux
mollusques et rayonnés 2. Paris: Masson.
STEPHENSON, L. W. 1941. The larger invertebrate fossils of the Navarro Group of Texas
(exclusive of corals and crustaceans and exclusive of the fauna of the Escondido
Formation). Bulletin. University of Texas, Austin 4101: 1-641.
SUMMESBERGER, H. 1979. Eine obersantone Ammonitenfauna aus dem Becken von Gosau
(Ober6sterreich). Annalen des Naturhistorischen Museums in Wien 82: 109-176.
SUMMESBERGER, H. 1980. Neue Ammoniten aus der Sandkalkbank der Hochmooschichten
(Obersanton; Gosau, Osterreich). Annalen des Naturhistorischen Museums in Wien 83:
275-283.
TANABE, K., OBATA, I. & FUTAKAMI, M. 1981. Early shell morphology in some upper
Cretaceous heteromorph ammonites. Transactions and Proceedings of the
Palaeontological Society of Japan (new series) 124: 215-234.
WRIGHT, C. W., with CALLOMAN, J. H. & HowarTH, M. K. 1996. Treatise on
Invertebrate Paleontology. Part L. Mollusca 4. Revised. Volume 4: Cretaceous
Ammonoidea. (revised). Boulder, Colorado and Lawrence, Kansas: The Geological
Society of America and The University of Kansas.
YABE, H. 1904. Cretaceous Cephalopoda from Hokkaido: 2. Turrilites, Helicoceras,
Heteroceras, Nipponites, Olcostephanus, Desmoceras, Hauericeras, and an
undetermined genus. Journal of the College of Science, Imperial University of Tokyo 20
(2): 1-45.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed
by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov.,‘sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov.,
etc. The name of the taxon should be followed, without intervening punctuation, by the author’s name
(not abbreviated) and the year of publication; a comma must separate author’s name and year. The
author’s name and date must be placed in parentheses if a species or subspecies is transferred from its
original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must be separated from the
scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be either according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order,
with all references to that name following in chronological order (see example 1), or according to
chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the year is placed in front of each entry, and the
synonym repeated in full for each entry (see example 2). The author should adopt one style or the
other throughout a paper.
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Example 1
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: SO.
Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example: comma separates author’s name and year; semicolon separates more than
one reference by the same author; full stop separates references by different authors; figures of plates are enclosed in
parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures; dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers.
Example 2
1845 Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, p. 37.
1856 Leda plicifera A. Adams, p. 50.
1859 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, p. 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73).
1861 Nucula largillierti Philippi, p. 87.
1871 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould): Sowerby, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
1950 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nickles, p. 163, fig. 301.
1955 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, p. 110.
1964 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Barnard, p. 234, figs 8-9.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens
mentioned in the original description are to be designated allotype (if applicable) and/or paratypes;
additional material not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data
(registration number, depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype
and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype. SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s
Beach, Port Elizabeth (33°51°S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text, e.g. ‘. . . the Figure depicting
C. namacolus ...’, or *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10). . .’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded by initials or full
names: e.g. Du Toit, but A. L. du Toit; Von Huene, but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary. Reference to the author should
preferably be expressed in the third person. Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except
when forming part of the title of a book or article, e.g. ‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII.
Amphipoda.’. A specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its
abbreviation to initial capital letter (except at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph), provided the
Same generic name is used consecutively. The name of new genus or species should not be included
in the title; it should be included in the abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet
the requirements of Biological Abstracts.
8. GENERAL. Once referees’ reports have been received by the editor, these will be discussed by the
editorial committee. If the paper is considered acceptable after minor or major revision, the reports
will be forwarded to the author who must then thoroughly revise in accordance with the referees’
suggestions. Final acceptance of the revised manuscript will be considered by the editorial committee.
In the case of major revision being necessary, the committee reserves the right to consult one or more
referees regarding the revised manuscript.
KLINGER, H. C.
&
KENNEDY, W. J.
ON THE AFFINITIES OF
MADAGASCARITES ANDIMAKENSIS
COLLIGNON, 1966,
AND ALLIED UPPER CRETACEOUS
HETEROMORPH AMMONITES
MARCH 1998 ISSN 0303-2515
ITHSONTAR
MAY 0 8 i998
LIBRARIES
OF THE SOUTH
AFRICAN.
MUSEUM
CAPE ‘TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced with
3 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of captions for
illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All pages should be num-
bered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small capitals;
second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered italics. Further
subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals) of headings and
abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking up
should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
caption); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated (and preferably uniform); orig-
inals larger than 35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and
final size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the caption; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be taken
into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not
printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items
of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of figures is not set in type and
should be in lower-case letters. If Letraset is used authors are requested to use Helvetica-style letter-
ing, if possible.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the
paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes... .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes. . .”
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927) .. .’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...”
Note: no comma separating name and year
pagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within
each name, with suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in
that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 1969b) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scientific periodicals. 4th ed.
London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses, pagination (first and
last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
Bu LouGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FiscHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88 (3): 100-140.
FiscHer, P. H., Duvat, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archives de zoologie
expérimentale et générale 74 (33): 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon. Annals and
Magazine of Natural History (13) 2 (17): 309-320.
Koun, A. J. 1960b. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean. Bulletin of
the Bingham Oceanographic Collection, Yale University 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. Jn: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische und anthro-
pologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika ausgefiihrt in den Jahren
1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 105 Band
March 1998 Maart
Part 4 Deel
FOUR NEW SPECIES OF POLYCHAETA FROM
SUBANTARCTIC MARION ISLAND
By
MARGO L. BRANCH
Cape Town Kaapstad
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles,
revisions and review articles in anthropology, archaeology, palaeontology,
geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology, and marine and freshwater
biology.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in
part, with material from the collections of the South African Museum. Other
contributions are also considered provided at least one of the authors is a staff
member of the Museum. In the case of descriptions of new species not already
part of the Museum's collections, the holotype and, if possible, part of the
paratype series must be deposited in the South African Museum. Authors whose
contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Committee prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper
accepted is published as a separate part at irregular intervals as material
becomes available; parts are priced individually.
Editorial committee
Dr P. A. Hulley (Chairman) Dr H. C. Klinger Elizabeth Louw (Editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000 South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Publications Office.
OUT OF PRINT
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 31-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 4), 5-3, 5, 7-9), 6(ln 2 tee
71-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 100-3), 11@=2, 5, 7, tpi). 14023), 16a
24(2, 5), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 45(1), 49(1), 67(5, 11), 84(2)
ISBN 0 86813 171 7
D6360
Printed in South Africa by
The Rustica Press
Old Mill Road, Ndabeni, Cape
FOUR NEW SPECIES OF POLYCHAETA FROM
SUBANTARCTIC MARION ISLAND
By
MARGO L. BRANCH
Zoology Department, University of Cape Town, Rondebosch, South Africa
(With 5 figures)
[MS accepted 17 August 1995]|*
ABSTRACT
Four new species of Polychaeta are described from Subantarctic Marion Island.
Orbiniella dayi sp. nov. (family Orbiniidae) occurs from mid-tide levels to depths of 15 m
and is separated from Orbiniella minuta Day, 1954, from Tristan da Cunha, by its larger size
and the presence of a small post-setal lobe to the parapodia. Scolelepis marionis sp. nov.
(family Spionidae) was buried up to 0.5 m in sandy substrata in shallow subtidal depths. It is
closely related to Scolelepis lamellicincta Blake & Kudenov, 1978, from Australia, but can
be distinguished by its notosetae, which are all capillaries, and neurosetae of bifid hooded
hooks that occur from setigers 42-46 and posteriorly. Malmgreniella fimbria sp. nov. (family
Polynoidae) is tentatively placed in the genus Malmgreniella, but the presence of a sixteenth
pair of elytra distinguishes the species and requires an expansion of the definition of the
genus. Malmegreniella fimbria was dredged from a depth of 410-644 m between Marion and
Prince Edward islands. Lanice marionensis sp. nov. (family Terebellidae) was previously
referred to as Lanice flabellum. Lanice marionensis sp. nov. occurs at depths of 5-475 m on
soft sediments.
CONTENTS
PAGE
IPE RO cs ata a nin k aide Md nd aunlSie MRM nic ARM See Oe ae eae 249
NER icici bg iad Gisie aw siecnibain.d bsad ais) whe nw deeds Gar eoaa eRe cer oad ee aAON 250
REE ARETE MD NI ros SL Sriclars wid ig sas dmee memmaan Me maaseee Nem acnmenmaths sane en ase 262
8 TES ag ee Ls ae eee Be ee ae 262
INTRODUCTION
The polychaete fauna of Subantarctic Marion and Prince Edward islands
(MPE) (46°54’S 37°45’E) has been sampled by a number of expeditions.
The benthos of these isolated volcanic islands was first sampled by the
H.M.S. Challenger expedition in 1873 and McIntosh (1885) reported on the
11 polychaete species collected. Further collections were made by dredging
from Discovery II in 1935 (Monro 1936). Day (1971) reported on 25 species
and De Villiers (1976) conducted a thorough study of the intertidal community,
finding 21 species of polychaetes. The French ship Marion Dufresne sampled
249
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 105 (4), 1998: 249-265, 5 figs.
* The original manuscript was submitted in February 1994. Although the names of the new
species were used in another paper by Branch (1994), the present paper provides the formal
descriptions of the new taxa.
250 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the offshore benthos during its MD/08 expedition in 1976 and listed 77 species
from Marion, Prince Edward and Crozet islands (Gillet 1991). During 1982-89,
the University of Cape Town undertook an extensive dredging programme
(Branch ef al. 1993) and, in 1988, a quantitative SCUBA diving survey to a depth
of 15 m at three sites (Beckley & Branch 1992). D. Glassom examined the
intertidal beach fauna in 1989 (unpublished data).
The author has analysed these recent collections and provided illustrated
keys to the 90 species of polychaetes now recognized from Marion and Prince
Edward islands, as well as data on species abundance and distribution (Branch
1994). The collections described included three polychaete forms that could not
be assigned to any known species and are therefore described here as new
species. A fourth species, previously referred to as Lanice flabellum, is also
described as new. Lanice flabellum was originally described from empty tubes
and its exact type locality is unknown. As a result the present specimens cannot,
with certainty, be attributed to that species.
SYSTEMATICS
Order ORBINIIDA
Family Orbiniidae Hartman, 1942
Orbiniella Day, 1954
Orbiniella dayi sp. nov..
Fig. 1
Orbiniella minuta Day, 1971: 386 (non Day, 1954). Beckley & Branch, 1992: 558.
Material examined
Holotype. SAM-A21273: specimen 5 mm long x 0.4 mm wide, 35 seg-
ments, from Bullard’s Bay, Marion Island at 5 m depth, collected by SCUBA
diving by L. Beckley on 10 April 1988.
Paratypes. SAM-A21393: 2 specimens, 3 mm and 5 mm long, from the
same sample as the holotype.
Other material. SAM-A21364: from Transvaal Cove, Marion Island under
rocks at mid-tide level, collected by N. Fuller, January 1965 (Day 1971).
SAM-A21272: 3 specimens from Cabbage Point, Marion Island, collected with
SCUBA at 5 m depth by G. M. Branch. |
Several hundred specimens from Transvaal Cove, Bullard’s Bay and Trypot
Point, collected by SCUBA at 5, 10 and 15 m depths by L. Beckley in April 1988
(unsorted collection).
Etymology
Named dayi after Professor J. H. Day from the University of Cape Town,
who was well known for his significant contributions to marine biology in
southern Africa and particularly for his work on polychaetes.
NEW SPECIES OF POLYCHAETA FROM MARION ISLAND 7p)
0.1 ane SUE Rees! Seeeneceee Sal | 0.01
Fig. 1. Orbiniella dayi sp. nov., holotype, 5 mm. A. Entire worm. B. Head and
anterior six segments. C. Posterior end, ventral view. D. Anterior parapodium,
post-setal lobe arrowed. E. Notoseta. F. Posterior parapodium. G. Notoseta.
H. Capillary neuroseta. I. Neurosetal hook. Scales in mm.
Description (of holotype)
Body length 5 mm, width 0.4 mm, 35 segments, separated by deep inter-
segmental constrictions. White in alcohol. Prostomium bluntly triangular with
rounded tip and no eyes or appendages. Proboscis not extrusible. First two
segments asetigerous. Following setigerous segments separated from one
another by deep intersegmental constrictions. Gills absent. Parapodia form
lateral ridges near the anterior margin of each segment with a small foliose post-
setal lobe, largest at the origin of the notosetae (Fig. 1D). Anterior 10 segments
shorter and broader than the posterior segments, which are slightly biannular.
Four or five notosetae project from the upper margin of the anterior parapodia,
which is elongated to form a small posterior lobe. Notosetae crenulate capil-
laries with distinct teeth and long curved tapering tips. Notosetae of posterior
segments similar but shorter. Neurosetae arise from the lower edge of the
parapodial ridge. Anterior neurosetae similar to the notosetae but posterior
neurosetae are of two types, one or two inferior simple acicular setae, which are
short, stout and blunt-tipped, and two or three crenulate setae, which become
progressively shortened posteriorly. Pygidium simple with a small terminal slit.
Not gravid.
252 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
Orbiniella minuta Day, 1954, from Tristan da Cunha, is smaller and the
parapodia are reduced to a simple parapodial ridge, whereas O. dayi sp. nov.
has distinct parapodial lobes posterior to the notosetae. Orbiniella aciculata
Blake, 1985, from the Galapagos rift at 2730 m depth, has prominent acicular
spines in both the noto- and neuropodia. Orbiniella nuda Hobson, 1974, from
off British Columbia, has several acicular spines and capillaries in the neuro-
podia and lacks the small post-parapodial lobe of O. dayi. Orbiniella uniformis
Hartman, 1967, from Anverse Island, Antarctic Peninsula, was described as
being exceedingly plain and unadorned; it is of similar size to O. dayi with
similar setae, but the segments are uniannulated throughout and there are no
post-setal lobes to the parapodia.
Distribution
Subantarctic Marion Island, intertidal to 15 m depth. A quantitative SCUBA
survey by Beckley at depths of 5, 10 and 15 m on rocky substrata at Transvaal
Cove, Bullard’s Bay and Trypot Point produced a total of several hundred
specimens of Orbiniella dayi at all three stations and depths, with up to
75 specimens.m~ at 5 m depth at Bullard’s Bay (Beckley & Branch 1992).
Order SPIONIDA
Family Spionidae Grube, 1850
Scolelepis Blainville, 1828
Type species. Lumbricus squamatus Miller, 1806, by monotypy.
Remark
Blainville’s (1828) diagnosis of this genus has been revised and emended by
various authors (e.g. Pettibone 1963: 91; Blake & Kudinov 1978: 175).
Scolelepis marionis sp. nov.
Fig. 2
Material
Holotype. SAM-A21254: incomplete specimen, 43 mm long x 6 mm wide,
73 segments, from sandy shore at Ship’s Cove, Marion Island, buried to depth
of 0.5 m in shallow sub-tidal depths; collected by D. Glassom in April 1989.
Paratypes. SAM-A21392: 6 incomplete specimens, anterior regions only;
70 setigers, 45 mm x 6 mm; 63 setigers, 35 mm x 5 mm; 33 setigers, 33 mm
<x 7 mm; 35 setigers, 25 mm x 6 mm; 14 setigers, 10 mm x 5 mm; I1 seti-
gers, 7 mm x 3 mm width; from the same sample as the holotype.
Etymology
Named marionis after the French navigator, Marion Dufresne, who
discovered Marion Island, the type locality.
NEW SPECIES OF POLYCHAETA FROM MARION ISLAND JES.)
: J
E en stele
F 1 H |
Fig. 2. Scolelepis marionis sp. nov., holotype, 43 mm. A. Anterior end, dorsal
view. B. Anterior end, lateral view. C. Dorsal view of head caruncle with palps
removed. D. Neurosetal hook from posterior setiger. E. Setiger 10. F. Setiger 33.
G. Setiger 50. H. Capillary neuroseta. I. Notoseta. J. Detail of notoseta.
Scales in mm.
Description (of holotype)
Body very regular, firm, vermiform, rectangular in cross section, incom-
plete anterior region, length 45 mm, width 5-6 mm, 73 segments. Body regions
not marked except by shape of parapodia. Red-brown in alcohol. Prostomium
projects anteriorly to narrow point and extends posteriorly as narrow, attached
lobe (caruncle) between the palps. Caruncle bears two pairs of small eyes
laterally and obscured by anterior base of palps. Proboscis unarmed, with a
ventral cushion. Peristomium well developed with lateral wings partially over-
lapping the prostomium. A pair of large grooved palps arise dorsally from the
posterior margin of the peristomium, extending back to the seventeenth segment
with a lateral membrane at the base.
254 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Setiger 1 reduced with a leaf-like dorsal lamella and rounded ventral
lamella. Dorsal gills from setiger 2. Dorsal lamellae from setiger 2, swollen,
foliose, folded over the dorsal body, branchia fused along the outer margin of
each lamella for whole length, except near the tip where the free lamella is
narrow and pointed. Post-setal neuropodial lamellae in the anterior region form
a single rounded lobe, swollen and foliose. Neuropodial lamellae increase in
size posteriorly and become notched at about segment 30, and after segment 41
are bilobed with a long, narrow inter-ramal lamella and a small, rounded ventral
lamella. There are low, swollen presetal ridges. Notosetae all capillaries in the
anterior setigers, about 40 in two to three groups. From setiger 60 the numbers
diminish to about 20-30, in two groups, those in the dorsal group are longest,
0.6 mm, ventral setae to 0.5 mm. Anterior neurosetae similar to notosetae,
about 40. From setiger 42 three hooded hooks appear in the neuropodia and
increase to about 9-11 by setiger 70. Hooded hooks bilobed with a smooth,
circular, funnel opening to the hood. It is still uncertain if there are hooded
hooks also in the far posterior notopodia. Pygidium unknown.
Remarks
Scolelepis marionis sp. nov. is closely related to S. lamellicincta Blake &
Kudenov, 1978, from Australia. The structure of their parapodia is very
similar, especially with the presence of long inter-ramal lamellae in the middle
and posterior segments. This feature separates these two species from all the
other species (see Audouin & Milne Edwards 1833; Mesnil 1896; Day 1967;
Blake & Kudenov 1978; Blake 1983). The two species are distinguished by their
setae: S. marionis has bifid hooded hooks from setiger 42-46 increasing from
3 to 11 per ramus, and the notosetae are all capillaries. Scolelepis lamellicincta
has unidentate hooded hooks from setiger 25-38 with only 5-6 to a ramus, and
has hooded hooks in notopodia from setigers 75-80. The posterior lobe, or
caruncle, of the prostomium in S. marionis is a flat and slender triangle about
1 mm thick, whereas that of S. lamellicincta is a blunt lobe that projects from
the surface. Scolelepis eltaninae Blake, 1983, from the Antarctic Ocean, has
triangular inter-ramal lamellae and an occipital tentacle.
Order PHYLLODOCIDA
Family Polynoidae Malmgren, 1867
Subfamily Harmothoinae Willey, 1902
Malmgreniella Hartman, 1967
Type species. Malmgreniella dicirra Hartman, 1967: 37, pl. 11A—-D, by
monotypy.
Remark
Hartman’s (1967) diagnosis of this genus was emended by Pettibone (1993:
9-10).
NEW SPECIES OF POLYCHAETA FROM MARION ISLAND 25
Malmgreniella fimbria sp. nov.
Fig. 3
Material
Holotype. SAM-A21346: body 50 mm long, 20 mm wide for 40 segments,
from Marion Island, dredged from Station 44, 46°40.58’S 37°50.20’E, 410-
644 m depth, on rocky substrata, collected by D. Gianakouras on 3 September
1988.
Etymology
From the Latin fimbria (fringe)—an allusion to the ventral cirrus that carries
a dense fringe of hairs.
Description (of holotype)
Body entire, length 50 mm, width 20 mm, 46 segments. Dorsum smooth
and convex, ventrum with a deep neural groove, otherwise smooth. Elytrae
16 pairs on segments 2, 4, 5 and 7 then alternate segments until 23, 26, 29, 32
and 33, and last 13 segments with dorsal cirri only. Elytrae subreniform, soft,
fleshy and almost smooth apart from a few microtubercles on the posterior
region. Elytrae do not overlap in the mid-dorsum and are not easily shed.
Prostomium bilobed, wider than long with an anterior ‘V’-shaped notch and
anterior lobes produced into cephalic peaks. Two pairs of eyes, anterior pair
large and anterolaterally placed, posterior pair small, close to posterior margin.
Ceratophore of median antenna large, in anterior notch, style missing. Cerato-
phores of single pair of lateral antennae inserted anteriorly, below cephalic
peaks of prostomium, styles short, broad, tapering. Palps large, stout, tapering,
three times length of prostomium. Tentaculophores on segment 1, lateral to
prostomium with a pair of dorsal and ventral slender tentacular cirri, four times
length of prostomium. Antennae and tentacles covered with fine fleshy papillae.
Segment 2, with first pair of elytrophores and small elytrae, biramous
parapodia with long narrow ventral cirrus and a short cirrophore. Remaining
parapodia also biramous but with unusual short, fleshy, curved ventral cirri
covered with a dense mat of long hairs and a short cirrophore; cirrus broad at
the base but with a narrow attenuated tip. Dorsal cirri have a thick, short cirro-
phore and a long fleshy, hairy style, and alternate with elytrae. Notopodia small
with a projection on the lower side. Neuropodia larger with subconical presetal
lobes with digitiform tip and short rounded post-setal lobes. Notosetae form
dorsally radiating bundles in first eight parapodia, absent from most of the
middle parapodia, and present as small bundles in the 13 posteriormost para-
podia; slightly stouter than neurosetae, with simple tips and a few fine lateral
teeth. Neurosetae in two groups, upper and lower, all setae long-shafted with an
expanded terminal third, bifid tips, a very narrow secondary tooth and setal
surface finely serrated.
Remarks
This species exhibits some characters associated with the genera Malm-
greniella Hartman, 1967, Lepidofimbria Hartman, 1967, Subadyte Pettibone,
256 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 3. Malmgreniella fimbria sp. nov., holotype, 50 mm. A. Entire worm. B. Head.
C. Elytra. D. Neuroseta. E. Detail of neuroseta. F. Notoseta. G. Parapodium 6.
H. Elytral parapodium 2. I. Elytral parapodium 17. Scales in mm.
NEW SPECIES OF POLYCHAETA FROM MARION ISLAND 257
1969, Scalisetosus McIntosh, 1885, Austrolaenilla Bergstrom, 1916, and Leucia
Sars, 1863. The genus Malmgreniella Hartman, 1967, was emended by Petti-
bone (1993) to include Malmgrenia and, in the revised diagnosis, the lateral
antennae may be inserted subterminally, subventrally or ventrally. The genus
Malmgreniella was regarded by Fauchald (1977) as belonging to the subfamily
Lepidonotinae Willey, 1902, but Pettibone (1993) considered it a member of the
subfamily Harmothoinae Willey, 1902.
Species of Malmgreniella have 15 pairs of elytrae that are delicate and
almost smooth with microtubercles. They differ from species of Harmothoe, in
which the 15 pairs of elytrae are tough and ornamented. Species of Malm-
greniella have up to 46 segments, the prostomium is bilobed, usually without
distinct cephalic peaks, notosetae are similar in width to neurosetae, which are
bifid, or unidentate, or both. The major difference between the present species
and previously described species of Malmgreniella is that the former have
16 pairs of elytrae, the sixteenth pair occurring on segment 33, the prostomium
also has cephalic peaks, the anterior pair of eyes are large, and the ventral cirri
are fleshy and fimbriate.
The large eyes and fimbriate ventral cirri of the present species are
characters shared with Lepidofimbria occulata, the only member of the genus
Lepidofimbria Hartman, 1967. It has three ventral papillae on the body segments
and no elytrae were described. However, the prostomium does not have
cephalic peaks and the ceratophores of the antennae are continuations of the
prostomium (characteristic of the subfamily Lepidonotinae). The parapodia are
also different with reduced notopodia, no notosetae and smooth neurosetae with
a smooth unidentate tip. Lepidofimbria occulata was collected at abyssal depths
in the Weddell Sea and described from a disconnected anterior end and six
anteromedian segments.
When considering the feature of 16 pairs of elytrae, five genera of the
subfamily Harmothoinae, each with 16 pairs of elytrae and ventral insertion of
the lateral antennae, were compared with the present species.
In the genus Subadyte Pettibone, 1969, the notosetae and neurosetae have
semilunar pockets of spines, which were not evident in the present material.
In the genus Scalisetosus McIntosh, 1885, the notosetae are much coarser
than the neurosetae; neurosetae are slender and distally entire; and the
notopodia as well as the neuropodia have long presetal lobes, not features of the
present species.
The monotypic genus Leucia Malmgren, 1867 (type species L. nivea (Sars,
1863)), is short bodied; the prostomium has peaks; the elytrae possess large
spiny tubercles; the notosetae are coarser than the neurosetae and serrated; and
the neurosetae are long and slender with unidentate tips and serrated edge—
characters that distinguish this genus from the present specimen.
In the genus Austrolaenilla Bergstr6m, 1916, there are 15-16 pairs of
elytrae; 40-43 segments; ventral cirri are digitate and the ventrum is usually
smooth, notosetae thicker than neurosetae with transverse rows of teeth; neuro-
setae with unidentate or bidentate tips with the distal end penicillate (brush-like).
The present material differed with 45 segments, the ventral cirrus curled, fleshy
and broad, and the neurosetae with bifid tips, not distally penicillate.
258 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
However, M. fimbria does have characters in common with Antinoella
antarctica fulgens (Fauvel, 1936) from Western Antarctica, in which the neuro-
setae are less plumose in their distal ends than in A. antarctica antarctica.
Malmgreniella fimbria has been tentatively placed in the genus Malm-
greniella on the strength of the similarity in the basic structure of the parapodia,
the short antennae, the smooth elytrae and neurosetae with bifid tips, with a
slender secondary tooth. The definition of the genus needs to be expanded to
give the number of elytrae as 15-16 pairs.
Malmgreniella fimbria can be distinguished from other species of Malm-
greniella by the presence of 16 pairs of elytrae, fimbriate ventral cirri and the
large anterior eyes.
Order TEREBELLIDA
Family Terebellidae Grube, 1851
Subfamily Amphitritinae Malmgren, 1866
Lanice Malmgren, 1866
Type species. Nereis conchilega Pallas, 1766: 31, pl. 9 (figs 14-22), by
monotypy.
Remark
Malmgren’s diagnosis (1866) of the genus was revised and emended by
Hutchings & Glasby (1988: 17-18).
Lanice marionensis sp. nov.
Figs 4-5
non Terebella flabellum Baird, 1865: 157, pl. 5 (figs 1-2).
Lanice flabellum (Baird) Gillet, 1991: 368.
Lanice conchilega (non Pallas, 1776) Branch et al., 1993: 29-30.
Material examined
Holotype. SAM-A21205: incomplete specimen 40 mm long x 6 mm wide,
removed from tube, dredged from volcanic ash and rock substrata at 58-85 m
depths, Marion Island, 46°58.6’S 37°45’E, collected by D. Gianakouras,
University of Cape Town survey.
Paratypes. SAM-A21209: two incomplete Sen in tubes dredged
from rocky substrata, Marion Island, 46°41.20’S 37°49’E, UCT survey.
SAM-A20326: one complete specimen 60 mm long x 3 mm wide, 17 thoracic
setigers, 104 abdominal setigers; eight incomplete specimens, Marion Island
46°49.8’S 37°52.2’E; Charcot dredge, collected by P. Gillet, Marion Dufresne
benthos expedition, 1976. SAM-A21207: two complete specimens 50 mm
long x 3 mm wide and 50 mm x 4 mm; 11 incomplete worms 28-42 mm long,
Marion Island, 46°35’S 37°56’E, dredged from 48-50 m depth, UCT survey.
NEW SPECIES OF POLYCHAETA FROM MARION ISLAND 259
D
1 0.01 0.01
Fig. 4. Lanice marionensis sp. nov., holotype, 40 mm. A. Head, ventral view.
B. Head, lateral view. C. Parapodium 14. D. Thoracic notosetae segment 14.
E. Neuroseta, front view, segment 30. F. Neuroseta, side view, segment 30.
Scales in mm.
260 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Other material. SAM-A21204, SAM-A21206, SAM-A21207, SAM-
A21208, SAM-A21210 to SAM-21220 (as Lanice conchilega—see Branch et
al. 1993). From Marion Island in depths of 5-475 m, predominantly on soft
substrata, UCT survey.
Etymology
Named marionensis after Marion Island, the type locality.
Description (of holotype)
Cartilaginous tube, covered with shell fragments and coarse sand. A
characteristic fringe of chitinous filaments extends from the ventral side of the
tube aperture and forms a fan with a narrow base. There is a smooth semi-
circular flap over the dorsal side of the aperture. Body with a swollen thorax,
6 mm wide and slender abdomen 3 mm wide, length over 40 mm, terminal
portion missing. Brown in alcohol. Prostomium compact with numerous
grooved buccal tentacles and a broad projecting ventral lip. Buccal segment with
large, broad ventrolateral lobes that are thick and fleshy and meet at the ventral
base. Segment 2 lacks lateral lobes. Segment 3 with smaller, laterally displaced,
rectangular lateral lobes that extend forward over segment 2 and curl back at the
tip. Gills three pairs on segments 2-4 with short trunks, and many dichotomous
branches. Gills unequal, the first pair on segment 2 being larger.
Notopodia from segment 4, continue for 17 segments. Notosetae consist
of winged capillaries in groups of about 20. Neuropodia from segment 5
(setiger 2), occur on all following thoracic and abdominal segments present.
Fig. 5. Lanice marionensis sp. nov. A. Holotype, 40 mm. Tube anterior end.
B-D. Paratype, 60 mm. B. Posterior abdomen segments 100-104. C. Neuroseta, front
view, segment 100. D. Neuroseta, side view, segment 100. Scales in mm.
NEW SPECIES OF POLYCHAETA FROM MARION ISLAND 261
Uncini initially arranged in single rows, but from seventh uncinigerous thoracic
segment to the last thoracic segment uncini arranged in double rows back to
back (2 x 20-35 per neuropodium). Uncini avicular with a large fang
surmounted by 3-4 rows of smaller teeth arranged with dental formula
MF 3:2:1:5 at thoracic segment 7. The thoracic neuropodial ridges are raised
and glandular but do not extend to the ventral glandular pads. About 20 ventral
glandular pads form a continuous glandular area anteriorly, which tapers to a
glandular streak. Abdominal uncini borne in single row on long pinnules.
Nephridial pore on setigers 3-6 just posterior to the notopodia.
Variation
Some of the larger paratypes had very swollen lateral lobes. The specimen
SAM-A21209 was projecting from the tube showing the orientation of
the ventral fanned extension to the tube in relation to the animal. The most
complete specimen was paratype SAM-A20326 with 17 thoracic setigers and
104 abdominal setigers. The segments became progressively narrower and
shorter to the simple last joint with short paddle-like neuropodia bearing
24 uncini at setigers 25-30 and 12 uncini by setigers 80-90. The uncini were
similar in shape throughout although the posterior abdominal uncini had a dental
formula of MF 2-3 : 4-8 : 4-8. This was not chosen as the holotype as the head
appendages were not as complete.
Large numbers of L. marionensis were collected from the soft substrata
between Marion and Prince Edward islands, consisting of sand, mud and
gravel. Sizes up to about 60 mm with 25-35 mm being common, although most
of them were posteriorly incomplete.
Remarks
The original description of Lanice flabellum (Baird, 1865) was based on
tubes only and the exact type locality is unknown. It is considered to be an
indeterminate name (Hartman 1959; Hutchings pers. comm.). Lanice flabellum
from Australia (Baird 1865) and from East Africa (Ehlers 1908) have similar
tubes but need to be re-examined. Specimens from the Antarctic labelled
L. flabellum present in the British Museum (Natural History) collections may
also prove to be L. marionensis (see Hutchings & Glasby 1988: 18).
As there are no type specimens, only tubes, of L. conchilega (Pallas, 1766),
Hutchings & Glasby (1988) described a specimen of L. conchilega from the type
locality, Netherlands, as having a narrow rectangular lobe on segment three
with a dorsolateral flag-like extension. Hutchings & Glasby (1988) distinguished
the smaller Australian L. bidewa, which has tubes with smooth margins, from
L. conchilega, which has frayed margins.
Day (1967) described L. conchilega from South Africa. Day’s specimen,
SAM-A20350, from South Africa, was examined and compared with
L. marionensis. The tube was also covered with sand and shell fragments but
differed from that of L. marionensis in that it was flattened and expanded at the
opening with fringe extensions on both the dorsal and ventral edge of the
margin, whereas in L. marionensis the fan-like fringe extended only on the
262 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ventral edge of the opening. In SAM-A20350, the ventrolateral flaps on the
buccal segment were longer and more triangular, whereas the flap on segment 3
was broader than in L. marionensis. The thoracic neuropodia were much wider
with 2 rows of 40-50 uncini in raised glandular patches that extended almost to
the ventral pad. The uncini also had fewer teeth. Day’s (1967) specimens
referred to Lanice conchilega may also be a new species and need to be
redescribed, but this is beyond the scope of this paper.
Lanice bidewa Hutchings & Glasby, 1988, from Australia and New Zealand
can be distinguished from L. marionensis by its small size (up to about 20 mm)
and it is colourless when preserved. All pairs of gills are equal in size. The
opening of the tube has smooth margins.
Lanice sinata Hutchings & Glasby (1990), an intertidal species from
Western Australia, is distinguished by the presence of a deep pocket-shaped
sinus formed by a dorsal ridge on segment 4.
Distribution
Subantarctic Marion and Prince Edward islands, 5-475 m depth. Highest
densities occur in the area between the two islands on soft substrata, with an
average of 50 individuals in each dredge sample and many empty tubes.
? Antarctica, ?East Africa.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I would like to thank Di Gianakouras, Dave Glassom, Prof. George Branch
and Dr Lynnath Beckley for the opportunity to work on material collected by
them during the University of Cape Town expeditions. Specimens were also
supplied by Dr P. Gillet from the 1976 survey of the Marion Dufresne. Prof.
Charles Griffiths is thanked for valuable guidance with the description of the
new species. Dr Pat Hutchings gave advice regarding the uncertainties relating
to L. flabellum. | am very grateful to the staff of the Marine Biology unit and
Library at the South African Museum for their patience and help. Funding was
supplied by the South African Steering Committee for Antarctic Research
(SASCAR) and the Department of Environment Affairs.
REFERENCES
AUDOUIN, J. V. & MILNE Epwarps, H. 1833. Classification des annélides et description de
celles qui habtent les cotes de la France. Annales des Sciences naturelles 30: 411-425.
BAIRD, W. 1865. On new tubiculous annelids, in the collection of the British Museum.
Journal of the Linnean Society (Zoology) 8: 341-361.
BECKLEY, L. & BRANCH, G. M. 1992. A quantitative scuBA diving survey of the sublittoral
macrobenthos at sub-antarctic Marion Island. Polar Biology 11: 553-563.
BERGSTROM, E. 1916. Die Polynoiden des schwedischen Siidpolar Expedition 1901-1903.
Zoologiska bidrag fran Uppsala 3: 37-224.
BLAINVILLE, H. DE. 1828. Dictionnaire des Sciences naturelles dans lequel on traite
méthodiquement des differens étres de la nature, considerés soit en eux-mémes, d’aprés
l’état actuel de nos connais sciens, soit relativement a l’utilité qu’en peuvent retirer la
médicine, l’agriculture, le commerce et les arts. Suivé d’une biographie des plus célébres
naturalists 57: 368-501. Paris.
NEW SPECIES OF POLYCHAETA FROM MARION ISLAND 263
BLAKE, J. A. 1983. Polychaetes of the family Spionidae from South America, Antarctica,
and adjacent seas and islands. Biology of the Antarctic Seas XIV. Antarctic Research
Series 39 (3): 205-288.
BLAKE, J. A. 1985. Polychaeta from the vicinity of deep sea hydrothermal vents in the
eastern Pacific. 1. Euphrosinidae, Phyllodocidae, Hesionidae, Nereidae, Glyceridae,
Dorvilleidae, Orbiniidae and Maldanidae. Bulletin of the Biological Society of
Washington 6: 67-101.
BLAKE, J. A. & KUDENOv, J. D. 1978. The Spionidae (Polychaeta) from southeastern
Australia and adjacent areas with a revision of the genera. Memoirs of the National
Museum of Victoria 39: 171-280.
BRANCH, G. M., ATTwoop, C. G., GIANAKOURAS, D. & BRANCH, M. L. 1993. Patterns in
the benthic communities on the shelf of the subantarctic Prince Edward Islands. Polar
Biology 13: 23-34.
BRANCH, M. L. 1994. The Polychaeta from subantarctic Marion and Prince Edward
islands. South African Journal of Antarctic Research 24: 3-52.
Day, J. H. 1954. The Polychaeta of Tristan da Cunha. Results of the Norwegian Scientific
Expedition to Tristan da Cunha, 1937-1938 29: 1-35.
Day, J. H. 1967. A monograph on the Polychaeta of southern Africa. Part 1. Errantia,;
Part 2. Sedentaria. London: British Museum (Natural History).
Day, J. H. 1971. Polychaeta. Jn: VAN ZINDEREN BAKKER, E. M., WINTERBOTTOM, J. M.
& Dyer, R. A. Marion and Prince Edward islands: 384-390. Cape Town: A. A.
Balkema.
De VILLIERS, A. F. 1976. Littoral ecology of Marion and Prince Edward islands (Southern
Ocean). South African Journal of Antarctic Research (Supplement) 1: 1-40.
EHLERS, E. 1908. Die bodensassigen anneliden aus der Sammlungen der deutschen Tiefsee-
Expedition. Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse der Deutchen Tiefsee-Expedition auf dem
Dampfer ‘Valdivia’, 1898-1899 16: 1-167.
FAUCHALD, K. 1977. The polychate worms. Definitions and keys to the orders, families and
genera. Natural History Museum of Los Angeles County. Science Series 28: 1-190.
FAUVEL, P. 1936. Contribution a la faune des Annélides polychetes du Maroc. Mémoires
de la Société des sciences naturelles et physiques du Maroc 43: 1-143.
GILLET, P. 1991. Biogeography and polychaete assemblages from subantarctic islands
(Indian Ocean); Marion Dufresne MD/08 Benthos Expedition to Marion, Prince Edward
and Crozet islands. Bulletin of Marine Science 48 (2): 358-368.
GruBe, A. E. 1850-1851. Die Familie der Anneliden. Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte 16 (1):
249-364.
HARTMAN, O. 1959. Catalogue of the polychaetus annelids of the world, Part 1. Occasional
Papers of the Allan Hancock Foundation 23: 1-226.
HARTMAN, O. 1967. Polychaetous annelids collected by the USNS Eltanin and Staten Island
cruises, chiefly from Antarctic seas. Allan Hancock Monographs in Marine Biology 2:
1-387.
Hopson, K. D. 1974. Orbiniella nuda new species (Orbiniidae) and nine new records of
other sedentariate polychaetous annelids from Washington and British Columbia.
Canadian Journal of Zoology 52: 69-75.
HuTcuincs, P. A. & GLasBy, C. 1988. The Amphitritinae (Polychaeta: Terebellidae) from
Australia. Records of the Australian Museum 40: 1-60.
Hutcuincs, P. A. & GLAsBy, C. 1990. Additional new species of the family Terebellidae
(Polychaeta)from Western Australia, with a key to all described species of the region.
Proceedings of the Third International Marine Biological Workshop, Perth 1: 252-289.
McINTOosH, W. C. 1885. Annelida Polychaeta. Report on the Scientific Results of the
voyages of H.M.S. Challenger during the years 1873-76 (Zoology) 12: 1-554.
MALMarREN, A. J. 1866. Nordiska Hafs-Annulater. Ofversigt af K. Vetenskapsakademiens
fordhandlingar. Stockholm 22: 355-410.
MALMGREN, A. J. 1867. Annulata Polychaeta Spetsbergiae, Groenlandiae, Islandiae et
Scandinaviae hactenus cognita. Ofversigt af K. Vetenskapsakademien fordhanglingar.
Stockholm 24: 127-255.
264 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
MESNIL, F. 1896. Etudes de morphologie externe chez les annélides. I. Les spionidiens des
cétes de la Marche. Bulletin scientifique de la France et de la Belgique 29: 110-287.
Monro, C. C. A. 1936. Polychaete worms. II. Discovery Report 12: 59-198.
MULLER, O. F. 1806. Zoologica Danica seu Animalium Daniae et Norvegiae rariorum ac
minus nototum, Descriptiones et Historia. Havniae.
PALLAS, P. S. 1766. Miscellanea Zoologica quibus novae imprimis atque obscurae
animalium species describunture et observationibus iconibusque illustrantur. Hague
Comitum 12: 1-224.
PETTIBONE, M. H. 1963. Revision of some genera of polychaete worms of the family
Spionidae, including the description of a new species of Scololepis. Proceedings of the
Biological Society of Washington 76: 89-104.
PETTIBONE, M. H. 1969. Review of some species referred to Scalisetosus McIntosh
(Polychaeta, Polynoidae). Proceedings of the Biological Society of Washington 82:
1-30.
PETTIBONE, M. H. 1993. Scaled polychaetes (Polynoidae) associated with ophiuroids and
other invertebrates and review of species referred to Malmgrenia McIntosh and replaced
by Malmgreniella Hartman, with descriptions of new taxa. Smithsonian Contributions to
Zoology 538: 1-92.
Sars, M. 1863. Geologiske og zoologiske iagttagelser, anstillede paa en reise 1 en deel af
Trondhjems Stift i sommeren 1862. Nyt magasin for naturvidenskapene 12: 253-340.
WILLEY, A. 1902. Polychaeta. In: Report on the collections of natural history made in the
Antarctic regions during the voyage of the ‘Southern Cross’ 12: 252-283.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature (particu-
larly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed
by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov.,
ctc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening punctuation
and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s name and year. The
author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a species or subspecies is trans-
ferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must be separated
from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published scientific
names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order, with all
references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nickles, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers.
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the year is
placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens
mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material not regarded
as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number, depository, descrip-
tion of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach, Port Eliza-
beth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. ‘. . . the Figure depicting C. namacolus .. .’: ‘. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...”
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded by
initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L. du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should preferably be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a book or
article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation to initial
capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively. The generic name should
not be abbreviated at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title; it should be included in the abstract,
counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of Biological Abstracts.
MARGO L. BRANCH
FOUR NEW SPECIES OF POLYCHAETA
FROM SUBANTARCTIC MARION ISLAND
~ VOLUME 105 PART 5 JULY 1998 ISSN 0303-2515
| AH
SG7x
Nd
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of: title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of
new genera or species; Author’s(s’) name(s); address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out);
number of illustrations and tables
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary (if paper is lengthy)
(g) Mckiowlesamens
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
3. MANUSCRIPT should be typed, double spaced with adequate margins. Four copies should be
provided. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of figure captions should be
typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are centred small capitals;
second subheadings are shouldered small capitals; third subheadings are shouldered italics; fourth sub-
headings are indented, shouldered italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration
(never roman numerals) of headings and abbreviations. Footnotes should be avoided unless they are
short and essential. All generic and specific names should be underlined or italicized.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12.5 x 18.5 cm (19.5 cm including ©
caption); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated in pencil on the reverse of the
figure; originals larger than 36 x 48 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular
in shape and final size. The size of illustrated objects may be indicated by a metric scale on the figure
(if appropriate), or the enlargement or reduction should be given in the caption; if the latter, then the
final reduction or enlargement should be taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not
printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items
of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; labelling on all figures should be non-serif
lettering (e.g. Helvetica, Univers) of uniform style, in lower-case whenever possible, and of appropri-
ate size taking into account the final size. The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil
on the back of each illustration, together with an indication of the desired reduction or enlargement.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the
paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) described . . .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) described...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year; pagination indicated by colon, not p. (except in synonymies, see
example 2); names of joint authors connected by ampersand; ef al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names
of all authors given in list of references.
(b)Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within
each name, with suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in
that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 1969) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal articles give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scientific periodicals.
4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses (if pagination
discontinuous), pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation) |
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88:
100-140.
FISCHER, P. H., DUVAL, M. & RAFFY, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines.
Archives de zoologie expérimentale et générale 74: 627-634.
KOHN, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Annals and Magazine of Natural History (13) 2: 309-320. ;
KOHN, A. J. 1960b. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bulletin of the Bingham Qceanographic Collection, Yale University 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungreise im westlichen und zentralen Stid Afrika ausgefiuhrt in den
Jahren 1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16:
269-270.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 105 Band
July 1998 Julie
Part 5 Deel
<2 S
Sour wow WS
PHYLOGENETIC IMPLICATIONS OF THE
EXISTENCE OF TWO MODERN GENERA OF
BATHYERGIDAE (MAMMALIA, RODENTIA)
IN THE PLIOCENE SITE OF LANGEBAANWEG
(SOUTH AFRICA)
By
CHRISTIANE DENYS
Cape Town Kaapstad
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles,
revisions and review articles in anthropology, archaeology, palaeontology,
geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology, and marine and freshwater
biology.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in
part, with material from the collections of the South African Museum. Other
contributions are also considered provided at least one of the authors is a staff
member of the Museum. In the case of descriptions of new species not already
part of the Museum's collections, the holotype and, if possible, part of the
paratype series must be deposited in the South African Museum. Authors whose
contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Committee prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper
accepted is published as a separate part at irregular intervals as material becomes
available; parts are priced individually.
Editorial committee
Dr P. A. Hulley (Chairman) Dr H. C. Klinger Elizabeth Louw (Editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000 South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Publications Office.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://nv1.samuseum.ac.za/collect/infosci/pub/prclist.htm
OUT OF PRINT
1, 20423, 5=8), 3(1-2, 445, 8 t.-p.1.), 4(1)) 5(1=3, 5) 729) Gi 2am
71-4), 8, 90-2, 7), 10@=3), 110-2 5.7. tps 143) Ges:
24(2, 5), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 45(1), 49(1), 67(5, 11), 84(2)
ISBN 0 86813 172 5
D6560
Printed in South Africa by
The Rustica Press, Old Mill Road,
Ndabeni, Western Cape
PHYLOGENETIC IMPLICATIONS OF THE EXISTENCE
OF TWO MODERN GENERA OF BATHYERGIDAE
(MAMMALIA, RODENTIA)
IN THE PLIOCENE SITE OF LAN GEBAANWEG (SOUTH AFRICA)
By
CHRISTIANE DENYS
Laboratoire Mammifeéres de Oiseaux, Museum National d'Histoire Naturelle,
55, rue Buffon, 75005 Paris, France
(With 7 figures and 4 tables)
[MS accepted 28 February 1992]
ABSTRACT
The oldest known Bathyergus and Cryptomys are found together in the Langebaanweg
‘E’ Quarry site of the Varswater Formation in Cape Province (South Africa). They are
represented by two previously unrecorded species: Bathyergus hendeyi sp. nov. and
Cryptomys broomi sp. nov. These species are characterized by primitive characteristics and
may represent ancestors of the extant species. Their affinities with modern Bathyergidae,
especially Georychus capensis and the fossil Gypsorychus, are discussed in the light of new
chromosomal and electrophoretic data. The fossils provide some calibrations and arguments
to the molecular hypotheses.
CONTENTS
PAGE
EE a al canis ab ae grewid ges syca be exe Ub puiae ae Eulero aa eA as 265
CELLS onetime Lire Ware nt 268
NT Tt a Pe Megs a adn cla cEaleng cs bade 's Lid scone cebumsa ee Cee een deat onaenees 283
MES TR ONG Oo, cea (aR se view sioe si voce ss o'e civ ols <ie'vs Son das Uae cause neu bdleien aleairtuneemornes 285
to 48 Rel Ae Ae Se eo ne Re ee ese Pers ae AU 5 a ee 285
INTRODUCTION
Bathyergidae are hystricognathous rodents characterized by a digging mode
of life and are endemic to the African continent. Until recently, their systematic
position has remained very controversial. However, Maier & Schrenk (1987),
in an ontogenetic study of the development of the masseteric muzzle, demon-
strated their position among hystricomorphous rodents. This has confirmed the
previous work of Lavocat (1973) on Miocene fossils.
Modern South African Bathyergidae are represented by three endemic
genera that were separated into two subfamilies by Roberts (1951) on the basis
of morphometric characteristics. These are the subfamily Bathyerginae, which
includes the genus Bathyergus, and the subfamily Georychinae, which includes
265
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 105 (5), 1998: 265-286, 7 figs, 4 tables.
266 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the genera Georychus and Cryptomys. This division of the family was partly
supported by Nevo et al. (1987), who concluded that there was need of urgent
revision of the taxonomic status of these rodents.
In their general discussion of the genetic distance extrapolated from allo-
zyme differentiation between the genera, Nevo ef al. (1987) proposed two
different hypotheses concerning the phylogenetic relationships and the origins of
cladogenesis among these genera (Fig. 1). Both clusters agree in giving a diver-
gence age between Bathyergus janetta and B. suillus and between Cryptomus h.
natalensis and C. h. hottentotus of around 2.5 Ma, but there are still problems
relating to earlier divergences of some taxa (Fig. 1). The difficulty arises from
the intermediate position of Georychus. In the first cluster, Georychus is con-
sidered as the sister-genus of Cryptomys, being closer to C. damarensis than to
Bathyergus. This leads to the first hypothesis of a differentiation of Bathyergus
(Bathyerginae) at 12 Ma, and a cladogenesis of Cryptomys and Georychus
(Georychinae) at about 5 Ma (Fig. 1A). In the second hypothesis, Nevo et al.
(1987) suggested that Georychus is the sister-genus of Bathyergus, and is farther
away from Cryptomys. The latter hypothesis is in contradiction to Roberts’s
(1951) classification and implies that the divergence between Bathyergus and
Georychus occurred around 8 Ma, and that Cryptomys appeared more recently
at around 4.5 Ma (Fig. 1B). The study of mitochondrial DNA variation among
bathyergid rodents also shows closer affinities between Bathyergus and
Georychus than between Bathyergus and Cryptomys (Honeycutt et al. 1987).
These two hypotheses suggest that around 4-5 Ma there was probably a
major phase of differentiation among the three modern South African genera.
According to the first hypothesis, there is a differentiation among the three
modern South African genera. The first hypothesis suggests a differentiation of
C. damarensis and Georychus at this date; and the second hypothesis suggests
an early differentiation between C. damarensis and other species of Cryptomys.
If either of these hypotheses is true, it should be possible to find some trace of
the purported events in the fossil record.
The bathyergid fossil record is poor but the family is well known in East
and South Africa from lower Miocene times (about 20 Ma). The family is
represented in South Africa by three extinct genera whose affinities have been
discussed by Lavocat (1973). Bathyergoides is known from 20 to 14 Ma and
represents a primitive form not related to the modern genera. Proheliophobius is
found at the same time and, according to Lavocat (1973), could represent a
good ancestor to Heliophobius, Georychus and Cryptomys. The most recent
genera, Paracryptomys and Richardus (14 to 12 Ma), could be the direct ances-
tors of Cryptomys and Heterocephalus (Lavocat 1973, 1989). There is no record
of bathyergids in the upper Miocene times due to a general gap in the fossil
record of tropical Africa.
The lower Pliocene sites are, in general, poorly documented for rodents
both in East and South Africa, except for the Langebaanweg site (Cape Prov-
ince, South Africa) in the Varswater Formation. This site is famous for having
yielded numerous, well-preserved fossil vertebrates, which include thousands of
rodents. Langebaanweg is estimated at around 5-4.5 Ma (see discussion in
Hendey 1981), and it has yielded an important assemblage of Bathyergidae. The
excavations have shown at least two different and important strata (Hendey
PLIOCENE BATHYERGIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 267
1981): the Quartzose Sand Member (QSM) at the base of the formation, and the
Pelletal Phosphorite Member (PPM), which includes beds 3AS and 3AN. Both
levels date from the Pliocene, and have different faunas, although Hendey
(1981) has suggested that a very short time period occurred between the
deposition of the two members.
< Ee o 2 o 2) = =n ey o o o
peeese 22 6fe OS S eu es 8 2a 3 5
2) 7, x = Oo ~ =
= = [on 2) ® ¢ = <b) on)
Ls 25 es 2865 Lg gs Ss £5 88 s§ Qe 2s
Be oes ss s& #8: So tme SS Se SE Go 8s <2
Se, Of 5S Od na m8 Ma Of Os SS O8 na Qs
25
5,0
8,0
11
Fig. 1. Summary of the two phylogenetic hypotheses proposed by Nevo ef al. (1987)
from chromosomal and electrophoretic data on modern Bathyergidae from South Africa.
The main differences between the hypotheses concern the affinities of Georychus capensis
and its age of divergence. A. Georychus is closest to Cryptomys and has recently diverged
(about 5 Ma). B. Georychus is closer to Bathyergus and was differentiated earlier
(about 8 Ma).
In a preliminary study of the rodent material from ‘E’ Quarry at Lange-
baanweg, Pocock (1976) reported two bathyergids—Bathyergus sp. and
Cryptomys sp. This author examined only one level (QSM), and the material
was simply listed and not described or further identified. Re-examination of
specimens at the South African Museum from the QSM and description of
supplementary material from the PPM have shown that Bathyergidae are the
most abundant rodents of the ‘E’ Quarry site at Langebaanweg. They are very
well represented in the QSM and also in the PPM members, reaching 80 per
cent of the total rodents in the PPM 3AN member. The morphological study
of these fossils and their comparison with modern equivalents should provide
some indication of the relationships among modern genera, as well as those of
the Miocene, and should provide further evidence on the relationships of
Georychus.
A systematic study of the Langebaanweg Bathyergidae has been undertaken
in order to test the two evolutionary hypotheses of Nevo et al. (1987), and to
try to determine the polarity of the characters. Comparisons between fossil
and modern forms have been made through examination of the collections of the
Transvaal Museum (TM), the Bernard Price Institute at the University of the
Witwatersrand, Johannesburg (BPI), the South African Museum (SAM), the
Natural History Museum of Paris (MNHN), the Natural History Museum,
London (BMNH), and the Los Angeles County Museum (LACM).
268 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SYSTEMATIC STUDY
Family Bathyergidae Waterhouse, 1841
Genus Bathyergus Illiger, 1811
The dune molerat (Bathyergus) is represented in south-western Africa by
two distinct extant species: B. suillus Schreber, 1782 (the Cape dune molerat)
and B. janetta Thomas & Schwann, 1904 (the Namaqua dune molerat) (Meester
et al. 1986). This distinction, based initially on the morphology, has been
confirmed by chromosomal studies (Nevo ef al. 1985) (B. suillus being charac-
terized by 2N = 56 and B. janetta by 2N = 54). A local population containing
smaller-sized individuals, B. suillus intermedius Roberts, 1926, from Klaver,
Cape Province, has also been taken into consideration.
Few representatives of the genus Bathyergus have been recorded from the
southern African Pliocene fossil record, and the species of Bathyergus from
Langebaanweg is, at present, the earliest one. The family Bathyergidae is well
represented in the Miocene times but by different genera whose affinities remain
uncertain (Lavocat 1973). In the most recent Plio-Pleistocene cave deposits at
Taung (North-West Province) and Makapansgat (Northern Province), a large
bathyergid of unknown affinities, Gypsorychus Broom, 1934, has been
described. An undescribed skull of Bathyergus has also been recorded at the
Upper Pleistocene site of Elandsfontein (De Graaff 1981—1-0.3 Ma).
Bathyergus hendeyi sp. nov.
Figs 2, 3A-D, 4-6
Bathyergus hendeyi sp. nov. is a large bathyergid that is the most abundant
of the Langebaanweg rodent assemblages. It is characterized by the existence of
2-4 cheek-teeth, depending on the age of the individual. As in modern species
of Bathyergus, the upper incisors have a median groove separating them in two
at their tip, and the lower incisors are ungrooved. The upper incisors do not
extend behind the tooth row as in Georychus and, according to Meester e¢ al.
(1986), the angular portion of the mandible is produced to well behind the
occipital condyles, as in modern Bathyergus species.
Etymology
The species is named in honour of Dr Q. B. Hendey, who devoted his time
to the Langebaanweg excavations and studied many large mammals from this
Site.
Material
Holotype. SAM-PQL20402 in the South African Museum (Cape Town).
Anterior skull fragment with left and right DP*-M>, from the Quartzose Sand
Member (QSM) of the Varswater Formation in ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg
(Figs 2C-E, 3A, 3C).
PLIOCENE BATHYERGIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 269
Fig. 2. Bathyergus hendeyi sp. nov. A-B. Skull, SAM-PQL12526 from Langebaanweg
PPM 3AS member. A. Ventral view of anterior skull fragment (x 2.6). B. Dorsal view
(x 1.5). C-E. Skull and mandible, SAM-PQL20402, holotype, from Langebaanweg QSM
member. C. Internal view of right mandible (x 2.8). D. External view of mandible
(x 2.8). E. Ventral view of anterior skull fragment with upper dental rows (x 1.5).
270 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Skull fragments
ae SAM-PQL28388, anterior skull fragment with left and right
DP*-M>.
PPM 3AN: SAM-PQL63443, anterior skull fragment with left DP*-M3.
PPM 3AS: SAM-PQL12526 (Fig. 2A, B), anterior skull fragment with left
and right DP4-M?.
Mandible fragments
QSM: 11 right and 9 left mandible fragments with DP,-M;; 49 right and
72 left mandible fragments with DP,-M,); 27 right and 34 left mandible
fragments with DP,-M,; 7 right and 6 left mandible fragments with DP,;
2 right and 2 left mandible fragments with M3; 4 right and 4 left mandible
fragments with M)3; 6 right and 2 left mandible fragments with M,; 4 right and
4 left mandible fragments with M); 1| left mandible fragment with M3; 15 right
and 14 left mandible fragments with M,,; 8 right and 18 left mandible
fragments without teeth.
PPM 3AN: 7 right and 3 left mandible fragments with DP,-M3; 43 right
and 27 left mandible fragments with DP,-M,; 22 right and 12 left mandible
fragments with DP,-M,; 6 right and 5 left mandible fragments with DP,;
2 right and 1 left mandible fragments with M,3; 24 right and 44 left mandible
fragments with M,; 19 right and 21 left mandible fragments with M,; 46 right
and 45 left mandible fragments with Mj,; 108 right and 69 left mandible
fragments without teeth.
PPM 3AS: 4 right and 4 left mandible fragments with DP,-M3; 17 right and
14 left mandible fragments with DP,-M_; 9 right and 8 left mandible fragments
with DP,-M; 2 right mandible fragments with DP,; 3 right and 1 left mandible
fragments with M,3; | left mandible fragment with M,3; 2 right and 2 left
mandible fragments with M,; 6 right and 4 left mandible fragments with M,; 4
right and 3 left mandible fragments with M,,; 6 right and 12 left mandible
fragments without teeth.
Upper tooth rows
QSM: 8 right and 4 left maxillary fragments with DP*-M3>; 5 right and
4 left maxillary fragments with DP4-M2; 1 right and 7 left maxillary fragments
with DP*-M!; 3 right and 5 left maxillary fragments with DP*; 1 left maxillary
fragment with M!3; 3 left maxillary fragments with M?3; 1 right maxillary frag-
ment with M!; 1 right and 4 left maxillary fragments with M!2.
Fig. 3 (see facing page). Teeth of specimens of Bathyergidae from Langebaanweg.
A-D. Bathyergus hendeyi sp. nov. from QSM member. A. SAM-PQL20402, holotype.
Left upper molar row with DP4-M? (x 7.4). B. SAM-PQL13060/B, right mandible
with DP,-M, (x 7.4). C. SAM-PQL20402, holotype. Right mandible with DP,-M, (x 7).
D. SAM-PQLS50230, isolated left DP, (up) and M, (down) (x 16).
E-F. Cryptomys broomi sp. nov. from QSM member. E. SAM-PQL25101, left dental row
with DP,-M, (x 14). F. SAM-PQL24012, holotype, left dental row, with DP,-M, (x 13).
PLIOCENE BATHYERGIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 211
Die ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PPM 3AN: 1 left maxillary fragment with DP*-M3; 4 right and 2 left maxil-
lary fragments with DP+-M?; 1 right and 1 left maxillary fragments with
DP4-M!; 1 left maxillary fragment with M?3; 1 right and 1 left maxillary frag-
ments with M!; 1 left maxillary fragment with M!2; 1 left and 1 right maxillary
fragments with M2; 2 right and 2 left maxillary fragments without teeth.
PPM 3AS: 5 right and 1 left maxillary fragments with DP4—-M3; 2 right and
2 left maxillary fragments with DP*-M?; 1 right and 3 left maxillary fragments
with DP‘; 4 right and 2 left maxillary fragments with M23; 1 left maxillary
fragment with M!; 1 right and 1 left maxillary fragments with M!2; 1 left
maxillary fragment without teeth.
Diagnosis
Medium-sized Bathyergus with a relatively large infraorbital foramen and a
wide angle between the zygomatic arch and the dental row; anterior part of skull
high; low-crowned molars. Upper incisors reaching the level of M!2 instead of
DP*-M! on modern Bathyergus; DP, rounded, not elongated.
Differentiated from B. suillus by the smaller size of skull and molars,
especially of the DP, less rectilinear nasals, lower crowns, and narrower upper
incisors. Differentiated from B. janetta by the slightly larger size of the skull
and slightly smaller molars, lower crowns and wider upper incisors.
Description
Measurements are given in Tables 1 and 2.
Skull. Only anterior parts of skulls were found at Langebaanweg. The
frontal region is high in lateral view and the upper incisors reach the level of the
M!2, The nasals are enlarged posteriorly, whereas the muzzle is wide. The
infraorbital foramen is wide and the zygomatic arch departure makes a right
angle with the dental row (Fig. 2A, B, E).
Mandible. This species is characterized by a very important hystrico-
gnathous angle of the mandible and the close proximity of the symphysial joint
to the DP*. There is a relatively large space between the distal part of the dental
row and the beginning of the coronoid process (Fig. 2C, D).
Teeth. Molars are described here but, as in all bathyergids, there is a large
variation in the size and shape of the teeth that is age dependent (Taylor et al.
1985; Denys 1988) (Fig. 4).
Upper molars. The DP* is a square tooth comprising two lobes, each
separated by an internal and an external sinus. These sinuses are only slightly
invaginated towards the centre of the tooth; the labial invagination is deeper
than the lingual one. In most cases these sinuses are invisible and the tooth
appears round. The M! is more compressed antero-posteriorly than the DP* and
has a rectangular shape. No internal or external sinuses are seen. The M? tooth
is rounded and shows very slight sinuses. The DP*, M! and M? are nearly
equivalent in size, whereas the M2 is the smallest tooth of the dental row and
shows some variation in shape. It is sometimes round and unilobated; in other
cases it is more elongated with a small posterior lobe; there is a trace of a small
external sinus (Fig. 3A).
PLIOCENE BATHYERGIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG PHI)
TABLE 1
Dental measurements (in mm) of Bathyergus hendeyi sp. nov. from Langebaanweg. Abbrevi-
ations: QSM—Quartzose Sand Member; 3AN and 3AS—Pelletal Phosphorite Member levels
3AN and 3AS, respectively; n—number of individuals; S.D.—standard deviation.
QSM 3AN — 3AS
Tooth Length Width Length Width Length Width
DP* n 9 3 2
Minimum 1.83 2.68 1.96 2S 1.83 3.08
Maximum Pally B15) DAB) 3.29 DAS Beat
Mean 1.92 2.99 2.03 2.88 -~ —
S-D. 0.09 0.27 0.14 0.31 ~ _
M! n et 5 2
Minimum 1.29 2.42 1.79 2.42 1.93 3.60)
Maximum 1.92 4 217 3.25 1.96 3.5
Mean 1.42 Bh 2.02 2.94 —
SD 0.23 0.46 0.06 0.34 —_ —
M? n 10 3 4
Minimum 2.04 2.41 2.08 233 2 2.88
Maximum 2:5 3.33 2.38 2.92 2.67 3.42
Mean 2.22 2.95 2.24 ATP) 2.46 3.07
SD. 0.18 0.29 On5 O25 0.31 0.25
M? n 9 3} 3
Minimum 1.67 1.92 1.83 1.96 1.67 2.08
Maximum 1.9 Pa 2.08 25 192 2,33
Mean 1.86 22 1.93 2D LS 2.19
SD; 0.36 0.27 0.13 0.28 0.13 0.13
DP, n 22 2 10
Minimum 25 1.89 2221 225 Dean 2.29
Maximum 2.96 PT ES) 2.88 3.33 2.88 3
Mean 2.44 231 2.62 2.69 2.62 esi
SD: 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.27 0.21 0.21
M, n 22 25 iit
Minimum 1.85 2 2 2 1.92 PSTD)
Maximum 2.38 2.82 2.58 325 2.58 Sele,
Mean pe 2.43 232 2.64 2.32 2.99
S.D: 0.15 O21 OS 0335 0.23 1S)
M, n 15 22 11
Minimum 2 2.04 2.08 PMNS) 2.08 2.42
Maximum 2.58 2.85 2.83 3.42 2267 3.38
Mean PASAT 25 2.49 2.8 Daa? 2.9
S.D. Or15 0.29 0.19 0.39 0.2 0:35
M, n 3 a. i
Minimum a) ETA 1.96 Dale DN) 2.08
Maximum 2 2.15 Das DS 2.58 2.58
Mean 1.76 1.9 233 Pe 2.33) 2S
Seb: 0.4 Ons 0.18 0.27 0.18 0.16
274 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Lower molars. The DP, is a rectangular tooth slightly enlarged distally.
This premolar shows a great variation of morphology related to the wear stages.
The youngest specimens show a small anterior median sinus and the DP, is
divided into two lobes by an external oblique sinus and a very small internal
sinus. On the lingual distal part, some more mature individuals show an enamel
fold that isolates a small island (Fig. 2). This island is, on other specimens,
related to the second lobe of the tooth making an intermediate loph reminiscent
of some phiomorphs. The latter structure is only seen in a few examples.
Another variation occurs in some specimens, where the lingual sinus is very
deep and the enamel island is linked to the second lobe.
The M, is more squared than the DP,. The anterior lobe is equal to the
posterior one. The external and internal sinuses are almost the same size and are
transverse. The anterior wall is rectilinear, whereas the posterior one is very
convex. The M, is larger than the M,. The external sinus is slightly more
developed than the internal. Both sinuses almost meet in the central part of the
tooth. The anterior and posterior walls are convex. The anterior part of the
tooth is wider than the posterior one. The M3 is composed of one or two
lobes—with a higher proportion being bilobated. The anterior lobe is the widest, —
and the second lobe is round and separated from the first by the internal and
external sinuses that join in the centre part of the tooth (Fig. 3B-F).
Comparison of Bathyergus hendeyi with modern and fossil Bathyergidae
Comparison with modern Bathyergus species
The two modern species of Bathyergus are distinguished essentially by their
size, B. janetta being smaller than B. suillus s.1. They also show a different
arrangement of the back of the skull and the tympanic bullae (De Graaff 1985).
The population of B. suillus intermedius from Klaver (Cape Province) is
characterized by a slightly smaller size (Roberts 1926) than B. suillus, but is
larger than B. hendeyi sp. nov.
The comparison of skulls and mandibular characteristics of B. hendeyi sp.
nov. with the modern species shows some differences. The angulation of the
zygomatic arch is more open in B. hendeyi sp. nov. The infraorbital foramina
are larger in the fossil species. The upper incisors reach the level of the DP*-
_ M! in modern specimens, whereas they reach the level of the M! in the Lange-
baanweg form. The skulls from Langebaanweg are higher in their anterior part
than in modern Bathyergus species, in which the muzzle is very low. In dorsal
view, the nasals of B. hendeyi show an anterior expansion similar to those of
B. janetta, whereas in B. suillus s.1. the nasals are more rectilinear.
The mandible of the modern Bathyergus species differs from those of Geory-
chus and Cryptomys in showing a large space behind the tooth row between the
M, and the beginning of the coronoid process. The foramen situated in this
space is round and deep. The latter characteristics are also found in B. hendeyi.
Bathyergus hendeyi sp. nov. has low-crowned molars in which the roots are
always visible, whereas in B. suillus the roots are fused and unrecognizable. In
molars of B. janetta traces of roots can be seen. In the modern species of
Bathyergus, the four jugal teeth have, in general, the same proportions, whereas
PLIOCENE BATHYERGIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 275
TABLE 2
Measurements (in mm) of mandibular and dental parameters of Bathyergus hendeyi sp. nov.
and those of modern species. Some measurements of the dental rows are taken directly from
Roberts (1951); in the case of B. suillus intermedius all measurements are from this source,
except for a single specimen from the Transvaal Museum. Abbreviations: QSM— Quartzose
Sand Member; 3AN and 3AS—Pelletal Phosphorite Member levels 3AN and 3AS;
n—number of individuals; S.D.—standard deviation; WINC—width of the upper incisor;
H-DP,—height of the external part of the mandible just below the alveola of the DP,;
DP*-M?’—length of upper jugal teeth row; DP,-M,—length of lower jugal teeth row.
Bathyergus Bathyergus Bathyergus Bathyergus
hendeyi suillus suillus Janetta
suillus intermedius
QSM 3AN _— 3AS
WINC n 4 0 1 8 1 3
Minimum Bhs) oa 2.6 3.3 So 3h7/ 2.6
Maximum 3.65 _ _ 4.7 2.92
Mean 3.43 — 3,93 — DS
Syl Be 0.17 — — 0.5 - Only
H-DP, n 23 9 9 8 1 3
Minimum 8 9.6 9.9 14 16.1 ils)
Maximum 13 {5 ey 18 _ 12
Mean 10.9 125 NS) 16.2 ~ Wty
S. DL. 0.18 Onl 0.07 0.13 — 0.03
DP*-M? on 8 l l 22 Ii 7
Minimum TS ee) Qed 105 8.3 UD
Maximum B.2 a 12 10 10
Mean 8 - oa ee 9.3 8.4
SED. 0.5 _ _ 0.6 0.6 0.76
DP-M, n Di 7 6 l 3
Minimum 8.2 8.75 rsa BS) OES 10 8.5
Maximum 10.3 10.6 10.6 1332 a 9.55
Mean 9.1 9.6 9.9 1 _ 9.1
S:.D. 0.5 0.6 0.4 — 0.5
in B. hendeyi, the M2? and the DP, are the smallest teeth (Table 1). The mean
lengths of the upper and lower dental rows and the height of the mandible under
the DP, (Table 2) are smaller in B. hendeyi than in B. suillus, and show similar
variation in size to that recorded in B. janetta (Figs 5, 6). The t-tests gave
highly significant results for the comparisons between B. hendeyi and the two
subspecies of B. suillus— B. suillus suillus and B. suillus intermedius, and non-
Significant results between B. hendeyi and B. janetta. However, the size
variation in modern specimens of B. janetta is not well known. The width of the
upper incisor of B. hendeyi is intermediate between those of B. suillus and
B. janetta.
276 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The molars of modern and fossil Bathyergus species are not very different,
except for the length of the DP, (Fig. 6). This tooth is more elongated in the
two modern species than in B. hendeyi, but there is a great variation in size and
shape of the molars during the life of these molerats.
Imm
[ a |
[— se
D E F
Fig. 4. Bathyergus hendeyi sp. nov. Morphological variation during wear in molars.
A. Stage 1: right mandible (two molars) with DP,-M,; the DP, shows two internal sinuses
and a single external one. B. Stage 1: right mandible with DP,-M, the internal sinuses
isolate an enamel island. C. Stage 2: on teeth more worn than in stage 1, the germ of M
shows two lobes separated by a narrow longitudinal crest. D. Stage 3: only one internal
sinus and one external one; no trace remains of the enamel island and the M, is well
developed. E. Stage 4: the teeth are worn and the internal sinus is small, whereas the
external one has disappeared on the DP,. On M,, the sinuses are less marked than in the
previous stage. F. Stage 5: there is the development of a small M, made of two lobes
separated by a longitudinal crest; two sinuses divide the tooth in two parts, the posterior one
being the narrowest. Scale bar = 1 mm.
PLIOCENE BATHYERGIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG P|
Comparison with the fossil Gypsorychus
The upper teeth of Gypsorychus darti Broom, 1934, and G. minor Broom,
1948, differ considerably from those of B. hendeyi sp. nov., and are also very
different from all known modern Bathyergidae. They are high crowned and
have a greater width than length. The molars are unfolded, except the upper
M2, which consists of two lobes (Broom 1937). In Gypsorychus the M3 is the
longest tooth in the dental row, whereas in B. hendeyi and most other southern
African Bathyrgidae (except Georychus) the M2? is the smallest. According to
Broom (1948), the skull of Gypsorychus is as large as that of Bathyergus and he
concluded that the affinities of Gypsorychus lay with Cryptomys. Present obser-
vations confirm that Gypsoychus does not share common characteristics with
B. hendeyi or Cryptomys.
~~
Y
ACG
W WK
coc
mee hendeyi
J
WV
~
Frequency
+
4 7,9 8,4 8,9 9,4 9,9 10,4 6,4 7,4 9, x _ 4 11,4
Length DP4—M® (mm) ee DP,—M, (mm)
|
Frequency
7,4 8,4 9,4 10,4 11,4 12,4
Length DP*—M (mm) Length DP4—M? (mm)
. 5. Comparisons of Bathyergus hendeyi sp. nov. with modern species of Bathyergus
a Georychus capensis. Frequency histograms of DP*-M?. Axes: abscissa = length in mm;
ordinate = frequencies.
Discussion
Whereas no morphological differences are seen between the molars of
Bathyergus hendeyi sp. nov. found in QSM and PPM levels, there are
indications of size differences (Table 1). The B. hendeyi specimens from the
QSM level are slightly smaller in size and more frequently show traces of
supplementary sinuses on the DP, than their homologues of the PPM level. This
278 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
eS
Ss
s
2
S
17 2,2 if 3,2 3,7 4,2 4,7
Length (mm)
€
—E
=
S
=
Uns) 2,2 2,9 2,8 3,1
Length (mm)
Width (mm)
2,6 2,8 3,0 3,2
Length (mm)
2,0 2,2 2,4
Fig. 6. Scatterplot of the DP,, M, and M, molars of modern and fossil species of
Bathyergus and comparison with Georychus capensis. Symbols: H—B. hendeyi sp. nov.
from Langebaanweg, ¥—B. janetta, &—B. suillus; @—G. capensis. Measurements
in mm. Axes: abscissa—length; ordinate—width.
PLIOCENE BATHYERGIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 279
could indicate a tendency towards an increase in general size and simplification
of the molars with time in the Bathyergus lineages.
Bathyergus hendeyi sp. nov. may represent a common ancestor to B. suillus
and B. janetta. Among the species of the genus Bathyergus, evolutionary
tendencies could be expressed by the increase of the size of skulls and teeth,
diminution in the height of the skull, simplification and elongation of the DP,,
and increased hypsodonty.
Bathyergus janetta shares with B. hendeyi enlarged nasals and almost identi-
cal length of upper and lower dental rows, which could indicate relatively close
affinities. However, these characteristics may also be primitive for the genus. In
the absence of intermediate fossils, the relationships between modern and fossil
species remain unclear.
At 5-4 Ma, Bathyergus is well differentiated from other bathyergids, which
supports its position in a separate subfamily following Roberts (1951) and sug-
gests a rather early differentiation (around 12 Ma) of the genus, as suggested by
molecular trees (Nevo ef al. 1987) (Fig. 1). However, Bathyergus cannot be
related directly to a Miocene ancestor due to the gap in the fossil record
between 12 and 5 Ma. Moreover, in his study of lower Miocene bathyergids,
Lavocat (1973) did not suggest any ancestor to Bathyergus among fossil genera
and the origins, as well as the age of its divergence, remains unknown.
On the contrary, the suggested age of 2.5 Ma, as determined by the molecu-
lar hypotheses, for the divergence between B. janetta and B. suillus from
ancestral B. hendeyi is highly probable according to the dental morphology of
the fossil examined here.
Genus Cryptomys Gray, 1864
One extant species of Cryptomys is found in the south-western Cape
region—C. hottentotus Lesson, 1826 (the common molerat). Within this species
Honacki ef al. (1982) recognized a further five subspecies in C. hottentotus s.1.
These are C. h. bocagei, C. h. damarensis, C. h. darlingi, C. h. holosericus,
and C. h. natalensis. Recent examination of the karyotypes of the South African
bathyergids has shown (Nevo ef al. 1985) that Cryptomys, traditionally con-
sidered as monospecific, could comprise at least three distinct forms. These are
C. hottentotus hottentotus (2N = 54), C. hottentotus natalensis (2N = 54) and
C. h. damarensis (2N = 74 and 78). The study of mtDNA, allozyme and
chromosomal variation among the three subspecies of C. hottentotus suggested
that C. h. damarensis should be raised to specific rank (Honeycutt et al. 1987).
According to Roberts (1951), C. damarensis is distinguished by a perforation at
the front edge of the orbit (antorbital foramen) that is smaller and not as oblong
(being only a little higher than wider) than in C. hottentotus. The subspecific
status of C. hottentotus hottentotus and C. hottentotus natalensis is retained at
present, despite some genetic differences. In the absence of morphological
revision and good external criteria, the term C. hottentotus sensu lato (s.1.) will
be employed in this paper to designate modern representatives of C. hottentotus.
Woods (1993) included the subspecies darlingi, holosericus and natalensis in
C. hottentotus.
280 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fossil Cryptomys are relatively abundant in the Plio—Pleistocene Transvaal
caves. Broom (1937) described C. robertsi from the Plio-Pleistocene bone
breccia at Krugersdorp, near Pretoria (Gauteng Province). Pocock (1987)
reported the coexistence of two species at Kromdraai and Sterkfontein:
Cryptomys cf. C. hottentotus natalensis and a larger species, C. robertsi Broom,
1937. Pocock (1987) also recorded Cryptomys cf. C. hottentotus in all sites at
Makapansgat, these specimens being smaller than Cryptomys cf. C. h. natal-
ensis from Sterkfontein. These forms have not yet been described in detail.
Cryptomys broomi sp. nov.
Figs 3E-F, 7
In addition to the numerous remains of Bathyergus found at Langebaanweg,
a small bathyergid with ungrooved molars and four cheek-teeth has been found.
Represented only by a small number of mandibles associated with the teeth, this
bathyergid shows a very large diastema and few markedly hystricognathous
characteristics of modern Cryptomys species, as well as the absence of sinuses
on the molars. The existence of an M, of nearly identical size to the M,
differentiates this small bathyergid from Langebaanweg from Georychus, and
the constant number of 4 cheek-teeth permits separation of the fossil from the
modern genus Heliophobius that has 2 to 6 cheek-teeth.
Etymology
This species is named in honour of Dr Broom who first paid attention to the
rodents of South African Plio—Pleistocene caves.
Material
Holotype. SAM-PQL24012 in the South African Museum (Cape Town).
Mandible with DP,-M; from the Quartzose Sand Member (QSM) of the Vars-
water Formation in East Stream Elephant site of ‘E’ Quarry at Langebaanweg
(Fig. 3F).
Other material
QSM: 1 left mandible fragment with DP,-M,; 3 left mandible fragments
with DP,-M,; 1 right mandible fragment with DP,-M,; 1 left and 1 right
maxillary fragments with DP*; 2 right mandible fragments with M;; 1 left
mandible fragment with M,; 2 right mandible fragments with M,,; 1 left and
1 right mandible fragments without molars.
PPM: 1 left mandible fragment with M,3; 1 right mandible with Mp3; | left
mandible fragment with Mj,3; 1 right mandible fragment with DP,-M); 1 right
mandible fragment with M,,; 1 right mandible fragment with DP,-M;; 3 right
and 3 left mandibles with M,; 3 mandible fragments without molars.
Diagnosis
Cryptomys with low-crowned molars, showing traces of cusps, and similar
in size to the molars of C. damarensis, C. hottentotus s.1. and C. robertsi.
PLIOCENE BATHYERGIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 281
Differentiated from C. hottentotus s.1. by a narrower angle of the mandible
(90°), by a more robust mandible, and by lower crowns. Differentiated from
C. robertsi by lower crowns and more visible traces of cusps. Differentiated
from C. damarensis by the slightly larger molars, especially the DP,, and by
lower crowns. ‘
Description of the molars
Measurements are given in Tables 3 and 4.
DP, is small, rather rounded and not elongate, with shallow internal and
external sinuses. There is a frontal, median, anterior sinus. When the tooth is
worn the internal sinus disappears. This premolar has two roots, one anterior to
thevother (Fic. 3E, F).
M, is more squared and slightly larger than DP,, with an external sinus
more developed than on DP,. The internal sinus is marked but no more deep
than on DP,. On worn teeth, the internal sinus disappears first, followed by the
external sinus (Fig. 3E, F).
On M), the external sinus is more developed than on the M, and almost
reaches the centre of the occlusal surface, dividing the molar into two lobes.
The first lobe is wider than the posterior one. The internal sinus may be either
less developed than on the M, or absent (Fig. 3E, F).
M, comprises two lobes, well separated by the deep external sinus, and is
more elongate than M,. The second lobe is narrower than the first. There are
three roots, two anterior and one posterior (Fig. 3E, F).
TABLE 3
Dental measurements (in mm) of Cryptomys broomi sp. nov. (n—number of individuals;
S.D.—standard deviation; min.—minimum value; max.—maximum value).
Tooth Length Width
n Min. Max. Mean _ S.D. Min. Max. Mean _§ S.D.
DP, 3 LS 1.58 1.54 0.04 175 1.83 1.79 0.04
M, 6 1.29 1.79 1.43 0.18 1.66 Deli, 1.88 0.17
M, 4 hed L753 1.62 0.15 le75 2.00 1.85 O212
M 2 3 1.66 _ — 1.05 LS — -—
Comparison of Cryptomus broomi with modern and fossil Bathyergidae
Comparison between modern and fossil Cryptomys
Cryptomys and other bathyergids are well known for the extreme variability
in size and shape of their jugal teeth during growth (Taylor et al. 1985; Denys
1988) and for having teeth that do not erupt simultaneously. This renders com-
parison very difficult, because Cryptomys broomi sp. nov. is represented by
only a few specimens. Comparison of molar dimensions shows that C. broomi
has variation similar to that found in modern C. hottentotus s.1. and C. robertsi
from Kromdraai B and Sterkfontein sites. The small Langebaanweg Cryptomys
282 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
sample shows as much variability as in all other modern and fossil represen-
tatives of the genus (Tables 3, 4). Comparison of the length of DP, of four
species of Cryptomys (Fig. 7) shows that C. broomi is slightly larger than
C. damarensis. The length of the lower dental row is very similar to that of the
specimens of C. hottentotus s.1. and C. damarensis (Table 4). The t-tests gave
non-significant differences between C. hottentotus, C. damarensis and
C. broomi at the 95 and 99 per cent levels.
From a morphological point of view, the most striking trait of C. broomi sp.
nov. is the low-crowned teeth. Roots of teeth are seen in all C. broomi
specimens, whereas they remain invisible in C. robertsi and all modern
Cryptomys, which have higher crowns.
Some juvenile specimens from Langebaanweg retain more clearly a trace of
cusps on their molars, especially the lower M; of the type specimen. The M,
is very wide anteriorly compared to other species of Cryptomys. Modern and
fossil Cryptomys share the same shape and disposition of the mandible with a
long and transverse symphysial joint and a small diastema; however, this
character is highly variable. The incisors of C. broomi sp. nov. are less
straightened and the wear facets more oblique than in C. hottentotus s.\. and
C. damarensis.
Comparison of Cryptomus broomi with modern Georychus capensis
Georychus capensis has a more robust mandible than C. broomi sp. nov.
and larger teeth that retain traces of the crests until an advanced stage of wear.
There is no trace of the roots in G. capensis and the jugal teeth are relatively
high crowned. In G. capensis, the molars increase in size from the M, to the
M3, the M3 being the largest tooth, whereas in C. broomi sp. nov. and other
Cryptomys species the M, is the smallest molar (Fig. 7).
Discussion
In the absence of a more detailed morphometric study of the different
modern Cryptomys species, any attempt to relate C. broomi sp. nov. to one or
other species of the genus remains difficult. The size of the Langebaanweg fossil
places it very close to C. robertsi from Plio—Pleistocene sites of Gauteng and
North-West Province. Cryptomys broomi shows a plesiomorphic character in
being less high crowned. However, the phylogenetic relationships between
C. broomi and the modern Cryptomys cannot yet be established, particularly the
relationship between C. broomi and C. damarensis.
The presence of a primitive Cryptomys at Langebaanweg, aged about
5-4 Ma, can be discussed in the light of the molecular hypotheses of Nevo et al.
(1987), summarized in Figure 1. The morphological characteristics of
C. broomi sp. nov. appear primitive and could be interpreted in the following
two ways. In a first hypothesis, from its dental morphology, C. broomi is
the common ancestor of C. hottentotus s.1. and of C. damarensis, and their
divergence occurred after 5-4 Ma. (This differs slightly from the two
hypotheses of Nevo et al. (1987), which—in both cases—suggested an earlier
divergence age of C. damarensis at 6-5 Ma (Fig. 1A, B)). In the second
PLIOCENE BATHYERGIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 283
TABLE 4
Comparison of DP,-M, length in four species of Cryptomys and in Georychus capensis.
Cryptomys Cryptomys Cryptomys Cryptomys Georychus
broomi robertsi damarensis hottentotus capensis
sp. nov.
DEM, n 4 1 6 16 7/
Mean 6.4 — 6.2 Dall 8
Minimum 5-9 bd SIS 4.7 6.4
Maximum 6.6 — 7 6.8 10
S.D. 03 — 0.6 0.6 0.9
hypothesis, C. broomi is more closely related to C. hottentotus s.1. and was
differentiated separately from C. damarensis. In the latter case, C. damarensis
represents another lineage differentiated before or after other Cryptomys.
However, C. damarensis is too close to C. broomi to suppose a very early or
late differentiation of C. damarensis, and the age of 5-6 Ma given by molecular
data for its differentiation is acceptable. So far as is known, no fossil of
C. damarensis has yet been found to support either the dental or molecular
hypothesis.
The relationships of C. broomi sp. nov. with G. capensis must also be dis-
cussed here. The comparison of the dental morphology of the two species shows
that Georychus capensis is very different from C. broomi and also from
C. damarensis, which suggests an earlier differentiation than 5 Ma, contrary to
the first suggestion provided by the molecular data of Nevo et al. (1987)
(Fig. 1A) and supports the second hypothesis of a very early divergence for
Georychus (Fig. 1B). This corresponds with the results of the mitochondrial
DNA data of Honeycutt er al. (1987). The absence of Georychus from Lange-
baanweg could be due to ecological or taphonomic reasons rather than
phylogenetic ones.
CONCLUSIONS
The description of two distinct and modern Bathyergidae at Langebaanweg
has some phylogenetic implications and permits more precise interpretation of
parts of the molecular trees that have been proposed. In addition, the study
provides calibrations and morphological arguments in support of one or other of
the hypotheses proposed by Nevo er al. (1987).
Firstly, the fact that the two bathyergid genera of Langebaanweg are modern
ones, supports Nevo et al.’s (1987) hypotheses that the differentiation between
Cryptomys and Bathyergus occurred before 5-4 Ma. However, the lack of a
fossil record in upper Miocene times precludes a precise determination of the
age of their divergence at the generic level.
284 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Width (mm)
Width (mm)
1,3 1,5 1,7 1,9 2,1 1,3 1,5 1,7 1,9 2,1 2,3
Length (mm) Length (mm)
Width (mm)
Width (mm)
Ee 1,4 1,6 1,8 2,0 1,3 1,4 1,5 1,6 1,7 1,8 1,9
Length (mm) Length (mm)
Fig. 7. Scatterplot of DP, and M, measurements in modern and fossil species of Cryptomys.
Symbols: *—G. capensis; H—C. broomi sp. nov. from Langebaanweg;
@—C. damarensis; &—C. hottentotus s.1.; #*—C. robertsi. Measurements in mm;
abscissa—length; ordinate—width.
At the specific level, the fossil record is better documented and the study
of dental morphology supports the molecular hypotheses. The small size of
Bathyergus hendeyi sp. nov. from Langebaanweg and its many primitive
characteristics make it a good ancestor to either B. suillus or B. janetta. This
supports Nevo et al.'s (1987) age of 2.5 Ma for the divergence of the two
modern species. Indeed, examination of the Bathyergus skull from the
Elandsfontein site (1-0.3 Ma) (Pleistocene) shows that it is clearly B. suillus.
Moreover, the study of different South African rodent lineages has shown that
the time period around 2.5 Ma corresponds to different speciation events (Denys
1990).
The Cryptomys broomi sp. nov. from Langebaanweg is, according to
present knowledge, the oldest known representative of the genus Cryptomys. It
has some primitive characteristics and seems to be relatively closely related to
either C. hottentotus s.1. or C. damarensis. Cryptomys broomi could be the
ancestor of modern C. hottentotus s.1. and could be closely related to the fossil
C. robertsi (whose specific attribution needs careful revision). Cryptomys
damarensis is also very closely related to C. broomi. In the absence of fossils of
C. damarensis, it is difficult to determine if this species arose from a lineage
PLIOCENE BATHYERGIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 285
other than the C. broomi—C. robertsi one or to assess the precise age of its
specific divergence.
The study of the oldest Cryptomys and Bathyergus representatives of the
lower Pliocene site of Langebaanweg provides some information on relation-
ships of the South African bathyergids. Despite the lack of intermediate fossils,
it is clear that Cryptomys and Georychus are distinct. On evidence from dental
and skull morphology, Georychus appears to be relatively distant from
Bathyergus. The hypothesis of a rather early differentiation of Georychus is
supported by dental anatomy, as well as the molecular data of Nevo et al.
(1987) (see Fig. 1B) and of Honeycutt et al. (1987). The examination of the
Miocene bathyergids shows that, according to Lavocat (1973), the best ancestor
of the modern Georychus-Heliophobius group could be Proheliophobius. The
revision of the numerous species of Miocene Bathyergidae from East and South
Africa should provide further information concerning the origin of the first
Bathyergus. The relationships of the Pliocene genus Gypsorychus remain to be
studied, and it is clear that the family Bathyergidae shows a more complex
history and evolutionary scenario than the systematics of modern Bathyergidae
has led us to understand.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I am indebted to Dr Q. B. Hendey who provided the Langebaanweg material
and received me during my Stay at the South African Museum; to D. Hamerton-
Drinkrow and Dr J. U. M. Jarvis who made results of their bathyergid experi-
ments available, and to T. Pocock who allowed me to examine the Kromdraai
and Sterkfontein material at the Bernard Price Institute, Johannesburg. Many
thanks also to F. Petter and M. Tranier at the Mammalogy Department of the
MNHN (Paris) and to Mrs J. Ingles and Mrs P. D. Jenkins of the Natural
History Museum (BMNH). This work was financed by the Singer Polignac
Foundation and the French CNRS (Montpellier). Photographs were taken by
C. Abrial from the URA 720 (CNRS, Paris).
REFERENCES
Broom, R. 1934. On the fossil remains associated with A. africanus. South African Journal
of Science 31: 471-480.
Broom, R. 1937. On some new pleistocene mammals from limestone caves of the
Transvaal. South African Journal of Science 33: 750-768.
Broom, R. 1939. The fossil rodents of the limestone cave at Taungs. Annals of the
Transvaal Museum 19 (3): 315-317.
BrRooM, R. 1948. The giant rodent mole Gypsorychus. Annals of the Transvaal Museum 21
(1): 47-49.
DeNys, C. 1988. Nouvelles observations de la structure dentaire de spécimens juvéniles de
Cryptomys hottentotus (Bathyergidés, rongeurs). Mammalia 52 (2): 292-294.
Denys, C. 1990. Implications paléoécologiques et paléobiogéographiques de 1|’étude de
rongeurs plio-pléistocénes d’Afrique orientale et australe. Thése de Doctorat d’Etat.
Mémoires de |’Institut des Sciences de la Terre de l'Université Pierre et Marie Curie,
Paris 6 (90-07): 1-428.
De GRAAFF, G. 1960. A preliminary investigation into the mammalian microfauna in
Pleistocene deposits of caves in the Transvaal system. Palaeontologia africana 7:
7-118.
286 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
DE GRAAFF, G. 1975. Family Bathyergidae. Part 6.9: 1-5. In: MEESTER, J. & SETZER,
H. W. The mammals of Africa: an identification manual. Washington: Smithsonian
Institution.
De GraAaFF, G. 1981. The rodents of southern Africa. Durban, Pretoria: Butterworths.
GRAY, J. E. 1864. Notes on the species of sand-moles (Georychus). Proceedings of the
Zoological Society, London 1864: 123-125.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1981. Palaeoecology of the late Tertiary fossil occurrences in ‘E’ Quarry,
Langebaanweg, South Africa and a re-interpretation of their geological context. Annals
of the South African Museum 84 (1): 1-104.
HOonaAcKI, J. H., KINMAN, K. E., Koeppel, J. W. 1982. Mammal species of the world.
Lawrence, Kansas: Allen Press Inc. and The Association of Systematics Collections.
HoneEycuTT, R. L., E>warps, S. V., NELSON, K. & NEvo, E. 1987. Mitochondrial DNA
variation and the phylogeny of African molerats (Rodentia: Bathyergidae). Systematic
Zoology 36 (3): 280-292.
LavocaT, R. 1973. Les rongeurs du Miocéne d’ Afrique orientale. 1-Miocéne inférieur.
Mémoires et Travaux de l’E. P. H. E. Inst., Montpellier 1: 1-284.
LavocaT, R. 1989. Ostéologie de la téte de Richardus excavans Lavocat, 1988.
Paleovertebrata, Montpellier 19 (2): 73-80.
Lesson, R. P. 1826. Voyage autour du monde executé par ordre du roi sur la corvette de
S.M. La Coquille pendant les années 1822, 1824, et 1825. Zoologie Atlas: 166. Paris.
MAIER, W. & SCHRENK, F. 1987. The hystricomorphy of the Bathyergidae, as determined
from ontogenetic evidence. Zeitschrift fiir Sdugetierkunde 52 (3): 156-164.
MEESTER, J. A. J., RAUTENBACH, I. L., DIPPENAAR, N. J., BAKER, C. M. 1986.
Classification of Southern African mammals. Transvaal Museum Monographs 5: 1-359.
Nevo, E., CAPANNA, E., Corti, M., JARvIs, J. U. M. & HICKMAN, G. C. 1985. Karyo-
type differentiation in the endemic subterranean mole rats of South Africa (Rodentia,
Bathyergidae). Zeitschrift fiir Sdugetierkunde 51 (1): 36-48.
NEvo, E., BEN-SHLOMO, R., BEILES, A., JARVIS, J. U. M. & HICKMAN, G. C. 1987. Allo-
zyme differentiation and systematics of the endemic subterranean mole rats of South
Africa. Biochemical Systematics and Ecology 15 (4): 489-502.
Pocock, T. N. 1976. Pliocene mammalian microfauna from Langebaanweg: a new fossil
genus linking the Otomyinae with the Murinae. South African Journal of Science 72 (2):
58-60.
Pocock, T. N. 1987. Plio-Pleistocene fossil mammalian microfauna of southern Africa—
a preliminary report including description of two new fossil muroid genera (Mammalia:
Rodentia). Palaeontologia africana 26 (7): 69-91.
ROBERTS, A. 1926. Some new South African mammalsand some changes in nomenclature.
Annals of the Transvaal Museum 11 (4): 245-263.
RoBERTS, A. 1951. The mammals of South Africa. Johannesburg: The Mammals of Africa
Book Fund.
SCHREBER, J. C. D. von. 1782. Die Sdugthiere in Abbildungen nach der Natur mit
Beschreibungen 4: 715. Erlangen: Walther.
THOMAS, O. & SCHWANN, H. 1904. Diagnosis of B. janetta. Abstract of the Proceedings of
the Zoological Society, London 1904 (2): 5-6.
TAYLOR, P. J., RAUTENBACH, I. L., DIPPENAAR, N. J. & BAKER, C. M. 1985. Age
determination in the Cape molerat Georychus QUO SIS. South African Journal of Science
20 (4): 261-267.
Woops, C. A. 1993. Suborder Hystricognathi. Jn: WiLson, D. E. & REEDER, D. M.
Mammal species of the world. A taxonomic and geographic reference. (2nd edition).
Washington and London: Smithsonian Institution Press.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed
by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov.,
etc. The name of the taxon should be followed, without intervening punctuation, by the author’s name
(not abbreviated) and the year of publication; a comma must separate author’s name and year. The
author’s name and date must be placed in parentheses if a species or subspecies is transferred from its
original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must be separated from the
scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be either according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order,
with all references to that name following in chronological order (see example 1), or according to
chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the year is placed in front of each entry, and the
synonym repeated in full for each entry (see example 2). The author should adopt one style or the
other throughout a paper. .
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Example 1
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example: comma separates author's name and year; semicolon separates more than
one reference by the same author; full stop separates references by different authors; figures of plates are enclosed in
parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures; dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers.
Example 2
1845 Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, p. 37.
1856 Leda plicifera A. Adams, p. 50.
1859 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, p. 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73).
1861 Nucula largillierti Philippi, p. 87.
1871 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould): Sowerby, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—-b).
1950 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, p. 163, fig. 301.
1955 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, p. 110.
1964 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Bamard, p. 234, figs 8-9.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens
mentioned in the original description are to be designated allotype (if applicable) and/or paratypes;
additional material not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data
(registration number, depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype
and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype. SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s
Beach, Port Elizabeth (33°51°S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text, e.g. ‘. . . the Figure depicting
C. namacolus .. .’, or‘. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10). . .’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded by initials or full
names: e.g. Du Toit, but A. L. du Toit; Von Huene, but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary. Reference to the author should
preferably be expressed in the third person. Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except
when forming part of the title of a book or article, e.g. ‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII.
Amphipoda.’. A specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its
abbreviation to initial capital letter (except at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph), provided the
Same generic name is used consecutively. The name of new genus or species should not be included
in the title; it should be included in the abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet
the requirements of Biological Abstracts.
8. GENERAL. Once referees’ reports have been received by the editor, these will be discussed by the
editorial committee. If the paper is considered acceptable after minor or major revision, the reports
will be forwarded to the author who must then thoroughly revise in accordance with the referees’
suggestions. Final acceptance of the revised manuscript will be considered by the editorial committee.
In the case of major revision being necessary, the committee reserves the right to consult one or more
referees regarding the revised manuscript.
diene eyees 0° PP: te as
; o * ng Se @o6
‘ ”
® cee Fs ee Tt,
¢ ‘9! nly:
De ag Meg
aad SAY
. 4 "ee
~ "a4 Sue 4,.
° ~ ASN 2
-; ge
i CHRISTIANE:DENYS
ee Pa ati Ae age par eR is
x $a. 5S ee i ne
’ 7 ‘ . Ne we “ar
PHYLOGENETIC IMPLICATIONS-OF
THE EXISTENCE OF TWO MODERN ‘GENERA
OF BATHYERGIDAE (MAMMALIA; RODENTIA)
IN THE PLIOCENE SITE OF LANGEBAANWEG |
(SOUTH AFRICA)...
VOLUME 105 PART 6 NOVEMBER 1998 ISSN 0303-2515
‘AH
SG?x
NH
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE ‘TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of: title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of
new genera or species; Author’s(s’) name(s); address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out);
number of illustrations and tables
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary (if paper is lengthy)
(g) Acknowledgments
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
3. MANUSCRIPT should be typed, double spaced with adequate margins. Four copies should be
provided. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of figure captions should be
typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are centred small capitals;
second subheadings are shouldered small capitals; third subheadings are shouldered italics; fourth sub-
headings are indented, shouldered italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration
(never roman numerals) of headings and abbreviations. Footnotes should be avoided unless they are
short and essential. All generic and specific names should be underlined or italicized.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12.5 x 18.5 cm (19.5 cm including
caption); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated in pencil on the reverse of the
figure; originals larger than 36 x 48 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular
in shape and final size. The size of illustrated objects may be indicated by a metric scale on the figure
(if appropriate), or the enlargement or reduction should be given in the caption; if the latter, then the
final reduction or enlargement should be taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not
printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items
of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; labelling on all figures should be non-serif
lettering (e.g. Helvetica, Univers) of uniform style, in lower-case whenever possible, and of appropri-
ate size taking into account the final size. The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil
on the back of each illustration, together with an indication of the desired reduction or enlargement.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the
paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) described. . .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) described...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year; pagination indicated by colon, not p. (except in synonymies, see
example 2); names of joint authors connected by ampersand; ef al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names
of all authors given in list of references.
(b)Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within
each name, with suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in
that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal articles give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scientific periodicals.
4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses (if pagination
discontinuous), pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88:
100-140.
FISCHER, P. H., DUVAL, M. & RAFFY, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines.
Archives de zoologie expérimentale et générale 74: 627-634.
KOHN, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Annals and Magazine of Natural History (13) 2: 309-320.
KOHN, A. J. 1960b. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bulletin of the Bingham Qceanographic Collection, Yale University 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid Afrika ausgefihrt in den
Jahren 1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16:
269-270.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 105 _ Band
November 1998 November
Part 6 Deel
BACULITES ALAVENSIS SANTAMARIA ZABALA,
1996 (CEPHALOPODA, AMMONOIDEA),
FROM THE UPPER CAMPANIAN
OF NORTHERN SPAIN
By
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
THOMAS KUCHLER
Cape Town Kaapstad
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles,
revisions and review articles in anthropology, archaeology, palaeontology,
geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology, and marine and freshwater
biology.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in
part, with material from the collections of the South African Museum. Other
contributions are also considered provided at least one of the authors is a staff
member of the Museum. In the case of descriptions of new species not already
part of the Museum's collections, the holotype and, if possible, part of the
paratype series must be deposited in the South African Museum. Authors whose
contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Committee prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper
accepted is published as a separate part at irregular intervals as material becomes
available; parts are priced individually.
Editorial committee
Dr H. C. Klinger Elizabeth Louw (Editor)
Dr P. A. Hulley (Chairman)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000 South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Publications Office.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://nv1.samuseum.ac.za/collect/infosci/pub/prclist.htm
OUT OF PRINT
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 4(1), 543, 5, 7-9), 61, 2p
7(1-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3), 11(1-2, 5, 7, t.-p.i.), 14(1-3), 15(4-5),
24(2, 5), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 45(1), 49(1), 67(5, 11), 84(2)
ISBN 0 86813 173 3
D6877
Printed in South Africa by
The Rustica Press, Old Mill Road,
Ndabeni, Western Cape
BACULITES ALAVENSIS SANTAMARIA ZABALA, 1996
(CEPHALOPODA, AMMONOIDEA),
FROM THE UPPER CAMPANIAN OF NORTHERN SPAIN
By
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
Division of Earth Sciences, South African Museum, Cape Town
&
THOMAS KUCHLER
Togostrasse 3, D-13351 Berlin (Wedding)
(With 5 figures)
[MS accepted I October 1998]
ABSTRACT
Several specimens of the poorly known Baculites alavensis Santamaria Zabala, 1996, are
described from the Upper Campanian of Ecay, northern Spain. These fully display the typical
ornament of the species. Affinities with B. leopoliensis Nowak, 1908, B. alonsoi Santamaria
Zabala, 1996, Trachybaculites columna Morton, 1834, B. vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936, and
B. sulcatus Baily, 1855, are discussed.
CONTENTS
PAGE
NNN Ed CSAP os Stine aide ance Sen aa ee oo 8 aia an buses Cuaine Sache Mcamatinwonemeln oaouos eee 287
RE BRIERE NS ero io css isc ccia snes asa nite oep ecu ws cubic csscasia tt nese aueablarmaetiaceen macceaene 288
MB MEAL ACON COLO PY! 16: 02 5 ioe. cmiseinins svic'ie soa nieisieiibimesemeey wigs weiss bar's cin nietnaeniee wsiciets meena 288
MARR CAPE ARIES MO 5. fa sho aicinnie One Sabre insane Gate Gauiisemomeoucet enema met ac aac oneaccna: 295
RE Oa RPOREE I eco 5.c sonar Csi wincia a ie wieah dvacwergmetwenans ue sede dseetonmmeanaescaence eons 296
INTRODUCTION
Baculites alavensis is here described on the basis of numerous specimens
collected by one of us (T.K.) in Spain to illustrate the intraspecific variation of
the species, as well as to compare it with baculitid species of similar
morphologies.
287
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 105 (6), 1998: 287-296, 5 figs.
288 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
LOCATION OF SPECIMENS
All the Spanish specimens are housed in the private collection of
T. Kuchler, Berlin, Germany; other figured specimens are housed in the
collections of the South African Museum, Cape Town.
SYSTEMATIC PALAEONTOLOGY
Class CEPHALOPODA Cuvier, 1797
Order AMMONOIDEA Zittel, 1884
Suborder ANCYLOCERATINA Wiedmann, 1966
Family Baculitidae Gill, 1871
Genus Baculites Lamarck, 1799
Baculites alavensis Santamaria Zabala, 1996
Figs 1, 2A-F, 3, 4, SI-L
?1986a Baculites sp. 5. Kennedy, p. 113, pl. 18 (figs 2-3).
? 1986b Baculites leopoliensis Nowak; Kennedy, p. 1013, pl. 2
(figs 1-2, 11-12), pl. 3 (figs 22-24).
1996 Baculites alavensis Santamaria Zabala, p. 14, pl. 3 (figs 7-9).
Type
Holotype by original designation is the specimen figured by Santamaria
Zabala (1996, pl. 3 (fig. 8)) from the Upper Campanian of Ullibarri-Jauregui in
the province of Alava, northern Spain.
Material
EC1-100+26 m/1-3, 7-8; EC1-102/3-4; EC1-104/a—b; EC1-106/a-e;
EC1-106/1-7; EC1-107/a—b, EC1-108/a-—d, all from the Upper Campanian of
Ecay, Navarra, northern Spain.
Description
All the specimens appear to be composite moulds, preserved in grey silt-
stone; all are crushed to varying degrees and none shows the suture lines.
Most of the specimens have a compressed, ovoid whorl section, but we
suspect that this is mainly due to secondary deformation. A few specimens,
e.g. Figure 5I-J, show a near-circular whorl section.
The most striking feature of this species is the strong lateral, ventral and, in
some cases, also dorsal ribbing. These ribs arise near the dorsum, curve back
near the upper quarter of the dorsum, and then curve forwards over the ventral
part of the flanks. In some specimens, e.g. Figure 4B-D, the ribs are markedly
thickened at the point where the curvature of the ribs changes. In most
BACULITES ALAVENSIS FROM NORTHERN SPAIN 289
Fig. 1. Baculites alavensis Santamaria Zabala, 1996. EC1-108a from the Upper
Campanian of Ecay. x 1.
specimens, the ribs pass over the venter without diminishing in strength and
with a sharp apertural curvature. Bifurcating or intercalatory ribs near the
venter are extremely rare. Ribbing over the dorsum is generally much weaker
than on the flanks or on the venter (e.g. Fig. 2A—-C), but in some specimens
(e.g. Fig. 2D-F) ribbing on the dorsum is nearly, or as strong as, on the rest of
the shell. Rib density is generally two-and-a-half to three ribs per whorl height,
but it may be as low as two (Fig. 3G-I). Some of our specimens appear to be
completely devoid of ribbing (e.g. Fig. 4A). We suspect that these are merely
rare, smooth variants of B. alavensis rather than a different species. Part of the
aperture is preserved in one specimen (Fig. 3A-C).
290 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SESS
SHES
BACULITES ALAVENSIS FROM NORTHERN SPAIN 291
Fig. 3. Baculites alavensis Santamaria Zabala, 1996. A-C. EC1-107.
D-F. EC1-106/e. G-I. EC1-106/d. All from the Upper Campanian of Ecay.
Alt x J.
Fig. 2 (see facing page). A-F. Baculites alavensis Santamaria Zabala, 1996.
A-C. EC1-100+26 m/7. D-F. EC1-100+26 m. Both from the Upper Campanian
of Ecay. G. Baculites leopoliensis Nowak, 1908 (SAM-PCPo012917) from the Lower
Maastrichtian (?Upper Campanian) of Piotrawin, Poland.
onl
292 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 4. Baculites alavensis Santamaria Zabala, 1996. A. EC1-102/4. B-D. Ecl-106/a.
E. Ecl-106/b. F-H. Ecl-106/c. All from the Upper Campanian of Ecay.
B, D x 1; A, E-H ~x 2.
BACULITES ALAVENSIS FROM NORTHERN SPAIN 293
Discussion
The strong lateral and ventral, and in some cases dorsal ribbing, easily
distinguishes this species from all other European Campanian baculites.
Our material adds to the range of variation of B. alavensis described by
Santamaria Zabala (1996: 14, pl. 3 (figs 7-9)). The holotype (pl. 3 (fig. 8)) and
one of the paratypes (pl. 3 (fig. 9)) clearly show the strong circumperipheral
ribbing as found in some of our specimens.
We suspect that the material described as B. leopoliensis by Kennedy in
Kennedy ef al. (1986, pl. 2 (figs 1-2, 11-12), pl. 13 (figs 22-24)), does not
belong to that species but rather to B. alavensis. Ornament in B. leopoliensis
normally consists of crescentic ribs on the flanks that project over the venter,
often with intercalatories. Some specimens, however, lack the lateral ribs and
are completely smooth. None of the Polish examples of B. leopoliensis, as
figured by Nowak (1908, pl. 14 (figs 1-11)) and material in Klinger’s (SAM)
collection, Figure 2G, however, have as strong ribbing as that of B. alavensis;
nor have we seen any with strong dorsal ribbing. Even though most of our
material and that of Santamaria Zabala is diagenetically deformed, some
specimens show a virtually circular whorl section. That of B. leopoliensis is
distinctly compressed. The age of B. leopoliensis is uncertain. Following
Nowak (1908), the species was traditionally regarded as being of Maastrichtian
age (see e.g. Kennedy 1986a, 1986b). However, according to Hancock &
Kennedy (1993: 165), they found B. leopoliensis only in the Upper Campanian
zone of Nostoceras (N.) hyatti in various sections in Poland. Klinger (Machalski
1996), however, found B. leopoliensis (Fig. 2G) associated with Diplomoceras
cylindraceum at Piotrawin in Poland, which suggests that the stratigraphic range
of B. leopoliensis may extend into the Maastrichtian, or, alternatively, that
D. cylindraceum may already occur in the Upper Campanian.
The generally stronger ribbing, which in cases may be circumperipheral,
and the more inflated whorl section are sufficient to distinguish B. alavensis
from B. leopoliensis.
Baculites alonsoi Santamaria Zabala (1996: 13, pl. 3 (figs 3-6)) is more
weakly ornamented than typical B. alavensis and ribbing is restricted to the
dorsal part of the flanks. Morphologically it is intermediate between
B. leopoliensis and B. alavensis.
The specimen described by Kennedy (1986a: 113, pl. 18 (figs 2-3)) as
Baculites sp. 5 from the Upper Campanian of Courgeac (Charente) Acquitaine
is probably B. alavensis. What is of interest, is that Kennedy compared the
species to Baculites columna Morton (1834: 44, pl. 19 (fig. 8)) (Fig. 5A-H),
the type species of the Maastrichtian genus Trachybaculites Cobban & Kennedy,
1995. That species, however, typically has straight, circumperipheral ribbing
rather than crescentic as in B. alavensis. Trachybaculites has simplified sutures
(see e.g. Cobban & Kennedy 1995, fig. 17.25-17.26). Unfortunately, none of
our specimens shows the suture, so it is not possible to determine if B. alavensis
could possibly be an early Upper Campanian representative of Trachybaculites.
Amongst the Indo-Pacific species, only B. sulcatus Baily, 1855, and juvenile
B. vanhoepeni Venzo, 1936, have ornament similar to that of B. alavensis. Both
species were recently reviewed by Klinger & Kennedy (1997). Baculites
294 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
BACULITES ALAVENSIS FROM NORTHERN SPAIN 295
vanhoepeni has closely spaced crescentic lateral ribs in the juvenile stage (see
Klinger & Kennedy 1997, fig. 79m), but in the adult stage the ornament consists
of very characteristic auricular, widely spaced ribs that are confined to the
flanks (see e.g. Klinger & Kennedy 1997, fig. 93). Ornament in the Lower
Campanian B. sulcatus is extremely variable, ranging from nearly smooth to
strong, circumperipheral ribs. Some strongly ornamented forms of B. sulcatus
(Klinger & Kennedy 1997, fig. 64e-g, m-l) are indistinguishable from B. alav-
ensis, but in the majority of specimens ornament is more of the B. capensis-
B. vanhoepeni type.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Financial assistance to Klinger by the FRD (South Africa) is gratefully
acknowledged. Prof. R. Marcinowski kindly invited Klinger to visit Poland in
1996, and I. Walaszcyck and M. Machalski showed him the section at Pio-
travin. Prof. E. Mancini (Alabama) provided the specimens of Trachybaculites
columna for comparison. Samantha Black and Ingrid Klinger photographed the
material.
Fig. 5. A-H. Trachybaculites columna (Morton, 1834). A-B. SAM-PCAI12918.
C-E. SAM-PCAI112919. F-H. SAM-PCAI12920. All from the Upper Maastrichtian
Prairie Bluff Chalk at roadside at railway track, south side of Linden, Marengo County,
Alabama. I-L. Baculites alavensis Santamaria Zabala, 1996. I-J. Unregistered.
K-L. Ecl-107. Both from the Upper Campanian of Ecay.
A-H x 2; J-L x 1.
296 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
REFERENCES
BaiILy, W. H. 1855. Description of some Cretaceous fossils from South Africa; collected
by Capt. Garden of the 45th Regiment. Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society of
London 11: 454-465.
CoBBAN, W. A. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1995. Maastrichtian ammonites chiefly from the Prairie
Bluff Chalk in Alabama and Mississippi. Memoirs. Paleontological Society 44: 1-40.
HANCOCK, J. M. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1993. The high Cretaceous ammonite fauna from
Tercis, Landes, France. Bulletin de |’Institut Royal des sciences naturelles de Belgique
(Sciences de la Terre) : Bulletin van het Koninklijk Belgisch Instituut voor
natuurwetenschappen (Aardwetenschappen) 63: 149-209.
KENNEDY, W. J. 1986a. Campanian and Maastrichtian ammonites from northern Aquitaine,
France. Special Papers in Palaeontology 36: 1-145.
KENNEDY, W. J. In: KENNEDY, W. J., BILOTTE, M., LEPICARD, B. & SEGURA, F. 1986).
Upper Campanian and Maastrichtian ammonites from the Petites-Pyrenees, southern
France. Eclogae geologicae Helvetiae 79 (3): 1001-1037.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1997. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal,
South Africa. The ammonite family Baculitidae Gill, 1871 (excluding the genus
Eubaculites). Annals of the South African Museum 105 (1): 1-206.
MACHALSKI, M. 1996. Diplomoceras cylindraceum (Defrance, 1816): a typically
Maastrichtian ammonite in the Piotrawin section, Central Poland. Przeglad Geologiczny
44 (9): 953-954. [In Polish and English.]
Morton, S. G. 1834. Synopsis of the organic remains of the Cretaceous group of the
United States. Philadelphia: Key & Biddle.
Nowak, J. 1908. Untersuchungen uber die Cephalopoden der oberen Kreide in Polen.
I. Teil. Genus Baculites Lamarck. Bulletin international de l’Academie des sciences et
des lettres de Cracovie (Classe des sciences mathematiques et naturelles) 1908 (4):
326-353.
SANTAMARIA ZABALA, R. 1996. Los ammonites del Campaniense de la Provincia de Alava.
Sistematica y bioestratigrafia. Estudios del Museo de Ciencas Naturales de Alava 10-11:
5-25. [In Spanish with Basque and English summaries. ]
VENZO, S. 1936. Cefalopodi del Cretaceo medio-superiore dello Zululand. Palaeontographia
italica 36: 59-133 (1-75).
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed
by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov.,‘sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov.,
etc. The name of the taxon should be followed, without intervening punctuation, by the author’s name
(not abbreviated) and the year of publication; a comma must separate author’s name and year. The
author’s name and date must be placed in parentheses if a species or subspecies is transferred from its
original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must be separated from the
scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be either according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order,
with all references to that name following in chronological order (see example 1), or according to
chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the year is placed in front of each entry, and the
synonym repeated in full for each entry (see example 2). The author should adopt one style or the
other throughout a paper.
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Example 1
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871, pl. 2 (fig. 8a-b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above cng =p comma separates author’s name and year; semicolon separates more than
one reference by the same author; full stop separates references by different authors; figures of plates are enclosed in
parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures; dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers.
Example 2
1845 Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, p. 37.
1856 Leda plicifera A. Adams, p. 50.
1859 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, p. 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73).
1861 Nucula largillierti Philippi, p. 87.
1871 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould): Sowerby, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
1950 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, p. 163, fig. 301.
1955 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nickles, p. 110.
1964 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Barnard, p. 234, figs 8-9.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens
mentioned in the original description are to be designated allotype (if applicable) and/or paratypes;
additional material not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data
(registration number, depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype
and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype. SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s
Beach, Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text, e.g. *. . . the Figure depicting
C. namacolus ...’, or *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded by initials or full
names: e.g. Du Toit, but A. L. du Toit; Von Huene, but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary. Reference to the author should
preferably be expressed in the third person. Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except
when forming part of the title of a book or article, e.g. ‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII.
Amphipoda.’. A specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its
abbreviation to initial capital letter (except at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph), provided the
Same generic name is used consecutively. The name of new genus or species should not be included
in the title; it should be included in the abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet
the requirements of Biological Abstracts.
8. GENERAL. Once referees’ reports have been received by the editor, these will be discussed by the
editorial committee. If the paper is considered acceptable after minor or major revision, the reports
will be forwarded to the author who must then thoroughly revise in accordance with the referees’
suggestions. Final acceptance of the revised manuscript will be considered by the editorial committee.
In the case of major revision being necessary, the committee reserves the right to consult one or more
referees regarding the revised manuscript.
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
THOMAS KUCHLER
BACULITES ALAVENSIS
SANTAMARIA ZABALA, 1996
(CEPHALOPODA AMMONOIDEA)
FROM THE UPPER CAMPANIAN
OF NORTHERN SPAIN
VOLUME 105 PART 7 APRIL 1999 ISSN 0303-2515
x
DA
PS G4 x
‘OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of: title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of
new genera or species; Author’s(s’) name(s); address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out);
number of illustrations and tables
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary (if paper is lengthy)
(g) Acknowledgments
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
3. MANUSCRIPT should be typed, double spaced with adequate margins. Four copies should be
provided. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of figure captions should be
typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are centred small capitals;
second subheadings are shouldered small capitals; third subheadings are shouldered italics; fourth sub-
headings are indented, shouldered italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration
(never roman numerals) of headings and abbreviations. Footnotes should be avoided unless they are
short and essential. All generic and specific names should be underlined or italicized.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12.5 x 18.5 cm (19.5 cm including
caption); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated in pencil on the reverse of the
figure; originals larger than 36 x 48 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular
in shape and final size. The size of illustrated objects may be indicated by a metric scale on the figure
(if appropriate), or the enlargement or reduction should be given in the caption; if the latter, then the
final reduction or enlargement should be taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not
printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items
of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; labelling on all figures should be non-serif
lettering (e.g. Helvetica, Univers) of uniform style, in lower-case whenever possible, and of appropri-
ate size taking into account the final size. The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil
on the back of each illustration, together with an indication of the desired reduction or enlargement.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the
paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) described . . .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) described...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year; pagination indicated by colon, not p. (except in synonymies, see
example 2); names of joint authors connected by ampersand; ef al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names
of all authors given in list of references.
(b)Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within
each name, with suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in
that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal articles give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scientific periodicals.
4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses (if pagination
discontinuous), pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88:
100-140.
FISCHER, P. H., DUVAL, M. & RAFFY, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines.
Archives de zoologie expérimentale et générale 74: 627-634.
KOHN, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Annals and Magazine of Natural History (13) 2: 309-320. :
KOHN, A. J. 1960b. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bulletin of the Bingham Qceanographic Collection, Yale University 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid Afrika ausgefihrt in den
Jahren 1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16:
269-270.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 105 Band
April 1999 April
Part 7 Deel
HERMIT CRABS OF THE GENUS
PAGURUS FABRICIUS (CRUSTACEA,
DECAPODA, PAGURIDAE)
FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA
By
PATSY A. MCLAUGHLIN
&
JACQUES FOREST
Cape Town Kaapstad
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles,
revisions and review articles in anthropology, archaeology, palaeontology,
geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology, and marine and freshwater
biology.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in
part, with material from the collections of the South African Museum. Other
contributions are also considered provided at least one of the authors is a staff
member of the Museum. In the case of descriptions of new species not already
part of the Museum's collections, the holotype and, if possible, part of the
paratype series must be deposited in the South African Museum. Authors whose
contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Committee prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper
accepted is published as a separate part at irregular intervals as material becomes
available; parts are priced individually.
Editorial committee
Dr P. A. Hulley (Chairman) Dr H. C. Klinger Elizabeth Louw (Editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000 South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to Administration.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://nv1.samuseum.ac.za/collect/infosci/pub/prclist.htm
OUT OF PRINT
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 4(1), 51-3, 5, 7-9), 6(1, 2, t.-p.i.),
7(1-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3), 11(1-2, 5, 7, t.-p.i.), 14(1-3), 15(4-5),
24(2, 5), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 45(1), 49(1, 2), 67(5, 11), 84(2)
ISBN 0 86813 174 1
D7244
Printed in South Africa by
The Rustica Press, Old Mill Road,
Ndabeni, Western Cape
HERMIT CRABS OF THE GENUS PAGURUS FABRICIUS
(CRUSTACEA, DECAPODA, PAGURIDAE)
FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA
By
PATSY A. MCLAUGHLIN
Shannon Point Marine Center, Western Washington University,
1900 Shannon Point Road, Anacortes, WA 98221-9081B, U.S.A.
&
JACQUES FOREST
Muséum national d’Histoire naturelle, Laboratoire de Zoologie (Arthropodes),
61 rue Buffon, 75005 Paris, France
(With 7 figures)
[MS accepted 22 April 1998]
ABSTRACT
Specimens of the hermit crab genus Pagurus, primarily from the Meiring Naude cruises
of 1982-1986, have prompted a review of south-eastern South African species assigned to the
genus. Pagurus barnardi Forest has been re-examined, based on the type material, i.e.,
Barnard’s ‘Incertae sedis’. This species has proved to be synonymous with Pagurus liochele
(Barnard). The presence of Pagurus cuanensis Bell in the Western Indian Ocean has been
verified and is formally acknowledged as the senior subjective synonym of Pagurus placens
(Stebbing).
Pagurus spinulentus as interpreted initially by Stebbing and later by Barnard, not
Pagurus spinulentus (Henderson), has been found to be conspecific with Pagurus prideaux
Leach; however, Henderson’s P. spinulentus has proved to bear considerable similarities with
P. cavicarpus (Paul’son) reported here for the first time west of the Red Sea. The range of
Pagurus liochele is extended to off Whale Rock, Transkei. A new species resembling the
West African species, Pagurus souriei (Forest) and Pagurus gordonae (Forest), is described
from KwaZulu-Natal. A key to the regional species of Pagurus is presented. Stebbing’s
Pagurus deprofundis has been redescribed from the holotype. This species has recently been
transferred to the genus Propagurus McLaughlin & de Saint Laurent.
CONTENTS
PAGE
IME en. 22 eRe «hah OAs wi Suis etal da at Gadicucunde Saas Goteteecre atte 298
MINE ECT Sh ors Sch dss ine cee acre ae eae waa Sati ae ERE Same en seer we 300
RM ccs aint AS aise elon cn cnaaa nm Somes decane os Mee cot sucee Beuntase es 301
PE PMEEIND ET ADTI CLUS 285s eichiicr couse adiciahs veidomoae Um nrc adele ke meee n Meleue et eae oe: 301
EEE EE PHO AL SPECIES OL FGSHIUS divs cons ode ston cthed cee: sens sen esce aac cee sees sas 3352
meas ropaenrus McLaughlin & de Saint Laurent ../...0.2..20-...0cccececeeeectenbecees 333
a ESTES SS eae te ete mee re een ny nS Pn CEE ere 340
SUR DNRRNIETsc ia 5a) Sara tis Gone wha alc lente weenie aoeaa sateen as amine Maes 340
297
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 105 (7), 1999: 297-344, 7 figs.
298 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
INTRODUCTION
Since the early accounts of South African species of Pagurus Fabricius,
1775 (reported as Eupagurus Brandt, 1851), by Stebbing (1910, 1920, 1924)
and Odhner (1923), there have been elements of uncertainty about the true
identities of the local species of the genus, particularly those occurring in the
littoral and deeper waters off the south-eastern coast. For example, Barnard
(1950) reported the occurrence of eight species of Pagurus (as Eupagurus) and
one ‘Incertae sedis’ in South African waters, of which four were present off
the southern Indian Ocean coast. Although Barnard concurred with Odhner
(1923) that Balss’ (1912) Pagurus pollicaris var. alcocki (Balss, 1911) deserved
full specific rank, he omitted Odhner’s (1923) Pagurus variabilis (= P. mbizi
(Forest, 1955); not P. variabilis (A. Milne Edwards & Bouvier, 1892)),
P. triangularis (Chevreux & Bouvier, 1892), and P. cuanensis Bell, 1845 (as
Eupagurus cuanensis Thompson), from his key to the South African species for
‘lack of comparative material and literature’. Barnard (1950) was ‘inclined to
suspect’ that Odhner’s (1923) P. cuanensis really represented Pagurus placens
(Stebbing, 1924).
Forest (1955) addressed some of the questionable identifications and/or
descriptions of Stebbing (1920, 1924), Odhner (1923), and Barnard (1950) in
his monograph of the pagurids from the west coast of Africa. Specifically,
Forest (1955) compared specimens of the South African taxon attributed first by
Stebbing (1910) to Eupagurus tristanensis Henderson, 1888, and subsequently
by Stebbing (1920) and Barnard (1950) to Pagurus spinulentus (Henderson,
1888), with the holotype of the latter, and concluded that Stebbing’s (1920) and
Barnard’s (1950) taxon was not conspecific with either of Henderson’s taxa.
However, Forest (1955: 106) noted the marked resemblance between the South
African taxon and Pagurus prideaux Leach, 1815 (as Eupagurus prideauxi), and
emphasized the need for detailed examinations of more specimens from south-
eastern South Africa.
Forest (1955) also noted that Eupagurus zebra Henderson, 1893, reported
from South Africa by Balss (1912), Stebbing (1920) and Barnard (1950), prob-
ably represented a species of Pylopaguropsis Alcock, 1905. Henderson’s (1893)
taxon was formally transferred to Pylopaguropsis by McLaughlin & Haig
(1989); however, these authors were unable to locate Stebbing’s (1920) speci-
mens. Based on Stebbing’s reference to ‘. . . slenderness of the second and third
peraeopods. . .’, McLaughlin & Haig (1989) considered Stebbing’s (1920)
taxon ‘incertae sedis’. The presence of Pylopaguropsis zebra in south-eastern
Africa has since been confirmed (e.g., McLaughlin 1997b (printer’s spelling
error as Pylopagurosis)).
Both of Stebbing’s (1924) species, Pagurus placens and P. deprofundis
(Stebbing), were based on single specimens; however, two additional speci-
mens, presumably of P. placens, collected later near the type locality, permitted
Barnard (1950) to redescribe the species, and to make one of those specimens
available for Forest’s (1955) subsequent examination. Forest (1955: 106) found
considerable agreement between this specimen and Pagurus cuanensis (reported
as Eupagurus cuanensis Thompson), but indicated that if certain differences in
ornamentation of the chelipeds were found in additional South African
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 299
specimens, Pagurus placens might be considered a geographical variety of
Pagurus cuanensis. None the less, Forest (1955: 114) included Stebbing’s taxon
in his synonymy of P. cuanensis. Forest also pointed out the need for a more
thorough description of P. deprofundis, still represented only by the holotype.
Although Forest (1966) did not include P. placens in his synonymy of P. cuan-
ensis, he reported that P. cuanensis had a very extended distribution from Nor-
way to South Africa ‘ou il a été signalé sous le nom d’Eupagurus placens
Stebbing’ (Forest 1955: 116). Kensley (1981) listed the South African distri-
bution of P. cuanensis as False Bay to Port Elizabeth, and that of P. placens as
False Bay to Knysna. Ingle (1993), without comment, cited Pagurus placens
as a synonym of P. cuanensis, and was followed in this action by Sandberg &
McLaughlin (1998), although none of these authors examined Stebbing’s (1924)
species.
The type specimens of Barnard’s (1947) Pylopagurus liochele were
re-examined by McLaughlin (1988). The absence of paired first pleopods in the
female of this species caused McLaughlin (1998) to reassign Barnard’s (1947)
species to Pagurus. Forest (1966), in discussing the similarities of a group of
closely allied western African Pagurus species, proposed the name Pagurus
barnardi for Barnard’s (1950) ‘Incertae sedis’ specimens. Therefore, depending
upon the accuracy of Forest’s (1955), Ingle’s (1993) and Sandberg &
McLaughlin’s (1998) synonymy of P. placens with P. cuanensis, the number of
Pagurus species occurring in south-eastern South Africa could be expected to
number five or six, despite the questionable identity of Stebbing’s (1920) and
Barnard’s (1950) P. spinulentus.
Kensley (1981) defined southern Africa as the area extending from
Mocamedes on the west coast to Mozambique on the east coast. However, for
the pagurid fauna, at least, the northern limit along the Atlantic coast les
between Liideritz and Walvis Bay, which corresponds with Barnard’s (1974)
geographical limit for the Mollusca. With the exclusion of Angola, Odhner’s
(1923) species, other than P. cuanensis, have not been considered in this report,
nor has Pagurus dartevellei (Forest, 1958b), collected by Kensley & Penrith
(1973) from Mocamedes.
We have recently had the opportunity to examine a small, but very import-
ant, collection of pagurids housed at the University of Transkei, Umtata, which
has provided the data necessary to address the true identities of the Pagurus
species of south-eastern South Africa. This collection contains specimens of
all but one of the species of Pagurus discussed herein, including P. cuanensis,
P. liochele, and P. spinulentus sensu Stebbing (1920) and Barnard (1950).
A species closely allied to P. souriei (Forest, 1952) and P. gordonae (Forest,
1956) is described as Pagurus emmersoni sp. nov. Pagurus cavicarpus
(Paul’son, 1875) is represented in samples collected off KwaZulu-Natal. One
immature male specimen can, for the present, only be described as Pagurus sp.;
however, it does not appear to be conspecific with any other known regional
species. Until very recently (McLaughlin & de Saint Laurent 1998), Pagurus
deprofundis was known only from its holotype, which is redescribed herein.
These authors reassigned it to their newly established genus Propagurus
McLaughlin & de Saint Laurent, 1998. Seven Pagurus species would have been
documented for south-eastern South Africa had P. barnardi not proved to be
300 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
synonymous with P. liochele. Diagnoses, redescriptions, or full descriptions
and illustrations are provided for all of these taxa, together with a key to the
regional species of Pagurus.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
Collections and museums. Much of the University of Transkei material used
in this study represents part of the pagurid fauna collected during cruises of the
R.V. Meiring Naude, 1982-1986. It has been supplemented by Stebbing’s type
specimen of Pagurus deprofundis from The Natural History Museum, London
(NHM), three of Barnard’s (1950) ‘Incertae sedis’ specimens (= syntypes
of P. barnardi) from the South African Museum, Cape Town (SAM), and
specimens from the University of Cape Town Ecological Survey, now in the
collections of the South African Museum and Muséum national d’ Histoire
naturelle, Paris (MNHN). Specimens of Pagurus spinulentus sensu Stebbing and
Barnard from the South African Museum and the Muséum national d’ Histoire
naturelle have been compared with the type specimens of Pagurus tristanensis
and P. spinulentus from The Natural History Museum, and with specimens of
Pagurus prideaux from the Zoological Museum Amsterdam (ZMA), and one
from the authors’ personal reference collection (PMcL).
Thorough searches of the collections of both The Natural History Museum
and the South African Museum failed to locate the type specimen of Pagurus
placens; however, the two ‘typical’ specimens from the South African
Museum that were compared by Barnard (1950) and Forest (1955) have been
re-examined. Odhner’s P. cuanensis has been borrowed from the Swedish
Museum of Natural History (SMNH). The identity of specimens resembling
Pagurus cavicarpus (Paul’son, 1875) has been confirmed by comparison with a
specimen of this species from the Red Sea borrowed from the National Natuur-
historisch Museum, Leiden, The Netherlands (RMNH), and with NHM
specimens from the John Murray Expedition identified by Thompson (1943) as
Pagurus carpoforaminatus (Alcock, 1905), a junior synonym of the former
according to Lewinsohn (1969). Comparative material of P.. cuanensis has come
from the Muséum national d’Histoire naturelle and PMcL’s reference
collection. All borrowed specimens have been returned to their museums of
origin; the type material of Pagurus emmersoni sp. nov. has been deposited in
the South African Museum and Muséum national d’Histoire naturelle. Rep-
resentative specimens of the other species from the Meiring Naude cruises have
been deposited in the collections of the Muséum national d’Histoire naturelle,
National Museum of Natural History, Smithsonian Institution (USNM), National
Natuurhistorisch Museum, South African Museum, The Natural History
Museum, and PMcL’s personal collection.
Illustrations. Drawings were made using a Wild M-5 dissection microscope
with camera lucida attachment.
Measurements. One measurement, shield length, given in parentheses, and
measured from the tip of the rostrum, or midpoint of the rounded rostral lobe,
to the midpoint of the posterior margin of the shield, provides an indication of
specimen size.
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 301
Terminology. Terminology used in the diagnoses and descriptions generally
follows that of McLaughlin (1974), with the exception of the fourth pereopod
(after McLaughlin 1997a) and telson (after McLaughlin & Forest 1997).
DESCRIPTIONS
Family Paguridae Latreille, 1802
Genus Pagurus Fabricius, 1775
Cancer Linnaeus, 1758: 625 (in part).
Pagurus Fabricius, 1775: 410 (in part).
Eupagurus Brandt, 1851: 105 (in part).
Bernhardus Dana, 1851: 267 (in part).
non Pagurus Berthold, 1827: 255 (nomen nudum).
non Pagurus Fabricius sensu Dana, 1851: 267 (= Dardanus Paul’son, 1875).
Type species. Cancer bernhardus Linnaeus, 1758 (as defined by lectotype
selection by Forest & Holthuis 1955: 312; specimen figured by Swammerdam
1737, pl. 2 (fig. 1)). Gender masculine.
Diagnosis
Eleven pairs of biserial gills (cf. McLaughlin & de Saint Laurent 1998).
Rostrum variable. Ocular acicles simple, bifid or multifid. Ischium of third
maxilliped with crista dentata well developed and one or more accessory teeth.
Sternite of third maxillipeds unarmed or armed. Chelipeds generally very
unequal, right usually appreciably larger. Dactyls of ambulatory legs commonly
with spinose ventral margins. Sternite of third pereopods with variably shaped
anterior lobe. Fourth pereopods usually semichelate, with one to several rows
of scales in propodal rasp. Fifth pereopods usually chelate, occasionally
semichelate. Sternite of fifth pereopods variable.
Coxae of fifth pereopods generally symmetrical in both sexes. Males with
paired gonopores; no well-developed sexual tubes; no paired pleopods, usually
with 3 or 4 unpaired left pleopods, rarely without unpaired pleopods. Females
usually with paired gonopores; no paired pleopods, usually 4 unpaired left pleo-
pods, rarely only 3. Abdomen usually spirally twisted, rarely straight. Uropods
most commonly asymmetrical, occasionally symmetrical. Telson typically with
mediolateral indentation, indistinctly delineating anterior and posterior regions;
posterior region frequently separated into distinct lobes by well-developed
median cleft, with terminal margins rounded, straight or oblique.
Pagurus cavicarpus (Paul’son, 1875)
Fig. 1A-C, E-I, K
Eupagurus cavicarpus Paul’son, 1875: 91, pl. 12 (fig. 3-3a); 1961: 97, pl. 12 (fig. 3-3a).
Nobili, 1906: 123. Riddell, 1911: 261. Ramadan, 1936: 4 (list).
Eupagurus carpoforaminatus var. nephromma Alcock, 1905: 131, ?not pl. 11 (fig. 4-4a) (see
remarks).
302 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Eupagurus carpoforaminatus: Thompson, 1943: 425 (in part) (see remarks).
Pagurus cavicarpus: Gordan, 1956: 327 (lit). Lewinsohn, 1969: 61 (in part), fig. 10.
non Eupagurus carpoforaminatus var. nephromma: Terao, 1913: 370 (= Pagurus megalops
(Stimpson, 1858)).
Material
Pagurus cavicarpus. RMNH, 1 ¢ (4.7 mm); Red Sea. Aqaba, Jordan,
collected by H. Schumacher. USNM 276077, 1 6, 1 2 (3.0, 2.2 mm); vicinity
of Kosi River mouth, Meiring Naude Stn ZA2, 26°56’S 32°54.7’E, 50 m,
6 June 1987. RMNH, 1 ¢, 1 ovigerous ? (2.4, 2.9 mm); vicinity of Kosi River
mouth, Meiring Naude Stn ZA2, 26°56’S 32°54.7’E, 50 m, 6 June 1987.
PMcL, 1 ¢ (3.2 mm); off Kosi River mouth, Meiring Naude Stn ZA3,
26°54.8’S 32°54.6’E, 6 June 1987. NHM 1997.726-727, 1 3, 1 2 (3.3,
2.5 mm); off Kosi River mouth, Meiring Naude Stn ZAS, 26°54.7’S 32°55’E,
45 m, 6 June 1987. SAM-A43223, 2 3, 1 2 (2.4-3.7 mm); off Kosi River
mouth, Meiring Naude Stn ZA23, 26°54.1’S 32°54.8’E, 50 m, 8 June 1987.
PMcL, 1 ovigerous ? (3.2 mm); off Boteler Point, Meiring Naude Stn ZB3,
27°12’S 32°54.2’E, 50 m, 6 June 1987. MNHN Pg5518, 1 3 (2.9 mm);
Meiring Naude Stn ZG1, 27°26.2’S 32°44.2’E, 55-60 m, 3 June 1987.
SAM-A43406, 1 3 (4.7 mm), off KwaZulu-Natal, Stn NAD 87W, 29°10’S
31°37’E, 43 m, 29 July 1964. SAM-A43404, 1 3 (6.6 mm), off KwaZulu-
Natal, Stn NAD 8N, 29°53.6’S 31°04.6’E, 38 m, 16 May 1958. SAM-
A43405, 2 6 (3.3, 3.3 mm), off KwaZulu-Natal, Stn NA 18V, 29°58’S
31°02’E, 49 m, 12 August 1958.
Pagurus carpoforaminatus sensu Thompson, 1943. NHM 1952.6.17.72-78,
3 3, 2 ovigerous ? (3.2-4.1 mm); South Arabian coast, John Murray
Expedition, H.E.M.S. Mabahiss Stn 45, 18°03’300N 57°02’300E, 38 m,
29 October 1933. NHM 1952.6.17.72-78, 1 3 (4.4 mm); Stn 53, 19°22’360N
57°53’000E, 13.5 m, 2 November 1933.
Diagnosis
Shield slightly broader than long. Rostrum usually broadly rounded, not
produced beyond level of lateral projections. Ocular peduncles broadest at bases
of corneas; approximately equal to length of antennal peduncles, but reaching
only to approximately mid-length of antennular peduncles; corneas somewhat
dilated; ocular acicles triangular. Antennal peduncles with anterolateral distal
angles of second segments extending to distal half of fourth peduncular segment,
but not reaching distal margin; acicle reaching to or beyond mid-length of
ultimate peduncular segment, but usually not reaching distal margins of corneas.
Chelipeds with numerous distinctly plumose setae, but not masking armature
and not appreciably more dense on ventral surfaces and margins of meri. Right
cheliped moderately slender; dactyl with row of spines on dorsomesial margin;
palm with row of teardrop-shaped spines on dorsomesial margin, medianly
elevated dorsal surface similarly armed and set off by longitudinal grooves
mesially and laterally; carpus with row of spines on dorsomesial margin, dorsal
surface with several rows of spines, ventral surface usually, but not always,
with distinct foramen centrally near distal margin. Left cheliped appreciably
shorter than right; palm with single or double row of spines on dorsolateral
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 303
Fig. 1. A-C, E-I, K. Pagurus cavicarpus (Paul’son, 1875), d (3.2 mm) from Meiring
Naude Stn Z3 (PMcL). D, J, L. Pagurus spinulentus (Henderson, 1888), holotype °
(8.7 mm) from Challenger Stn Tables Island (NHM 88.33). A. Shield and cephalic
appendages. B. Chela and carpus of right cheliped (dorsal view). C-D. Carpus of right
cheliped (ventral view.). E. Chela and carpus of left cheliped (dorsal view). F. Carpus of
left cheliped (ventral view). G. Right second pereopod (lateral view). H. Left third
pereopod (lateral view). I-J. Anterior lobe of sternite of third pereopods. K-L. Telson.
Scales I-K, 1.0 mm; A, 2.0 mm; B-C, E-H, L, 3.0 mm; D, 10 mm.
304 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
margin and additional double or triple row on elevated dorsal midline; carpus
with row of strong spines dorsally, ventral surface usually, but not always, with
distinct foramen or circular depression. Ambulatory legs with dactyls appreci-
ably longer than propodi; dorsal margins of propodi and carpi each with row of
spines; meri of second pair with spinose dorsal and ventral margins.
Males with 4 unpaired uniramous or unequally biramous left pleopods.
Telson with faint, partial transverse suture indicating division into anterior and
posterior portions; terminal margins of posterior lobes each with row of strong
corneous-tipped spines extending on to lateral margins.
Redescription
Shield (Fig. 1A) usually slightly broader than long; anterior margin concave
between rostral lobe and lateral projections; lateral margins each distinctly
notched to produce small raised lobe; posterior margin roundly truncate.
Rostrum obsolete or broadly rounded, not produced beyond level of strongly
developed lateral projections. Lateral projections triangular, with small
marginal or submarginal spine.
Ocular peduncles 0.80 to as long as shield; moderately slender basally, but
broad at bases of slightly to considerably dilated corneas, 1 or 2 distinct tufts
of setae dorsomesially. Ocular acicles triangular, moderately slender, termin-
ating subacutely and with prominent submarginal spine; separated basally by
0.50-0.75 basal width of one acicle.
Antennular peduncles over-reaching distal margins of corneas by 0.50-0.95
length of ultimate segment. Ultimate and penultimate segments glabrous or with
only 1 or 2 short setae. Basal segment with prominently produced distolateral
subacute lobe; small spine on distolateral margin of statocyst lobe.
Antennal peduncles over-reaching distal margins of corneas very slightly to
nearly 0.18 length of ultimate segment. Fifth and fourth segments each with few
scattered setae. Third segment with small spine on ventrodistal margin, at least
partially obscured by long setae. Second segment with dorsolateral distal angle
produced, reaching mid-length of fourth segment, terminating with simple or
very small bifid spine, mesial margin unarmed or with 2 or 3 spinules; dorso-
mesial distal angle with strong spine. First segment with dorsolateral distal
margin unarmed or with small spinule, ventrolateral margin produced into very
prominent spine. Antennal acicle reaching approximately to mid-length of
ultimate peduncular segment; with terminal spine partially obscured by tuft of
setae; mesial surface with few tufts of setae.
Ischium of third maxilliped with 1 accessory tooth on moderately short
crista dentata. Sternite of third maxillipeds with spine on either side of midline.
Right cheliped appreciably larger than left, chela often more slender than in
illustrated male (Fig. 1B); dactyl overlapped by fixed finger, but separated by
slight hiatus; cutting edges of both with calcareous teeth. Dactyl slightly shorter,
equal to, or slightly longer than palm; dorsal surface flattened, with covering of
rather closely-spaced, low, somewhat teardrop-shaped spines at least from mid-
line mesially and including dorsomesial margin, sometimes extending to tip;
dorsomesial margin also with numerous short plumose setae; mesial face not
distinctly delimited; ventral surface with few low tubercles and 1 or 2 rows of
short plumose setae. Palm approximately equaling length of carpus; dorsomesial
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 305
margin slightly elevated, with 2 or 3 rows of regular and teardrop-shaped
spines, extending somewhat on to mesial face, medially elevated dorsal surface
armed with numerous teardrop-shaped spines and set off by distinct longitudinal
groove mesially and fainter longitudinal groove laterally; dorsolateral margin
not delimited, but rounded lateral surface armed with irregular rows of short,
thick, tuberculate or teardrop-shaped spines extending nearly to tip of fixed
finger; dorsal surface of fixed finger covered, but not densely, with tuberculate
spines; ventral surface of fixed finger with short tufts of plumose setae. Carpus
(Fig. 1B-C) approximately same length as merus; dorsodistal margin with few
to several small to moderately strong spines or spinose tubercles; dorsomesial
margin with almost double row of prominent spines, frequently separated by
generally smooth longitudinal strip from remainder of spinose dorsal surface;
dorsolateral margin not delimited, lateral face with similar tuberculate
or teardrop-shaped spines and tufts of plumose setae; mesial face with
few teardrop-shaped spines and scattered short plumose setae; ventral surface
with flattened but still somewhat teardrop-shaped tubercles and usually, but not
always, with distinct median foramen; ventromesial and ventrolateral margins
spinose and setose. Merus with several small spines on dorsodistal margin,
dorsal margin with short transverse spinulose ridges and plumose setae; lateral
face with some transverse spinulose ridges and plumose setae, mesial face with
plumose setae; ventromesial margin with nearly double row of small scale-like
blunt or subacute spines, ventral surface with few similar spines, sometimes
partially obscured by plumose setae; ventrolateral margin with scale-like blunt
spines becoming more acute distally. Ischium with row of very small subacute
spines or tubercles on ventromesial margin; ventrolateral distal angle with small
but prominent acute spine.
Left cheliped (Fig. 1E) reaching only slightly beyond mid-length of palm of
right cheliped; dactyl strongly overlapped by fixed finger. Dorsomesial margin
of dactyl with tufts of plumose setae, dorsal surface with row of spinules reach-
ing nearly to tip; cutting edge with row of corneous teeth concealed by tufts of
plumose setae. Palm half or slightly less than half length of carpus; dorsal
surface with broad strongly elevated median ridge not extending on to fixed
finger, dorsal midline with double to triple row of acute or subacute, teardrop-
Shaped spines proximally, becoming single row distally and extending on to
fixed finger but not reaching tip; dorsal surfaces laterad and mesiad of raised
median ridge each with small spines, much more numerous laterally, dorso-
lateral margin with generally double row of regular or teardrop-shaped small
spines, not extending to tip of fixed finger and accompanied by tufts of plumose
setae; dorsal surface of fixed finger somewhat flattened and with numerous
teardrop-shaped small spines, cutting edge with row of small calcareous teeth,
generally concealed by tufts of plumose setae; ventral surfaces of dactyl, fixed
finger and palm with tufts of plumose setae. Carpus (Fig. 1E-F) slightly shorter
than merus, subtriangular; dorsal surface with row of acute spines laterally;
lateral and mesial surfaces with low protuberances and tufts of plumose setae;
ventral surface with numerous flattened, scale-like tubercles and usually, but not
always with, median foramen or circular depression. Merus with 2 or 3 spines
on dorsodistal margin, dorsal surface with few short transverse ridges and tufts
of plumose setae; mesial face with scattered plumose setae, ventromesial margin
306 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
crenulate or with row of subacute spines; ventral surface with numerous blunt
tuberculate spines, partially obscured by tufts of plumose setae; ventrolateral
margin with row of low tuberculate spines proximally, becoming stronger and
more acute distally, lateral face with low flattened scale-like tubercles ventrally,
distolateral margin with row of very small spines. Ischium with row of small
spinules or spinulose tubercles on ventromesial margin; ventrolateral distal
angle with acute spine.
Second and third pereopods (Fig. 1G-H) of right side slightly longer than
left, but neither over-reaching tip of right cheliped. Dactyls slender, curved,
1.50-2.0 length of propodi; dorsal surfaces spinulose, spinules of second pereo-
pods stronger and extending to distal third of segment, all dactyls with short
plumose setae proximally and long simple setae distally; lateral faces each with
row of long stiff simple setae near ventral margin proximally and curving
upward to mid-width at base of claw; mesial faces each with faint longitudinal
sulcus proximally, row of tufts of stiff simple setae ventrally and extending on
to ventral margin in distal third or fourth; ventral margins lacking row of
corneous spinules. Propodi 1.25-1.35 length of carpi; dorsal margins of second
each with row of strong spines and frequently additional smaller spines on
lateral face dorsally accompanied by tufts of short plumose setae; mesial faces
with few spinules dorsally; ventral margins of second each with row of spinules;
propodi of third each with row of smaller spines or spinulose protuberances and
tufts of short plumose setae, mesial and lateral faces unarmed, ventral surfaces
with tufts of plumose setae and occasionally 1 or 2 spinules distally. Carpi each
with row of acute spines on dorsal surface, smaller on third, accompanied by
tufts of plumose setae; ventral surfaces with few tufts of plumose setae. Meri
each with short transverse ridges and tufts of plumose setae dorsally; ventro-
lateral and ventromesial margins of second pereopods each with row of small
spines and 1 acute spine at ventrolateral distal angle; ventral margins of third
pereopods unarmed or with minute protuberances and tufts of plumose setae.
Fourth pereopods semichelate; segments all with numerous tufts of long
plumose setae; propodal rasps each consisting of 3 or 4 rows of quite small
corneous scales. Fifth pereopods semichelate, with dacty] considerably over-
reaching produced area of propodus when extended. Sternite of third pereopods
with triangular anterior lobe (Fig. 11) slightly skewed to left, surface with
several low protuberances and usually terminal spine, partially obscured by long
setae.
Males with paired gonopores, each partially masked by tuft of long stiff
setae; 4 uniramous, or markedly asymmetrical biramous unpaired left pleopods.
Females with 4 unpaired pleopods, first three biramous, last uniramous. Telson
(Fig. 1K) with faint, partial transverse suture indicating division into posterior
and anterior portions; posterior lobes asymmetrical, median cleft obsolete or
absent, lobes separated simply by unarmed median space; left posterior lobe
with row of strong corneous or corneous-tipped spines extending on to lateral
margin to at least mid-length; right posterior lobe similarly armed but spines
tending to be smaller and often not extending as far on lateral margin.
Colour
In preservative: ivory white (Alcock 1905).
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 307
Habitat
Collected at depths from 38 to 1507 m.
Distribution
Northern KwaZulu-Natal, South Africa; Gulf of Aqaba, Red Sea; South
Arabian coast, and Indian Ocean between Maldives and Cape Comorin.
Remarks
In his description of P. cavicarpus, Paul’son (1875, 1961) reported that the
chelipeds resembled those of ‘Eu. Monticulosus’, a name that neither Dr Rafael
Lemaitre of the National Museum of Natural History (pers. comm.) nor we
have been able to apply to any known taxon. That Paul’son simply misspelled
Pagurus meticulosus Roux, 1828-30 (= Pagurus excavatus (Herbst, 1791)), is
certainly a possibility, although the chelipeds of the two taxa would not be con-
sidered similar by today’s standards. The description that Paul’son gave of
P. cavicarpus was relatively thorough, including spinose chelipeds and the
notation of a foramen on the ventral surface of each carpus of the chelipeds; the
Red Sea was cited as the type locality. Although his specimens have not been
available for re-examination, it has been possible to compare the Meiring Naude
specimens with a specimen of P. cavicarpus subsequently collected in the Red
Sea. This specimen agrees quite well with those from South Africa, although the
spines of the chelae of the former are generally more slender and acute, and the
setation of chelipeds and ambulatory legs is denser.
Alcock (1905) described Pagurus carpoforaminatus from the west and east
coasts of India and Sri Lanka (as Ceylon), together with a deep-water variety,
P. carpoforaminatus var. nephromma, from an Investigator station between the
Maldives and Cape Comorin. Both taxa were distinguished, in part, by the
presence of a foramen on the ventral surface of the carpus of the right cheliped,
and frequently also of the left. These foramina were specified as being a ‘pin
hole’ in P. carpoforaminatus and larger in P. c. var. nephromma. Pagurus
carpoforaminatus was described as having chelipeds similar to those of
P. prideaux, and the ‘nude’ ambulatory legs considerably longer than the right
cheliped. In contrast, P. carpoforaminatus var. nephromma, according to
Alcock (1905), had the dorsal surface of the chela covered with coarse spines;
the ambulatory legs were only slightly longer than the right cheliped. Alcock
reportedly figured P. c. var. nephromma; however, his figures (Alcock 1905,
pl. 11 (fig. 4, 4a)) certainly appear to be of P. carpoforaminatus, not of P. c.
var. nephromma.
Terao (1913) reported on two specimens of Pagurus megalops (as Eupag-
urus) that had a ventral carpal pin-hole foramen on each cheliped. He expressed
the opinion that these specimens, although referable to P.megalops, also agreed
with Alcock’s (1905) description of Pagurus carpoforaminatus var. nephromma
(as Eupagurus). Terao placed Alcock’s variety in synonymy with P. megalops
and stated that if his assumption was correct, Alcock’s nominal variety (Pagurus
carpoforaminatus) should be called Eupagurus megalops var. carpoforaminatus.
Terao appears to have been correct in believing that Stimpson (1858)
overlooked the foramen when he described P. megalops. The male specimen
308 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(5.8 mm) from Minahe, Wahayama, Japan, that we have personally examined
does have a carpal foramen on the right cheliped, although none is present on
the left. However, P. megalops unquestionably is not the senior synonym of
P. carpoforaminatus nephromma. The presence of a carpal foramen is not
mentioned by Miyake (1978) in his diagnosis of P. megalops, although he did
cite Terao’s (1913) specimens from Nagasaki in his synonymy.
Lewinsohn (1969) included in the synonymy of P. cavicarpus, Pagurus
carpoforaminatus (Alcock, 1905), together with the reports of the latter species
by Southwell (1906, 1910) and Thompson (1943), stating the two species were
undoubtedly identical. From his discussion, it is clear that Lewinsohn (1969)
compared the descriptions of Paul’son (1875) and Alcock (1905). However, the
distinct differences in these descriptions appear to have been overshadowed in
his mind by the presence of a foramen on the ventral surface of the carpus of
each cheliped in both taxa. He made no comment about its presence in P. c.
nephromma. Lewinsohn (1969) certainly was correct in his surmise that Alcock
(1905) was not aware of Paul’son’s species, as the latter author’s work was not
translated from Russian until 1961. Had it been, Alcock (1905) very well
might have recognized the similarities between his P. carpoforaminatus var.
nephromma and P. cavicarpus, which include spinose chelipeds and setose
ambulatory legs.
Neither Alcock’s (1905) type specimens nor Southwell’s specimens have
been re-examined; however, we have been able to examine all of the specimens
collected during the John Murray Expedition that Thompson (1943) reported.
Specimens agreeing with Alcock’s (1905) description of P. carpoforaminatus
were exclusively present at station 72 (Gulf of Oman), whereas five of the speci-
mens from station 45 and the single specimen from station 53 agree with
Alcock’s description of P. carpoforaminatus var. nephromma. The two taxa are
not conspecific, but it is the specimens from station 72 that correspond to
Alcock’s (1905, pl. 11 (fig. 4-4a)) figures. As indicated earlier, it appears that
Alcock incorrectly attributed these figures to P. carpoforaminatus var. neph-
romma. Comparison of Thompson’s (1943) specimens with those from the Red
Sea and eastern South Africa show conclusively that it is P. carpoforaminatus
nephromma that is synonymous with P. cavicarpus. Pagurus carpoforaminatus
is a distinct species, easily differentiated by the characters described by Alcock
(1905).
Southwell (1906) reported P. carpoforaminatus from Sri Lanka (as Ceylon)
but, as he gave no information on his specimens, it is impossible to determine if
his material was actually P. carpoforaminatus. Sarojini & Nagabhushanam
(1972) reported this species from Lawson’s Bay, Waltair, but their diagnosis
and description are simply paraphrased from Alcock’s (1905) original descrip-
tion. Their illustrations (Sarojini & Nagabhushanam 1972, text-fig. 5 (4a—c)) are
too diagrammatic to permit evaluation; however, the collection locality of their
specimens suggests that they probably accurately reported P. carpoforaminatus.
Stebbing (1920) and Barnard (1950) both reported Pagurus spinulentus from
South African waters; however, Forest (1955) compared one of the South
African specimens with the type of P. spinulentus and found them to represent
distinct species. In the course of this study, we re-examined the type of
P. spinulentus and found it to be extremely close to P. cavicarpus in general
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 309
configuration, including the suggestion of a carpal foramen or indication of one
(Fig. 1C-D, F), and similarities in the structure of the anterior lobe of the
sternite of the third pereopod (cf. Fig. 11, J) and telson (cf. Fig. 1K, L). Hen-
derson’s (1888) species is known only from the holotype collected off Tablas
Island in the Philippines, and his figure (Henderson 1888, pl. 7 (fig. 3)) does not
adequately depict the strength of the armature of the chelipeds. Henderson made
no mention of the suggestion of a moderately large median foramen on the
ventral surface of the carpus of the right cheliped, which, as illustrated, is quite
similar to that seen in P. cavicarpus; however, in P. spinulentus this area is not
depressed, nor is an actual opening present. No foramen is present on the
carpus of the left cheliped in Henderson’s specimen. Pagurus spinulentus differs
from P. cavicarpus in the following characters: (1) the dorsolateral distal angles
of the second segments of the antennal peduncles reach to the distal margins of
the fourth peduncular segments; (2) the mesial faces of the dactyl and palm of
the right cheliped are clearly defined and strongly spinose; (3) the dorsal surface
of the carpus of the left cheliped has a nearly double median row of spines and
numerous accessory spines; (4) the ventrodistal margins of the meri of the
chelipeds each carries a dense fringe of pinnate setae; (5) the setae of the
chelipeds and ambulatory legs are a mixture of simple and pinnate setae.
Although most of the specimens identified as P. spinulentus by Stebbing and
Barnard proved to be P. prideaux, among Barnard’s identified material from off
KwaZulu-Natal, we found four specimens attributable to P. cavicarpus.
Pagurus cuanensis Bell, 1845
Fig. 2A-L
Pagurus Bernhardus: Risso, 1816: 55; 1827: 37. Hope, 1851: 12. Non Pagurus bernhardus
(Linnaeus, 1758).
Pagurus Cuanensis Thompson, 1844: 267 (nomen nudum).
Pagurus cuanensis Bell, 1845: 178, unnumbered fig. Kensley, 1981: 33 (distribution list).
Ingle, 1985: 760, figs 1, 7, 17, 45, 56, 62; 1993: 129, figs 101-104 and synonymy.
Sandberg & McLaughlin, 1998: 58, fig. 17.
Pagurus spinimanus Lucas, 1846: 29, pl. 3 (fig. 3). Forest, 1958a: 99.
Eupagurus spinimanus: Stimpson, 1858: 236. Forest, 1956: 364; 1958a: 99.
Eupagurus cuanensis: Stimpson, 1858: 237. Chevreux & Bouvier, 1892: 97, pl. 2 (figs
16-17). A. Milne-Edwards & Bouvier, 1900: 227, pl. 28 (figs 19-20). Selbie, 1921: 26,
pl. 2 (figs 16-17). Odhner, 1923: 10, 25. Bouvier, 1940: 132, fig. 88. Forest, 1955:
114, text-fig. 24, pl. 5 (fig. 6); 1966: 154. Rossignol, 1962: 127.
Eupagurus Lucasi Heller, 1863: 163, pl. 5 (fig. 10).
Spiropagurus forbesii: Sars, 1890: 161. Non Pagurus forbesii Bell, 1845.
Eupagurus placens Stebbing, 1924: 241, pl. 4. Barnard, 1950: 462, fig. 85e.
Pagurus placens: Kensley, 1981: 33 (distribution list).
Material
Pagurus cuanensis. PMcL, 1 6, 1 ovigerous 2 (2.4, 3.8 mm); Denmark-—
Sweden, Kattagat Strait, collected by O. Schmitt. PMcL, 1 6, 1 2 (5.8,
6.2 mm); Bay of Naples, collected by F. Gherardi, July 1989. SMNH 16150,
1 3, 1 ovigerous 2 (3.3, 3.5 mm); Port Alexander, Angola, 73 m, collected by
Skoog, 11 August 1912. MNHN Pg5500, 1 ¢ (4.0 mm); Vema Seamount, South
310 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 2. A-J. Pagurus cuanensis Bell, 1845, ovigerous 2° (4.4 mm) from Meiring Naude
Stn XX113 (NHM 1997.724-725. K. Female (8.0 mm) from False Bay (SAM-A1538).
L. Male (6.8 mm) from Cape St Blaize (SAM-A1539). A. Shield and cephalic appendages.
B. Chela of right cheliped. C. Chela and carpus of right cheliped with setae omitted.
D. Chela of left cheliped. E. Chela and carpus of left cheliped with setae omitted. F. Right
second pereopod (lateral view). G. Dactyl of right second pereopod (ventral view).
H. Dactyl and propodus of left fourth pereopod (lateral view). I-J. Anterior lobe of sternite
of third pereopods. K-L. Telson. Scales H-I, K, 1.0 mm; J, L, 2.0 mm; A-G. 3.0 mm.
Africa, Stn VEM 4.4, 31°38’S 08°02’E, approximately 40 m, 14 November
1964. MNHN Pg5507, 1 3 (3.0 mm); Vema Seamount, South Africa, Stn
VEM 20D, 31°38’S 08°02’E, approximately 40 m, 16 November 1964.
MNHN Pg5508, 1 6, 1 2 (4.8, 6.0 mm); near Mossel Bay, 110 m, January
1954. USNM 276077, 2 6, 1 2 (2.4-3.1 mm); Meiring Naude Stn XX?,
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 311
30°13.8’S 30°54.2’E, 70 m, 8 July 1986. NHM 1997.724-725, 1 3, 1 oviger-
ous 2 (2.1, 4.4 mm); Meiring Naude Stn XX113, 29°50.2’S 31°12.3’E, 95 m,
9 July 1986. PMcL, 1 ¢ (2.7 mm); Meiring Naude Stn XX114, 29°56.2’S
31°10.2’E, 88 m, 9 July 1986. SAM-A43224, 1 ovigerous 2 (2.0 mm);
Meiring Naude Stn XX115, 29°50.05’S, 31°14.2’E, 130 m, 9 July 1986.
Eupagurus placens. SAM-A1538, 1 ? (8.0 mm); False Bay, 55 m. SAM-
A1539, 1 ¢ (6.8 mm); Cape St. Blaize, 100 m.
Diagnosis
Shield (Fig. 2A) as broad or slightly broader than long. Rostrum obsolete or
occasionally slightly rounded; lateral projections produced, with small marginal
or submarginal spine. Ocular peduncles moderately long and slender, 0.75-0.85
length of shield; corneas slightly dilated. Ocular acicles roundly or ovately
triangular, with strong submarginal spine. Antennular peduncles slightly over-
reaching distal margins of corneas; antennal peduncles usually not over-reaching
corneas. Second segment of antennal peduncle with dorsolateral distal angle
produced, elongate, terminating in simple or bifid spine, mesial margin with
1 to 6 spines. Antennal acicle reaching to or beyond mid-length of ultimate
peduncular segment.
Right cheliped with dorsal surfaces of chela (Fig. 2B) and, to lesser extent,
carpus covered with tufts of plumose setae, usually at least partially concealing
armature. Dactyl with row of spines on dorsomesial margin and additional row
in dorsal mid-line. Palm (Fig. 2C) with row of spines on dorsomesial margin,
dorsal surface with 3 or 4 irregular rows of moderate to strong spines, median
row usually strongest and most prominent; dorsolateral margin rounded, but
with row of smaller spines proximally, increasing in size and extending nearly
to tip of fixed finger; dorsal surface of fixed finger with only 2 or 3 small
spines. Carpus (Fig. 2C) with row of strong spines on dorsomesial margin,
2-4 slender spines on dorsodistal margin; dorsal surface with median row of
spines (large specimens) or 2 or 3 spines (smaller specimens) and several short
transverse sometimes setose and sometimes spinulose ridges, extending on to
lateral face.
Left cheliped with dorsal surfaces of chela (Fig. 2D) and carpus covered
with tufts of setae usually concealing armature. Hiatus between dactyl and fixed
finger becoming more pronounced with increased animal size. Palm (Fig. 2E)
with medial row of moderate to strong spines on dorsal surface. Carpus
(Fig. 2E) with 3 or 4 strong spines on or adjacent to dorsolateral margin.
Ambulatory legs somewhat dissimilar. Segments of both pairs of pereopods
with numerous tufts of plumose setae, but dactyl and propodus of left third
noticeably more setose. Dactyls of both second and third pereopods each with
row of 10-17 very small, closely-spaced corneous spines (Fig. 2F) on distal
0.50-0.65 of ventral margin. Carpus and propodus of second right (Fig. 2G)
each with row of spines on dorsal surface; carpus of second left with 1 dorso-
distal and frequently 1-4 more proximal spines on dorsal surface, dorsal surface
of propodus unarmed or with few minute spinulose protuberances; meri each
with row of spines on ventral margin. Third pereopods with propodi and carpi
unarmed or similar in armature to second left; meri unarmed. Fourth pereopods
with 3 or 4 rows of corneous scales in propodal rasp (Fig. 2H). Anterior lobe of
312 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
sternite of third pereopods (Fig. 2I-J) triangular to subquadrate, with 2—4 blunt
or acute projections or spines and tufts of setae.
Males with unpaired left pleopods on abdominal somites 2-5. Telson
(Fig. 2K-L) with short narrow median cleft; terminal and lateral margins of
posterior lobes with moderately strong sometimes corneous-tipped spines, often
irregularly interspersed with smaller spines.
Colour (in preservative)
Ocular peduncles yellowish, with two rather darker rings, one anterior and
one posterior, some white spots posterior to proximal ring. Basal segment of
antennular peduncles reddish; two distal segments translucent, with whitish
spots; flagellum colourless. Basal segments of the antennae dark reddish brown,
fourth and fifth segments clear, striated longitudinally with red; flagella red,
with white rings; antennal acicle light colour, striated longitudinally with red.
Meri of chelipeds reddish, sprinkled with whitish spots and with some dark
vinaceous colour on dorsal margin; carpi reddish, more accented than meri,
with proximal transverse dark red spot; palms reddish, covered completely with
long, earth-coloured setae. Meri of second and third pereopods reddish with
whitish spots and some darker red on dorsal margins; carpi reddish, with one
large dark red longitudinal spot and some small whitish spots covering much of
lateral face; propodi similar, dactyls with two longitudinal whitish stripes.
(After Sandberg & McLaughlin 1998.)
Habitat
Sometimes associated with sponge-covered shells, rarely with compound
ascidians. Reported from depths of 15-91 m in the North Atlantic, and 0-250 m
in the Mediterranean (Ingle 1993; Sandberg & McLaughlin 1998). In South
Africa, 40 m at Vema Seamount, 55-100 m at False Bay and Cape St. Blaize,
110 m near Mossel Bay, and 70-130 m off Durban and KwaZulu-Natal.
Distribution |
North Atlantic from the coasts of Norway and Sweden to the Atlantic coast
of France; Mediterranean; Central and South Atlantic from Spain to ile Principe
and Sao Tomé (Forest 1966); Southern Africa from Angola to KwaZulu-Natal.
Remarks
One of us (Forest 1955, 1961, 1966) had previously reported on the very
southern extension of the range of P. cuanensis and, after examining a specimen
recorded by Barnard (1950) as P. placens, could find only minor differences
between that specimen and P. cuanensis. Together with Odhner’s (1923) report
of this species from Port Alexander, Angola, and Vema Seamount and Mossel
Bay specimens in the collection of the Muséum national d’Histoire naturelle, the
presence of P. cuanensis in south-eastern South Africa seemed certain, and its
synonymy with P. placens probable. Specimens from the Meiring Naude cruises
confirm the distribution of this species as far north as KwaZulu-Natal in eastern
South Africa.
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 413
Despite the inaccuracies and poor quality of Stebbing’s (1924) description
and illustrations of P. placens, we re-emphasize the characters that almost
certainly confirm its conspecificity with P. cuanensis, particularly in the shape,
proportions and ornamentation of the chelae. For example, virtually identical
strong spines are found on the mesial margins of the: right chelae in both taxa,
as well as two primary longitudinal rows of spines on the dorsal surfaces. The
dactyls of the left chelae both are arched, more elongate than the palms, and
separated from the fixed fingers by a prominent hiatus. Additionally, the ambu-
latory legs of both species have curved dactyls fringed with setae and are
longer than the propodi. We have re-examined both of Barnard’s (1950) speci-
mens attributed to P. placens and there is no question that they represent
P. cuanensis. Given the close proximity of Barnard’s collection sites to the type
locality of P. placens, and the similarities observed, we must conclude that
P. placens is a junior subjective synonym of P. cuanensis. (Also see remarks
under Pagurus sp.)
Barnard’s (1950) specimens are larger than any of the specimens collected
off KwaZulu-Natal and differ from the latter in having more slender right
chelae, a complete median row of spines on the dorsal surface of the carpus of
the right cheliped, a more prominent hiatus between the dactyl and fixed finger
of the left cheliped, and stronger corneous-tipped spines laterally on the terminal
margins of the telsons. However, these differences are well within the range of
variation reported for P. cuanensis (cf. Ingle 1993). All of the South African
specimens generally have fewer spines on the dorsal surfaces and these are
arranged in more regular rows, than are seen in some specimens from the North
Atlantic and Mediterranean. The dactyls of the ambulatory legs also are longer
in the South African specimens.
Pagurus emmersoni sp. nov.
Fig. 3A-F
Material
Holotype. SAM-A43426, 1 ¢ (9.7 mm), Tugela River mouth, December
1968.
Paratypes. SAM-A43222, ovigerous 2 (2.7 mm); KwaZulu-Natal, reef
5 km south of Tongaat Beach, 12-15 m, 5 April 1987. MNHN Pg5834
(formerly SAM- A19138), 1 ¢ (6.6 mm), off Danger Point, Cape,
34°39'13.60S 19°19’1.80E, 34 m, 11 April 1984.
Diagnosis
Shield as or nearly as long as broad. Rostrum obtusely triangular, produced
beyond level of lateral projections. Ocular peduncles approximately 0.60-0.80
shield length; cornea not dilated; ocular acicles rounded mesially, terminating
subacutely and with small submarginal spine. Antennular peduncles over-
reaching distal margins of corneas by approximately 0.20 length of ultimate
segment. Antennal peduncles variable in length; antennal acicles reaching to
bases of corneas or considerably beyond. Third maxilliped with one accessory
tooth on crista dentata.
314 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 3. A-F. Pagurus emmersoni sp. nov., ovigerous 2 (2.7 mm) from reef
south of Tongaat Beach. G. Pagurus souriei (Forest, 1952) 2 (2.7 mm) from
Gorée (PMcL). H. Pagurus gordonae (Forest, 1956), d (3.7 mm) from
Tamara (I. de Los), Guinea (PMcL). A. Shield and cephalic appendages.
B. Chela and carpus of right cheliped. C. Chela and carpus of left cheliped.
D. Right second pereopod (lateral view). E. Anterior lobe of sternite of third
pereopods. F-H. Telson. Scales E-F, H, 1.0 mm; A-D, 2.0 mm.
Right cheliped stout, chela somewhat operculate; dorsomesial margin of
dactyl with row of rounded tubercles not reaching to tip. Dorsomesial and
dorsolateral margins of palm each with row of tubercles, scale-like on dorso-
lateral margin, dorsal surface with scattered tubercles or granules. Carpus with
row of tuberculate spines on dorsomesial margin. Ventromesial margins of
carpus and merus not developing wing-like projections.
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 315
Left cheliped with small tubercles in dorsal midline of dactyl, dorsomesial
margin unarmed or not delimited. Dorsomesial and dorsolateral margins of
palm each with row of tubercles. Carpus with row of spines on dorsomesial
margin.
Ambulatory legs with left pair slightly shorter than right. Dactyls with 5-8
strong corneous spines on ventral margins. Carpi each with dorsodistal spine.
Meri unarmed or with spinule at ventrolateral distal angle of second right.
Fourth pereopods semichelate; propodal rasp consisting of single row of scales.
Sternite of third pereopods with roundly subrectangular anterior lobe.
Telson with posterior lobes separated by shallow median cleft; terminal
margins each with row of small to moderately large spines; lateral margins with
solid or serrated plate.
Description
Shield (Fig. 3A) as or nearly as long as broad, and slightly shorter to
slightly longer than posterior carapace; anterior margin between rostrum and
lateral projections concave; anterolateral margins sloping; posterior margin
truncate; dorsal surface with sparse tufts of setae. Rostrum obtusely triangular,
terminally subacute, reaching beyond level of lateral projections. Lateral
projections obtusely triangular, each with marginal or submarginal spinule.
Ocular peduncles approximately 0.60-0.80 length of shield, moderately
swollen distally in small paratype, dorsal and mesial surfaces with few stiff
setae; corneas not noticeably dilated. Ocular acicles with rounded mesial
margins, terminating subacutely, and with small submarginal spinule; separated
basally by approximately 0.65 basal width of one acicle.
Antennular peduncles, when fully extended, over-reaching distal margins of
corneas by 0.20-0.40 length of ultimate segment. All three segments with few
fine setae.
Antennal peduncles not quite reaching distal margins of corneas in small
paratype, but considerably longer in holotype. Fifth and fourth segments with
few scattered short setae. Third segment with spinule at ventrodistal angle
practically obscured by tuft of stiff setae. Second segment with dorsolateral
distal angle produced, terminating bluntly and with several stiff setae; dorso-
mesial distal angle with small spine. First segment with spinule on ventrolateral
margin. Antennal acicles long and slender, reaching at least to bases of corneas,
with terminal spine and row of stiff setae on mesial face. Antennal flagellum,
with 1 or 2 short (1-2 article length) setae every several articles. Third
maxillipeds with strong accessory tooth on crista dentata.
Right cheliped (Fig. 3B) stout, with somewhat operculate chela; stronger but
not appreciably longer than left. Dactyl approximately same length as palm and
slightly overlapped by fixed finger; cutting edge with 3 or 4 strong calcareous
teeth, terminating in small corneous claw; dorsomesial margin with row of low
rounded tubercles not extending to tip, dorsal surface generally flat or somewhat
elevated in midline, with three to incomplete row of small tubercles, and with
few tufts of setae; ventral surface with tufts of short stiff setae. Palm with dorsal
surface slightly convex and with scattered very small granules or minute
tubercles, becoming larger and forming longitudinal row on fixed finger
mesially; dorsomesial margin with irregular row of quite small tubercles,
316 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
dorsolateral margin with row of closely-spaced scale-like tubercles, decreasing
in size on fixed finger but not reaching to tip; mesial, lateral and ventral
surfaces with sparse tufts of short setae. Carpus with relatively flat dorsal
surface, dorsomesial margin with row of tuberculate spines, extending on to
distomesial margin dorsally and partially obscured by sparse tufts of stiff setae;
dorsodistal margin with few spinulose tubercles; dorsolateral margin not
distinctly delimited, but with few short transverse rows of stiff setae; mesial,
lateral and ventral surfaces each with scattered stiff setae, ventromesial margin
not produced into wing-like projection. Merus with dorsodistal spine; surfaces
all with few sparse tufts of stiff setae; ventromesial margin not developing wing-
like projection.
Left cheliped (Fig. 3C) more slender than right, reaching beyond distal
margin of palm of right; similarly but more weakly armed. Dactyl with row of
small tubercles in dorsal midline proximally, becoming obsolete distally; dorso-
mesial margin unarmed; dorsal, mesial and ventral surfaces each with few
sparse tufts of short setae; cutting edge with row of corneous teeth, terminating
in small corneous claw. Palm slightly more than half length of carpus; with row
of single or double small subacute spines or tubercles on dorsomesial margin,
dorsal surface slightly convex, weakly tuberculate, with small cluster of
tubercles near base of dactyl, dorsolateral margin slightly raised and with row
of small tubercles, not extending to tip of fixed finger; mesial face sometimes
with few spinulose tubercles dorsally, scattered setae ventrally; lateral and
ventral surfaces with tufts of stiff setae; cutting edge of fixed finger with row of
very small calcareous teeth. Carpus with row of subacute spines on dorsomesial
margin, dorsal surface with short transverse ridges and tufts of stiff setae
laterally; dorsodistal margin, mesial, lateral and ventral surfaces all with sparse
tufts of long stiff setae and occasional blunt tubercles. Merus with dorsodistal
spine; surfaces with sparse tufts of long stiff setae; ventrolateral distal angle
with small spine or row of low tubercles continuing on to ventral margin.
Ischium with long stiff setae dorsally and ventrally.
Ambulatory legs (Fig. 3D) of right side approximately equal to length of
right cheliped, left slightly shorter; generally similar, each with sparse tufts of
stiff setae, particularly dorsally and ventrally. Dactyls slightly shorter than
propodi, ventral margins each with 5 or 6 (second) or 6 to 8 (third) strong
- corneous spines. Propodi each with 1 or 2 prominent corneous spines at ventro-
distal margin and 1-3 smaller spines on ventral margin in distal half. Carpi each
with dorsodistal spine. Meri unarmed except for small spine or spinule at
ventrolateral distal angle of second pair. Fourth pereopod semichelate; propodal
rasp consisting of single row of corneous scales. Sternite of third pereopods
with roundly subrectangular anterior lobe (Fig. 3E).
Anterior ventral region of abdomen with doubly protruded membranous
lobes, left appreciably larger. Male with 3 unequally biramous left pleopods.
Female with 4 unpaired left pleopods; second to fourth with both rami well-
developed; fifth with rudimentary endopod. Telson (Fig. 3F) with transverse
notch indicating division into anterior and posterior regions; somewhat asym-
metrical posterior lobes separated by shallow median cleft; terminal margins
each with row of small to moderately large spines, anterior portions of lateral
margins with solid or serrated plate.
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 317
Colour (in preservative)
Background colour of calcified regions white with faint tint of orange, and
streaks of darker red. Anterior region of shield light red-orange. Ocular ped-
uncles with faint band of red-orange basally. Chelae red-orange, most intense
on dorsal surfaces, with distal halves of dactyls and-fixed fingers white; carpi
and meri whitish, with faint red longitudinal lines on carpi and transverse lines
on meri. Ambulatory legs each with one submedian mottled red-orange ring on
merus, one similar median ring on propodus; dactyls each with one proximal
and one subdistal ring of same tint; carpi each whitish, with three or four faint
red longitudinal lines.
Etymology
This species is named for Professor Winston (Winks) Emmerson, University
of Transkei, who provided much of the material for this study.
Habitat
Subtidal reef; 12-15 m.
Type locality
Tugela River mouth, KwaZulu-Natal.
Distribution
KwaZulu-Natal and southern Cape coasts, South Africa.
Remarks
Pagurus emmersoni is clearly assignable to the anachoretus group of
Pagurus, named for its first member, Pagurus anachoretus Risso, 1827, from
the Mediterranean, and including P. souriei, P. gordonae, P. laurentae Forest,
1978, and P. anachoretoides Forest, 1966, from the tropical eastern Atlantic,
and the South African P. barnardi (= P. liochele) (Forest 1978). Forest &
Ngoc-Ho (1992) added P. kulkarnii Sankolli, 1961, from the Arabian Sea. With
the discovery of P. emmersoni and the formal inclusion of P. hedleyi (Grant &
McCulloch, 1906) from Queensland, Australia, the Arafura Sea, and Hong
Kong (new locality record), the anachoretus group now contains nine species.
Although the group was well defined by Forest & Ngoc-Ho (1992: 224), one
supplemental character should be added, i.e., the propodal rasp of the fourth
pereopod that consists of a single row of squamiform scales. Characteristic of
the group is the shape of the right cheliped. The dorsal surface of the palm is
always more or less rounded, and the mesial and lateral margins are more or
less convex and symmetrical, but a very distinct gradient is seen in the elonga-
tion of the palm. Despite the fact that intraspecific variation in the ratio of
breadth to length is observed in adults of each species, the mean values still
provide a specific character. Another character, the strong wing-like projection
of the ventromesial margin of the carpus and merus of the right cheliped,
especially well-developed in the large males, appears to correlate with species
having enlarged palms. Living colour is also a specific characteristic for species
of the anachoretus group, and permits confident identification in the field. Most
318 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
often the colour patterns consist of patches and/or longitudinal stripes of pig-
ment, continuous or not, covering part or all of the segments of the chelipeds
and ambulatory legs.
The above-mentioned species of Pagurus seem to form a homogeneous
group whose members are distinguished from one another, at least in part, by
the gradual differences in the form of the chelipeds. With the exception of this
cheliped form, four other species from the tropical western Atlantic fit the
definition of the P. anachoretus group: P. triangularis, P. fimbriatus Forest,
1966, P. alcocki, and P. dartevellei (cf. Forest & Ngoc-Ho 1992). Their
cheliped differences most probably reflect adaptations to their particular modes
of life. The latter two species in particular exhibit profound modifications of the
chelipeds in that both chelae are especially adapted to form an operculum.
Apart from P. anachoretus and P. hedleyi, which have relatively broad
distributions, the other species are more strictly localized. Although some are
reported from the same geographic regions, they usually inhabit different
bathymetric levels. Pagurus gordonae and P. laurentae, whose distributions
overlap from Gambia to Ghana are one example. Whereas P. gordonae is found
in the intertidal zone, P. /aurentae lives in depths between 30 and 40 metres.
After comparing P. emmersoni with P. alcocki, P. gordonae, P. hedleyi,
P. kulkarnii, P. liochele, and P. souriei, there is no doubt that the new species
is most closely allied with P. liochele, P. gordonae, and P. souriei. In fact,
P. emmersoni, while clearly a distinct species, appears to be intermediate
between P. souriei and P. gordonae, sharing certain morphological and colour
characters with one or both. Specifically, the rostrum of P. emmersoni is sub-
acute, as in P. gordonae, rather than obtuse and rounded as in P. souriei. The
antennular and antennal peduncles both considerably over-reach the distal
margins of the corneas in P. gordonae, whereas they are equal or only very
slightly longer in P. souriei. In P. emmersoni, the antennular peduncles over-
reach the distal margins of the corneas by approximately 0.20 the length of the
ultimate segments, whereas the antennal peduncles do not reach the distal
corneal margin. Although the shape of the chelipeds is very similar in all three
species, the dactyl of the right cheliped has a longitudinal unarmed ridge in the
dorsal mid-line of P. souriei, a row of small spines extending nearly to the tip in
P. gordonae, but only three small proximal tubercles in P. emmersoni. The
ventromesial margins of the meri of the right chelipeds of both P. gordonae and
P. souriei are armed with several small spines that are lacking in P. emmersoni.
The palm of the left cheliped has a weakly granular or tuberculate dorsal sur-
face in both P. gordonae and P. emmersoni, but a median longitudinal row of
spines in P. souriei. The ambulatory dactyls of P. emmersoni are intermediate
between the very short, stout dactyls of P. gordonae and the longer, more
slender dactyls of P. souriei. The telson of P. emmersoni, although distinguish-
able, is more similar to the telson of P. souriei (Fig. 3G) than that of
P. gordonae (Fig. 3H).
The colour patterns of P. emmersoni combine those of the two West African
species. Whereas the entire chelipeds of P. souriei are intense red-orange,
only the palms of the chelae of P. emmersoni show this coloration; the distal
portions of the fingers are whitish. The carpi of P. emmersoni, like those of
P. gordonae, are whitish with only longitudinal lines of red; however, the meri
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 319
of P. emmersoni are marked by transverse lines of reddish colour, whereas
those of P. gordonae carry irregular patches of colour. In contrast, the banding
patterns of the ambulatory legs agree completely with those of P. sourieéi,
whereas P. gordonae has longitudinal stripes on the lateral faces of the carpi
and similar stripes on the proximal portions of the meri and propodi.
Pagurus emmersoni differs from both of the West African species in: (1) the
dorsolateral projections of the second peduncular segments in P. emmersoni ter-
minate bluntly or in a tiny spinule, whereas in both P. gordonae and P. souriei
these projections terminate in one or two spinules; (2) both P. gordonae and
P. souriei have a long row of spines on the dorsomesial margin or the dactyl
of the right cheliped, but this margin is armed with only rounded tubercles in
P. emmersoni.
Pagurus emmersoni is known only from a few specimens; however, the
carpus of the right cheliped, even in the very large male holotype, does not
exhibit the development of a wing-like projection such as is seen in males of
P. gordonae. This development of wing-like projections on the merus and
carpus of the right cheliped is correlated with size rather than sex in P. liochele
and P. kulkarnii, but even in small specimens of the former species (< 2.5 mm
shield length) some development is apparent.
Pagurus liochele (Barnard, 1947)
Fig. 4A-J
Pylopagurus liochele Barnard, 1947: 376; 1950: 455, fig. 84a-f. Kensley, 1974: 66; 1981:
33.
Incertae sedis: Barnard, 1950: 456.
Eupagurus sp.: Forest, 1956: 363.
Pagurus barnardi Forest, 1966: 153; 1978: 531. Forest & Ngoc-Ho, 1992: 224.
?Phimochirus liochele: McLaughlin, 1981a: 5 (by implication); 19815: 354.
Pagurus liochele: McLaughlin, 1988: 6, figs 1-2.
Material
Syntypes of Pagurus liochele. SAM-A4038, 1 ¢ (7.0 mm); 5.5 mi SE Cape
Seal, 68 m. SAM-A1543, 1 2 (3.3 mm); Bird Island Passage, Algoa Bay,
18 m.
Syntypes of Pagurus barnardi (Forest, 1966). SAM-A8228, 1 2 (4.3 mm);
False Bay, littoral. SAM-A10963, 1 ¢ (3.7 mm); Simonstown, littoral. SAM-
A8496, 1 ovigerous 2 (2.8 mm); Port Elizabeth, littoral.
Other material examined. MNHN Pg5509, 1 2 (2.1 mm); False Bay,
Stn FB757, 34°07.5’S 18°31’E, 27-28 m, rock, 22 February 1947. MNHN
ene Go, 1 2 (3.5, 4.2 mm), | ovigerous 2 (3.3 mm); Stn FB792,
34°10.2’S 18°26.2’E, 14 m, shelly sand, 27 August 1951. MNHN Pg5511, 2 ¢
(3.1, 3,8 mm), 1 2 (2.6 mm), 3 ovigerous 2? (3.0-4.2 mm); Stn FAL87, south
of Kogel Bay, 14-17 m, 19 August 1952. MNHN Pg5512, 1 ovigerous 2
(5.2 mm); Stn FAL188, 34°12.8’S 18°36.5’E, 46 m, 10 September 1953,
macuyesand. MNHN P5513, 2 ¢ (4.3, 7.9 mm), 2 2 6.3, 5.7 mm); near
Mossel Bay, 110 m, January 1954. MNHN Pg5514, 1 ¢ (3.8 mm); Stn LIZ7
320 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
\
ho
===
Fig. 4. A-C, E-I. Pagurus liochele (Barnard, 1947), syntype of Pagurus barnardi
Forest, 1966, 6 (4.3 mm) from False Bay (SAM-A10963. D, J. Male (5.2 mm)
from Meiring Naude Stn N13 (NHM 1997.729).
A. Shield and cephalic appendages.
B. Chela and carpus of right cheliped (dorsal view). C-D. Right cheliped (mesial view).
E. Chela and carpus of left cheliped. F. Right second pereopod (lateral view). G. Left third
pereopod (lateral view). H. Anterior lobe of sternite of third pereopods. I-J. Telson.
Scales H-J, 1.0 mm; A, 2.0 mm; and B-C, E-G, 3.0 mm; D, 5.0 mm.
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 3211
Algoa Bay, 33°58.1’S 25°38.9’E, 9 m, stones and rock, 6 April 1954. MNHN
Pg5515, 1 ovigerous ° (4.8 mm); Stn FAL270, Roman Rock, 14-17 m, rock,
18 September 1954. MNHN Pg5516, 1 ovigerous ? (3.1 mm); Stn FAL279,
Roman Rock, 12-14 m, rock, 23 September 1954. MNHN Pg5517, 1 ¢
(3.9 mm); Stn FAL285, Roman Rock, 12-14 m, rock, 23 September 1954.
Sent A442) 1 Ss, 1 2 (6.2, 7.5 mm); Stn FAL332T, 34°15’S 18°36’E, 51 m,
31 January 1959. SAM-A43391, 1 ovigerous 2 (3.9 mm); Stn FAL755, north
of Seal Island, 4 m, 16 February 1965. SAM-A43429, 1 2 (2.2 mm); Stn
DBN264S, east Centre Bank of Congella River Channel, intertidal, 25 April
1952. USNM 276078, 1 3 (4.1 mm); Meiring Naude Stn M1, 31°56.9’S
29°13.5’E, 20-26 m, 16 July 1982. NHM 1997.729, 1 3 (5.2 mm); Meiring
Naude Stn N13, 32°04’S 29°05.7’E, 25-30 m, 19 July 1982.
Diagnosis
Shield (Fig. 4A) longer than broad. Rostrum triangular, produced to or
slightly beyond level of obtusely triangular or broadly rounded lateral projec-
tions. Ocular peduncles 0.50-0.65 length of shield, slightly swollen basally;
corneas slightly dilated; ocular acicles roundly triangular, terminating sub-
acutely and with small submarginal spine. Antennular peduncles over-reaching
ocular peduncles by 0.50-0.65 length of ultimate segment. Antennal peduncles
over-reaching ocular peduncles by approximately half length of fifth segment,
and slightly shorter than antennular peduncles. Second segment with dorso-
lateral distal angle strongly produced, reaching to mid-length of fourth
peduncular segment, terminating in strong spine, mesial margin with 1-5
additional spines; dorsomesial distal angle with acute spine. Antennal acicles
arcuate, reaching to proximal 0.35-0.50 of ultimate peduncular segment, with
small terminal spine; mesial margin with row of rather stiff setae.
Right cheliped (Fig. 4B-D) with somewhat operculate chela; stronger but
not appreciably longer than left. Dactyl approximately same length as palm;
dorsomesial margin with row of strong, closely-spaced blunt or spinulose
tubercles, dorsal surface slightly laterad of midline with longitudinal row of
distinct, very closely-spaced tubercles, often neither row extending to tip of
dactyl, remainder of dorsal surface generally flattened; ventral surface usually
with numerous tufts of setae. Palm with row of blunt spines or tubercles on
dorsomesial margin, dorsal surface only faintly convex, usually with scattered
low simple or bifid tubercles, but pitted in male syntype, stronger row of
tubercles adjacent to cutting edge of fixed finger, often not extending to tip;
dorsolateral margin with row of closely-spaced tubercles, slightly stronger on
fixed finger but not extending to tip; ventral surface with numerous tufts of setae
distally and on fixed finger. Carpus deep, ventromesial margin developing into
wing-like projection in larger specimens (shield length > 5.0 mm); dorsomesial
margin with row of moderately strong blunt or acute spines, dorsodistal margin
with few short, blunt or subacute spines; dorsolateral margin often not distinctly
delimited, but surface with single to multiple rows of denticles, low tubercles
or transverse ridges and tufts of setae, dorsal surface minutely spinulose to
tuberculate. Merus with 1 or 2 acute spines on dorsodistal margin; ventromesial
margin weakly scalloped or with low spinulose tubercles, developing into strong
wing-like protuberance with increasing size; ventrolateral margin smooth.
322 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Left cheliped (Fig. 4E) generally similar to right. Dactyl approximately 1.3-
2.0 length of palm, dorsomesial margin with row of closely-spaced tubercles not
extending to tip, dorsal surface often with 1 tubercle proximally; mesial face
with 1 or 2 rather prominent tubercles near proximal margin. Palm with row
of subacute spines on dorsomesial margin and frequently adjacent second row,
dorsal surface slightly convex, unarmed (male syntype) or somewhat tubercu-
late, dorsolateral margin slightly raised and with row of small tubercles, usually
not extending to tip of fixed finger. Carpus with row of subacute spines on
dorsomesial margin, dorsal surface usually weakly tuberculate in mesial half
and with short transverse ridges and tufts of stiff setae laterally, dorsodistal
margin with 2 to several small spines. Merus with 1-3 spines on dorsodistal
margin; ventromesial and ventrolateral margins each with row, or only few,
very small blunt spinules or tubercles.
Ambulatory legs (Fig. 4F-G) short and stout. Dactyls approximately 0.75
length propodi; 0.25-0.35 as deep (lateral view) as long; tufts of setae dorsally,
mesially and laterally; ventral margins each with row of 5 to 8 strong corneous
spines. Propodi approximately equal to carpi; dorsal surfaces each with trans-
verse rows of setae; ventral margins each with 2 to several corneous spines or
spinules. Carpi each with small spine at dorsodistal margin, dorsal surfaces with
low sometimes spinulose protuberances and tufts of setae, or occasionally 2 to
short row of small spines in large males, row of tufts of setae on lateral faces
dorsally. Meri with setae dorsally and ventrally, ventral margins unarmed or
with low protuberances or spinules, particularly on second pereopods. Sternite
of third pereopods with roundly subrectangular anterior lobe (Fig. 4H). Sternite
of fifth pereopods with widely separated lobes, each with moderately long setae.
Males with 3 unpaired left pleopods; females with 4. Telson (Fig. 4I-J) with
lateral incision indicating anterior and posterior portions; posterior lobes slightly
asymmetrical, separated by very small median cleft; terminal margins each with
row of calcareous teeth and sometimes second smaller adjacent row on telson
surface, at least on left lobe; spines sometimes extending on to lateral margins.
Colour 3
Ocular peduncles sienna at base, distal half cobalt, with narrow dark sienna
ring immediately adjacent to black cornea; meral segment of right and left cheli-
peds with a cobalt band bordered with sienna, and distal margin dark sienna;
granules on dorsal surfaces of palms white on a pale sienna ground, sienna
longitudinal stripes on dactyls and fixed fingers; proximal halves of meral seg-
ments of second and third pereopods sienna, distal halves pale, longitudinal
sienna stripes on carpi and dactyls and dorsally on proximal halves of propodi,
distal halves of propodi yellowish, passing into cobalt apically. (After Barnard
1950: 457 for ‘Incertae sedis’ specimens.)
Distribution
Orange River mouth to Transkei, South Africa; littoral to 110 m.
Habitat
Mud and fine sand, sometimes associated with sponges and gorgonians.
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 323
Remarks
When Barnard (1947) described Pylopagurus liochele, he apparently
assumed, because of the generally operculate right chela, that the female would
have possessed paired first pleopods modified as gonopods had its abdomen not
been lost. Barnard (1950) redescribed and illustrated the species, but made no
mention of the ventral wing-like projections of the mesial faces of the carpus
and merus of the right cheliped. After reviewing the type material and additional
specimens subsequently collected and finding no paired female gonopods,
McLaughlin (1988) transferred Barnard’s (1947) taxon to Pagurus.
In Barnard’s (1950) account, he briefly described as ‘Incertae sedis’, four
specimens collected littorally from False Bay, Simonstown, Jeffreys Bay and
Port Elizabeth, and these were subsequently given the name Pagurus barnardi
sp. nov. by Forest (1966). Barnard (1950) remarked that the specimens might
have been identified as Pylopagurus ungulatus Balss, 1912, had it not been
for the absence of paired first abdominal pleopods in his single female speci-
men. He considered Pagurus (as Eupagurus) the only other available genus;
however, Barnard (1950) was of the mistaken belief that males of Pagurus all
had four unpaired pleopods. His three males had only three left pleopods. In
reality, Pagurus males have three or four unpaired pleopods, or in the case of
P. prideaux, no unpaired pleopods. Barnard also misinterpreted the positions of
the three male pleopods in his taxon, reporting their occurrence on the second,
third and fifth abdominal somites. Actually, the males that we examined have
typical unpaired left pleopods on the third, fourth and fifth abdominal somites.
Barnard’s description indicated the considerable similarities with P. liochele that
he observed.
Although Barnard (1950) listed the four specimens as ‘Incertae sedis’,
the specimens are not so labelled. Of the three specimens available for examin-
ation, the male from Simonstown and the ovigerous female from Port Elizabeth
are labelled only as ‘Eupagurus sp.’ In the vial of the latter is also the label
‘Eupagurus sp. Forest, 1953’. This specimen is in poor condition; the cephalic
appendages of the right side are missing as are the two right and third left
pereopods, and most calcification has been lost. The male from False Bay is
labelled ‘Eupagurus or Pylopagurus’, and clearly reflects Barnard’s ambi-
valence. This male, the largest, does not show any lengthening of the
ventromesial face of the carpus of the right cheliped; however, there is slight
development of the ventromesial face of the merus. Two specimens, clearly
identifiable as P. liochele were present in the Transkei collection. The smaller
of the two males exhibits carpal and meral development similar to that of this
male of P. barnardi, whereas the larger specimen has the ventromesial
projections very well-developed (Fig. 4D). The residual colour patterns of these
specimens agree with the patterns described for P. barnardi. The Transkei
specimens have been carefully compared with the syntypes of P. barnardi, and
no characters have been found upon which the two taxa can be distinguished.
Therefore, P. barnardi must be considered a subjective junior synonym of
P. liochele. McLaughlin (1988) reported that variation in the armature of the
chelipeds and ambulatory legs appeared to be, at least in part, a function of size,
but made no direct mention of development of the carpal and meral projections.
These too appear to be size related.
324 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
In the absence of colour, P. liochele and P. emmersoni are superficially
quite similar species with overlapping patterns of distribution. The wing-like
expansions of the ventromesial faces of the right cheliped of P. liochele will
immediately distinguish this species from P. emmersoni.
Additionally, the dactyls of the ambulatory legs are thinner and the setation
of the appendages more abundant in P. liochele. However, setal density also
appears to be influenced by animal size. Smaller specimens generally have more
numerous tufts of long setae than are seen in larger individuals.
Pagurus prideaux Leach, 1815
Fig. 5A-F
Pagurus prideaux Leach, 1815, pl. 26 (figs 5-6). Holthuis, 1977: 60. Ates & Schakenbos,
1985: 36, colour photo. Ingle, 1985: 760, figs 6, 12, 16, 22, 50, 61, 67; 1993: 148,
figs 121-124 and detailed synonymy.
Pagurus solitarius Risso, 1827: 40; 1844: 94. Roux, 1828-1830, unnumbered text pages,
pl. 36
?Pagurus Crenatus: Hope, 1851: 13.
Eupagurus prideauxii: Heller, 1863: 161, pl. 5 (figs 1-8).
Eupagurus tristanensis: Stebbing, 1910: 356. Non Eupagurus tristanensis Henderson, 1888.
Eupagurus prideauxi: Pesta, 1918: 239, fig. 73. Nobre, 1931: 218, figs 120-121b. Zariquiey
Alvarez, 1946: 121, pl. 6 (fig. b).
Eupagurus spinulentus: Stebbing, 1920: 260. Barnard, 1950: 460, fig. 85a-d. Non
Eupagurus spinulentus Henderson, 1888.
Pagurus prideauxi: Forest, 1958a: 99. Zariquiey Alvarez, 1968: 250, figs 89h, 90e, p,
Olf, n.
Pagurus cf. prideauxi: Lewinsohn, 1969: 68.
Material
ZMA, 1 2 (3.9 mm); Terse Zee, Netherlands, 11 June 1972. PMcL,
1 3, 1 2 (7.6, 11.4 mm); near Cabo Creus and Golfo de Rosa, Spain, 100 m,
collected by o B. Holthuis, 28 July 1961.
As Pagurus spinulentus. SAM-A8223, 1 ovigerous Q (3.7 mm); Mossel
Bay, South Africa. SAM-A1498, 1 6, 1 ovigerous 2 (4.1, 5.7 mm); Umvoti
River, Nx W 0.5 W 4.25 mi, 49 m. SAM-A1504, Ss 1 ovigerous @ (5.2,
6.8 mm); Umvoti River, Nx W 0.5 W 4.25 mi, 49 m. SAM-A8224, 1 6
(3.7 mm); Umhloti River, NW 0.5W 15.5 mi, 183 m. SAM-A1548,
1 ovigerous 2 (4.3 mm); Tongaat River, NW xN 0.25N 5.5 mi, 66 m.
SAM-A1497, 1 3 (2.5 mm); Scottsburgh Lighthouse NW x N 8 mi, 168 m.
SAM- A43407, 3 3, 12, 3 ovigerous ¢ (2.2-5.2 mm), off KwaZulu-Natal, Stn
NAD 87W, 29° 10” S 31°37’ E, 43 m, 29 July 1964. SAM-A43408, 12 Ge
7 ovigerous 2 (4.9-8.4 mm), off KwaZulu- Natal, Stn NAD 8N, 29°53. 6’ S
31°04.6’E, 38 m, 16 May 1958.
Pagurus prideaux. USNM 276079, 2 6, 1 2, 3 ovigerous ? (3.8-5.9 mm);
Meiring Naude Stn XX91, 30°12.9’S 30°52.5’E, 50 m, 8 July 1986. PMcL,
1 2 (6.2 mm); Meiring Naude Stn XX96, 30°15’S 30°54.3’E, 100 m, 8 July
1986. NHM 1997.729, 1 ovigerous 2 (5.6 mm); Meiring Naude Stn XX104,
30°07.2’S 30°58.2’E, 50 m, 8 July 1986. SAM-A43225, 1 ¢ (3.9 mm);
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 325
Fig. 5. Pagurus prideaux Leach, 1815, ovigerous 2 (5.9 mm) from Meiring
Naude Stn XX91 (USNM 276079). A. Shield and cephalic appendages.
B. Chela and carpus of right cheliped. C. Chela and carpus of left cheliped.
D. Left third pereopod (lateral view). E. Anterior lobe of sternite of third
pereopods. F. Telson. Scales E, F, 1.0 mm; A-D, 5.0 mm.
Meiring Naude Stn XX114, 29°56.2’S 31°10.2’E, 88 m, 9 July 1986. RMNH,
1 3 (4.0 mm); Meiring Naude Stn XX115, 29°50’S 31°14.2’E, 130 m, 9 July
1986.
Diagnosis
Shield (Fig. 5A) broader than long. Rostrum usually broadly rounded,
occasionally obtusely triangular. Ocular peduncles short, stout; corneas strongly
dilated; ocular acicles subovate, moderately slender, with moderate to strong
326 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
submarginal spine. Antennular peduncles over-reaching ocular peduncles by
nearly entire length of ultimate segment. Antennal peduncles equalling or
over-reaching ocular peduncles by up to 0.25 length of ultimate segment;
antennal acicle slender, unarmed, reaching from slightly beyond base to distal
margin of cornea, occasionally over-reaching cornea.
Right cheliped (Fig. 5B) with chela often much longer than carpus. Palm
with single or double row of small spines or tubercles, occasionally only
granules, on dorsomesial margin; convex dorsal surface granular or minutely
spinulose, with short spinose median elevation at proximal margin; dorsolateral
margin with somewhat elevated row of small spines or tubercles extending to
or nearly to tip of fixed finger. Carpus with irregular single or double row of
moderate to strong tubercles or spines on dorsomesial margin and smaller row
in dorsal midline, convex dorsal surface covered with numerous small spines or
tubercles; dorsodistal margin often broadly v-shaped and armed with single
or double row of small spines; dorsolateral margin indistinctly delimited by row
of spines, strongest proximally.
Left cheliped with propodal-carpal articulation rotated 15-30° counter-
clockwise from perpendicular. Dactyl with row of small spines on dorsomesial
margin. Palm (Fig. 5C) weakly elevated in dorsal midline and with short single
or double row of small spines proximally, dorsal surface of palm and fixed
finger granular; dorsomesial and dorsolateral margins each with irregular single
or double row of small spines. Carpus with row of simple to multifid spines on
dorsolateral margin and irregular single or double row of slightly smaller spines
on dorsomesial margin.
Ambulatory legs (Fig. 5D) with elongate slender dactyls strongly twisted;
dorsal surfaces each with row of tiny spinules, mesial faces each with longi-
tudinal sulcus and row of long setae extending to claw, lateral faces each with
longitudinal sulcus in proximal half and row of setae extending to claw; ventral
margins each with row of closely-spaced, very small corneous spinules. Dorsal
surfaces of carpi and propodi each with row of spines, strongest on second;
lateral faces spinulose at least in dorsal halves. Anterior lobe of sternite of third
pereopods (Fig. 5E) broadly subtriangular to subquadrate; usually with several
small spines or spinulose protuberances.
Males without paired or unpaired pleopods. Females with four unpaired
biramous left pleopods (2-5). Telson (Fig. 5F) with posterior lobes separated
by broad shallow median cleft, terminal and lateral margins with row of
irregularly-sized spines.
Colour (in preservative)
Ocular peduncles very pale yellow, with more eadich or salmon pink band
next to cornea, or with small clearer area; corneas dark greenish gray. Anten-
nular peduncles very pale yellow, with light reddish traces. Antennae of similar
tone, but colour of reddish spots on the peduncles more accentuated; flagella
yellowish. Right cheliped rose coloured, darker salmon on dorsal surfaces of
merus and carpus; propodus salmon, with violet hue in posterior part of upper
face, but extending entire and on each side of longitudinal keel, but granules
always rose coloured on all the segments; dactyls lighter, coloured like
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 327
pumpkin; claw whitish rose. Left cheliped similar, but much more accentuated
in hue and in extent of violet on propodus, and showing also a reddish spot on
propodus and dactyl. Second and third pereopods with meri pale salmon, some
paler areas, reddish spots and darker transverse band near margin; carpi similar
but usually with somewhat darker colour tone, spines whitish; propodi with
transverse clear band in centre, reddish proximally and distally, white centrally
on longitudinal keel; also transverse white stripe and some reddish spots;
dactyls pale coloured, with numerous spots or specks throughout. (After
Sandberg & McLaughlin 1998.)
Habitat
Commonly found in symbiotic relationship with the ‘cloak anemone’
Adamsia carciniopados (Otto) formerly known as Adamsia palliata (Bohadsch);
20-400 m. In the South African specimens, Barnard (1950) reported that all
shells that had been preserved with the crabs had a single anemone encircling
the shell aperture. This was similarly the case in the specimens from the
Meiring Naude.
Distribution
Eastern Atlantic from Norway to Cape Verde; Mediterranean Sea; South
Africa; and Red Sea.
Remarks
As previously noted, Stebbing (1910) initially identified a single specimen
(SAM-A1497) as Pagurus tristanensis, but changed this and subsequently
assigned it to Pagurus spinulentus (as Eupagurus). Neither Henderson’s (1888)
descriptions nor figures of either species are sufficiently diagnostic to permit
confident identifications without references to the type specimens themselves.
The illustrations of the right chelipeds of both species (Henderson 1888, pl. 5
(figs 3, 5a)) are relatively similar and do bear considerable superficial similarity
to P. prideaux; however, it would appear that neither Stebbing (1910, 1920) nor
Barnard (1950) examined their specimens closely enough to notice the complete
absence of pleopods in the males. Henderson (1888) made no mention of the
sex of his single specimen of P. tristanensis, which is a male, and immediately
distinguished from P. prideaux by the presence of three unpaired left pleopods,
as well as the better-developed, obtusely triangular rostrum and chelipeds armed
with rows of strong spines. Henderson’s single specimen of P. spinulentus is
a female and the spines present on the dorsal surfaces of the chelae are not
apparent in his figure. The dorsal surfaces of the chelae of P. prideaux are
covered with granules or spinules, thus making recognition of the two species
elementary. The very close relationship of P. spinulentus to P. cavicarpus, a
species recognized for the first time in south-eastern South African waters, has
been discussed under the latter taxon.
Pagurus prideaux is the second species common to the north-eastern
Atlantic fauna to be found in south-eastern South Africa. In contrast to P. cuan-
ensis, whose distribution appears continuous from Norway to the Atlantic coast
of South Africa and into the south-western Indian Ocean, the most southernly
328 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
record of P. prideaux in the eastern Atlantic is Cape Verde. It was questionably
reported from the Red Sea by Lewinsohn (1969). Its presence in the south-
western Indian Ocean and southernmost portion of South Africa provides
credence to its occurrence in the Red Sea. Future surveys of the deeper waters
off eastern Africa may provide additional information on the southernly
migration of P. prideaux in the western Indian Ocean.
Pagurus sp.
Fig. 6A-H
Material
SAM-A43226, 1 ¢ (1.6 mm); KwaZulu-Natal (off Park Rynie), Meiring
Naude Stn X6, 30°23.2’S 30°50.8’E, 140 m, 19 August 1981.
Description
Shield (Fig. 6A) slightly broader than long; anterior margin between ros-
trum and lateral projections concave; anterolateral margin sloping; posterior
margin truncate. Rostrum broadly rounded, not produced beyond level of lateral
projections. Lateral projections triangular, each with small submarginal spine.
Dorsal surface of shield with sparse tufts of stiff setae posterior to anterior
margin at level of lateral projections, ocular acicles and rostrum. Third maxil-
liped with accessory tooth on crista dentata; merus and carpus each with strong
or blunted dorsodistal spine.
Ocular peduncles approximately 0.80 shield length: short and moderately
stout, dorsomesial surface with 1 or 2 tufts of setae and tuft of thick setae at
base of slightly dilated corneas. Ocular acicles narrowly triangular, dorsal
surface somewhat concave, with strong inwardly directed submarginal spine;
separated basally by more than basal width of one acicle.
Antennular peduncles slightly over-reaching distal margins of corneas. Ulti-
mate segment with 1 or 2 setae near dorsolateral distal angle and few scattered
surface setae. Penultimate segment with few scattered setae. Basal segment
unarmed. ,
Antennal peduncles reaching to or not quite to distal margins of corneas,
and reaching approximately to distal half of ultimate segments of antennular
peduncles. Fifth and fourth segments with scattered setae. Third segment with
small spine at ventrodistal margin. Second segment with dorsolateral distal
angle produced strongly, reaching at least distal half of fourth peduncular seg-
ment, with strong terminal spine, mesial margin unarmed, lateral margin
unarmed or with small spine distally; dorsomesial distal angle with strong spine.
First segment with spine on dorsolateral margin distally; ventrolateral margin
with 1 spine. Antennal acicle arcuate, reaching distal 0.33-0.50 of ultimate
peduncular segment, with terminal spine and few tufts of long setae on mesial
face. Antennal flagellum short, approximately 2.5 times length of peduncle,
with 1 or 2 short (< 1 article length) setae every 1 or 2 articles.
Right cheliped (Fig. 6B) much shorter than ambulatory legs. Dactyl approxi-
mately as long as palm; cutting edge with row of corneous teeth in distal fourth,
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 329
three large, calcareous teeth proximally; terminating in corneous claw; slender
hiatus between dactyl and fixed finger; dorsal surface convex, with scattered
long setae and 3 small spines proximally; dorsomesial margin with 1 spine
A\
\ =
VS
, =
\
—
»
C2.
Fig. 6. A-H. Pagurus sp., 3d (1.6 mm) from Meiring Naude Stn X6 (SAM-A43226).
A. Shield and cephalic appendages. B. Right cheliped. C. Right second pereopod (lateral
view). D. Right third pereopod (lateral view). E. Dactyl and propodus of right fourth
pereopod. F. Dactyl and propodus of left fifth pereopod. G. Anterior lobe of sternite of
third pereopods. H. Telson. Scales G-H, 0.50 mm; A-F, 1.0 mm.
330 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
proximally; mesial and ventral surfaces with tufts of long setae. Palm moder-
ately slender; approximately 0.75 length of carpus; dorsomesial margin
rounded, with double row of small spines and spinulose tubercles; dorsal
surface somewhat convex, with 2 irregular rows of spines, accompanied by
scattered long stiff setae; dorsolateral margin with row of small spines and
adjacent row of larger spines proximally, becoming single row distally
and extending to proximal half of fixed finger; ventral surface with scattered
long setae; fixed finger with scattered setae on dorsal and ventral surfaces, cut-
ting edge with row of low, broad calcareous teeth. Carpus approximately as
long as merus; dorsomesial margin with irregular row of strong spines, dorsal
surface and dorsodistal margin each with few spines; dorsolateral margin
rounded but with row of small spines becoming irregular double row distally;
lateral face with few small spines dorsally in distal half, 1 tiny spinule at ventro-
lateral distal angle; mesial face with scattered long setae. Merus with unarmed
dorsodistal margin, dorsal and mesial surfaces and ventromesial margin all with
sparse long setae; ventrolateral margin with 2 spines in distal third. Ischium
unarmed. Left cheliped missing.
Ambulatory legs (Fig. 6C-D) (left third missing) with dactyl of third right
slightly longer than second pair; dactyls moderately long and slender, approxi-
mately equal to length of propodi (second) or 1.2 longer (third right); in dorsal
view Straight; in lateral view straight (second) or slightly curved (third); dorsal
surfaces with transverse low protuberances and long setae; lateral and mesial
surfaces with few moderately long setae; ventral margins each with row of
strong corneous spines (7 on second, 8 on third). Propodi of second pereopods
shorter than third; dorsal surfaces each with transverse low ridges or pro-
tuberances and long setae; lateral and mesial faces with setae; ventral margins
each with 2 or 3 corneous spinules. Carpi of second right with row of 6 spines,
second left with row of 5 spines and numerous setae on dorsal surfaces; dorsal
surface of third right with 1 spinulose protuberance proximally and dorsodistal
spine; lateral faces all with sparse long setae. Meri all with transverse setose
ridges dorsally; second pair each with small spine at ventrolateral distal angle,
ventral margin of right second with row of 4 spinules, distal-most strongest, left
with single distal spinule and row of widely-spaced protuberances; third right
pereopod unarmed. Ischia unarmed. Fourth pereopods (Fig. 6E) weakly semi-
chelate; propodal rasp consisting of 1 row of large corneous scales. Fifth
pereopods (Fig. 6F) chelate. Sternite of third pereopods with submarginal row
of setae on subsemicircular anterior lobe (Fig. 6G). Sternite of fifth pereopods
with 2 closely-spaced subovate lobes.
Immature male with gonopores not open. Left third pleopod short,
biramous, with subequal rami; fourth and fifth better developed, uniramous.
Uropods very asymmetrical. Telson (Fig. 6H) with small transverse incision
indicative of transverse suture separating anterior and posterior regions; nearly
symmetrical posterior lobes separated by small median cleft; terminal margins
each with row of moderately strong spines, interspersed on left lobe with
smaller spines.
Colour
Unknown.
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 331
Habitat
Collected at depth 140 m.
Distribution
Known only from KwaZulu-Natal, South Africa.
Remarks
This quite small juvenile male specimen with a spinose right cheliped clearly
is not referable to P. cuanensis or P. cavicarpus. We initially were inclined to
think that this specimen might represent Stebbing’s (1924) (but not Barnard’s
(1950)) P. placens, as Stebbing (1924) noted in his description of ‘P.’ depro-
fundis that it agreed with P. placens in having numerous rows of ‘teeth or
sharpened tubercles’ on the chelae and carpi of the chelipeds, and in the
development of the fourth pereopods.
As previously mentioned, the holotype and unique specimen of P. placens
has not been located, and interpretation of P. placens has been difficult, as
Stebbing’s (1924: 242, pl. 4) description and illustrations are both inadequate
and inaccurate. He described the rostral region as ‘obscurely produced between
the ophthalmic scales’, but illustrated a well-developed tridentate rostrum
reaching nearly to the mid-length of the ocular acicles. The rostrum of the
KwaZulu-Natal specimen is, as Stebbing described, rounded and not produced.
Although his figure (Stebbing 1924, pl. 4 (car)) shows a simple spinose
termination of the ocular acicles. Stebbing described them as ‘wide apart,
bilobed, not denticulate, but the larger inner lobe produced into an acute apex’.
The ocular acicles of the KwaZulu-Natal specimen (Fig. 6A) are widely
separated, terminate subacutely (equivalent to Stebbing’s outer lobe), and each
has a strong, submarginal, inwardly directed spine (equivalent to Stebbing’s
inner lobe) reaching well beyond the tip of the acicle.
The fourth pereopod of P. placens illustrated by Stebbing (1924, pl. 4
(prp4)) appears to have been drawn in mesial view, with no propodal rasp
visible, but Stebbing described it as being like that of ‘P.? deprofundis, which
he illustrated (Stebbing 1924, pl. 5 (prp4)) as having a rasp consisting of a
single row of corneous scales. Although Stebbing actually was incorrect in
ascribing a single row of scales to the propodal rasp of ‘P.’ deprofundis, his
illustration is in agreement with the rasp of the KwaZulu-Natal specimen.
However, there the similarities begin to falter. Although Stebbing gave no
indication of heavy setation, other than to mention long setae adjacent to the
cutting edges of the dactyl and fixed finger of the right chela that concealed the
hiatus between the two, his figures of both chelae depict long setae, similar to
that seen in P. cuanensis. The KwaZulu-Natal specimen has a scattering of
long, finer and less abundant setae.
Perhaps more importantly, the shield and cephalic appendages of the
KwaZulu-Natal specimen differ from the holotype of P. placens in the reported
armature of the anterior part of the shield, length of the antennal flagellum, and
the armature of the dorsolateral distal lobe of the second segment of the antennal
peduncle, which Stebbing (1924: 242, pl. 5, figs (car, a.c.)) referred to as the
outer branch of the antennal acicle. Stebbing described the anterior carapace
332 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
behind each ocular acicle (scale) as being ‘produced backward [as] a faint ridge
of the carapace, its front margin forming a small denticle on the outer side of
each scale’. His figure (pl. 2 (car)) shows only a series of three lines on the left
and one on the right side of the shield posterior to the ocular acicles; the lateral
projections of the shield do each have a small spinule. In the KwaZulu-Natal
specimen there are only two or three long setae in these positions posterior to
the ocular acicles, but the lateral projections each have a distinct spinule. The
antennal flagellum of P. placens was described as ‘devoid of setae and more
than four times as long as the peduncle’ (Stebbing 1924: 242). The antennal
flagellum of the KwaZulu-Natal specimen is approximately 2.5 times the length
of the peduncle and has one or two very short setae every two or three articles.
The produced dorsolateral distal angle of the second antennal segment is well-
developed in both the illustrated holotype and in the KwaZulu-Natal specimen;
however, in the KwaZulu-Natal specimen the process of the left side is
unarmed, and that of the right has a spine on the lateral margin. Stebbing
described this process as denticulate and illustrated a row of spines on the
mesial margin such as is also seen in P. cuanensis. Perhaps the most distinctive
difference between P. placens, as Stebbing described it, and the KwaZulu-Natal
specimen, is in the armament of the dactyl of the right chela. The holotype
reportedly has a row of spines on the dorsomesial margin. There is only a single
spine on this margin in the KwaZulu-Natal specimen.
The KwaZulu-Natal specimen also shows some similarities to P. tristan-
ensis in having short stout ocular peduncles, rounded rostrum, moderately
slender, spinose right cheliped and propodal rasp of the fourth pereopod with a
single row of scales. However, despite its similarly small size (shield length
2.12 mm, carapace length 3.62 mm), the holotype of P. tristanensis (NHM
1888.33) is a male with well-developed gonopores. It differs from the Kwa-
Zulu—Natal specimen in the armature of the dorsolateral distal angle of the
second segment of the antennal peduncle, spine configuration of the right cheli-
ped, segmental ratios and armature of the ambulatory legs, configuration of the
anterior lobe of the sternite of the third pereopods, and armature of the telson.
Until additional and more mature specimens become available, the
KwaZulu-Natal specimen must simply be referred to as Pagurus sp.
KEY TO THE REGIONAL SPECIES OF PAGURUS
1A. Dorsal surface of palms of chelipeds armed with spines ..................... 2
1B. Dorsal surface of palms of chelipeds unarmed or armed only with granules
or small tubercles. sieges. .0catedeuredele Dede eta +
2A. Right second pereopod with dorsal row of spines on propodus ............. 3
2B. Right second pereopod without dorsal row of spines on propodus ...........
sssuioil's vn-s ewieia-meian sre enie oMasien sinals Claes serste Tease cst EEE CREE Pagurus sp. (Fig. 6)
3A. Ocular peduncles short, stout. Dorsal surface of palm of right chela with
small tubercles or spines, strongest mesially and laterally; carpi of cheli-
peds each, or at least right, usually with prominent foramen on ventral
Suifacea ue oe Pagurus cavicarpus (Paul’son, 1875) (Fig. 1A—C, E-I, K)
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 333
3B. Ocular peduncles moderately long and slender. Dorsal surface of palm of
right chela with rows of spines, strongest in midline; carpi of chelipeds
each, or at least right, without prominent foramen on ventral surface .......
I ooo das cihcaas andettass saceieeve Pagurus cuanensis Bell, 1845 (Fig. 2)
4A. Dactyls of ambulatory legs shorter to only slightly longer than propodi .. 5
4B. Dactyls of ambulatory legs at least 1.5 length of propodi ......................
ee ai aie laine sen vanienednncese Pagurus prideaux Leach, 1815 (Fig. 5)
5A. Ventromesial face of merus and carpus of right cheliped developed as
MA IPLOIeCHON IM DOUWSEXES \ ...5005 sc cok c20dscdeec5 dats occa do sas dome we naceke
gos acdc sccdaescldssasas ss Pagurus liochele (Barnard, 1947) (Fig. 4)
5B. Ventromesial face of merus and carpus of right cheliped not developed as
ne Mee E CHC CHOON IN ChENET SEK. <aycc% ava barecls Ge eect ec din ee oe cect come
Propagurus McLaughlin & de Saint Laurent, 1998
Pagurus Fabricius, 1775: 410 (in part).
Propagurus McLaughlin & de Saint Laurent, 1998: 159.
Type species. Pagurus gaudichaudii H. Milne Edwards, 1836: 269. Gender
masculine.
Diagnosis
Thirteen pairs of symmetrical or asymmetrical quadriserial gills (cf.
McLaughlin & de Saint Laurent 1998); moderately well-developed or rudimen-
tary pleurobranch above pereopod 2, rudimentary pleurobranch above pereopod
3, well-developed pleurobranch above pereopod 4. Antennal peduncles with
supernumerary segmentation; dorsolateral distal angle of second segment well-
developed, with spinose mesial margin. Maxillule with external lobe of endopod
varying from rudimentary to well-developed, arched, but not strongly recurved.
Ischium of third maxilliped with well-developed crista dentata and strong
accessory tooth. Fourth pereopods with propodal rasp consisting of 3 or 4 rows
of corneous scales. Sternite of fifth pereopods broadly and ovately subrec-
tangular lobes, each with transverse tuft of long setae. Tergite of sixth
abdominal somite strongly calcified, with deep submedian transverse furrow
dividing tergite into subquadrate anterior and subrectangular posterior lobes.
Telson with submedian transverse indentation providing indication of division
into anterior and posterior portions; asymmetrical posterior lobes separated by
median cleft.
Males with paired gonopores, each with adjacent tuft of stiff setae; no sexual
tubes; no paired pleopods, usually 3 stout unpaired left pleopods (3-5) (very
rarely 4, pleopods 2-5), each with somewhat foliaceous elongate endopod and
rudimentary exopod. Females with paired gonopores; no paired pleopods,
4 stout unpaired left pleopods, second with subequal rami, both short, paddle-
shaped, third and fourth each with elongate somewhat foliaceous endopod and
short somewhat paddle or blade-shaped exopod; fifth as in male.
334 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
During the course of this investigation, one of us (JF) recognized the
morphological similarities of Stebbing’s (1924) Pagurus deprofundis and the
South American Pagurus gaudichaudii H. Milne Edwards, 1836. Earlier,
Forest & de Saint Laurent (1968) had noted the unusual gill structure of
P. gaudichaudii, which resembled that of some undescribed Indo-Pacific
species. For those species McLaughlin & de Saint Laurent (1998) recently
proposed the genus Propagurus. One of those species proved to be conspecific
with Stebbing’s (1924) taxon.
Propagurus deprofundis (Stebbing, 1924)
Fig. 7A-K
Eupagurus deprofundis Stebbing, 1924: 243, pl. 70. Barnard, 1950: 164. Forest, 1955: 107.
Pagurus deprofundus: Kensley, 1981: 33 (list) (misspelling).
Propagurus deprofundis: McLaughlin & de Saint Laurent, 1998: 170, figs 2D, E, 4B, 7B,
8A-D, 9, 11C, D.
Material
Holotype. NHM 1928.12.1.245, 1 2 (9.3 mm); 13 miles north-west of Cape
Morgan, South Africa, 457-585 m.
Diagnosis
Shield varying from slightly longer than broad to distinctly broader than
long. Rostrum commonly triangular, usually produced beyond level of lateral
projections; usually with prominent terminal spine. Ocular peduncles slightly
less to slightly more than half shield length; moderately stout; corneas slightly
dilated; ocular acicles ovately or acutely triangular, dorsal surfaces somewhat
concave; with strong submarginal spine. Fully extended antennular peduncles
over-reach distal margins of corneas by 0.20 length of ultimate segments to 0.25
length of penultimate segments. Antennal peduncles over-reach distal margins of
corneas by 0.10-0.75 length of ultimate segments; antennal acicle reaching at
least to mid-length of ultimate peduncular segment, usually considerably
beyond, with strong terminal spine.
Right cheliped considerably stronger than left, but not always appreciably
longer; sometimes with hiatus between dactyl and fixed finger. Dactyl often
with few acute tubercles proximally on convex dorsal surface; dorsomesial
margin with single or double row of small teeth. Palm varying from moderately
slender to moderately broad, with irregular double row of spines on dorsomesial
margin, convex dorsal surface sparsely covered with short setae and with
6 somewhat irregular rows of spines, usually accompanied by long stiff setae;
dorsolateral margin not distinctly delimited proximally, but with irregular row
of teeth becoming marginal and extending nearly to tip of fixed finger. Carpus
with irregular row of strong spines on dorsomesial margin accompanied by
adjacent slightly irregular row of spines on dorsal surface, separated by broad
nearly naked longitudinal band from median row of shorter spines. Merus with
0-3 spines on dorsodistal margin; ventrolateral margin with row of acute or
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 335
subacute teeth; ventral surface often with few small and occasionally 2 large
tubercles.
Left cheliped frequently with hiatus between dactyl and fixed finger; also
often with few tubercles proximally on rounded dorsal surface of dactyl. Palm
with median single or double row of acute tubercles on convex dorsal surface,
becoming less regular on proximal half of fixed finger; dorsomesial face usually
with central row of tubercles and nearly double row of slightly smaller tubercles
near margin; dorsolateral face with several irregular rows of small closely-
spaced blunt or acute tubercles or denticles, appreciably stronger dorsally, but
not extending to tip of fixed finger. Carpus with 1 or 2 spines on dorsodistal
margin, dorsomesial margin with irregular row of moderate to strong spines.
Merus with 1-3 spines at dorsodistal margin; ventromesial margin with row of
spines proximally and frequently also small spine distally; ventrolateral margin
with row of spines sometimes becoming double row proximally.
Ambulatory legs over-reaching left cheliped by at least 0.75 length of
dactyls. Dactyls and propodi of left and right morphologically similar, but left
with greater setation on lateral faces. Dactyls 1.10-1.85 length of propodi;
dorsal surfaces with transverse low protuberances and long stiff setae; lateral
surfaces each with faint longitudinal sulcus; ventral margins each with row of
8-21 strong corneous spines. Propodi each with transverse low ridges and long
stiff setae on dorsal and lateral surfaces; mesial faces of second pereopods (each
with longitudinal keel in ventral third), extending from near distal margin to
proximal half or third. Carpi of second pereopods with row of 3-8 spines and
transverse setose ridges on dorsal surfaces; dorsal surfaces of third each with
0-5 smaller spines and transverse setose ridges in addition to strong dorsodistal
spine. Meri with ventral margins of second each with ventral row of spines,
ventral margins of third unarmed or rarely with denticle on ventrolateral margin
and stronger denticle on ventromesial margin distally. Sternite of third
pereopods with submarginal row of setae on subsemicircular to roundly
subrectangular anterior lobe.
Males with 3, rarely 4 unpaired left pleopods. Mature females usually with
dense setae on coxae of fifth pereopods. Telson with asymmetrical posterior
lobes separated by slender median cleft; terminal margins often considerably
produced laterally, each with row of small calcareous teeth becoming stronger
toward outer angles, largest teeth, particularly on left, somewhat hooked.
Redescription of holotype
Shield (Fig. 7A) slightly longer than broad; anterior margin between
rostrum and lateral projections concave; anterolateral margin terraced; posterior
margin roundly truncate. Rostrum well-developed, triangular, produced beyond
level of lateral projections, with prominent terminal spinule. Lateral projections
obtusely triangular, each with strong submarginal spine. Dorsal surface of
shield with row of tufts of stiff setae on either side of midline and additional
tufts posterior to anterior margin and rostrum. Ten pairs of well-developed
asymmetrical intermediate arthrobranchs (Fig. 7B-C), moderately well-
developed pleurobranch above second pereopod, rudimentary pleurobranch
above third pereopod, pleurobranch above fourth pereopod normally developed.
336 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
fo
V
»
H
er‘
S. ao
)iea aaa
Fig. 7. A-K. Propagurus deprofundis (Stebbing, 1924), holotype 2 (9.3 mm) from off Cape
Morgan (NHM 1928.12.1.245). A. Shield and cephalic appendages. B. Arthrobranch
lamella from gill of third maxilliped. C. Arthrobranch lamella from gill of fourth pereopod.
D. Chela and carpus of right cheliped (setal density not precise). E. Chela and carpus of left
cheliped (setal density not precise). F. Right second pereopod (lateral view). G. Propodus
and carpus of left second pereopod (mesial view). H. Third left pereopod (lateral view).
I. Dactyl and propodus of right fourth pereopod. J. Anterior lobe of sternite of third
pereopods. K. Telson. Scales B-C, 0.50 mm; J, 1.0 mm; A, D-H, 5.0 mm.
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 337
Third maxilliped with very strong accessory tooth on crista dentata; merus with
strong dorsodistal spine and small spine medially on ventral margin; carpus with
small dorsodistal spine.
Ocular peduncles slightly more than half shield length; moderately short and
stout, broader at base of cornea than proximally, dorsomesial surface with row
of tufts of setae; corneas slightly dilated. Ocular acicles acutely triangular, dor-
sal surfaces somewhat concave, each with strong submarginal spine; separated
basally by slightly less than basal width of one acicle.
Antennular peduncles over-reach distal margins of corneas by nearly entire
length of ultimate segments. Ultimate segment with tuft of setae near dorso-
lateral distal angle, and few scattered surface setae. Penultimate segment with
few scattered setae. Basal segment with very strong spine on lateral surface in
distal half.
Antennal peduncles over-reach distal margins of corneas by nearly half
length of ultimate segments, and reach approximately to distal half of ultimate
segments of antennular peduncles. Fifth and fourth segments with scattered
setae. Third segment with very strong spine at ventrodistal margin. Second
segment with dorsolateral distal angle produced strongly, reaching distal half of
fourth peduncular segment, with simple or bifid terminal spine, mesial margin
with 7 or 8 small spines, lateral margin with tufts of long setae; dorsomesial
distal angle with very strong spine. First segment with spine on distolateral
margin dorsally; ventrolateral margin with 2 or 3 small spines. Antennal acicle
arcuate, reaching distal half of ultimate peduncular segment, with strong
terminal spine and numerous tufts of long stiff setae on mesial face. Antennal
flagellum with 1 or 2 setae of moderate length (4 or 5 article length) every 5 or
6 articles proximally and more widely spaced distally.
Detached right cheliped (Fig. 7D) considerably stronger than left. Dactyl
approximately as long as palm (although appearing slightly shorter in illus-
tration); cutting edge with row of corneous teeth in distal third, 3 large, broad
calcareous teeth proximally; terminating in strong corneous claw; small hiatus
between dactyl and fixed finger; dorsal surface convex, marked by transverse
rows of tufts of stiff setae and 2 small spines proximally; dorsomesial margin
with double row of small spines proximally, becoming single row in distal 0.65
and accompanied by long setae; ventral surface with 3 longitudinal rows of long
setae. Palm moderately slender; slightly shorter than carpus; dorsomesial mar-
gin with irregular double row of spines, some minutely corneous-tipped; dorsal
surface convex, with 6 somewhat irregular rows of spines, and accompanied by
scattered long stiff setae; dorsolateral margin not distinctly delimited, but with
irregular row of spines extending on to tuberculate lateral face, ventral surface
with low simple or multifid tubercles and scattered long stiff setae; fixed finger
with 5 spines on dorsal surface and distinct row of short spines on dorsolateral
margin, cutting edge with short row of corneous teeth distally and 2 large broad
calcareous teeth proximally, lateral face with spinose tubercles proximally, tufts
of short setae distally and on ventral surface. Carpus slightly shorter than
merus; dorsomesial margin with irregular row of strong spines accompanied by
adjacent slightly irregular row of spines on dorsal surface, separated by broad
nearly naked longitudinal strip from median row of shorter spines, few scattered
spines laterally; dorsolateral margin rounded but with row of small spines
338 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
becoming double row distally; lateral face with forwardly directed spines and
spinules; mesial face with scattered low protuberances and long setae; ventral
surface with row of spines mesially and laterally. Merus with 2 spines on dorso-
distal margin, dorsal margin with short transverse ridges; mesial face with
perpendicular ridge distally presumably with setae now missing, scattered
protuberances proximally; ventromesial margin with row of spines, strongest
proximally; lateral face with transverse ridges more spinulose in ventral half,
ventrolateral margin with row of subacute spines; ventral surface with few small
spines. Ischium with row of widely-spaced, very small blunt tubercles on
ventromesial margin.
Left cheliped (Fig. 7E) moderately long and slender. Dactyl with few
spinules proximally on rounded dorsal surface, mesial face with 2 spinules
proximally and transverse ridges accompanied by long setae. Palm approxi-
mately 0.75 length of carpus; dorsal surface convex, midline with double row of
spines becoming less regular on proximal half of fixed finger and replaced by
short transverse setose ridges distally; dorsomesial face with central row of
spines and nearly double row of slightly smaller spines extending on to mesial
face distally as low spinulose tubercles; dorsolateral face with several irregular
rows of small tubercles, appreciably more spinose dorsally, but not extending to
tip of fixed finger; ventrolateral margin delineated only proximally by row of
very small, closely-spaced blunt spinules. Carpus approximately same length as
merus; dorsodistal margin with 1 very strong spine and second spine directly
beneath; dorsomesial margin with irregular row of strong spines, dorsal surface
unarmed, slightly depressed, rounded dorsolateral margin with row of spines;
lateral surface with semi-perpendicular rows of small tuberculate spines
decreasing in size proximally, ventrolateral margin with row of small subacute
spines; mesial surface with short transverse ridges, presumably accompanied by
long setae; ventral surface with 2 blunt spines distally and tufts of long setae.
Merus with 1 small spine at dorsodistal margin, dorsal margin and mesial face
each with transverse ridges presumably accompanied by setae, becoming multi-
spinose ventrally on mesial face; ventromesial margin with row of subacute
spines proximally and small acute spine distally; lateral face with short trans-
verse ridges becoming flattened multifid tubercles ventrally, ventrolateral
margin with row of prominent spines becoming double row proximally. Ischium
with row of small spinules on ventromesial margin and tiny spinule on
ventrolateral margin.
Ambulatory legs (Fig. 7F-H) over-reaching left cheliped by at least 0.75
length of dactyls. Dactyls of left and right similar; moderately long and stout,
1.10-1.35 length of propodi; in dorsal view slightly twisted; in lateral view
straight (second) or slightly curved (third); dorsal surfaces with transverse low
protuberances and long stiff setae (many broken); lateral surfaces each with very
faint longitudinal sulcus and row of long or moderately long setae; mesial faces
each with transverse ridges and setae dorsally; ventral margins each with row of
strong corneous spines (8 or 9 on second, 12 or 13 on third). Propodi of third
pereopods slightly shorter than second; dorsal and lateral surfaces each with
transverse low ridges and long stiff setae; mesial faces of second pereopods
(Fig. 7G) each with longitudinal keel in ventral third, extending from near distal
margin to proximal third. Carpi of second right with row of 5 spines, second
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 339
left with row of 3 spines and transverse setose ridges on dorsal surfaces; dorsal
surfaces of third each with only transverse setose ridges and dorsodistal
spine; lateral faces all with short transverse ridges and long setae. Meri all with
transverse setose ridges dorsally, ventral margins of second pereopods each
with ventromesial row of spines, more numerous and stronger on left,
ventrolateral distal angles each with spine; ventral margin of third right
unarmed, third left with tiny spinule on ventrolateral margin and stronger
spinule on ventromesial margin distally. Ischia each with row of very small
spinules on ventromesial margins. Fourth pereopods (Fig. 7I) semichelate;
propodal rasp consisting of 3 rows of small corneous scales. Sternite of third
pereopods with submarginal row of setae on large subsemicircular anterior lobe
(Fig. 7J). Sternite of fifth pereopods damaged, but still with dense setae.
Female with paired gonopores; no paired pleopods; 4 unpaired left pleopods
(2-5), with rami of second nearly equal, third and fourth with exopod approxi-
mately half length of endopod, fifth with exopod markedly reduced. Uropods
very asymmetrical. Telson (Fig. 7K) with deep mediolateral incision indicative
of transverse suture separating anterior and posterior regions; asymmetrical
posterior lobes separated by slender median cleft; terminal margins each with
row of small calcareous spines becoming stronger toward outer angles, largest
spines of left somewhat hooked.
Colour
Unknown for holotype. Other specimens in preservative: Shield mottled
white and orange. Ocular peduncles orange; ocular acicles orange basally, white
distally. Antennular peduncles whitish with orange flagella. Antennal peduncles
faintly orange, darkest on proximal segments. Chelipeds with orange tint,
darkest on dactyls. Ambulatory legs each with orange band proximally and
distally on meri; carpi, propodi and dactyls all faintly orange, darkest on distal
halves of dactyls. (After McLaughlin & de Saint Laurent 1998.)
Habitat
Holotype collected from depth of 457-585 m. Elsewhere specimens found in
variety of gastropod shells, sometimes with attached anemone; 200-915 m.
Distribution
In South African waters, known only from type locality north-west of Cape
Morgan; however, now recognized from southern Australia eastward to New
Zealand; Philippines and Hawaiian islands.
Remarks
Stebbing’s (1924) description of P. deprofundis (as Eupagurus) is not only
brief, but very inaccurate; his illustrations are equally unsatisfactory. He
remarked that the telson had a ‘curiously produced lobe with calcified rim at the
right extremity’ and the right uropod was larger than the left. Clearly, as may
be seen in Figure 7K, the telson is normally developed. Apparently Stebbing
was looking at the telson with one of the two posterior lobes folded under. The
abdomen of the holotype does twist strongly and it must have been this torsion
340 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
that gave Stebbing the impression that he was looking at a larger right uropod.
The specimen has normally asymmetrical uropods, the left is appreciably larger.
The one remaining antennal flagellum is long, as Stebbing reported, but does
not have the long setae depicted in his plate 5 (a.i.). It is probable that the
flagellum was laying across one of the setose appendages and he attributed this
setation to the flagellum. Stebbing did not actually describe the propodal rasp of
the fourth pereopod, other than to say that it was like that of Pagurus placens;
however, he illustrated a rasp with a single row of corneous scales (Stebbing
1924, pl. 5 (prp4)). We have re-examined the appendage and found that it has
three rows of small corneous scales (Fig. 7I), rather than the single row of large
scales he depicted.
Certain important morphological attributes of Propagurus deprofundis were
overlooked by Stebbing, i.e., the gill number and structure, and the presence of
a longitudinal keel on the mesial face of the propodus of each second pereopod.
As indicated in the generic diagnosis, species of Propagurus have 13 pairs of
symmetrical or asymmetrical trichobranchiate or intermediate gills (as defined
by Lemaitre 1989). The degree of asymmetry observed in the holotype is
greater than reported by McLaughlin & de Saint Laurent (1998) in specimens
from Australia. The distinctive propodal keel (Fig. 7G) may actually represent a
primitive stridulatory mechanism, used in conjunction with the tubercles on
opposing lateral surfaces of the chelae.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We are deeply indebted to Professor Winks Emmerson, University of
Transkei, for putting his collection at our disposal. This study could not have
been successfully completed had it not been for the assistance and cooperation
of Paul Clark, The Natural History Museum, London; Rafael Lemaitre,
National Museum of Natural History, Smithsonian Institution, Washington,
D.C.; Michelle van der Merwe, South African Museum, Cape Town; Lennart
Sandberg, Swedish Museum of Natural History, Stockholm; and Charles
Fransen, National Natuurhistorisch Museum, Leiden, who made type and
comparative specimens available. The efforts of Rafael Lemaitre in tracking
down obscure names and literature are also gratefully acknowledged. This is
a scientific contribution from the Shannon Point Marine Center, Western
Washington University.
REFERENCES
Atcock, A. 1905. Anomura. Fasc. I. Pagurides. Catalogue of the Indian decapod
Crustacea in the collections of the Indian Museum 2: i-xi, 1-197. Calcutta: Indian
Museum.
ATES, R. M. L. & SCHAKENBOS, J. A. 1985. Heremieten uit de Middeellandse Zee. Hetzee
Aquarium (Amsterdam) 35: 36-39.
Bass, H. 1911. Neue Paguriden aus den Ausbeuten der deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition
‘Valdivia’ und der japanischen Expedition Prof. Dofleins. Zoologischer Anzeiger 38 (1):
1-9.
Bass, H. 1912. Paguriden. In: CHUN, C. ed. Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse der deutschen
Tiefsee-Expedition ‘Valdivia’, 1898-1899 20 (2): 85-124. Jena: Gustav Fischer.
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 341
BARNARD, K. H. 1947. Descriptions of new species of South African decapod Crustacea,
with notes on synonymy and new records. Annals and Magazine of Natural History (11)
13: 361-392.
BARNARD, K. H. 1950. Descriptive catalogue of South African decapod Crustacea (crabs
and shrimps). Annals of the South African Museum 38: 1-837.
BARNARD, K. H. 1974. Contributions to the knowledge of South African marine Mollusca,
VII: Revised fauna list. Annals of the South African Museum 47: 663-781.
BELL, T. 1844-1853. A history of the British stalk-eyed Crustacea: i-lxv + 1-386.
London: John van Voorst. (Issued separately in parts.)
BERTHOLD, A. A. 1827. P. A. Latreille. Natirliche Familien des Thierreichs, aus dem
Franzésischen mit Anmerkungen und Zusdtzen: i-x, 1-606. Weimar.
Bouvier, E. L. 1940. Faune de France. 37. Décapodes Marcheurs. Paris: Paul
Lechevalier.
BRANDT, J. F. 1851. Krebse. Jn: MIDDENDORFF, A. TH. V. Reise in den dussersten
Norden und Osten Sibiriens wahrend der Jahre 1843 und 1844 2 (1) (Zoologie): 77-148.
CHEVREUX, E. & Bouvier, E. L. 1892. Voyage de la Goélette Melita aux Canaries et au
Sénégal, 1889-1890. Paguriens. Mémoires de la Société Zoologique de France 5:
83-144.
Dana, J. D. 1851. Conspectus crustaceorum quae in orbis terrarum circumnavigatione,
Carolo Wilkes e classe reipublicae foederatae duce, lexit et descripsit. (Preprint from)
Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia 5: 267-272.
Fasricius, J. C. 1775. Systema Entomologiae, sistens insectorum classes, ordines, genera,
species, adiectis synonymis, locis, descriptionibus, observationibus. Flensburgi et
Lipsiae: Officina Libraria Kortii.
Forest, J. 1952. Notes préliminaires sur les Paguridae (Crust. Décap.) des cdtes
occidentales d’ Afrique. III. Sur un Eupagurus nouveau de la région de Dakar, E. souriei
sp. nov. Bulletin du Muséum national d’Histoire naturelle 24: 355-359.
ForesT, J. 1955. Crustacés Décapodes, Pagurides. Expédition océanographique Belge dans
les eaux cotiéres africaines de 1’Atlantique Sud (1948-1949). Résultats scientifique 3 (4):
23-147. Brussels.
ForesT, J. 1956. Sun une collection de Paguridae de la céte de 1’Or. Proceedings of the
Zoological Society of London 126: 335-367.
Forest, J. 1958a. Sur la nomenclature des Pagures des mers frangaises. Bulletin du
Muséum national d’Histoire naturelle (2) 30: 94-100.
Forest, J. 1958b. Les Crustacés Anomoures du Muséum national d’Histoire naturelle,
Paris (3, Zoologie) 356: 525-538.
Forest, J. 1961. Pagurides de 1’Afrique occidentale. Scientific Results of the Danish
Benen to the coasts of tropical West Africa 1945-1946. Atlantide Report 6:
-250.
ForesT, J. 1966. Crustacés Décapodes: Pagurides. Jn: Campagne de la Calypso dans le
Golfe de Guinée et aux iles Principe, Sao Tomé et Annobon (1956). Annales de
l’Institut Océanographique de Monaco 44: 125-172.
Forest, J. 1978. Sur deux pagurides nouveaux de |’Atlantique tropical africain: Pagurus
laurentae et Paguristes cyanops spp. nov. Bulletin du Muséum national d Histoire
naturelle, Paris (3, Zoologie) 356: 525-538.
Forest, J. & HoLTHuis, L. B. 1955. Application for a decision regarding the status of the
generic name ‘Pagurus’ Fabricius, 1775 (Class Crustacea, Order Decapoda) and
application for the use of the Plenary Powers in regard thereto in certain circumstances.
Bulletin of Zoological Nomenclature 11: 307-321.
Forest, J. & Ncoc-Ho, N. 1992. Description de Pagurus dartevellei (Forest, 1958)
(Crustacea, Decapoda, Paguridae). Bulletin du Muséum national d’Histoire naturelle,
Paris (4) 14 (A): 217-227.
Forest, J. & SAINT LAURENT, M. DE. 1968. Résultats scientifiques des campagnes de la
‘Calypso’, Part VII. Campagne de la Calypso au large des cétes Atlantiques de
l’ Amérique du Sud (1961-1962). 6. Crustacés Décapodes: Pagurides. Annales de
l'Institut Océanographique de Monaco (n.s.) 45 (2): 45-172.
342 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
GRANT, F. E. & McCuLLocu, A. R. 1906. On a collection of Crustacea from the Port
roe Eanes Queensland. Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales
1906: 1-53.
GORDAN, J. 1956. A bibliography of pagurid crabs, exclusive of Alcock, 1905. Bulletin of
the American Museum of Natural History 108: 253-352.
HELLER, C. 1863. Die Crustaceen des stidlichen Europa. Crustacea Podophthalmia. Mit
einer Ubersicht tiber die horizontale Verbreitung simmtlicher europdischer Arten: i-xi,
1-336. Wien: Wilhelm Braumiiller.
HENDERSON, J. R. 1888. Report on the Anomura collected by H.M.S. Challenger during
the years 1873-76. Scientific Results of the Exploratory Voyage of HMS Challenger,
Zoology 27: i-xi, 1-221.
HENDERSON, J. R. 1893. A contribution to Indian carcinology. Transactions of the Linnean
Society of London, 1888-94 (2) 5 (Zoology): 325-458.
HERBST, J. F. W. 1791-96. Versuch einer Naturgeschichte der Krabben und Krebse nebst
einer Systematischen Beschreibung ihrer verschiedenen Arten 2: i-vili, 1-226. Stralsund.
Ho.tuHuls, L. B. 1977. The Mediterranean decapod and stomatopod Crustacea in A. Risso’s
popes works and manuscripts. Annales du Muséum d’Histoire naturelle de Nice 5:
7-88.
Hope, G. 1851. Catalogo dei Crostacei italiani e di Molti Altri del Mediterraneo: 1-48.
Napoli: Stabilimento Tifografico di Fr. Azzolino.
INGLE, R. W. 1985. Northeastern Atlantic and Mediterranean hermit crabs (Crustacea:
Anomura: Paguroidea: Paguridae). I. The genus Pagurus Fabricius, 1775. Journal of
Natural History 19: 745-769.
INGLE, R. W. 1993. Hermit crabs of the northeastern Atlantic Ocean and Mediterranean
Sea. An illustrated key. London, New York: Chapman & Hall.
KENSLEY, B. 1974. Type specimens of Decapoda (Crustacea) in the collections of the South
African Museum. Annals of the South African Museum 66 (4): 55-77.
KENSLEY, B. 1981. On the zoogeography of southern African decapod Crustacea, with a
distributional checklist of the species. Smithsonian Contributions to Zoology 338: 1-64.
KENSLEY, B. & PENRITH, M.-L. 1973. The constitution of the intertidal fauna of rocky
shores of Mocamedes, Southern Angola. Cimbebasia (A) 2 (9): 113-123.
LeacH, W. E. 1815. Malacostraca Podophthalmata Britanniae, or descriptions of such
British species of the Linnean genus Cancer as have their eyes elevated on footstalks.
LEMAITRE, R. 1989. Revision of the genus Parapagurus (Anomura: Paguroidea:
Parapaguridae), including redescriptions of the western Atlantic species. Zoologische
Verhandelingen 253: 1-106.
LEWINSOHN, CH. 1969. Die Anomuren des Roten Meeres (Crustacea Decapoda: Paguridea,
Galatheidea, Hippidea). Zoologische Verhandelingen 104: 1-213
LINNAEUS, C. 1758. Systema naturae per regna tria naturae, secundum classes, ordines,
genera, species, cum characteribus, differentiis, synonymis locis (ed. 10) 1: i-ii, 1-824.
Holmiae.
Lucas, H. 1846. Histoire naturelle des Animaux articulés. I. Crustacés, Arachnides,
Myriapodes et Hexapodes (Exploration scientifique de 1’ Algérie pendant les années 1840,
1841, 1842). Sciences physiques, Zoologie 1: i-xxxv, 1-403.
McLAUGHLIN, P. A. 1974. The hermit crabs (Crustacea Decapoda, Paguridea) of
northwestern North America. Zoologische Verhandelingen 130: 1-396.
McLAUGHLIN, P. A. 198la. Revision of Pylopagurus and Tomopagurus (Crustacea:
Decapoda: Paguridae) with the descriptions of new genera and species: Part I. Ten new
genera of the Paguridae and a redescription of Tomopagurus A. Milne Edwards and
Bouvier. Bulletin of Marine Science 31: 1-30.
McLAUGHLIN, P. A. 1981b. Revision of Pylopagurus and Tomopagurus (Crustacea:
Decapoda: Paguridae) with the descriptions of new genera and species: Part II.
Rhodochirus McLaughlin and Phimochirus McLaughlin. Bulletin of Marine Science 31:
329-365.
McLAUGHLIN, P. A. 1988. The taxonomic position of Pylopagurus liochele Barnard
(Decapoda, Paguroidea, Paguridea). Crustaceana 54: 5-12
HERMIT CRABS FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA 343
McLAUGHLIN, P. A. 1997a. Crustacea Decapoda: hermit crabs of the family Paguridae
from the KARUBAR cruise in Indonesia. Jn: CROSNIER, A. & BOUCHET, P. eds.
Résultats des Campagnes MUSORSTOM, 16. Mémoires du Muséum national d’Histoire
naturelle 172: 433-572.
MCLAUGHLIN, P. A. 1997b. Anomura—hermit crabs. In; RICHMOND, M. ed. A guide to
the seashores of Eastern Africa and Western Indian Ocean islands: 216-221. Sida/
Department for Research Cooperation, SSAREC.
McLAuGHLIN, P. A. & Forest, J. 1997. Crustacea Decapoda: Diacanthurus gen. nov., a
new genus of hermit crabs (Paguridae) with both Recent and fossil representation, and
the descriptions of two new species. Jn: CROSNIER, A. ed. Résultats des Campagnes
MUSORSTOM, 18. Mémoires du Muséum national d’Histoire naturelle 176: 236-259.
MCLAUGHLIN, P. A. & Haic, J. 1989. On the status of Pylopaguropsis zebra Henderson,
P. magnimanus (Henderson), and Galapagurus teevanus Boone, with descriptions of
seven new species of Pylopaguropsis (Crustacea: Anomura: Paguridae). Micronesica
22: 123-171.
MCLAUGHLIN, P. A. & SAINT LAURENT, M. DE. 1998. A new genus and two new species
of hermit crabs of the family Paguridae (Crustacea: Decapoda: Anomura). Proceedings
of the Biological Society of Washington 111: 156-187.
MILNE Epwarps, A. & Bouvier, E. L. 1892. Observations préliminaires sur les paguriens
recueillis par les expéditions du Travailleur et du Talisman. Annales des Sciences
Naturelles, Zoologie et Paléontologie (7) 13: 185-226.
MILNE EDwarps, A. & BouvigeR, E. L. 1900. Crustacés Décapodes. I. Brachyures et
Anomoures. Expéditions scientifiques du Travailleur et du Talisman pendant les années
1880, 1881, 1882, 1883: 1-396. Paris.
MILNE EpwarpDs, H. 1836. Observations zoologiques sur les Pagures et description d’un
nouveau genre de la tribu des Paguriens. Annales des Sciences Naturelle Zoologie, Paris
(2) 6: 257-288.
MIYAKE, S. 1978. The crustacean Anomura of Sagami Bay: 1-200 (English), 1-161
(Japanese). Tokyo: Hoikusha Publishing Co.
NosiL!, G. 1906. Faune carcinologique de la Mer Rouge. Décapodes et Stomatopodes.
Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Zoologie, Paris (9) 4: 1-347.
Nosre, A. 1931. Crustdceos Decdpodes e Stomatépodes marinhos de Portugal: 1-307.
Porto, Portugal: Instituto de Zoologia de Universidade do Porto.
ODHNER, T. 1923. Marine Crustacea Podophthalmata aus Angola und Siidafrika gesammelt
1 H. Skoog 1912. Meddelanden fran Goteborgs Musei Zoologiska Avdelning 31:
-37.
PAUL’SON, O. 1875. Izsledovaniya rakoobraznykh krasnago morya $ zametkami otnositel’no
rakoobraznykh drugikh morei. Chast’ 1. Podophthalmata i Edriophthalmata (Cumacea):
i-xiv, 1-144. Kiev: S.V. Kul’zhenko.
PAUL’SON, O. 1961. Studies on Crustacea of the Red Sea with notes regarding other seas.
Podophthalmata and Edriophthalmata (Cumacea): vi, 1-143. Jerusalem: Israel Program
for Scientific Translations, 1961, National Science Foundation and Smithsonian
Institution.
Pesta, A. 1918. Die Decapodenfauna der Adria: i-x, 1-492. Franz Deuticke.
RAMADAN, M. M. 1936. Report on a collection of Stomatopoda and Decapoda from
Ghardaqa, Red Sea. Bulletin for the Faculty of Science, Egypt University 5: 1-43.
RIDDELL, W. 1911. The Anomura. Reports on the marine biology of the Sudanese Red Sea,
from collections made by Cyril Crossland. XVII. Journal of the Linnean Society,
London (Zoology) 31: 260-264.
Risso, A. 1816. Histoire Naturelle des Crustacés des Environs de Nice.
Risso, A. 1827. Histoire naturelle des principales productions de |l’Europe méridionale et
particuliérement de celles des environs de Nice et des Alpes Maritimes 5: i-vi, 1-403.
Risso, A. 1844. Nouveau guide du voyageur dans Nice et notices sur l’histoire civile et
naturelle de cette ville. ed. 2, Crustacés: 93-99.
ROSSIGNOL, M. 1962. Catalogue des Crustacés Décapodes Brachyoures, Anomoures et
Macroures littoraux en collection au Centre d’Océanographie de Pointe-Noire.
O.R.S.T.O.M., Travaux du Centre océanographique de Pointe-Noire 2 (5): 111-138.
344 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Roux, P. 1828-1830. Crustacés de la Méditerranée et de son littoral, décrits et
lithographiés: iv + 176 unnumbered pages; published in 9 parts. Paris & Marseille.
SANDBERG, L. & MCLAUGHLIN, P. A. 1998. Crustacea, Decapoda, Paguridae. Marine
Invertebrates of Scandinavia 10: 1-113.
SANKOLLI, K. N. 1961. On a new species of hermit crab Pagurus kulkarnii sp. nov.
(Anomura: Paguridae). Journal of the Zoological Society of India 13 (2): 136-142.
SAROJINI, R. & NAGABHUSHANAM, R. 1972. Pagurid crabs (Decapoda, Anomura) from
Waltair coast. Records of the Zoological Survey of India 66: 249-272.
Sars, G. O. 1890. Bidrag til Kundskaben om Decapodernes Forvandlinger. II. Lithodes -
Eupagurus - Spiropagurus - Galathodes - Galathea - Munida - Porcellana -
(Nephrops). Archiv for Mathematik og Naturvidenskab. 1888: 133-201.
SELBIE, C. M. 1921. The Decapoda Reptantia of the coasts of Ireland. II. Paguridea.
Scientific Investigations, Department of Agriculture and Technical Instruction for Ireland
1: 1-68
SOUTHWELL, T. 1906. Report on the Anomura collected by Professor Herdman, at Ceylon,
in 1902. In: HERDMAN, W. A. Report to the government of Ceylon on the pearl oyster
jisheries of the Gulf of Manaar, with supplementary reports upon the marine biology of
Ceylon, by other naturalists, Part V: 211-224. London: Royal Society.
SOUTHWELL, T. 1910. Report on certain scientific work done on the Ceylon pearl banks
during the year 1909. No. 9. Notes on the habitaculum of two species of pagurids; a
description of one new species; and a list of the Anomura recorded to date from Ceylon
waters. Ceylon Marine Biological Reports 1910 (4): 179-184.
STEBBING, T. R. R. 1910. General catalogue of South African Crustacea (Part V. of S.A.
Crustacea, for the Marine Investigations in South Africa). Annals of the South African
Museum 6: 281-593.
STEBBING, T. R. R. 1920. South African Crustacea (Part X of S.A. Crustacea, for the
Marine Investigations in South Africa). Annals of the South African Museum 17:
231-272.
STEBBING, T. R. R. 1924. South African Crustacea (Part XII of S. A. Crustacea, for the
Marine Investigations in South Africa). Annals of the South African Museum 19:
235-250.
STIMPSON, W. 1858. Prodromus descriptionis animalium evertebratorum, quae in
expeditione ad oceanum Pacificum septentrionalem, a Republica Federate missa,
Cadwaldaro Ringgold et Johanne Rodgers ducibus, obseravit et descripsit. VII. (Preprint
(December 1858) from) Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia
1858: 225-252.
SWAMMERDAM, J. 1737. Biblia Naturae, sive Historia Insectorum, in Classes certas
redacta, nec non Exemplis, et Anatomico variorum Animalculorum examine, aeneisque
Tabulis illustrata. Insertis numerosis Rariorum Naturae Observationibus. Bybel der
Natuure. Of Historie der Insecten tot zeekere Zoorten gebracht, door Voorbeelden,
ontleedkundige Onderzoekingen van velerhands kleine Gediertens, als ook door kunstige
kopere Plaaten opgeheldert, Verrijkt met ontelbaare Waarnemingen van nooit ontdekte
Zelldzaamheden in de Natuur 1: 550. Leiden.
TERAO, A. 1913. A catalogue of hermit-crabs found in Japan (Paguridea excluding
Lithodidae), with descriptions of four new species. Annotationes Zoologicae Japonenses
8 (2): 355-391.
THOMPSON, E. F. 1943. Paguridae and Coenobitidae. In: The John Murray Expedition
1933-34, Scientific Reports 7 (5): 411-426.
THOMPSON, W. 1844. Report on the fauna of Ireland. Division Invertebrata. Drawn up at
the request of the British Association. British Association for the Advancement of
Science 1843: 245-291.
ZARIQUIEY ALVAREZ, R. 1946. Crustaceos Decdpodos Mediterréneos. IJnstituto Espanol de
Estudios Mediterrdneos 2: 1-181.
ZARIQUIEY ALVAREZ, R. 1968. Crustéceos Decdpodos Ibéricos. Investigacién Pesquera 32:
i-vi, 1-510.
sch
9
"a"
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed
by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov.,
etc. The name of the taxon should be followed, without intervening punctuation, by the author’s name
(not abbreviated) and the year of publication; a comma must separate author’s name and year. The
author’s name and date must be placed in parentheses if a species or subspecies is transferred from its
original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must be separated from the
scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be either according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order,
with all references to that name following in chronological order (see example 1), or according to
chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the year is placed in front of each entry, and the
synonym repeated in full for each entry (see example 2). The author should adopt one style or the
other throughout a paper.
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Example 1
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: SO.
Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871, pl. 2 (fig. 8a-b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above ir ps comma separates author’s name and year; semicolon separates more than
one reference by the same author; full stop separates references by different authors; figures of plates are enclosed in
parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures; dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers.
Example 2
1845 Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, p. 37.
1856 Leda plicifera A. Adams, p. 50.
1859 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, p. 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73).
1861 Nucula largillierti Philippi, p. 87.
1871 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould): Sowerby, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
1950 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nickles, p. 163, fig. 301.
1955 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, p. 110.
1964 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Barnard, p. 234, figs 8-9.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens
mentioned in the original description are to be designated allotype (if applicable) and/or paratypes;
additional material not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data
(registration number, depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype
and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype. SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s
Beach, Port Elizabeth (33°51°S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text, e.g. ‘. . . the Figure depicting
C. namacolus .. .’, or‘. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10). . .’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded by initials or full
names: e.g. Du Toit, but A. L. du Toit; Von Huene, but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary. Reference to the author should
preferably be expressed in the third person. Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except
when forming part of the title of a book or article, e.g. ‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII.
Amphipoda.’. A specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its
abbreviation to initial capital letter (except at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph), provided the
same generic name is used consecutively. The name of new genus or species should not be included
in the title; it should be included in the abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet
the requirements of Biological Abstracts.
8. GENERAL. Once referees’ reports have been received by the editor, these will be discussed by the
editorial committee. If the paper is considered acceptable after minor or major revision, the reports
will be forwarded to the author who must then thoroughly revise in accordance with the referees’
Suggestions. Final acceptance of the revised manuscript will be considered by the editorial committee.
In the case of major revision being necessary, the committee reserves the right to consult one or more
referees regarding the revised manuscript.
PATSY A. MCLAUGHLIN
&
JACQUES FOREST
HERMIT CRABS OF THE GENUS
PAGURUS FABRICIUS (CRUSTACEA,
DECAPODA, PAGURIDAE
FROM SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AFRICA
|
VOLUME 105 PART 8 APRIL 1999 ISSN 0303-2515
>=
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of: title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of
new genera or species; Author’s(s’) name(s); address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out);
number of illustrations and tables
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary (if paper is lengthy)
(g) Acknowledgments
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
3. MANUSCRIPT should be typed, double spaced with adequate margins. Four copies should be
provided. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of figure captions should be
typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are centred small capitals;
second subheadings are shouldered small capitals; third subheadings are shouldered italics; fourth sub-
headings are indented, shouldered italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration
(never roman numerals) of headings and abbreviations. Footnotes should be avoided unless they are
short and essential. All generic and specific names should be underlined or italicized.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12.5 x 18.5 cm (19.5 cm including
caption); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated in pencil on the reverse of the
figure; originals larger than 36 x 48 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular
in shape and final size. The size of illustrated objects may be indicated by a metric scale on the figure
(if appropriate), or the enlargement or reduction should be given in the caption; if the latter, then the
final reduction or enlargement should be taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not
printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items
of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; labelling on all figures should be non-serif
lettering (e.g. Helvetica, Univers) of uniform style, in lower-case whenever possible, and of appropri-
ate size taking into account the final size. The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil
on the back of each illustration, together with an indication of the desired reduction or enlargement.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the
paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) described...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) described. . .’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma i pee name and year; pagination indicated by colon, not p. (except in synonymies, see
example 2); names of joint authors connected by ampersand; ef al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names
of all authors given in list of references.
(b)Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within
each name, with suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in
that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 1969b) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal articles give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scientific periodicals.
4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses (if pagination
discontinuous), pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88:
100-140.
FISCHER, P. H., DUVAL, M. & RAFFY, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines.
Archives de zoologie expérimentale et générale 74: 627-634. d
KOHN, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Annals and Magazine of Natural History (13) 2: 309-320. “
KOMN, A. J. 1960b. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bulletin of the Bingham Qceanographic Collection, Yale University 17 (4): 1-51. ;
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungreise im westlichen und zentralen Sild Afrika ausgefuhrt in den
Jahren 1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16:
269-270.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 105 Band
April 1999 April
Part 8 Deel
THE TERRESTRIAL AMPHIPODS
(CRUSTACEA, AMPHIPODA)
OF SOUTH AFRICA
By
CHARLES L. GRIFFITHS
Cape Town Kaapstad
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles,
revisions and review articles in anthropology, archaeology, palaeontology,
geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology, and marine and freshwater
biology.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in
part, with material from the collections of the South African Museum. Other
contributions are also considered provided at least one of the authors is a staff
member of the Museum. In the case of descriptions of new species not already
part of the Museum's collections, the holotype and, if possible, part of the
paratype series must be deposited in the South African Museum. Authors whose
contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Committee prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper
accepted is published as a separate part at irregular intervals as material becomes
available; parts are priced individually.
Editorial committee
Dr P. A. Hulley (Chairman) Dr H. C. Klinger Elizabeth Louw (Editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000 South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to Administration.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://nv1.samuseum.ac.za/collect/infosci/pub/prclist.htm
OUT OF PRINT
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 4(1), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9), 6(1, 2, t.-p.i.),
7(1-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3), 11(1-2, 5, 7, t.-p.i.), 14(1-3), 15(4-5),
24(2, 5), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 45(1), 49(1, 2), 67(5, 11), 84(2)
ISBN 0 86813 175 X
D7245
Printed in South Africa by
The Rustica Press, Old Mill Road,
Ndabeni, Western Cape
THE TERRESTRIAL AMPHIPODS (CRUSTACEA: AMPHIPODA)
OF SOUTH AFRICA
By
CHARLES L. GRIFFITHS
Zoology Department, University of Cape Town, Rondebosch, South Africa
(With 7 figures)
[MS accepted 17 February 1999]
ABSTRACT
A re-examination of all available terrestrial amphipod material from South Africa has
resulted in the recognition of seven valid species. Four of these, Talitriator calva,
T. cylindripes, T. eastwoodae and T. setosa were previously formae of Talitriator (formerly
Talitroides) eastwoodae that have been raised to species rank elsewhere, but without being
adequately diagnosed or figured. A fifth such species, Talitriator macronyx, is considered
invalid and is here synonymized with T. setosa. Talitriator africana, which was first
described over a century ago but has subsequently been considered either a synonym of
T. eastwoodae or a species inquirenda, is re-erected. The remaining two taxa, Talitroides
alluaudi and T. topitotum are introduced forms, both of which have been widely dispersed
around the world, but are here recorded for the first time from South Africa. A brief
diagnosis, illustrations and distribution data are provided for each of the species, and a key to
the terrestrial amphipod fauna of the region is presented.
CONTENTS
PAGE
SIN PINS IPE ey alesis oe kine sicicinswse Sako 8 darala alas vo maa weaatwesisamearemearenegomenaoeate sa aermener 345
NNER PORE SACRO S Be ela o08 0 5G cso ate. oie wae naa di fne oe Cannas jatar anne tee eeee ser aucune ter 347
MUMS eo 2 22 is Sai Jnas op a teciamiced #6 0as'edtanies eacice ve dmdee fasthe seme suet cae ee ee 347
Besmeunercmesitial amphipods of South Africa .......6.606. ies sececsesceeecenvecsstouss 347
DINE MRM TACT Ee SAR ik Sak stcie si w'n side Sein ae awe Gee ae wise HER mee REE Blame Retna Oo 361
ae aN 22 Sk Oe eae chk A Winall Sawaldvoulonetha hacen ee tacoma Ee cena 361
INTRODUCTION
Amphipods are a primarily aquatic group, and only one family, the
Talitridae, has successfully invaded the terrestrial environment. The talitrids
have in fact colonized a broader variety of habitats than any other amphipod
family and span both coastal marine and freshwater environments, in addition to
terrestrial ones. In the past some confusion has surrounded the use of the term
‘terrestrial’ as applied to talitrid amphipods and this has prompted the adoption
of a more specific terminology by Bousfield (1984) and Friend & Richardson
345
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 105 (8), 1999: 345-362, 7 figs.
346 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(1986). These authors recognize four ecological groupings, as follows:
(a) sandhoppers—burrowing forms found in the intertidal and supralittoral zones
of sandy beaches; (b) beachfleas—non-burrowing species associated with algae
on rocky shores or coastal marine habitats; (c) palustrid talitrids—which are
semi-aquatic in salt marshes, mangroves and estuarine habitats; and (d) land-
hoppers—which occur mostly in forest litter and live independent of water
bodies. It is only this last, truly terrestrial group that is considered here, the
remaining groups having been included in a review of the southern African
marine Amphipoda by Griffiths (1976).
Landhoppers are largely nocturnal, cryptic residents of the forest floor in the
Southern Hemisphere and tropics, where they feed on angiosperm leaves and
detritus. A few have colonized specialized habitats above ground, or live in
moist grasslands and caves, and at least one has taken to burrowing in the soil
(Friend & Richardson 1986). Most species are local endemics, although a few
so-called ‘tramp’ species have been widely dispersed by man (Bousfield 1984).
The taxonomic history of the South African terrestrial amphipod fauna is
a long and confusing one. The first species recorded from the region was Talor-
chestia? africana, described by Bate (1862) from a single female collected in
Port Natal (= Durban). Although Stebbing (1910) included this species in his
Catalogue of South African Crustacea, Methuen (1913) made no mention of
Bate’s paper when describing a second terrestrial species, Talitriator east-
woodae, from the Northern Transvaal. This was possibly because Methuen
was under the mistaken impression that his species was aquatic, rather than
terrestrial, in its habits. Barnard (1916) expanded on Methuen’s description of
Talitriator eastwoodae, recognized that it is in fact a terrestrial form, and
allocated additional material to the species from various sites around South
Africa. Shortly thereafter Stebbing (1917) synonymized Methuen’s species with
Bate’s under the earlier name Talitriator africanus (Bate).
In a later paper, Barnard (1940) accepted Schellenberg’s (1934) recommen-
dation that Talitriator should fall into synonymy with Talitroides, but rejected
Stebbing’s synonymy of Talitroides eastwoodae with T. africanus—largely on
the basis of differences in the degree of expansion of article 5 of gnathopod 1,
which is distinctly lobed in eastwoodae, but distinctly linear in Bate’s figure of
africanus. He also recognized, but only very briefly characterized, five distinct
formae of Talitroides eastwoodae, these being based largely on the relative
lengths of antenna 1 and 2, the form of gnathopod 1, and the structure of the
pleopods. Finally, Bousfield (1984) elevated each of Barnard’s formae to full
specific status within the genus Talitriator, but without providing any additional
descriptions or figures. The departure point from which this study develops is
thus one in which the recognized terrestrial amphipod fauna of the region
consists of five species of Talitriator, of which only one, T. eastwoodae, has
ever been adequately described or illustrated. One additional form, 7. africana,
is of dubious status and is presently a species inquirenda.
The principal aims of this paper are to clarify the taxonomic status of each
of the terrestrial amphipods previously reported from South Africa, to identify
any new or unrecorded forms, to establish the distribution patterns of the
species, and to provide diagnoses and illustrations of the key features of each.
This information is also used to produce a key to the regional fauna.
TERRESTRIAL AMPHIPODS OF SOUTH AFRICA 347
MATERIALS AND METHODS
A written appeal for terrestrial amphipod material was sent to all natural
history museums in South Africa and a similar notice circulated via e-mail to
members of the Zoological Society of southern Africa, The principal collections
eventually examined were those of the South African Museum, the Transvaal
Museum and the Natal Museum—these being the main institutions in the region
that maintain wet invertebrate collections. Additional material was collected by
the author, or contributed by individual researchers who responded to the appeal
for specimens. These additional collections have been deposited in the South
African Museum, Cape Town. Drawings were done with the aid of a camera
lucida attached to a Wild stereo microscope and a Nikon compound microscope.
TAXONOMY
KEY TO THE TERRESTRIAL AMPHIPODS OF SOUTH AFRICA
1A. Pleopod 3 greatly reduced, less than half as long as pleopods 1 and 2 and
either lacking rami, or with the single (inner) ramus reduced to a one-
aPMITEMECARVGSILO CN TQIMITOIGES) odio... 50 va co' eos ccd eee saeeemoe me eek soe aa ee 2
1B. Pleopod 3 not greatly reduced, more than half as long as pleopods 1 and 2
aaaEismmetiv DiramOus (TaliTialor) -: ....2...006csedeeesenase cl eccoe bens cebedease 3
2A. Pleopod 3 a minute unsegmented vestige; antenna 2 about 25 per cent body
length, flagellum equal to peduncle (Fig. 1A, E); adult body length not
Seenrata re MEER SENITILY Sie ccc ss cad owins 2 6 nies s wc gjhwcasdedadmete eens Talitroides alluaudi
2B. Pleopod 3 a short, slender peduncle with a single, one-segmented inner
ramus; antenna 2 about half body length, flagellum 1.5 times length of
feauncleric. 1G, K); adult body lengthup to 13 mm ..............25...0.00-.
Go. o cso aleiciciass ssiswisn'e s wannae eSoosea Cow ease ee Talitroides topitotum
3A. Antenna | extending beyond mid-point of article 5 of antenna 2; pleopods
long and slender (Figs 2, 5); distribution mostly east of 26°E (c. Port
Rene TINE cnc SOS Ott ds sn niclann sais hats mu wea 4 opal eneia Semone dems arti 4
3B. Antenna 1 not extending as far as mid-point of article 5-of antenna 2;
pleopods short and stout (Figs 3, 4, 6); distribution mostly west of 26°E
PME HEPA ETI) Ps osc hs cscs ee een oe ek Cts Ses ee te eee neces 5
4A. Article 6 of gnathopod 1 with distinct palm; outer margins of peduncles of
pleopods setose throughout; rami of pleopods 1 and 2 equal; coxal gills of
pereopods 3-5 with branched, three-digitate posterior processes (Fig. 5) ..
Eo oc laiscs o ttadis gs SarenlSlo geese aiels sl ae cleaceAaeyeias Talitriator eastwoodae
4B. Article 6 of gnathopod 1 tapering, without palm; outer margins of
peduncles of pleopods normally setose only distally; rami of pleopods
unequal, outer 80 per cent length of inner; coxal gills of pereopods 3-5
naumestmple posterior lobes (Fig: 2). ......2.62-.ec0s0--0- Talitriator africana
SA. Article 5 of gnathopod 1 not lobed posteriorly; article 6 tapering distally,
without distinct palm, antenna 2 about half body length, pereopod 7
extending well beyond tip of uropods (Fig. 4) ........ Talitriator cylindripes
348 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SB. Article 5 of gnathopod 1 distinctly lobed posteriorly, article 6 rectangular,
with distinct palm, antennae usually one-third or less body length,
pereopod 7 not extending well beyond tip of uropods (Figs 3, 6) .......... 6
6A. Pleopod 1 shorter than 2 or 3, peduncles of pleopods 2 and 3 (and
sometimes 1) setose along outer margins, rami subequal in length (Fig. 6)
sis dled kasi Salta re RIS ele SS ANE Raye a eee ee i Na aa Talitriator setosa
6B. Pleopod 1 longer than 2 or 3, peduncles of pleopods not setose, rami
globular in appearance, the inner in each case considerably the shorter,
50-70 per cent length of outer (Fig. 3) ...................000. Talitriator calva
Talitroides Willem, 1898
This genus currently comprises just two species, Talitroides alluaudi and
T. topitotum. Both are unusual amongst terrestrial amphipods in that they have
been widely dispersed by man, undoubtably along with soil and leaf mould
carried with exotic plants. Indeed their dispersal has been so widespread that it
has become difficult to determine where the species originated. In Hawaii
Talitroides spp. have largely displaced native species and may pose a threat to
their future survival (Friend & Lam 1985), but as yet neither species has been
recorded outside of urban areas in South Africa.
Both Talitroides species are easily distinguished from Talitriator spp.
(below) by the reduced form of their pleopod 3.
Talitroides alluaudi (Chevreux, 1896)
Fig. 1A-F
Talitrus Alluaudi Chevreux, 1896: 112, figs 1-4. Chevreux & Fage, 1925, figs 280-281.
Talitroides alluaudi: Morino & Ortal, 1993: 332-338, figs 1-2. Stock & Biernbaum, 1994:
809.
Distribution
Recorded only from compost heaps in the nursery of the University of Cape
Town and suburban gardens in the nearby suburb of Claremont.
Diagnosis
At a maximum length of only 5-6 mm T. alluaudi is smaller than any other
South African landhopper. The species is best recognized by its minute,
unsegmented pleopod 3 and the greatly reduced, 1-3 articulate inner rami of
pleopods 1-2. Both antennae and pereopod 7 are also unusually short, antenna 1
being only 25 per cent of body length (as compared to 50 per cent in
T. topitotum).
Remarks
Talitroides alluaudi was originally described from material collected in Paris
(where it was certainly introduced), and from the Seychelles. Present distri-
bution records include the Seychelles, Madagascar, Australia, various Atlantic
TERRESTRIAL AMPHIPODS OF SOUTH AFRICA
349
2.
a
aS SS
Lp 2S wy.
SoS = = oS eo ee
ay "
aA
Fig. 1. A-F. Talitroides alluaudi (Chevreux, 1896), male, 5 mm, UCT gardens. A. Lateral
aspect. B. Base of pereopod 6 showing gill.
C-E. Pleopods 1, 2, 3. F. Telson.
G-L. Talitroides topitotum (Burt, 1934), male, 11 mm, Pinelands, Cape Town. G. Lateral
view. H. Base of pereopod 6 showing gill. I-K. Pleopods 1, 2, 3
. L. Telson.
350 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and Pacific islands, the USA, and most European countries (Friend & Richard-
son 1986), as well as Israel (Morina & Ortal 1993) and now South Africa. The
present material agrees closely with the detailed description given in Morino &
Ortal (1993).
Talitroides topitotum (Burt, 1934)
Fig. 1G-L
Talitrus (Talitropsis) topitotum Burt, 1934: 184-190, pls 12-13, text-fig. 1.
Talitrus sylvaticus (non Haswell, 1880): Shoemaker, 1936: 60-64, figs 1-2.
Talitroides topitotum: Friend & Lam, 1985: 27-33, figs 1-2.
Distribution
Recorded only from a suburban garden in Pinelands, Cape Town, and the
gardens of the University of Pretoria.
Diagnosis
Most easily distinguished from T. alluaudi (above) by the much larger size
of up to 13 mm body length, the longer antenna 2, which is about 45 per cent of
body length, and the more elongate pleopod 3, which retains minute single-
segmented vestigial rami.
Remarks :
Like T. alluaudi, T. topitotum is a ‘tramp’ species, which has been widely
dispersed by man. The species was originally described by Burt (1934) from
specimens found under a packing case in a garage in Ceylon (Sri-Lanka).
Subsequent records include Southern India, Australia, various Indian,
Pacific and Atlantic ocean islands, Brazil, the USA, and glasshouses in Europe
(Friend & Richardson 1986). This is the first record from Africa. The
distribution is now so widespread that it is difficult to determine where the
species originated.
The present material corresponds closely to the descriptions given by
Shoemaker (1936), who incorrectly identified his material as Talitrus sylvaticus,
and by Friend & Lam (1985). Although Shoemaker reported the species as
occasionally reaching pest densities in Californian gardens, introduced
landhoppers are not normally considered as problem animals, since they are
decomposers of dead organic material and do not feed on the living tissues of
plants.
Talitriator Methuen, 1913
As currently defined this genus is endemic to southern Africa and the only
Species are those detailed below. The author has received unconfirmed
reports of terrestrial amphipods occurring north into Zimbabwe, but has to date
not been able to obtain specimens to confirm the identity of the species
concerned.
TERRESTRIAL AMPHIPODS OF SOUTH AFRICA 351
Talitriator africana (Bate, 1862)
Fig. 2
Talorchestia? Africana Bate, 1862: 15-16, pl. 2 (fig. 6). Stebbing, 1910: 459.
Talitriator africanus: Stebbing, 1917: 330-331 (partim). ;
Talitroides eastwoodae forma typica: Barnard, 1940: 465-467 (partim).
Distribution
Widespread from Port Elizabeth along a broad coastal strip northwards and
eastwards to northern KwaZulu-Natal and then inland through Swaziland into
Mpumalanga (formerly Eastern Transvaal) (Fig. 7).
Diagnosis
Antenna 1 relatively elongate, reaching almost to tip of article 5 of
antenna 2; antenna 2 about one-third body length. Article 5 of gnathopod 1
moderately lobed posteriorly, length about twice width; article 6 elongate,
tapering distally, without a distinct palm; article 6 of gnathopod 2 broadly
rounded distally. Pereopods relatively short, tip of pereopod 7 barely extending
to end of body. Pleopods slender and elongate; pleopod 2 slightly longer
(105 per cent) than 1, pleopod 3 65 per cent length of 1; peduncles slender,
4-6 times longer than wide, outer margins typically setose only along distal half
(rarely setose along whole margin); inner rami of pleopods 1 and 2 equal to
peduncle; outer rami 80 per cent length of inner; pleopod 3 with outer ramus
75 per cent and inner ramus 60 per cent length of peduncle. Telson usually with
four strong lateral and one terminal spine on each lobe (lateral spines reduced to
one or absent in some Eastern Cape and Mpumalanga specimens). Coxal gills
relatively simple, that of gnathopod 2 smooth-edged, with a long upward-lobed
anterior process, of pereopods 3 and 4 smaller and postero-ventrally produced
into a pointed lobe, of pereopod 5 the smallest and a simple twisted lobe, of
pereopod 6 much larger, with an oval basal lobe and larger flat plate.
Remarks
Bate’s original (1862) description of this species from Port Natal (Durban) is
the first record of a terrestrial amphipod from South Africa. However, neither
Methuen (1913), in his description of T. eastwoodae, nor Barnard (1916),
referred to Bate’s species, although it had been listed by Stebbing (1910).
Stebbing (1917) subsequently synonymized the two forms—africana taking
precedence. Barnard (1940) pointed out inconsistencies between the descriptions
of T. africana and T. eastwoodae—principally as regards the shape of article 5
of gnathopod 1, but—unable to examine material from the type locality—
nevertheless retained their synonymy under the name 7. eastwoodae forma
typica.
Based on examination of a wide range of material, including the co-types of
T. eastwoodae held by the South African Museum, it is now clear that two
distinct species are represented. These are Methuen’s T. eastwoodae, which is
the dominant talitrid in the inland regions of KwaZulu-Natal and the former
Transvaal, and Bate’s T. africana, which is formally re-erected here and is the
352 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 2. Talitriator africana (Bate, 1862), female, 14 mm, Ngome State Forest. A. Lateral
aspect. B-F. Coxal gills of gnathopod 2 and pereopods 3, 4, 5, 6. G. Gnathopod 1 with
articles 5-7 enlarged. I. Gnathopod 2. J-L. Pleopods 1, 2, 3. M. Uropod 3. N. Telson.
TERRESTRIAL AMPHIPODS OF SOUTH AFRICA 353
most common terrestrial amphipod in the coastal areas of KwaZulu-Natal and
the Eastern Cape. Talitriator africana is most easily distinguished from T. east-
woodae by the absence of a palm on article 6 of gnathopod 1 and the unequal
rami of pleopods 1-3.
The species shows some local variation, notably in the setation of the
peduncles of the pleopods, which is generally restricted to the distal half, but
rarely extends over the full length. In some samples towards the fringes of the
distribution range the lateral spines on the telson are also absent or reduced to
one.
Talitriator calva (Barnard, 1940)
Fig. 3
Talitroides eastwoodae forma calva Barnard, 1940: 468.
Talitriator calva: Bousfield, 1984: 206, 209.
Distribution
From Cape Town eastwards along a coastal belt to Grahamstown in the
Eastern Cape Province (Fig. 7).
Diagnosis
Antenna 1 short, article 1 of peduncle wider than long, flagellum not
extending more than half way along article 5 of antenna 2. Antenna 2 typically
only about one-third body length (longer to the east). Article 5 of gnathopod 1
lobed posteriorly, twice as long as wide, article 6 widest at base and tapering
distally, with distinct palm. Pleopods progressively decreasing in length, the
second 90 per cent and the third 80 per cent as long as the first. Peduncles of
pleopods not setose, rami unjointed, but incisions marking the limits of the
segments deep, such that the rami appear as a series of subglobose segments;
inner ramus of each pair considerably the shorter, that of pleopod 1 70 per cent,
of pleopod 2 60 per cent and of pleopod 3 50 per cent length of outer ramus.
Coxal gill on gnathopod 2 a simple forward-directed lobe, of pereopods 3-5 a
folded oval plate and of pereopod 6 a complex structure of several elongate
lobes. Telson usually with a single apical spine, but one or two lateral spines
present in some Eastern Cape samples.
Remarks
In his brief description, Barnard (1940) implied, by his comparison with
T. setosa, that the rami of the pleopods in this form are subequal. This is not the
case, although the differences in the relative lengths of the rami in specimens to
the east of the range are less marked than depicted here. The absence of setae
on the peduncles of all the pleopods and their globular, unsegmented rami are
characteristic of the species. Samples from the Eastern Cape have longer
antenna 2 (up to 25 flagellar segments) and pereopods and have one or two
lateral spines on the telson.
354 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
U QA
Re FEN an a) | \ iN
Fig. 3. Talitriator calva (Barnard, 1940), male, 9 mm, Onrustriver. A. Lateral aspect.
B-F. Coxal gills of gnathopod 2 and pereopods 3, 4, 5, 6. G. Gnathopod 1 with articles 5-7
enlarged. I. Gnathopod 2. J-L. Pleopods 1, 2, 3. M. Uropod 3. N. Telson.
TERRESTRIAL AMPHIPODS OF SOUTH AFRICA 355
Talitriator cylindripes (Barnard, 1940)
Fig. 4
Talitroides eastwoodae forma cylindripes Barnard, 1940: 467, fig. 27e-h.
Talitriator cylindripes: Bousfield, 1984: 207, 209.
Talitriator insularis Stock & Biernbaum, 1994: 800-808, figs 2-6.
Distribution
From Table Mountain and the Cape Peninsula eastwards to Hermanus and
north to Picketberg (Fig. 7).
Diagnosis
Antenna 1 short, reaching less than half way along article 5 of antenna 2;
antenna 2 relatively elongate, about half as long as body and with flagellum of
up to 28 segments. Article 5 of gnathopod 1 parallel-sided, not lobed pos-
teriorly, length 3 times width; article 6 evenly tapering, palm very poorly
developed. Article 6 of gnathopod 2 produced into a long, slightly upturned,
rugose lobe. Pereopods elongate, the sixth and seventh reaching well beyond
tips of uropods. Coxa 4 with a characteristic long, down-turned posterior tooth.
Coxal gill of gnathopod 2 with large, forward-projecting lobe, of pereopods 3-5
smaller and bilobed, of pereopod 6 large and complex with crenulate margin
posteriorly. Pleopods relatively short and stout, peduncles setose only along
distal margin, peduncle of pleopod 1 expanded distally, rami swollen proximally
and unequal, the inner two-thirds as long as the outer. Pleopods 2 and 3
progressively shorter, 70 per cent and 60 per cent length of pleopod 1 respect-
ively, inner rami half as long as outer, not visibly segmented. Each lobe of
telson with 2-3 dorsal and a single apical spine.
Remarks
Although originally described as a form of T. eastwoodae, this taxon clearly
merits specific status, as recommended by Bousfield (1984). Characteristic
features include the linear article 5 and long tapering article 6 of. gnathopod 1,
long upturned tip to article 6 of gnathopod 2 and unique form of the pleopods.
Talitriator insularis, as described from Ascension and Saint Helena islands
by Stock & Biernbaum (1994), is clearly synonymous with T. cylindripes. Stock
& Biernbaum indeed suspected that their species had been introduced from
South Africa, but were misled into describing it as new by the poor quality of
the original illustrations in Barnard (1940), which exaggerate the length and
slenderness of articles 5 and 6 of gnathopod 1 in T. cylindripes.
Talitriator eastwoodae Methuen, 1913
Fig: 5
Talitriator eastwoodae Methuen, 1913: 109-112, pl. 10-22. Barnard, 1916: 223-224
(partim). Bousfield, 1984: 206, 209.
Talitroides eastwoodae forma typica Barnard, 1940: 465-467 (partim), fig. 27a-d.
356 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 4. Talitriator cylindripes (Barnard, 1940), male, 12 mm, Constantia, Cape Town.
A. Lateral view. B-F. Coxal gills of gnathopod 2 and pereopods 3, 4, 5, 6.
G. Gnathopod 1 with articles 5-7 enlarged. I. Gnathopod 2. J-L. Pleopods 1, 2, 3.
M. Uropod 3. N. Telson.
TERRESTRIAL AMPHIPODS OF SOUTH AFRICA 357
Fig. 5. Talitriator eastwoodae Methuen 1913, male, 7 mm, Soutpansberg. A. Lateral
view. B-F. Coxal gills of gnathopod 2 and pereopods 3, 4, 5, 6. G. Gnathopod 1 with
articles 5-7 enlarged. I. Gnathopod 2. J-L. Pleopods 1, 2, 3. M. Uropod 3. N. Telson.
358 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Distribution
In a broad band from southern KwaZulu-Natal northwards into Northern
Province, but well inland from the coast (Fig. 7).
Diagnosis
Antenna 1 relatively elongate, extending almost to tip of article 5 of
antenna 2; antenna 2 about one-third body length. Article 5 of gnathopod 2
distinctly and broadly lobed posteriorly, length twice width, article 6 relatively
short, with distinct palm. Pleopods relatively elongate, their peduncles slender,
linear and at least four times as long as broad, outer margins setose throughout.
Pleopods 1 and 2 equal in length, pleopod 3 only 65 per cent as long. Rami
of pleopods 1 and 2 equal, but outer ramus of pleopod 3 only 70 per cent
length of inner. Each lobe of telson with a single lateral and one strong
terminal spine. Coxal gills of pereopods 3-5 each with a three-digitate posterior
lobe.
Remarks
This species was accurately described by Methuen (1913), but Barnard
(1916) subsequently (and incorrectly) referred all other landhopper material
from South Africa to this species. In 1940, he subdivided this material into a
series of recognized forms, allocating all specimens collected east of 26°E to his
forma typica. These forms were raised to species rank by Bousfield (1984). In
the present analysis, two species are recognized from the material formerly
allocated to T. eastwoodae forma typica—Methuen’s original Talitriator
eastwoodae and Bate’s long-obscure T. africana, which is re-erected for
specimens mainly from the KwaZulu-Natal region.
Talitriator eastwoodae can be distinguished from all species found in
the western regions of South Africa by its longer antenna 1 and pleopods,
and from T. africana by having a palm on gnathopod 1, setae along the
entire outer margins of the pleopod peduncles, equal rami on pleopods 1 and 2
and complex digitate coxal gills on pereopods 3-5. Some specimens have
lateral spines on the telson that are considerably stronger than shown in the
illustration.
Talitriator setosa (Barnard, 1940)
Fig. 6
Talitroides eastwoodae forma setosa Barnard, 1940: 467.
Talitroides eastwoodae forma macronyx Barnard, 1940: 468, fig. 27 i, j.
Talitriator setosa: Bousfield, 1984: 206, 209.
Talitriator macronyx: Bousfield, 1984: 206, 209.
Distribution
In high-lying areas from Table Mountain northwards into the Cederberg and
eastwards to the Langeberg Mountains near Heidelberg (Fig. 7).
TERRESTRIAL AMPHIPODS OF SOUTH AFRICA 359
Fig. 6. Talitriator setosa (Barnard, 1940), female, 8 mm, Constantiaberg, Cape
Peninsula. A. Lateral view. B-F. Coxal gills of gnathopod 2 and pereopods 3, 4, 5, 6.
G. Gnathopod 1 with articles 5-7 enlarged. I. Gnathopod 2. J-L. Pleopods 1, 2, 3.
M. Uropod 3. N. Telson.
360 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Diagnosis
Antennae short, article 1 of antenna 1 wider than long, tip of flagellum
reaching less than half way along article 5 of antenna 2; antenna 2 short, only
about 25 per cent body length. Article 5 of gnathopod 1 lobed posteriorly,
length about twice width, article 6 with distinct palm. Pleopods with elongate
peduncles and shorter, subequal rami. Pleopod 1 75 per cent length of 2 or 3,
peduncle setose along outer margin or not, rami half length of peduncle.
Peduncles of pleopods 2 and 3 with close-set plumose setae along whole outer
margin, rami equal and 65 per cent length of peduncle. Coxal gill of gnatho-
pod 2 an elongate forward-projecting lobe, of pereopods 3-5 variously branched
lobes on narrow stalks, and of pereopod 6 a complex, branched structure. Each
lobe of telson with 4-5 dorsal and one terminal spine.
Botswana
A T. cylindripes
@ T. setosa
Vv T. africana
w T. eastwoodae
East London
Cape Town
Fig. 7. Map of South Africa showing distributional records and ranges of the known species
of Talitriator.
Remarks
In his brief description, Barnard (1940) described the pleopods of this form
as having close-set plumose setae along the whole of the sinuous outer margin
of the peduncle, although he found some specimens in which only the distal
TERRESTRIAL AMPHIPODS OF SOUTH AFRICA 361
third of the peduncles was setose. The present material is inconsistent in this
character, at least as regards pleopod 1, where the setae range from absent to
lining most of the outer margin of the peduncle. The peduncles of pleopods 2
and 3 are uniformly setose throughout.
The unusual shortened pleopod 1 readily identifies this species. It is often
found together with T. cylindripes, from which it can be distinguished in the
field by its much shorter antenna and pereopods. Live specimens collected by
the author were bright orange in life, although this faded quickly in alcohol.
Talitriator macronyx is hereby synonymized with T. setosa. On the basis of
Barnard’s extremely brief diagnosis, he distinguished his forma macronyx from
forma setosa essentially on two counts—the unlobed form of article 5 and
elongate, strongly spined article 6 of gnathopod 1 and the unusually long ingues
on both gnathopods and pereopods. I found his diagram of gnathopod 1 to be
exaggerated in this regard and the actual specimens to show a broadened
article 5 and shorter article 6 of gnathopod 1, very similar to that depicted for
T. setosa in Figure 6. Similarly the spinule on the dactyl of gnathopod 1 and the
elongate ungues are not significantly more pronounced or elongate than those of
T. setosa. The fact that 7. macronyx was recorded only from a single sample
that falls well within the range of T. setosa also suggests that it simply
represents an extreme form of T. setosa.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This paper would not have been possible without the assistance of
Liz Hoenson and Michelle van der Merwe of the South African Museum,
Sebastian Endrddy-Younga of the Transvaal Museum, and Michelle Hamer of
the Natal Museum, who loaned the author the substantial terrestrial amphipod
collections held by their respective institutes. Additional specimens were kindly
donated by Mary Bursey (East London Museum), Riaan Stals (University of
Pretoria), David Marshall (University of Fort Hare), Pat Caldwell (Agricultural
Research Council), Pat Reavell and Leon Vivier (University of Zululand), and
Norma Sharratt and Mike Picker (University of Cape Town). The assistance of
these researchers, several of whom made specific collecting trips in order to fill
gaps in the distributional database, is gratefully acknowledged. Financial
support was provided by a grant from the Foundation for Research
Development.
REFERENCES
BATE, C. S. 1862. Catalogue of the specimens of amphipodous Crustacea in the collections
of the British Museum. London: Trustees of the British Museum.
BARNARD, K. H. 1916. Contributions to the crustacean fauna of South Africa. 5. The
Amphipoda. Annals of the South African Museum 15: 105-302.
BARNARD, K. H. 1940. Contributions to the crustacean fauna of South Africa. 12. Further
additions to the Tanaidacea, Isopoda, and Amphipoda with keys for the identification of
hitherto recorded marine and fresh-water species. Annals of the South African Museum
32: 381-543.
362 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
BOUSFIELD, E. L. 1984. Recent advances in the systematics and biogeography of
landhoppers (Amphipoda, Talitridae) of the Indo-Pacific region. Special Publications.
Bernice P. Bishop Museum 72: 171-210.
BurT, D. R. R. 1934. On the amphipod genus Talitrus, with a description of a new species
from Ceylon, Talitrus (Talitropsis) topitotum, subgen. et sp. nov. Ceylon Journal of
Science 18: 181-191.
CHEVREUX, E. 1896. Recherches zoologiques dans les serres du Museum de Paris. iv—Sur
un Amphipode terrestre exotique, Talitrus Alluaudi nov. sp., acclimate dans les serres du
Jardin des Plantes de Paris. Feuille des Jeunes Naturalistes 26: 112-113.
CHEVREUX, E. & FAGE, L. 1925. Faune de France 9. Amphipodes. Paris: Paul
Lechavalier.
FRIEND, J. A. & LAM, P. K. S. 1985. Occurrence of the terrestrial amphipod Talitroides
topitotum (Burt) on Hong Kong Island. Acta Zootaxonomica Sinica 10: 27-33.
FRIEND, J. A. & RICHARDSON, A. M. M. 1986. Biology of terrestrial amphipods. Annual
Review of Entomology 31: 25-48.
GRIFFITHS, C. L. 1976. Guide to the benthic marine amphipods of southern Africa. Cape
Town: Trustees of the South African Museum.
HASWELL, W. A. 1880. On the Australian amphipods. Proceedings of the Linnean Society
of New South Wales 4: 245-279.
METHUEN, P. A. 1913. Description of an amphipod belonging to the family Talitridea,
from the Woodbush, Transvaal. Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London 1913:
109-112.
Morino, H. & ORTAL, R. 1993. The identity of Talitroides alluaudi (Chevreux)
(Crustacea: Amphipoda: Talitridae) with notes on a new locality. Proceedings of the
Biological Society of Washington 106: 332-338.
SCHELLENBERG, A. 1934. Die herkunft des terrestrischen Amphipoden Talitroides dorrieni
(Hunt). Zoologischer Anzeiger 105: 159-160.
SHOEMAKER, C. R. 1936. The occurrence of the terrestrial amphipods Talitrus alluaudi and
Talitrus sylvaticus in the United States. Journal of the Washington Academy of Science
26 (2): 60-64.
STEBBING, T. R. R. 1910. General catalogue of South African Crustacea (part V of S.A.
Crustacea). Annals of the South African Museum 6: 447-473.
STEBBING, T. R. R. 1917. South-African Talitridae. Annals and Magazine of Natural
History (series 8) 19: 330-331.
Stock, J. H. & BIERNBAUM, C. K. 1994. Terrestrial Amphipoda (Talitridae) from
Ascension and Saint Helena (South Central Atlantic). Journal of Natural History 28:
795-811.
WILLEM, V. 1898. Un nouvel Amphipode terrestre (Talitroides J. Bonnier) trouve en
Belgique. Annales de la Société entomologique de Belgique 42: 208-211.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed
by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov.,
etc. The name of the taxon should be followed, without intervening punctuation, by the author’s name
(not abbreviated) and the year of publication; a comma must separate author’s name and year. The
author’s name and date must be placed in parentheses if a species or subspecies is transferred from its
original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must be separated from the
scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be either according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order,
with all references to that name following in chronological order (see example 1), or according to
chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the year is placed in front of each entry, and the
synonym repeated in full for each entry (see example 2). The author should adopt one style or the
other throughout a paper.
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Example 1
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note ~aceiaomagm in the above faa comma separates author’s name and year; semicolon separates more than
one reference by the same author; full stop separates references by different authors; figures of plates are enclosed in
parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures; dash, not comma, separates consecutive num
Example 2
1845 Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, p. 37.
1856 Leda plicifera A. Adams, p. 50.
1859 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, p. 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73).
1861 Nucula largillierti Philippi, p. 87.
1871 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould): Sowerby, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
1950 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nickles, p. 163, fig. 301.
1955 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nickles, p. 110.
1964 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Barnard, p. 234, figs 8-9.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens
mentioned in the original description are to be designated allotype (if applicable) and/or paratypes;
additional material not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data
(registration number, depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype
and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype. SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s
Beach, Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text, e.g. . the Figure depicting
C. namacolus ...’, or‘. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10) .
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surmmames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded by initials or full
names: e.g. Du Toit, but A. L. du Toit; Von Huene, but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary. Reference to the author should
preferably be expressed in the third person. Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except
when forming part of the title of a book or article, e.g. ‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII.
Amphipoda.’. A specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its
abbreviation to initial capital letter (except at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph), provided the
same generic name is used consecutively. The name of new genus or species should not be included
in the title; it should be included in the abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet
the requirements of Biological Abstracts.
8. GENERAL. Once referees’ reports have been received by the editor, these will be discussed by the
editorial committee. If the paper is considered acceptable after minor or major revision, the reports
will be forwarded to the author who must then thoroughly revise in accordance with the referees’
suggestions. Final acceptance of the revised manuscript will be considered by the editorial committee.
In the case of major revision being necessary, the committee reserves the right to consult one or more
referees regarding the revised manuscript.
CHARLES L. GRIFFITHS
THE TERRESTRIAL AMPHIPODS
(CRUSTACEA, AMPHIPODA)
OF SOUTH AFRICA
~ VOLUME 105 PART 9 JUNE 1999 | ISSN 0303-2515
i
SU y
NK
)
s
we
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
| MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of: title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of
new genera or species; Author’s(s’) name(s); address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out);
number of illustrations and tables
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary (if paper is fasthy)
(g) Acknowledgments
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
3. MANUSCRIPT should be typed, double spaced with adequate margins. Four copies should be
provided. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of figure captions should be
typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are centred small capitals;
second subheadings are shouldered small capitals; third subheadings are shouldered italics; fourth sub-
headings are indented, shouldered italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration
(never roman numerals) of headings and abbreviations. Footnotes should be avoided unless they are
short and essential. All generic and specific names should be underlined or italicized.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12.5 x 18.5 cm (19.5 cm including
caption); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated in pencil on the reverse of the
figure; originals larger than 36 x 48 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular
in shape and final size. The size of illustrated objects may be indicated by a metric scale on the figure
(if appropriate), or the enlargement or reduction should be given in the caption; if the latter, then the
final reduction or enlargement should be taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not
printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items
of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; labelling on all figures should be non-serif
lettering (e.g. Helvetica, Univers) of uniform style, in lower-case whenever possible, and of appropri-
ate size taking into account the final size. The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil
on the back of each illustration, together with an indication of the desired reduction or enlargement.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the
paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) described . . .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) described... .’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year; pagination indicated by colon, not p. (except in synonymies, see
example 2); names of joint authors connected by ampersand; ef al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names
of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within
each name, with suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in
that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 1969b) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal articles give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scientific periodicals.
4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses (if pagination
discontinuous), pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88:
100-140.
FISCHER, P. H., DUVAL, M. & RAFFY, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines.
Archives de zoologie expérimentale et générale 74: 627-634.
KOHN, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Annals and Magazine of Natural History (13) 2: 309-320. ;
KOHN, A. J. 1960b. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bulletin of the Bingham Qceanographic cullecion, Yale University 17 (4): 1-51. ;
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid Afrika ausgefihrt in den
Jahren 1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16:
269-270.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 105 Band
June 1999 Junie
Part 9 Deel
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS TAKEN BY THE
R.V. AFRICANA IT IN 1959,
FROM OFF THE WEST COAST OF THE
CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA
By
AHMED S. THANDAR
Cape Town Kaapstad
The Annals of the South African Museum publishes original research articles,
revisions and review articles in anthropology, archaeology, palaeontology,
geology, entomology, herpetology, ornithology, and marine and freshwater
biology.
In order to be considered for publication, manuscripts should deal, at least in
part, with material from the collections of the South African Museum. Other
contributions are also considered provided at least one of the authors is a staff
member of the Museum. In the case of descriptions of new species not already
part of the Museum's collections, the holotype and, if possible, part of the
paratype series must be deposited in the South African Museum. Authors whose
contributions do not meet with these criteria should contact the Editorial
Committee prior to final preparation and submission of their manuscript.
All articles are refereed by three referees of international standing. Each paper
accepted is published as a separate part at irregular intervals as material becomes
available; parts are priced individually.
Editorial committee
Dr P. A. Hulley (Chairman) Dr H. C. Klinger Elizabeth Louw (Editor)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Publisher: South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000 South Africa
Please direct enquiries (including copyright) and manuscripts to the Editor.
Please direct orders and subscriptions to the Publications Office.
BACK COPIES
Orders for back copies of the journal are welcome. For a full list of papers published
since 1898, please write to the above address or visit our web-site:
http://nv1.samuseum.ac.za/collect/infosci/pub/prclist.htm
OUT OF PRINT
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 4), 50-3, 5, 7-9), O(l 2s tena
7(1-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3), 11(1-2, 5, 7, t.-p-i.), 14(1-3), 15(4-5),
24(2, 5), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 43(1), 45(1), 49, 67(5, 11), 84(2)
ISBN 0 86813 176 8
D7390
Printed in South Africa by
The Rustica Press, Old Mill Road,
Ndabeni, Western Cape
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS TAKEN BY THE R.V. AFRICANA II
IN 1959, FROM OFF THE WEST COAST OF THE
CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA
By
AHMED S. THANDAR
Department of Zoology, University of Durban-Westville, Durban, South Africa
(With 16 figures and 2 tables)
[MS accepted 11 June 1998]
ABSTRACT
Some 106 specimens of deep-sea holothuroids taken by the R.V. Africana II cruises off
the west coast of the Cape Peninsula, South Africa, in 1959 by the then Division of Sea
Fisheries, are diagnosed and/or described.
The material is distributed over 10 families, 13 genera, 15 nominal and two
indeterminate species, and includes three recently described species (Thandar 1998), a new
species, Molpadia millardae, and nine new records for the southern African region, south of
the tropic of Capricorn. Previous records of Echinocucumis typica sensu Clark, 1923 (non
Sars, 1859), and Sphaerothuria talismani (partim) sensu Deichmann, 1930 (non E. Perrier,
1886), are based on misidentifications of Ypsilothuria bitentaculata (Ludwig, 1893).
CONTENTS
PAGE
WOES NIGECUIL 5 o25 2 Jac 308 See a a lee ON ra are RE ea 364
eee arcana di Stations, species and other data .....6...000...cceseesenteetnecceceescceecsees 364
Ma ocr os Ge ace dad se smcabendeabiemoads sucwb sons cbdassuaasoSheseencecswetacaueesss 366
RE MACARONI RPE ot Ss Sais Satine ads Sel aycie As Ale nan ne Been I NOME Ne eae ene sanded oe 366
caters dere Perimer: 1902 i) 5 sas caus aad daw oe wodnawte nme ea oe neche sere tetanic ae 366
SeminmeremmaniGae Ludwig, 1894. 0.3... os soe sacnechiciese some poweee fetes wee secession’ 368
naiipen aneyeiidac Pawson & Fell, 1965... ..0c.ccuseesecdeed once vdeweseeadneteseesmees 369
E mbentnitomiuridae Heding , 1942 ii. .s sce Ussnses ccamcdoeeans cegaceneeenes ods enecanian 369
Prmmmmsmmalbactidac Ludwig, 1894 oc... owen cans sacinaecosineens da smtdnoe tees see emee oe 376
meme inmanGae PKIMAN: LOZG) o. cun seca sscomaiueteaane aiaeion <cisotes somumesuere nome reac si)
Pamareeacmoconiaae Ekman, 1926 2.5... 0. ¢.csecscee- cose qoeneeted yen: vecacesasenscsences 381
PmmlemenpenTopoudae Thcel, 1882" 62.12.91 .tesccoee i eceees oes eneeled casdieca sees oasemus 382
rime mMCACMINeCL : LST) yoo. oy lelsbu leds sesteetees suecueeevamece dt veda eveSeteenede eee 389
Bamdayaaeohyrothuridae Koehler & Vaney, 1905 «2.2.0.2. .6.c00600.Edenccescedeeseece cass 396
ifeummn@imadiGac, NMuUNET, 1850 ye ioc ceticed cncimavecice see qenembenecemceeaacce stats Pere 3s)
0 TE ge DBI TVSICIS, II RNa Sr cI att er ais 4 eR ere nem ei ete Re as oe RRL 406
a A ois cos. cinta. crassa close on tem one man ebae UaeIee stan ine emul <Cub ac emenmmatne Nase: 407
© EEOUTLLV ETE, Gis 3 SUS oa eee rg Re tem De cl ks gue ON ery aed oe ee ene 409
363
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 105 (9), 1999: 363-409, 16 figs, 2 tables.
364 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
INTRODUCTION
Numerous specimens plus some fragments of deep-sea holothuroids taken
during the months of August and December 1959, by the then Division of Sea
Fisheries’ R.V. Africana IT routine cruises off the west coast of the Cape
Peninsula, South Africa, have until now remained undescribed. The material
was deposited in the South African Museum (SAM). Subsequently, most of the
material was sent to the late Dr Cherbonnier of the Museum National d’ Histoire
Naturelle, Paris (MNHN) for identification and reporting. Duplicates of the
samples and some other remaining material was loaned to the author for
inclusion in his monograph of the southern African Holothuroidea that was
being prepared for a doctoral thesis. The thesis was completed some time ago
(see Thandar 1984) but the results of the R.V. Africana II collections were not
published, awaiting a report of the material at the MNHN. Since no report was
forthcoming and after the retirement of Dr Cherbonnier, the writer asked the
SAM to request a return of the specimens from France. This was acceded to
and on their arrival the specimens were forwarded to the writer.
All the R.V. Africana IT material was collected with a 15-foot beam trawl
from nine deep-sea localities off the west coast of the Cape Peninsula between
latitudes 33°26’S and 34°42’S and longitudes 16°15’E and 17°21’E, in water
depths ranging from 2 269 to 3257 m. All material studied is deposited in the
SAM, under SAM-A catalogue numbers. The R.V. Africana IT stations, the
species taken from each station and other pertinent data are listed below. Full
station lists and other data for the period 1 April 1959 to 31 March 1960 can be
found in the Division of Sea Fisheries Annual Report (Anon. 1963: 204-213).
R.V. AFRICANA II STATIONS, SPECIES AND OTHER DATA
A 190, west of Dassen Island, 33°26’S 16°33’E, 26 August 1959,
2 268-2 377 m.
SAM-A22149, Ypsilothuria bitentaculata (Ludwig), 13 specimens.
SAM-A27715, Elpidia gracilis Belyaev, 1 specimen and 2 fragments.
A 191, west of Dassen Island, 33°36’S 16°15’E, 26 August 1959,
2 780-2 871 m.
SAM-A22165, Laetmogone perplexa Thandar, 1998 (holotype),
1 specimen.
SAM-A27716, Benthodytes lingua R. Perrier, 1 specimen.
SAM-A27717, Benthodytes valdiviae Hansen, 2 specimens.
SAM-A22175, Benthodytes ?typica Théel, 1 specimen.
A 193, west of Cape Town, 33°50’S 17°21’E, 26 August 1959, 2268 m.
SAM-A22147, Scotoplanes globosa Théel, 4 specimens.
A 315, west of Cape Point, 34°37’S 17°03’E, 8 December 1959,
2 890-2 963 m.
SAM-A27718, Echinocucumis hispida (Barrett), 1 specimen.
SAM-A22150, Ypsilothuria bitentaculata (Ludwig), 7 specimens.
SAM-A22169, Molpadia millardae sp. nov., 1 specimen (paratype).
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 365
A 316, south-west of Cape Point, 34°42’S 16°54’E, 8 December 1959,
3 155-3 255 m.
SAM-A22146, Paracucumaria capense Thandar, 1998, 2 specimens.
SAM-A27719, Psolidium vitreum Ohshima, 1 specimen.
SAM-A22155, Psolidothuria octodactyla Thandar, 1998, 1 specimen.
SAM-A22145, Psolidothuria octodactyla Thandar, 1998, 1 specimen.
SAM-A22130, Echinocucumis hispida (Barrett), 3 specimens.
SAM-A22142, Echinocucumis hispida (Barrett), 1 specimen.
SAM-A22143, Echinocucumis hispida (Barrett), 3 specimens plus
fragments.
SAM-A22158, Orphnurgus protectus (Sluiter), 1 specimen.
SAM-A22156, Meseres atlanticus (R. Perrier), 2 specimens.
SAM-A22172, Peniagone sp. indet., 1 specimen.
A 317, west of Saldanha Bay, 33°15’S 16°30’E, ?8/9 December 1959,
2 708-3 038 m.
SAM-A22151 Ypsilothuria bitentaculata (Ludwig), 1 specimen.
A 318, west of Cape Peninsula, 33°52’S 16°51’E, 9 December 1959,
2 524-2 780 m.
SAM-A22166, Paracucumaria capense Thandar, 1998, 1 specimen.
SAM-A27722, Paracucumaria capense Thandar, 1998, 3 specimens.
SAM-A22164, Psolidothuria octodactyla Thandar, 1998, 1 specimen
(holotype).
SAM-A27710, Psolidothuria octodactyla Thandar, 1998, 2 specimens
(paratypes).
SAM-A27590, Psolidothuria octodactyla Thandar, 1998, 3 specimens.
SAM-A27720, Echinocucumis hispida (Barrett), 1 specimen.
SAM-A27721, Echinocucumis hispida (Barrett), 4 specimens.
SAM-A22167, Echinocucumis hispida (Barrett), 2 specimens.
SAM-A22132, Ypsilothuria bitentaculata (Ludwig), 6 specimens.
SAM-A22144, Ypsilothuria bitentaculata (Ludwig), 2 specimens.
SAM-A22168, Molpadia millardae sp. nov., 2 specimens.
A 319, west of Cape Town, 34°05’S 16°58’E, 9 December 1959,
2 688-2 725 m.
SAM-A27723, Echinocucumis hispida (Barrett), fragment.
SAM-A22139, Ypsilothuria bitentaculata (Ludwig), 10 specimens plus
fragment.
SAM-A22140, Gephyrothuria alcocki Koehler & Vaney, 2 specimens.
SAM-A22174, Molpadia millardae sp. nov., 1 specimen.
SAM-A22141, Molpadia sp. indet., 2 specimens.
A 322, south-west of Cape Point, 34°36’S 17°00’E, 10 December 1959,
2743 m.
SAM-A22148, Ypsilothuria bitentaculata (Ludwig), 12 specimens.
SAM-A22163, Molpadia millardae sp. nov., 1 specimen (holotype).
SAM-A27711, Molpadia millardae sp. nov., 3 specimens (paratypes).
366 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
METHODS
The specimens were studied according to conventional methods outlined by
Fisher (1907), Deichmann (1948), and Rowe & Doty (1977). The spicules were
removed in antiformin (see Mahoney 1966), washed in two changes of distilled
water, and illustrated with a camera lucida.
For scanning electron microscopy the spicules were transferred, through
two changes of absolute alcohol, on to a specimen stub to which they normally
stick once the alcohol evaporates. They were then sputter-coated with gold at
30-40 mAmp for 5 minutes and photographed using the Philips SEM 500.
Although all the available data for the new species described herein are
repeated in the text under “Material examined’, for the remaining species only
the locality data are given in the text and then by reference to latitude/longitude
degree squares as was previously done by the writer (Thandar 1984, 1991),
following Day’s (1967) method for the polychaetes. The letters WCP denote
Western Cape Province and vd, very deep (> 500 m).
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT
Order DENDROCHIROTIDA Grube, 1840
Family Psolidae R. Perrier, 1902
Psolidium vitreum Ohshima, 1915
Figs 1, 16B
Psolidium vitreum Ohshima, 1915: 281, pl. 11 (fig. 32).
Psolus sp. Théel, 1886: 15 (syn. nov.).
Diagnosis (after Ohshima 1915: 281)
Body form elliptical, mouth and anus on conical prominences. Colour white,
glassy. Ventral pedicels in zigzag row on each ambulacrum on margin of sole,
few also in odd ambulacrum. Dorsal pedicels minute. Sole deposits round to
oval, often overlapping, faintly knobbed plates, up to 0.40 mm in diameter, with
large, regularly arranged holes (up to 36), partially or completely occluded in
larger specimens, size of plates and number of holes increasing with age.
Dorsal scales thin, smooth, rounded, imbricating, 1.0-1.5 mm in diameter,
some with holes for dorsal pedicels. Ventral pedicels with end-plates and other
curved, elongated plates with two series of holes; dorsal pedicels with reduced
end-plates and supporting rods. Plates of tentacles similar to those of pedicels
but broader, with more holes.
Previous southern African record
None.
Material examined
SAM-A27719, WCP (34/16/vd), 1 specimen.
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 367
Fig. 1. Psolidium vitreum Ohshima. Spicules and calcareous ring. A. Scales from dorsal
wall. B. Deposits from sole. C. End plate and other perforated plates from ventral podia.
D. Plates and rods from dorsal podia. E. Tentacle plates. F. One radial and two interradial
plates of calcareous ring. A—scale a; B-E—scale b.
Description
Form cylindrical, dorsal surface arched, ventral flattened, damaged. Length
10 mm, width in mid-body 3 mm. Colour white, in alcohol. Anterior and
posterior ends turned up, mouth and anus dorsal, oral and anal cones not
conspicuous; anus surrounded by five calcareous plates, each flanked by anal
papillae. Tentacles 10, eight large and bushy, ventralmost two very much
reduced. Sole displaced anteriorly, oval, 3.5 mm in length, bordered by a rim
of well-developed pedicels in a single zigzag row in each ventrolateral
ambulacrum, none detected in damaged odd ambulacrum; total number of
ventral pedicels 18. Dorsal pedicels minute, scarce.
Alimentary canal lost; polian vesicle and stone canal not seen. Calcareous
ring (Fig. 1F) simple, radial and interradial plates with pointed anterior
projections, interradial plates about two-thirds the size of radial plates, latter
with anterior depression for insertion of retractor muscle; posterior surface of
radial plates deeply notched, that of interradial plates concave. Gonad
368 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
immature. Respiratory trees as paired, simple tubes, each branched
dichotomously once.
Dorsal scales (Figs 1A, 16B), circular but imbricating, up to 1 mm in
diameter, made up of more than one layer of calcareous material. Sole deposits
(Fig. 1B) as rods and usually faintly knobbed, perforated plates,
0.095-0.15 mm long (mean 0.12 mm); holes large, 1-7 in number, knobs along
margin of plates and on surface; usually only a few of the smaller plates
smooth. Ventral pedicels with well-developed end-plates and other smooth
perforated plates (up to 0.14 mm long), of various shapes and irregular margins
(Fig. 1C). Dorsal pedicels with reduced end-plates and other smooth irregular
plates with one or more holes, often curved and basket-like (Fig. 1D). Tentacles
with plates similar to those of ventral pedicels, but larger, up to 0.25 mm in
length, and with more numerous holes (Fig. 1E).
Remarks
Ohshima (1915) compared his species from the North West Pacific with
Psolidium dorsipes Ludwig from the South East Pacific, pointing out several
differences between the two. He further commented that Psolus incertus Théel
from Kerguelen Island and Psolus sp.—a defective specimen described by Théel
(1886) from the Gulf of Mexico—are also close to P. vitreum. Whereas Psolus
incertus Clearly belongs in the genus Psolus, the presence of dorsal pedicels
(‘flexible cylindrical appendages’ of Théel 1886: 16) in Psolus sp., clearly
places it in the genus Psolidium. From the brief description given by Théel, it
appears that, apart from the arrangement of ventral pedicels in double rows and
the absence of pedicels in the odd ambulacrum, there appear to be no other
differences between Psolus vitreum and the specimen collected by S.S. Blake, to
which it is here referred. The southern African specimen similarly differs from
the type of the species only in the absence of pedicels in the odd ambulacrum
(perhaps an age variation). One other species, namely P. disjunctum Sluiter
from the tropical West Pacific, is also similar to P. vitreum but its dorsal
pedicels are stated to be in double rows and ventral in three rows.
Distribution
Known from Japan, the Gulf of Mexico, and south-west coast of Africa,
184-3 255 m.
Family Cucumariidae Ludwig, 1894
Paracucumaria capense Thandar, 1998
Fig. 15B
Trachythyone ?parva Thandar, 1991 (non Ludwig): 134, figs 11, 15.
Paracucumaria capense Thandar, 1998: 83, figs 2c-e, 3a-e.
Diagnosis (from Thandar 1998)
Small, somewhat U-shaped species, up to 36 mm in length along ventral
surface. Colour, in alcohol, uniformly white. Pedicels restricted to ambulacra in
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 369
double rows, sometimes a few also scattered in interambulacra of dorsal
surface. Tentacles 8-10, of more or less equal size. Radial plates of calcareous
ring blunt, without incisions but with concave posterior margins. Body wall
spicules a superficial layer of baskets, usually confined to anal region, rarely
occurring elsewhere, and an inner layer of large, irregular, smooth to faintly
nodular, imbricating plates with up to 12 large holes. Pedicels with mostly
perforated, sometimes knobbed, irregular rods and plates, end-plates reduced.
Tentacle deposits similar but larger. Introvert with perforated plates of varying
shapes, margins jagged or knobbed, surface finely knobbed.
Remarks
This species was identified as Trachythyone ?parva by Thandar (1991) but,
after examination of the additional specimens received from the MNHN, it
became obvious that the material does not represent a Trachythyone but a new
species of Paracucumaria, recently described by Thandar (1998) and compared
with other nominal species of the genus.
Order DACTYLOCHIROTIDA Pawson & Fell, 1965
Family Vaneyellidae Pawson & Fell, 1965
Psolidothuria octodactyla Thandar, 1998
Fig. 15A
Psolidothuria octodactyla Thandar, 1998: 80, figs la-f, 2a, b.
Diagnosis (from Thandar 1998)
Small, U-shaped dactylochirotid holothuroids with mouth and anus at
opposite ends. Tentacles eight, unequal in size, finger-like but finely branched.
Calcareous ring simple, consisting of eight, more or less similar plates without
posterior prolongations. Thecal plates simple, imbricating, occasionally faintly
nodular; holes few (up to 20), large, spires absent.
Remarks
This species was recently described by Thandar (1998), who also amended
the diagnosis of the family Vaneyellidae and erected the new genus
Psolidothuria to accommodate the new southern African form; hence only the
diagnosis is repeated here. It appears that the new genus bridges the gap
between the families Vaneyellidae and Ypsilothuriidae within the dactylochirotid
holothuroids.
Family Ypsilothuriidae Heding, 1942
This family, when proposed by Heding (1942), included only the genera
Echinocucumis and Ypsilothuria. However, Panning (1949) referred several
other genera to it; subsequently Pawson (1965) restricted the Ypsilothuriidae to
370 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
include only three genera, namely Echinocucumis Sars, Ypsilothuria E. Perrier
and Ypsilocucumis Panning. Of these, only the former two are represented in
southern Africa and present in the collection here studied.
Genus Echinocucumis Sars, 1859
This genus includes ypsilothuriids with thecal plates made up of only a
single layer of calcareous material. Currently only four species—the
cosmopolitan type species Echinocucumis hispida (Barrett, 1856), the Western
Indian Ocean E. paratypica Ludwig & Heding, 1935, and the Eastern Atlantic
E. tenera Cherbonnier, 1958, and E. multipodia Cherbonnier, 1964, are
included in the genus. The latter two species possess bifurcate processes to the
calcareous ring and hence may not strictly belong in Echinocucumis.
Echinocucumis hispida (Barrett, 1856)
Figs 2, 14A-C
Eupyrgus hispidus Barrett, 1856: 46, pl. 4 (figs a-b).
Echinocucumis typica Sars, 1861: 102, pl. 10 (figs 11-20), pl. 11 (figs 1-17). Théel, 1886:
3), lil, Be
Cucumaria typica Ludwig, 1901: 149.
non Echinocucumis typica Clark, 1923: 418 (= Ypsilothuria bitentaculata (Ludwig)).
Echinocucumis hispida Mortensen, 1927: 404, figs 242 (1), 243. Deichmann, 1930: 150,
pl. 18 (fig. 9). Ludwig & Heding, 1935: 167. Heding, 1942: 29, figs 31, 32. Panning,
1949: 454. Pawson, 1965: 8, fig. 2.
Diagnosis (from Pawson 1965)
Tentacles 10, unequal in size. Body U-shaped, mouth and anus placed at
ends of non-retractile tubes. Pedicels scarce, slender, thread-like, restricted to
ambulacra. Body covered by large (c. 1 mm in diameter) scales with an
excentric spire, placed near margin; scales with numerous regular holes and
either single-layered or with a coarse reticulum spreading out from the base of
Spire and partially covering primary disc.
Previous southern African record
None.
Material examined
SAM-A22130, A22142, A22143, A22167, A27718, A27720, A27721,
A27723; WCP (33/16/vd to 34/17/vd), 15 specimens plus fragments.
Description
Specimens typically U-shaped (Fig. 2A), largest 40 mm along greater
curvature. Tentacles 10 (Fig. 2G)—in dissected specimens one on each side
very long, four slightly smaller and four very small, two largest branched at
base. Each respiratory tree (Fig. 21) with two main trunks, one whitish, the
other brownish, each trunk with short extensions (?caeca) and, in addition, short
thread-like processes at base.
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA Sil
Fig. 2. Echinocucumis hispida (Barrett). Structure and spicules. A. Entire animal.
B. Spired plates from body wall. C. Spire (from side). D. Smooth plates from oral siphon.
E. Smooth plate from anal siphon. F. Tentacle plates. G. Calcareous ring and associated
organs. H. Gonadal tubules of female. I. Cloaca with respiratory trees.
A-scale a; B—scale b; C-F—scale c.
S72 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Thecal plates (Figs 2B, 14B) 0.60-0.90 mm, with a coarse reticulum
spreading out from base of spire to partially cover primary disc.
Spires (Fig. 2B, C) 0.165-0.270 mm, placed near margin, gradually lost
towards oral and anal ends. Plates of anal siphon thick, holes large (Fig. 2E);
those of oral siphon thin, holes small (Fig. 2D). Tentacles with plates and rods
(Fig. 2F).
Remarks
Although the form of the specimens, the number of tentacles and the mar-
ginal spires suggest that the present material belongs in Echinocucumis, the base
of the spire spreads out as a coarse reticulum partially covering the primary
plate so that it appears as if part of each thecal plate is made up of more than
one layer of calcareous material. Since a coarse reticulated network has also
been described by Deichmann (1930) for Ypsilocucumis asperrima (Théel), one
may be inclined to consider the present material as being identical with that
species. The tentacle deposits also resemble those illustrated by Deichmann.
However, judging from Théel’s (1886) description of the holotype, it is certain
that the thecal plates of Y. asperrima are clearly multilayered. In fact, Heding
(1942: 27) commented that ‘Deichmann did not distinguish clearly between the
different forms of Ypsilothuria and Echinocucumis’ .
The thecal plates of the present specimens in fact resemble those of
Ypsilothuria talismani talismani E. Perrier, illustrated by Heding (1942: 28,
fig. 27 (3)), more than any other ypsilothuriid. However, Heding stated that
Ypsilothuria always has 8 tentacles and 8 plates to the calcareous ring. Echino-
cucumis, on the other hand, has 10 tentacles with 10 plates to the calcareous
ring. If the number of tentacles is not of any great phylogenetic significance, as
suggested by Deichmann (1930) (she noted that the two ventral tentacles may be
aborted), then there appears to be some overlap of characters between the
southern African E. hispida and Y. talismani talismani. As a point of interest,
the spires in the southern African material are more excentric than those
illustrated by Pawson (1965) for the New Zealand form.
According to both Sars (1861) and Heding (1942), the four dorsal tentacles
always have two digits each, whereas the two large lateral ones are branched. In
the present material, however, only the two largest tentacles have a few
branches at their base. Nevertheless, unbranched tentacles have been described
for the species by Deichmann (1930), who worked on Scandinavian material,
and by Pawson (1965), who studied the New Zealand form.
The respiratory trees, unlike those described for the species by both
Deichmann (1930) and Pawson (1965), are well developed, with separate
origins, each supplied with two main stems and some supplementary branches.
This observation is in agreement with that of Heding (1942).
The bathymetric range of E. hispida, according to Heding (1942), is
50-1300 m. He stated that deeper records are those of Y. talismani and not
E. hispida. However, Pawson’s material from the eastern side of New Zealand
came from a depth of 1 530 m. If the southern African material represents a true
E. hispida then a depth of 2 525-3 257 m is the deepest yet recorded for the
species. The structural differences between the southern African form and the
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 373
typical E. hispida may be ascribed to both geographic and depth variations. At
least, at infraspecific level, distinction can be drawn between the North Atlantic,
southern African, New Zealand and West Indian (forma atypica Deichmann,
1930) forms of the species, each possibly representing a subspecies.
Clark’s (1923) specimens of E. typica, recorded from Cape Point, are
herein re-identified as Ypsilothuria bitentaculata (see remarks under
Y. bitentaculata).
Local distribution
Known only from off south-western Cape Province, 2 525-3 257 m.
General distribution
Cosmopolitan, 50-3 257 m.
Genus Ypsilothuria E. Perrier, 1886
Heding (1942) recognized only two species in this genus, namely
Ypsilothuria talismani E. Perrier and Y. bitentaculata (Ludwig). According to
him, Y. talismani has two Atlantic varieties (subspecies) whereas
Y. bitentaculata has one Atlantic and two Indo-Pacific varieties (subspecies).
Ypsilothuria bitentaculata (Ludwig, 1893)
Figs 3, 14D-F
Sphaerothuria bitentaculata Ludwig, 1893: 112; 1894: 141, pl. 12 (figs 16-17), pl. 14
(figs 5-14). Deichmann, 1930: 152, pl. 19 (figs 4-5). Ludwig & Heding, 1935: 196,
figs 55-57.
Ypsilothuria bitentaculata Koehler & Vaney, 1905: 87. Heding, 1942: 28, pl. 2 (figs 1-10),
text-figs 25 (1-4, 9-10), 26 (4-7), 27 (2, 5), 30. Panning, 1949: 455. Pawson, 1965: 6,
fig. 1 (2-5).
Echinocucumis typica Clark, 1923: 418 (non Echinocucumis typica Sars, 1859 = E. hispida
Barrett, 1856).
Sphaerothuria talismani Deichmann, 1930: 154, pl. 19 (fig. 3) (partim) (non Sphaerothuria
talismani (E. Perrier) = Ypsilothuria talismani E. Perrier).
Diagnosis
Globular to spherical ypsilothuriids with plates of body wall forming a rigid
test almost as hard as a young echinoid; thecal plates with uneven margins and
composed of several layers of calcareous material; holes reaching periphery of
plates; spires never marginal in position.
Previous southern African record
WCP (34/18/vd) as Echinocucumis typica by Clark (1923), 1647-1 830 m.
Material examined
SAM-A22132, A22139, A22144, A22148, A22149, A22150, A22151;
WCP (33/16/vd to 34/17/vd), 51 specimens plus fragments.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
374
OO O98
0088 90@e@
> \O9@SO @@SOe@
OOs
A. Entire animals.
D. Gonadal tubules of
K. Plate from anal
F. Detail of one spired plate. G. Spire (from side).
C. Respiratory trees.
J. Plates from oral siphon.
siphon. B, D—scale a; F-K—scale b; E—scale c.
Fig. 3. Ypsilothuria bitentaculata (Ludwig). Structure and spicules.
gans.
I. Introvert plates.
B. Calcareous ring and associated or
female. E. Spired plates of body wall.
H. Tentacle rods.
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 375
Description
Specimens globular to spherical (Fig. 3A), largest 25 mm along greater
curvature. Tentacles 7-8, unbranched (Fig. 3B), lateral two largest; of remain-
ing tentacles, two dorsal and 3-4 ventral in position. Respiratory trees each with
two main trunks, each trunk with sac-like extensions (caeca) (Fig. 3C).
Thecal plates (Figs 3E, F, 14D, E) 0.71-1.27 mm, multi-layered, spire up
to 0.5 mm high (Fig. 3G), slightly excentric (Fig. 3E). Plates of oral siphon
single-layered, with or without a spire (Fig. 3J); the latter, if present, marginal.
Plates of anal siphon also single-layered with small, concentrically arranged
holes (Fig. 3K). Tentacle rods curved, margins spinose (Fig. 3H). Introvert
plates with minute nodules and jagged edges (Fig. 31).
Remarks
Of the two species included in this genus there is no doubt that the present
specimens belong to Y. bitentaculata. This is borne out by the shape and texture
of the specimens, the form of the calcareous ring, and the structure of the thecal
plates. According to Heding (1942), Y. bitentaculata is as rigid as a little echi-
noid, whereas Y. talismani is soft; the latter species is much smaller, reaching a
length of 15 mm, whereas Y. bitentaculata reaches a length of 20 mm. Heding
also stated that Y. bitentaculata always occurs at abyssal depths (true for the
southern African material), whereas Y. talismani occurs in shallow waters.
The specimens agree well with Heding’s (1942) description of Y. biten-
taculata attenuata except that they reach a size of 25 mm, the thecal plates
(0.7-1.3 mm) are smaller than those recorded for the variety (1.2-1.8 mm), and
the tentacle spicules resemble those of Y. talismani talismani illustrated by
Heding rather than those of his Y. bitentaculata attenuata. Perhaps not all these
differences are significant as the size of the animal may vary depending on the
method of measuring, and the tentacle deposits may differ from the base of a
tentacle to the tip. The present specimens are not referable to the Indo-Pacific
Y. bitentaculata bitentaculata since Heding stated that the size of the plates in
this form exceeds 1.8 mm.
Clark (1923) recorded two spherical forms collected by the R.V. Pieter
Faure from Cape Town in 1916 as Echinocucumis typica (= E. hispida).
Deichmann (1930), who re-examined one of Clark’s specimens, referred it to
Sphaerothuria (= Ypsilothuria) talismani, although she described the body as
spherical, a shape typical for Y. bitentaculata. According to Heding, Y. talis-
mani is oblong-spherical with a thin soft body wall similar to E. hispida. A dry
specimen in the SAM type collection, labelied as E. typica, is possibly one of
the specimens examined by Clark. Judging from its size, shape and external
structure it is indistinguishable from Y. bitentaculata described herein. Hence
E. typica Clark, 1923 (non Sars, 1861) and S. talismani (partim) Deichmann,
1930 (non E. Perrier, 1886), are here re-identified as Y. bitentaculata.
Local distribution
Known only from off south-western Cape Province, 1 647-2 965 m.
General distribution
Possibly cosmopolitan, 375-3 231 m.
376 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Habitat
Green mud.
Order ASPIDOCHIROTIDA Grube, 1840
Family Synallactidae Ludwig, 1874
Meseres atlanticus (R. Perrier, 1902)
Figs 4, 16A
Pseudostichopus atlanticus R. Perrier, 1902: 333, pl. 17 (figs 15-20). Mortensen, 1927: 387
(passim). Deichmann, 1930: 87.
Molpadiodemas atlanticus: Heding, 1940: 357.
Meseres atlanticus O’ Loughlin, 1998: 493, 497.
Diagnosis
Large, sac-like, often flattened synallactid up to 170-180 mm long with no
encrusting foreign bodies on skin, the latter smooth, naked. Anus in an
inconspicuous furrow; mouth surrounded by 15-20 tentacles. Appendages
minute, hair-like. Colour brown to grey to white. Large, round solid deposits
with warty or spiny surface in skin; branching rods and reticulate plates in skin
around mouth. Tentacle deposits prominent, including curved rods, often
thickened in middle.
Material examined
SAM-A22156, WCP (34/16/vd), 2 specimens.
Description
Form cylindrical, U-shaped, anterior end extending beyond level of anus.
Dorsal surface conspicuously arched. Length of larger specimen 80 mm,
diameter of mid-body 15 mm. Dorsal and ventral surfaces not clearly
demarcated. No adhering foreign bodies, except for a few Globigerina on
ventral surface. Colour uniformly grey.
Mouth anterior; 15 tentacles in one specimen, 20 in the other. Tentacles
distinctly peltate with a short stem and a large disc with few lateral projections.
No collar or brim at anterior end. Anus situated in a furrow, indistinct due to
the contraction of the posterior end of body.
Appendages minute, sparse, inconspicuous, few scattered dorsally, longer
and in double rows ventrally, giving the mid-ventral ambulacrum a villus-like
appearance. All appendages inconspicuous, hence body appears naked like that
of a molpadiid.
Body wall thin, translucent, bearing externally a pleated appearance—the
pleats traversing the body in all directions.
Calcareous deposits present in body wall, peristome, tentacles, papillae and
gonadal tubules; absent from anal region. Body-wall spicules discoidal,
mulberry-like plates, up to 0.2 mm in diameter (Fig. 4C), similar to that
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 377
illustrated by Perrier (1902, pl. 17 (fig. 20)). Such plates unusual, unlike
anything seen in other holothuroids. Peristomial deposits (Fig. 4D) branching
rods, branching resulting in complex reticulate structures almost impossible to
remove whole; such plates and rods resemble those of the type illustrated by
Perrier (1902, pl. 17 (figs 17-19)). Papillae deposits, few, appearing as simple
smooth rods, without perforations (Fig. 4E). Tentacle deposits prominent,
curved rods of a variety of forms, with or without perforations (Figs 4A, 16A),
\ 0.05 mm j
Fig. 4. Meseres atlanticus (R. Perrier). Spicules. A. Large rods from tentacle.
B. Small rods from tentacle. C. Mulberry-like plates from body wall.
D. Deposits from peristomial membrane. E. Rods from papillae. F. Rods from
gonad. A—scale a; B-E—scale b.
378 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the latter often with a swollen middle (Fig. 4B); some rods developed as
perforated plates similar to those of the peristome. Minute simple smooth rods
in the gonadal tubules (Fig. 4F).
Remarks
The two specimens come closer to Pseudostichopus atlanticus Perrier, 1902,
than to any other species of the genus, agreeing with it in body form, the almost
naked appearance of the skin, the presence of peculiar mulberry-shaped spicules
o.imm ,
Fig. 5. Orphnurgus protectus (Sluiter). Spicules. A. Cross from anterodorsal body wall.
B. Rods and crosses from ventral body wall. C. Tentacle deposits. D. Pedicel deposits.
E. Papillae deposits. ;
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 379
in the skin, and the form of deposits in the tentacles and peristome. However, it
differs in size (Perrier’s specimens measured 170-180 mm in length), color-
ation, and the presence of some tentacle rods with a central thickening. Such
differences are perhaps geographic variations as Perrier’s specimens came from
between the Azores and France, at a depth of 3614 m. Deichmann (1930)
recorded a single 95 mm specimen of this species from off Bequia in the West
Indies, at a depth of 2920 m. According to her, P. villosus Hérouard (non
Théel), described in 1923 from Morocco, is also perhaps identical with
Perrier’s species.
Heding (1935) erected the genus Molpadiodemas for a similar species,
M. acaudum, taken by the Danish Ingolf Expedition from the North Atlantic.
He referred the genus to the family Gephyrothuriidae in the order Gephyro-
thurioidea (erected by him in 1931), close to the order Molpadioidea. However,
Heding (1940), in his account of the holothuroids collected by the German
Deep-Sea Expedition, abandoned the order Gephyrothurioidea and transferred
the family Gephyrothuriidae back to the order Aspidochirotida, in which it was
classified when erected by Koehler & Vaney (1905). To the genus Molpadio-
demas, Heding (1940) further referred Pseudostichopus atlanticus Perrier,
1902, P. occultatus von Marenzeller, 1893, and P. villosus Théel, 1886. In
1942, Heding reaffirmed his earlier (1935) decision and commented that he had
no doubt about the validity of the genus Molpadiodemas but hesitated to support
his inclusion of the three other species he assigned to it in 1940.
Thandar (1992), in his comment on the status of the genus Pseudostichopus,
suggested that it be removed from the family Gephyrothuriidae and transferred
again to the Synallactidae in the order Aspidochirotida.
Rowe (in Rowe & Gates 1995), in error followed Heding’s (1940) views on
the Gephyrothuriidae. This was, however, corrected by O’Loughlin (1998) who
restricted Gephyrothuriidae to the genera Gephyrothuria and Hadalothuria, and
classified the family in the order Molpadiida; the remaining genera of the
Gephyrothuriidae he transferred back to the Synallactidae. He further relegated
Molpadiodemas to the synonymy of Meseres and accepted the validity of
P. atlanticus as a distinct species of Meseres, in the combination M. atlanticus
(R. Perrier, 1902). |
Order ELASIPODIDA Hansen, 1975
Family Deimatidae Ekman, 1926
Orphnurgus protectus (Sluiter, 1901)
Figs 5, 16C-E
Scotodeima protectum Sluiter, 1901a: 20-21; 1901b: 61-62, pl. 2 (fig. 7), pl. 9 (fig. 4).
Orphnurgus protectus Hansen, 1975: 47.
Diagnosis (from Hansen 1975)
Tentacles 15, discs with irregular ramifications on the margin. Ventrolateral
tube feet 24 pairs, midventral tube feet few and rudimentary. Dorsal papillae
380 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
22 pairs, in irregular double rows. Ventrolateral papillae 21 pairs. Spatulated
crosses of body wall measuring 0.7 mm across. Spatulated rods densely packed
in the slender and rigid papillae.
Material examined
SAM-A22158, WCP (34/16/vd), 2 fragments.
Description
Both fragments in poor state of preservation. Anterior fragment 48 mm
long, 21 mm in width in broadest part of body; posterior fragment 37 mm long
and 20 mm wide. Not possible to determine whether both fragments belong
together and if they do whether they represent a complete specimen. Body wall
thin, brittle as a result of numerous spicules. Colour dirty greyish white.
Mouth anterior, ventral. Tentacles 15, of unequal size—five large, five
medium and five small, irregularly arranged with large ones anterior, medium
on right side and small on left; all tentacles with contracted ramifications and no
marginal knobs. Circum-oral papillae absent. Ventrolateral pedicels maximum
of four pairs on anterior fragment; seven on right and five on left side of
posterior fragment; however, left side of latter damaged, hence some pedicels
possibly lost.
If both fragments represent a single specimen, it appears that there were no
more than 11 pairs of pedicels. All pedicels short, stout, in two zigzag rows.
Mid-ventral pedicels not observed.
Dorsal papillae—five pairs on anterior fragment and approximately five
pairs on posterior fragment. Papillae thin, long, with a maximum length of
8 mm, decreasing slightly in size posteriorly.
Ventrolateral papillae—only three pairs detected with any degree of
certainty, on anterior fragment; difficult to count on posterior fragment.
Due to the poor state of preservation of both the fragments, the numbers
here given for both pedicels and papillae are approximate. All papillae rigid
with spicules.
Internal anatomy little preserved; interior packed with Globigerina.
Spicules of body wall comprise spatulated crosses, tripartite deposits and
rods; crosses (Figs 5A, B, 16C) up to 1.3 mm in length. Rods and tripartite
deposits (Fig. 5B) only present in ventral body wall. Spatulated rods confined
to pedicels (Figs 5D, 16D) and papillae (Fig. 5E), in the former up to 0.9 mm
in length, in the latter up to 2.35 mm long. Tentacle deposits as more or
less straight rods with expanded, spinulated and perforated ends, sometimes
bifurcate (Figs 5C, 16E).
Remarks
This species resembles Oneirophanta setigera (Ludwig) with which it shares
most of the characters, differing from it in the presence of tentacles with
ramified processes and without marginal knobs on discs. According to Hansen
(1975), the crosses of O. setigera measure up to 3 mm across whereas those of
the single specimen of Orphnurgus protectus are only 0.7 mm across. The size
of the crosses of the southern African material hence appears intermediate
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 381
between the two. Dr Gebruk, to whom my description and drawings were sent,
concurs with my identification (pers. comm.) but is sceptical about the presence
of rods in the ventral integument.
Distribution
Celebes Strait and west coast of South Africa, 1301-3 255 m.
Family Laetmogonidae Ekman, 1926
Genus Laetmogone Théel, 1879
Hansen (1975) included four genera in the family but of these only the genus
Laetmogone occurs in southern Africa, with only L. fimbriata (Sluiter, 1901)
hitherto recorded. This species is not present in the collection at hand. Its
record is that of Hansen (1975), based on 10 specimens (12-35 mm long) taken
by the Galathea Expedition, off Durban. However, a single specimen in the
present collection is new and has recently been described as L. perplexa
(Thandar, 1998). In the number, form and distribution of pedicels and papillae
and the maximum size (0.18 mm) of the wheels, the new species differs
considerably from L. fimbriata, and can readily be distinguished with the aid of
the key that follows. Since the new species is described elsewhere only the
diagnosis is given below.
Key to the southern African species of Laetmogone
1A. Papillae conspicuous, white; pedicels crowded, slender from base to tip;
faeeeemmneeis usually (95 per cent) with 9 spokes ~............:..---..-sscsessess
a oo. cain dae Gein caccnenacccweeels Laetmogone fimbriata (Sluiter, 1901)
1B. Papillae inconspicuous, dark violet; pedicels not crowded, short, truncate,
retractile into pockets; large wheels usually (72 per cent) with
LL) 00 | ere ee Laetmogone perplexa Thandar, 1998
Laetmogone perplexa Thandar, 1998
Fig. 15€, D
Laetmogone perplexa Thandar, 1998: 84, figs 2f-i, 4a-c.
Diagnosis (from Thandar 1998)
A large subcylindrical species, holotype 220 mm long. Colour uniform dark
violet. Tentacles 15, slightly lobed. Pedicels 20 on each side, short, truncate,
retractile into pockets, the latter situated on an indistinct brim, which also
encircles mouth. Papillae minute (1 mm), retractile, about 25 on each side.
Body wall spicules restricted to anterior and posterior ends; rods of varying
shapes, 0.40-0.55 mm long; wheels not sharply differentiated into two types,
diameter varying from 0.05 mm to 0.18 mm with mostly (72 per cent) four
central rays and 10-12 spokes.
382 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Psychropotidae Théel, 1882
This elasipodid family includes the genera Benthodytes, Psychropotes and
Psycheotrephes, all erected by Théel (1882) and characterized by the presence
of spicules, midventral pedicels, and a brim of fused pedicels surrounding the
body. Only the former two genera are known from southern Africa, of which
only Benthodytes is represented in the collection at hand.
Genus Benthodytes Théel, 1882
Benthodytes is characterized by soft retractile tentacles, circum-oral or post-
oral papillae and the absence of an unpaired dorsal appendage. It includes eight
species, of which B. sanguinolenta, B. lingua, B. plana and B. typica have
hitherto been recorded from southern Africa. The R.V. Africana II material
includes only B. lingua, two specimens herein referred to B. valdiviae, and a
single incomplete specimen perhaps representing B. typica. A key to all five
southern African species is provided.
Key to the southern African species of Benthodytes
1A. Spicules cross-shaped; dorsal papillae usually well developed .............. 2
1B. Spicules rod-shaped or absent; dorsal papillae minute ........................ 4
2A. Brim narrow, often completely enclosed in body wall, body somewhat
eylindgical’ oo ascese.coesaenteneee ase ee Benthodytes lingua R. Perrier, 1896
2B. Brim broad, its margin forming the edge of the rather flattened body ..... 3
3A. Anterior and posterior ends of body rounded; tentacular crown placed a
considerable distance from anterior edge of body .....................eeeeeeeees
RRs Aue Res eee Ree ee Benthodytes plana Hansen, 1975
3B. Anterior and posterior ends of body somewhat tapered; tentacular crown
adjoining anterior edge of body ....... Benthodytes valdiviae Hansen, 1975
4A. Dorsal papillae numerous arranged in two bands; tentacles 18; post-oral
papillae presents ceeeseeoeae ee Benthodytes sanguinolenta Théel, 1882
4B. Dorsal papillae few, arranged in two single rows; tentacles 15-20; circum-
Oral papillae presen a--0----eeee se eee Benthodytes typica Théel, 1882
Benthodytes lingua R. Perrier, 1896
Fig. 6
Benthodytes lingua R. Perrier, 1896: 902; 1902: 456, pl. 12 (figs 1-2), pl. 21 (figs 1-9).
Deichmann, 1930: 124. Hansen, 1975: 80, pl. 9 (figs 3-5), pl. 12 (figs 2-3), text-
fig. 29.
Benthodytes janthina Grieg, 1921: 11 (non von Marenzeller).
Pannychia glutinosa Hérouard, 1902: 32, pl. 4 (fig. 17).
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 383
Diagnosis (from Hansen 1975)
Body usually rounded in cross section. Skin usually thick and gelatinous.
Tentacles 12-15, usually 12. Brim narrow, completely retractile. Ventral sole
usually feebly delimited from remaining part of body. Dorsal papillae in single
rows, up to 12 pairs, filiform or slightly conical. Dorsal deposits large crosses
with bipartite apophyses, the two arms of which are outwardly curved and
gradually tapered. Ventral deposits rudimentary or absent.
Previous southern African record
Locality unknown (Hansen 1975).
Material examined
SAM-A27716, WCP (33/16/vd), 1 specimen.
Fig. 6. Benthodytes lingua R. Perrier. Spicules. A. Cross-shaped rod with
bipartite apophysis from dorsal body wall. B. Rod from anal region.
Description
Length 250 mm. Pedicels, dorsal papillae and brim not recognizable.
Circum-oral papillae well developed. Each longitudinal muscle consisting of
4-7 strands, united at point of origin and insertion.
Spicules common only anteriorly and posteriorly—dominant type large
crosses with bipartite apophyses (Fig. 6A), but latter rarely preserved, arms
spinous (0.75-1.0 mm, usually 0.75 mm), spines increasing in density distally.
Other spicules include crosses without apophyses, tripartite rods and spinous
384 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
rods (Fig. 6B); arms of crosses 0.35 mm long, spinous rods up to 0.6 mm long.
Tentacles with rods, tripartite spicules and crosses, spinose at ends. Gonad with
crosses and tripartite spicules without apophyses but with distally spinose arms.
Remarks
The only previous record of this species from southern Africa is that of
Hansen (1975) based on seven specimens from an unknown locality. According
to Hansen, the apophyses in this species are bipartite from the base but this
could not be conclusively demonstrated in the few spicules in which the
apophyses were intact. However, the size of the R.V. Africana II specimen, its
cylindrical shape, thick gelatinous body wall, the type of tentacle discs, and the
size and robustness of the deposits, all agree with Hansen’s description of
B. lingua. The closest relative of this species is the Eastern Pacific B. incerta
from which it differs in its form, thick skin, well-developed circum-oral papillae
and the absence of the characteristic crosses of the type illustrated by Hansen
(1975: 79, fig. 28).
Local distribution
Off south-western Cape, 2 780-2 871 m.
General distribution
North and South Atlantic, 860-3 192 m.
Benthodytes valdiviae Hansen, 1975
Fig. 7
Benthodytes valdiviae Hansen, 1975: 82, figs 30-31.
Benthodytes lingua Heding, 1940: 368 (non R. Perrier).
Benthodytes janthina Heding, 1940: 368 (non von Marenzeller).
Diagnosis (from Hansen 1975)
Body flattened, somewhat tapered at both ends. Tentacle crowns adjoining
anterior edge of body. Tentacles 12-15, usually 15. Brim broad, but retractile.
Dorsal papillae 5-10 pairs, slender from base to tip. Deposits, dorsally large
crosses with bipartite apophyses; ventrally absent, or reduced to small rods.
Previous southern African record
None.
Material examined
SAM-A27717, WCP (33/16/vd), 2 specimens.
Description
Specimens flattened, larger 42 mm long. Colour light violet to dirty grey.
Tentacles dark purple, 15 in the larger and 12 in the smaller specimen. Tentacle
crowns adjoining anterior edge of body. Circum-oral papillae, dorsal papillae
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 385
and mid-ventral pedicels not seen. Brim broad, pedicels of brim more or less
completely fused, except anteriorly, but lateral canals often visible.
Dorsal spicules crosses (with apophyses), tripartite deposits and rods.
Crosses of two types: one type large, similar to that described for B. lingua,
with arms up to 0.8 mm long; other type (Fig. 7A, C, D) slender, with
4-5 smooth to slightly thorny arms, 0.35-0.60 mm long, with distally bipartite
apophysis, feebly spinose at ends. Ventral spicules similar to dorsal, including
crosses, tripartite spicules and spinose to smooth rods (Fig. 7B).
Fig. 7. Benthodytes valdiviae Hansen. Spicules. A. Cross-shaped rods
with bipartite apophysis from dorsal body wall. B. Rods, crosses and
tripartite deposit from ventral body wall. C. Cross-shaped rods from
ventral body wall of second specimen. D. Same from dorsal body wall.
All drawn to same scale.
Remarks
Although the specimens are here referred to B. valdiviae, their flattened
nature, free anterior pedicels and five-armed spicules suggest that they may
belong to B. plana. However, since B. valdiviae differs from B. plana only in
the shape of the body, the more anterior position of the tentacles and a greater
robustness of the deposits (Hansen 1975), the present material is referred to it.
386 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A point of some interest is that whereas B. plana appears to be an Indian
Ocean species, currently known only from the east coast of southern Africa and
from between Seychelles and Sri Lanka, B. valdiviae is probably Eastern
Atlantic in distribution, formerly known from Canary Islands and now possibly
off the Cape Peninsula, South Africa.
In the presence of two types of crosses with apophysis, it is quite unlike any
other species except B. incerta. The latter species, however, is semicircular in
cross section with a warty skin and peculiar crosses of the type illustrated by
Hansen (1975: 79, fig. 28).
Local distribution
Off south-western Cape, 2 780-2 871 m.
General distribution
East Atlantic.
Benthodytes ?typica Théel, 1882
Fig. 8
Benthodytes typica Théel, 1882: 103, pl. 27 (fig. 7), pl. 35 (fig. 4), pl. 38 (fig. 5), pl. 44
(fig. 8); 1886: 2. Grieg, 1921: 10, pl. 3 (figs 6-7). Hérouard, 1923: 101, pl. 6 (fig. 4),
text-fig. 8. Deichmann, 1930: 123.
Benthodytes papillifera Théel, 1882: 102, pl. 34 (fig. 14). .
Benthodytes glutinosa R. Perrier, 1896: 902; 1902: 462-465, pl. 13 (fig. 5), pl. 20 (fig. 31).
Koehler & Vaney, 1905: 72-74, pl. 12 (fig. 10). Grieg, 1921: 10, pl. 3 (figs 1, 2).
Benthodytes janthina Hérouard, 1923: 103.
Diagnosis (from Hansen 1975)
Tentacles 15-20, discs irregularly incised at the margin, and retractile into
the stalks. Circum-oral papillae present. Brim well developed, the dark
pigmented canals of the enclosed tube feet often clearly visible both from the
dorsal and ventral side. Dorsal papillae minute and few, placed in a single row
along the anterior part of the dorsal radii. Skin soft and usually covered in
mucous. Deposits absent or rod-shaped.
Previous southern African records
Eastern Cape Province (33/32/vd), KwaZulu-Natal (29/33/vd), and
Mozambique (14/45/vd).
Material examined
SAM-A22175, WCP (33/16/vd), 1 specimen.
Description
Specimen damaged, internal organs lost. Length 35 mm. Colour off-white.
Tentacles 18, with marginal knobs on discs. Circum-oral papillae numerous.
Other external structures not visible. Longitudinal muscles paired. Spicules of
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA
9
\)
0.4 mm
Fig. 8. Benthodytes ?typica (Théel). Rods from body wall.
387
388 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
0.1mm
Fig. 9. Peniagone sp. indet. Deposits from body and podia. A. Crosses without apophyses.
B. Rods and crosses with apophyses. C. Smooth cross with densely setose apophysts
All drawn to same scale.
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 389
body wall (Fig. 8) only rods and tripartite deposits, the former terminally
spinulated, the latter either smooth or spinose. A single cross-shaped spicule
with broken apophysis also observed, but this could be of foreign origin. Rods
up to 0.35 mm long, longest arm of tripartite deposits up to 0.20 mm.
Remarks
The identity of this single incomplete specimen is in doubt due to the
fragmentary nature and scarcity of the deposits. The specimen was initially
thought to represent B. sanguinolenta, since this species was recorded by Clark
(1923) from Cape Point. The description of the specimen and drawings of its
spicules were sent to Dr Gebruk, who has since confirmed (pers. comm.) that it
cannot represent B. sanguinolenta, which is always purple to violet in colour
with spicules that are rather difficult to locate. According to him, the specimen
may represent B. typica, since rods are the dominant type of spicules. Dr
Gebruk further commented that the ‘Presence of tripartite elements is not of
significant value in this genus’. The presence of circum-oral papillae also
supports the identity of this specimen. Additional cross-shaped deposits with
apophysis, here suspected to be of foreign origin, could not be detected; they
may prove that the specimen is referable to another species.
Distribution
Cosmopolitan, 1 873-4700 m.
Family Elpidiidae Théel, 1879
This family comprises small elasipodid holothuroids with few tentacles
(10-12), pedicels and papillae. Hansen (1975), who critically analysed the
family, rejected the ideas expressed by Hérouard (1923) and Ekman (1926) that
the genera represent two evolutionary lines. He reduced the number of genera
from 13 to 10. Only the genera Peniagone, Elpidia and Scotoplanes, each
represented by a single species, are here recorded from southern Africa for the
first time.
Peniagone sp. indet.
Figs 9, 16F
Previous record
None.
Material examined
SAM-A22172, WCP (34/16/vd), 1 specimen (mutilated).
Description
Specimen badly mutilated, no external or internal characters preserved.
Colour dirty yellowish-grey in alcohol. Deposits typical of genus, comprising
mostly primary crosses with bent arms and apophyses and, in addition, large
390 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
spinous crosses without apophyses and curved spinous rods. Spinous crosses
without apophyses (Figs 9A, 16F) are the commonest deposits and may
represent pedicel spicules. Rare variations of these may be 3-6-armed with one
or more arms branched at tips, length of stem 0.03-0.40 mm, length of arms
0.05-0.35 mm. Curved spinous rods scarce, 0.24-0.30 mm in length. Spinous
4-armed crosses with 2-4 apophyses (Fig. 9B) not common; length of stem
0.02-0.30 mm, apophysis length 0.05-0.27 mm, longest arm 0.06-0.16 mm;
most apophyses short and arms usually strongly curved inwards. There may
also be present smooth crosses with 1-4 apophyses, often much longer than the
arms of the rods; when single apophysis present, this is densely setose
(Fig. 9C). In addition, there are numerous other smooth crosses, with up to
0.8 mm long arms, and rods up to 2 mm in length, of possibly foreign (?sponge)
origin.
Fig. 10. Scotoplanes globosa Théel. Entire specimen and spicules. A. Rods from body
wall. B. C-, S- and Y-shaped deposits from body wall. C. C-shaped deposits from
tentacles. D. Rods from tentacles. E. Ventral view of entire specimen. F. Dorsal view.
All spicules drawn to same scale.
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 28)
Remarks
Hansen’s (1975) key to the species within the genus is based on several
external characters that are lost in this mutilated specimen. However, my
description of the material and drawings of spicules were sent to Dr Gebruk,
who concurs that the specimen at hand definitely represents a Peniagone
because of the 4-armed spicules with bent arms and apophyses. According to
him, the colour of the specimen and the type and sizes of the crosses, indicate
that the specimen is perhaps referable to P. azorica von Marenzeller from the
North East Atlantic, and related to the Antarctic P. purpurea (Théel), P. incerta
(Théel), P. affinis Théel and P. willemoesi (Théel). In fact, the writer was first
inclined to consider the species as identical to the latter species or to P. horrifer
Théel also from the Antarctic.
Genus Scotoplanes Théel, 1882
This genus includes only the type species S. globosa Théel and S. clarki
Hansen, distinguished primarily by the presence of smooth skin with sturdy
papillae in the former and warty skin with slender papillae in the latter. In
southern Africa only the type species occurs, here reported for the first time.
Scotoplanes albida Théel, 1882, collected by the ‘Challenger’ from off the
south-western Cape coast at 347 m is, according to Hansen (1975), probably
referable to Ellipinion Hérouard, 1923.
Scotoplanes globosa (Théel, 1879)
Figs 10, 1SF
Elpidia globosa Théel, 1879: 14, figs 17-19.
Elpidia murrayi Théel, 1879: 16, figs 23-25.
Scotoplanes globosa Théel, 1882: 29, pl. 4, pl. 5 (fig. 3), pl. 34 (figs 8-9), pl. 36 (figs 5-6),
pl. 44 (fig. 12). Hansen, 1975: 167, pl. 9 (fig. 9), text-figs 83, 95 (4).
Scotoplanes murrayi Théel, 1882: 34, pl. 3 (figs 3-4), pl. 34 (fig. 2), pl. 44 (fig. 4).
Scotoplanes theeli Ohshima, 1915: 242; 1916-1919, 3 figs.
Diagnosis (from Hansen 1975)
Skin smooth. Dorsal papillae rather sturdy.
Previous southern African record
None.
Material examined
SAM-A22147, WCP (33/17/vd), 4 specimens.
Description
Largest specimen (Fig. 10E, F) 15 mm long. Colour grey. Pedicels
5-6 pairs, situated in distinct ventrolateral grooves. Only 2-3 papillae
identifiable on right side, only anterior ones well preserved on left side.
392 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Rods (Figs 10A, 15F) either slender with a few spines or robust with
strongly developed, often ramified spines; slender rods up to 0.02 mm thick and
about 0.40 mm long; stout rods up to 0.05 mm thick and 0.55 mm long; C-, S-
and Y-shaped bodies (Figs 10B, 15F) 0.05-0.12 mm in length, delicate in
smallest specimen. Tentacles with spinous rods (Fig. 10D) and C-shaped bodies
(Fig. 10C).
Remarks
The present specimens are identical to Théel’s species. Because of their
poor state of preservation, no significance can be attached to the distribution of
papillae. The rods, however, are similar to those of Hansen’s material from the
deepest Kermadec stations (5 850-6770 m). Such rods can attain a maximum
length of 1 mm as shown both by Théel (1882) and Hansen (1975).
Local distribution
Known only from off Cape Point, 2268 m.
General distribution
Almost cosmopolitan but not yet known from the North Atlantic,
2 100-6770 m.
Habitat
Diatom ooze, grey mud.
Genus Elpidia Théel, 1876
This genus is well characterized by its rod-shaped spicules with two pairs of
obliquely placed horizontal arms and two vertical apophyses. The genus was
formerly regarded as monotypic, but due to the work of mostly Hansen (1956,
1975) and Belyaev (1971, 1975), the genus currently contains 13 nominal and
three unnamed species. Some scanty material collected off the south-west coast
of southern Africa is here referred to E. gracilis Belyaev, 1975.
Elpidia gracilis (Belyaev, 1975)
Figs 11, 15E
Elpidia gracilis Belyaev, 1975: 266. Gebruk, 1993: 235.
Diagnosis (after Belyaev (1975) and Gebruk (1993); modified herein)
Body length up to 25 mm. Dorsal papillae three pairs, up to 9 mm long,
decreasing posteriorly. Tube feet four pairs. Deposits varying from
0.65-1.20 mm, sometimes serrate. Diameter of axis 0.03-0.04 mm. Length of
arms 35 per cent of shaft length. Apophyses straight and acicular, 10-78 per
cent length of deposits. Tentacle deposits curved with reduced or absent arms
and apophyses, 0.13-0.90 mm in length.
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 393
Fig. 11. Elpidia gracilis Belyaev. Structure and spicules. A. Ventral and dorsal views of
complete specimen. B. Normal spicules of dorsal body wall. C. Devleoping spicules of
dorsal body wall. D. Abnormal spicules of dorsal body wall. E. Normal spicules of ventral
body wall. F. Tentacle spicules. G. Normal spicules from fragmented specimen.
H. Branched rods from same. I. Tentacle spicules. All spicules drawn to same scale.
394 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material examined
SAM-A27715, WCP (33/16/vd), 1 specimen plus 2 fragments.
Description
Complete specimen (Fig. 11A) whitish in alcohol; length 7 mm, width
5 mm. Skin thin, delicate, ruptured at several points, apophyses of spicules
projecting from skin all round. Mouth ventral, tentacles 10, short (c. 1 mm),
truncate, with slender retractile processes; diameter of oral disc c. 30 per cent
of body length. Anus terminal. Pedicels about 4 pairs—two short projections,
one on each side of oral disc, may represent fifth pair of pedicels or are
probably torn fragments of body wall. Papillae dorsal, only five counted with
certainty, first definite pair between first definite pair of pedicels, second pair
between second and third pair of pedicels, single posterior papillae on right side
between third and fourth pairs of pedicels; longest papilla c. 1 mm long. An
unpaired papilla-like structure at anterior end of left side may represent a sixth
papilla or a torn piece of body wall.
Dorsal and ventral spicules (Figs 11B-E, 15E) slender and elongate, axis
and arms smooth or slightly serrate with rounded extremities. Spicules 0.16-
0.65 mm long, longest dorsal spicule 0.65 mm (Fig. 11B), longest ventral
spicule (Fig. 11E) 0.50 mm; maximum diameter of axis of dorsal spicules
0.03 mm, of ventral spicules 0.02 mm. Arms up to 31 per cent length of
spicule; extremities of some spicules bent off plane (Fig. 11D).
Apophyses straight, acicular, of dorsal spicules 0.050-0.285 mm long or
18-78 per cent length of spicules, of ventral spicules 0.045-0.070 mm long or
12-21 per cent length of spicules. Some spicules abnormal with strongly curved
axis and arms of unequal length (Fig. 11D). Tentacle spicules (Fig. 11F) 0.20-
0.45 mm, slightly or strongly curved with both arms and apophyses reduced
and/or absent.
Fragments
Tentacles as in complete specimen. Body wall spicules (Fig. 11G) 0.175-
0.520 mm long; diameter of axis 0.02 mm. Arms up to 32 per cent length of
spicules. Apophyses 0.018-0.205 mm long or 10-62 per cent length of spicules.
Irregularly branched rods (Fig. 11H), 0.11-0.13 mm in length also present.
Tentacle spicules (Fig. 111) as in complete specimen, 0.130-0.445 mm long.
Remarks
Of the two fragments, the posterior was contained in the same vial as the
complete specimen, whereas the anterior fragment was included with a synaptid
in another vial that contained four labels, as follows: everted part of holo-
thurian; sac-like holothurian; SAM, A189C, 25 August 1959; and SAM,
AI190N, 26 August 1959. It is certain that the second and last labels belong
together and refer to the elpidiid since the station number and date of collection
are the same as those of the complete specimen and the remaining fragment.
The two fragments most probably belonged to a single specimen.
The southern African material is here referred to E. gracilis Belyaev
because of short papillae, smooth as well as serrate extremities of spicules and
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 395
Table 1. Comparison of characters of the type specimens of Elpidia gracilis
Character
Length
Width
Pedicels
Papillae
Papillae length
Oral disc
Spicules
Longest dorsal spicule
Longest ventral spicule
Maximum diameter of
axis
Arms
Apophyses
Tentacle spicules
with the southern African form.
Type
6.4-25 mm
14mm
4 pairs
3 pairs, in anterior half
of body or throughout
body length
up to 9 mm (adults),
1.5 mm Guvenile)
20-30% body length
1.2 mm
0.8 mm
dorsal: 0.04 mm
ventral: 0.03 mm
length 35% of shaft;
smooth, occasionally
serrate at extremity
0.15-0.20 mm
(20-70% length of
spicules)
length 0.8-0.9 mm
arms short, or absent,
apophyses well
South African
7mm
5 mm
4-(95) pairs
73 pairs; in posterior
half of body
up to 1 mm (? juvenile)
30% body length
0.65 mm
0.5 mm
dorsal: 0.03 mm
ventral: 0.02 mm
length 37% of shaft;
smooth or serrate at
extremity
0.020-0.285 mm
(10-78% length of
spicules)
length 0.13-0.45 mm,
arms and apophyses
reduced or absent
developed
arms, length of arms relative to the axis, and the form and maximum size of the
apophyses. However, there are slight differences, initially considered to be
geographic variations worthy of subspecific ranking (Thandar 1984). These
differences (summarized in Table 1) include the presence of papillae in the
posterior rather than the anterior half of the body, the short maximum size of
the spicules, the slightly narrower diameter of the central axis of the spicules
and the shorter and less-developed tentacle deposits. According to Dr Gebruk
(pers. comm.) these differences fall within the range of variation of the species
and do not support the establishment of geographical subspecies. Hence the
Original diagnosis of the species is here modified to include not only the
southern African form but also a single well-preserved specimen described
recently by Gebruk (1993).
The soft thin nature of the skin and the extremely slender spicules with well-
developed acicular apophyses are reminiscent of E. theeli Hansen,
E. minutissima Belyaev, E. chilensis Belyaev and E. adenensis Belyaev.
However, whereas both E. theeli and E. minutissima have spicules up to 0.60
and 0.80 mm in length respectively, the diameter of the central axis is 0.02 mm
with the apophyses 20-50 per cent the length of the spicules in E. theeli and
only 25-35 per cent in E. minutissima (Hansen 1975). Further, E. theeli has
396 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
5-7 pairs of long (12 mm) papillae. Elpidia adenensis is characterized by
smooth spicules up to 1.25 mm long, with the diameter of axis as 0.02 mm and
the apophyses only 7-15 per cent the length of the spicules. Like E. gracilis,
E. chilensis also has smooth to serrate spicules but its apophyses are only
10-14 per cent the length of the spicules and there are only two pairs of
papillae.
Elpidia gracilis has only previously been recorded from South Orkney
Islands and trench at 5 450-6145 m. According to Dr Gebruk (pers. comm.),
the species also occurs in the North Atlantic.
Local distribution
South-western Cape Province, 2 268-2 377 m.
General distribution
South Orkney Island and trench, and the Atlantic Ocean.
Order MOLPADIIDA Haeckel, 1896
Family Gephyrothuriidae Koehler & Vaney, 1905
Gephyrothuria alcocki Koehler & Vaney, 1905
Fig. 12
Gephyrothuria alcocki Koehler & Vaney, 1905: 78, pl. 5 (figs 6-8).
Himasthlephora glauca Clark, 1907: 40, 184, pl. 13 (figs 1-4).
Gephyrothuria europeensis Hérouard, 1923: 30, pl. 9 (figs 10a, b).
Gephyrothuria glauca Deichmann, 1930: 202.
Diagnosis (modified from O’ Loughlin 1998: 495)
Tentacles 15, each with 2-3 pairs of digits, mouth terminal, anterior, anal
furrow present with anal canal extension. Papillae long, up to five pairs, with
ampullae. Papulae present, some drawn out into papillae-like extensions, at least
posteriorly. Calcareous ring with three dorsal interradials. Gonadal tubes with
up to four sac-like branches. Males with prominent mid-dorsal genital papillae
at anterior end. Spicules absent.
Material examined
SAM-A22140, WCP (34/16/vd), 2 specimens.
Previous southern African record
None.
Description
Specimen SAM-A22140a. Body form cylindrical, barrel-shaped (Fig. 12A).
Mouth and anus terminal. Length 23 mm, height in mid-body 8 mm. Mouth
open, bordered by 15 tentacles, each with 2-4 lobes. Anterior end constricted
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 397
and slightly turned up. Skin thin, translucent, ribbed. Calcareous ring clearly
visible through body wall. Dorsal papillae—only five identified with any degree
of certainty. A papilla-like structure on skin covering the calcareous ring may
represent genital papilla. Of the five dorsal papillae, three situated anteriorly,
and two in the middle of the body. A papilla-like structure behind the three
anterior papillae may represent a sixth papilla. Largest papillae about 3 mm.
Anal papillae distinct. Porous skin in region of anus and mouth may be evidence
of retracted podia. Ribs on surface of body can be confused with papillae
adhering on to body surface. Colour uniformly grey, including tentacles and
papillae.
Calcareous ring well developed, radial and interradial plates well calcified
and weakly fused (Fig. 12B). External appearance of ring suggests 15 plates but
dissection revealed only 10 plates—five radials, each with paired anterior
projections and five interradials, each with a single anterior projection; radials,
in addition, with paired anterior depressions for tentacle attachment. All plates
roughly rhomboidal in shape and posteriorly concave.
Polian vesicle single, elongate. Stone canal not seen. Gonad in two tufts of
5-6 terminally bifurcate tubes per tuft. Both respiratory trees short, right one
more so, each with few lobes. Longitudinal muscles unpaired, clearly visible
through translucent body wall. Gut filled with Globigerina.
Spicules absent in body wall, appendages and tentacles.
Specimen SAM-A22140b. Length 22 mm, breadth in mid-body 6 mm.
Colour grey speckled with a black substance of possibly foreign origin. Mouth
and anus terminal, the former slightly turned up due to the constricted anterior
Fig. 12. Gephyrothuria alcocki Clark. A. Entire specimen. B. Two radial
and one interradial plates of calcareous ring.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
398
ee ee ee a SS Sa a
ROLY INOS oyroed-opu] onuepy uonnquisiq
poyourlq poyouerszqun poyouriq soinqn Tepeuoy
h i do] Jeued 3u0}S$
g[3uls i, WU p ‘o[sUIS Q[OISOA ULI[Od
(-oads auo ul) yuoutwold yusuTUIOId i aejjided fey1ueyH
jyuasoid yuasoid | yuasqe SUIMOISINO SYT]-[SOIPId
(Suo] wu ¢) sid p-¢ (Suo] wu 9-¢) sId Q-p (Suo] wu g-¢) sid ¢-¢ aeyideg
PG v C Saqo] 9f9eUSL
Kars Kors dSO1 InojoD
WU 8 WU g ww gI-LI WPIM
ww ¢Z Www QZ + WW OS ysug]
pee ee we ee
(edA}) QyeID) (adAy) AoueA 29 JoTYooyy
WO} UROLY WNOS ponnjs punyjo1kyday 1y909]0 biunyjoskyday JoyoeleyO
a ee ee ee a
"WIOJ UROLIJY WIOYINOS SY) YIM punyjosKyday
Jo sadMojoy ay} Jo sxojoereyo [edroutsd jo uosweduioD °7 equ
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 399
end. Body form cylindrical, barrel-shaped. Mouth bordered by 15 tentacles,
each with 2-4 digits. Anal papillae distinct. Dorsal papillae four pairs, longest
about 2 mm in length. Pedicel-like structures crowded posteriorly, sparse
anteriorly. Genital papillae absent. Calcareous ring as in specimen A22140a,
each radial plate with a pore for radial nerve. Spicules absent.
Remarks
Because of the presence of a tail-like process, Clark (1907) described his
material as a new species and assigned it to the genus Himasthlephora erected
for this purpose. He, however, suspected that this process could be an ejected
part of the gut. Hence Hérouard (1923) declared Himasthlephora a junior
subjective synonym of Gephyrothuria, a genus erected by Koehler & Vaney
(1905) for their G. alcocki; in this he was supported by Deichmann (1930).
Hérouard (1923), in addition, described G. europeensis which, according to
Deichmann (1930), is clearly conspecific with G. glauca. Thandar (1992), citing
Rowe (pers. comm.), considered that G. alcocki and G. glauca may be
conspecific. O’Loughlin (1998) synonymized G. glauca with G. alcocki after
examining material from different localities. He retained the genus in the family
Gephyrothuriidae and the order Molpadiida, together with the genus
Hadalothuria.
The southern African material, although scant, is well preserved. In its size,
coloration, number of tentacle-lobes, presence of pedicel-like outgrowths and
the genital papilla (in at least one specimen) appears to be identical with Clark’s
form. However, both specimens lack an extension to the anal canal. Differences
between the southern African material and both Koehler & Vaney’s (1905) and
Clark’s (1907) specimens are summarized in Table 2.
This is the first record of this species from the southern Atlantic Ocean.
Distribution
Atlantic Ocean, 1 316-3 678 mm.
Family Molpadiidae Miller, 1850
Genus Molpadia Risso, 1826
This more or less cosmopolitan genus is represented in southern Africa by
Molpadia millardae, here described as new to science, and M. capensis Heding,
1935. Two specimens of an indeterminate species in the present collection are
also referred to this genus.
Key to the southern African nominal species of Molpadia
1A. Calcareous ring without significant sculpturings, radial plates with or
usually without posterior bifurcations; body wall spicules exclusively tables
WU Ah tok oes tei tews evant eaten ee Molpadia millardae sp. nov.
1B. Calcareous ring deeply sculptured, radial plates with posterior bifurcations;
Hoy wall spicules fusiform rods, plates and tables) <......55.2-..20-...52205+ 03:
RES Ne ean aula ica Nsueeaa<eiesdanwlas Molpadia capensis Heding, 1935
400 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Molpadia millardae sp. nov.
Figs 13, 15G
Diagnosis
Total length up to 29 mm; tail up to one-third body length, often shorter.
Colour dirty grey, anterior end (oral disc) and tail whitish to grey. Tentacles 15
with usually 3 digits, including unpaired one which is the largest. Calcareous
ring without significant sculpturings, radial plates often with a long, posterior
prolongation. Longitudinal muscles paired. Phosphatic deposits absent. Spicules
exclusively tables with a solid spire derived from three pillars fused for most of
their length. Body wall tables with usually 3-6, sometimes more (up to 12)
perforations, average diameter 0.15 mm; tail tables rod-like, average length
0.30 mm, with up to 12 holes, often fewer.
Etymology
The species is named after Dr Naomi Millard, formerly of the South African
Museum, for making the R.V. Africana II and other material available to me.
Material examined
Holotype. SAM-A22163, off south-western Cape Province, R.V.
Africana IT Stn A 322, 34°36’S 17°00’E, 2745 m, 10 December 1959.
Paratypes. SAM-A27711, same data as holotype, 3 specimens;
SAM-A22168, Stn A318, 33°52’S 16°51’E, 2525-2 782 m, 8 December 1959
2 specimens; SAM-A22169, Stn A315, 34°37’S 17°03’E, 2 891-2 965 m,
8 December 1959, 1 specimen; A22174, Stn A319, 34°05’S 16°58’E,
2690-2 727 m, 8 December 1959, 1 specimen.
Description
Holotype. Specimen small, total length 22 mm (including tail), diameter of
body 11 mm, tail roughly one-third body length. Colour of body dirty grey,
anterior end (oral disc) and tail whitish to grey. Radii with five longitudinal
lines demarcating positions of longitudinal muscles. Tentacles retracted, digits
not visible. Mouth terminal, circular, in centre of oral disc. Body wall thin,
somewhat translucent and gritty to the touch; oral disc and skin around mouth
rigid due to well-formed calcareous ring.
Internal organs poorly preserved, interior filled with sand and Globigerina.
Calcareous ring well developed (Fig. 13E), radial and interradial plates not
fused and without significant external sculpturing; anterior margin of ring
scalloped, each radial plate notched anteriorly once and slightly prolonged
posteriorly to form a rudimentary process; interradial plates each with two
anterior notches. Longitudinal muscles distinctly paired.
Body wall spicules exclusively tables (Fig. 13F, G) with small discs
(average diameter 0.14 mm) with 3-6, usually 3, large holes, additional holes
alternating with three primary ones; spire high (0.09-0.15 mm), composed of
three pillars solidly fused at apex. Tail spicules (Fig. 13H) tables with elongate,
rod-like or fusiform discs (average length 0.27 mm) with up to 12, but usually
Fig. 13. Molpadia millardae sp. nov. Spicules. A. Tables from body wall of
paratype SAM-A27711. B. Same from side. C. Tables from tail of paratype
SAM-A27711. D. Same from side. E. Part of calcareous ring of holotype, SAM-
A22163. F. Tables from body wall of holotype. G. Same from side. H. Tables
from tail of holotype. I. Tables from anterior body wall of holotype. J. Tables
from base of tail of holotype. K. Spicules from body wall of paratype
SAM-A22168. L. Spicules from tail of same. M. Part of calcareous ring of same.
N. Part of calcareous ring of paratype SAM-A27711. All spicules drawn to scale a;
E—scale b; M, N—scale c.
401
402 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
less than 10 holes; spire low with three discrete pillars or pillars solidly fused
together, terminating in few blunt teeth.
Table discs of anterior body wall large, somewhat irregular, slightly
elongate (up to 0.33 mm), with usually more than six holes (Fig. 131). Table
discs from base of tail equally long and irregular but with pseudopodia-shaped
extensions, usually pierced by several small holes (Fig. 13J). Phosphatic
deposits absent.
Fig. 14. SEM micrographs of spicules of R.V. Africana II holothuroids. A. Thecal plate
(undersurface) of Echinocucumis hispida. B. Part of same (upper surface) to show spire.
C. Another plate of E. hispida (under surface). D. Thecal plate of Ypsilothuria
bitentaculata. E. Same enlarged to show spire. F. Spire enlarged.
Paratype, SAM-A27711. Total length of largest specimen 21.5 mm;
diameter of body 10 mm, tail about one-quarter body length. Radial plates of
calcareous ring of dissected specimen with long, terminally bifurcate, posterior
prolongations (Fig. 13N). Longitudinal muscles paired. Body wall tables
(Fig. 13A, B) sometimes scarce, discs with up to 12 perforations, often fewer;
tail tables (Fig. 13C) common, with elongate discs, with up to 10, sometimes
occluded holes.
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 403
Paratype, SAM-A22168. Both specimens poorly preserved and damaged.
Total length of larger specimen 20 mm, tail about one-third body length. Radial
plates of calcareous ring with long posterior process, not terminally bifurcate
(Fig. 13M). Longitudinal muscles paired. Body wall tables with discs up to
0.25 mm and 3-6 holes (Fig. 13K). Tail table discs (Fig. 13L) up to 0.35 mm
in length, with up to eight holes. Some table spires very long, of three pillars,
totally fused together and with terminal cluster of several downwardly directed
spines (Fig. 13L). Smaller specimen damaged, about 13 mm in total length.
Paratype, SAM-A22169. Largest specimen in collection—total length
29 mm, diameter of body 12 mm, tail length 5 mm. Tentacles 15, each with
about three digits, unpaired digit the largest. Radial plates of calcareous ring
each with a long posterior process, not terminally bifurcate. Longitudinal
muscles paired. Gonad filled with large eggs. Body wall tables with disc up to
0.25 mm in length, with 4-8 perforations. Tail tables up to 0.35 mm in length
with about five central perforations and a low, sometimes arched spire.
Paratype, SAM-A22174. Total length 27 mm, tail about half body length.
Body wall tables not common, discs up to 0.15 mm in length with usually 3-6,
usually 3, perforations. Tail table discs long, up to 0.4 mm in length, with up to
six large central holes.
Remarks
The new species has close similarities with the Antarctic Molpadia
abyssicola Pawson, 1977. On first examination, the South African material was
referred to this species, albeit with some hesitation (see Thandar 1984). On
examination of more material, there appears to be sufficient grounds to regard
the southern African material as a new species. It differs from M. abyssicola in
its size, coloration, smaller tail tables, and the very significant paired nature of
the longitudinal muscles. Pawson’s species is stated to reach a total length of
105 mm, and is purple or white in colour, with tail tables having an average
length of 0.36 mm with up to 20 holes, and undivided longitudinal muscles. In
contrast, the largest (mature, female) specimen of M. millardae reaches a total
length of only 29 mm, all specimens are greyish in colour, the tail tables have a
average length of 0.30 mm with only up to 12 holes. There is, however, no
doubt that both species are closely related.
It may also be argued that both are geographical variants of the same
species, but the above differences speak against this conclusion. Since an adult
female measures only 29 mm in total length it does not seem likely that the new
species grows to any appreciable size.
The calcareous ring illustrated for the holotype may be abnormal with its
arrested posterior processes to the radial plates since at least three paratype
dissected show distinct processes to the radial plates. This is in direct contrast to
M. abyssicola in which Pawson concluded that the ring with long processes to
the radial plates in the holotype was abnormal as no such processes were
evident in his dissected paratypes.
In the small size of the tables, the present specimens approach also
M. blakei Théel but, judging from both Deichmann’s (1930) and Pawson’s
(1977) illustrations of the spicules of this species (the latter from the holotype),
404 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 15. SEM micrographs of spicules of R.V. Africana II holothuroids. A. Psolidothuria
octodactyla, holotype. B. Paracucumaria capense, holotype. C. Laetmogone perplexa,
holotype. D. Single wheel of same (enlarged). E. Elpidia gracilis. F. Scotoplanes
globosa. G. Molpadia millardae sp. nov., holotype.
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 405
Fig. 16. SEM micrographs of spicules of R.V. Africana II holothuroids. A. Tentacle
spicules of Meseres atlanticus. B. Complex plate from Psolidium vitreum. C-E. Orph-
nurgus protectus. C. Cross from body wall. D. Pedicel deposits. E. Tentacle deposits.
F. Crosses from Peniagone sp. indet.
406 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the spires of the body wall tables are extremely long with downwardly directed
teeth. Only one such table was observed in one of the paratypes of the new
species here described. Molpadia millardae also comes quite close to
M. granulata (Ludwig) (= M. bathybia Clark), but Pawson (1977), who
synonymized these species, stated that M. granulata has body wall tables with
six or more (up to 20) perforations. In addition, Molpadia granulata reaches a
length of 110 mm, is brownish-yellow in colour and has larger table discs in
both the body and the tail.
Pawson’s (1977) supposition that those molpadiids without phosphatic
deposits always have undivided radial muscles must be discounted unless larger
specimens of the new species are found with phosphatic deposits.
This is a second record of a molpadiid from southern Africa. The first is
that of Heding (1935) who presented a rather incomplete description of his
M. (Paramolpadia) capensis, collected by the Ingolf Expedition from the
Western Cape Province.
Distribution
South-western Cape Province, South Africa, 2525-2 965 m.
Molpadia sp. indet.
Material examined
SAM-A22141, WCP (34/16/vd), 2 specimens.
Description
Form and colour as in M. millardae; tail absent (?lost). Length 16 mm and
23 mm.
Calcareous ring small, radial plates about twice as wide as interradial plates,
notched at both ends, posterior processes absent. Each interradial plate with a
blunt, triangular, anterior projection and an indented posterior margin.
Longitudinal muscles unpaired. Spicules absent (?dissolved).
Remarks
Since the specimens lack a tail and spicules, it is not possible to determine
their specific identity. Although their general appearance (except for the smooth
skin) and coloration are identical to M. millardae, the form of the calcareous
ring and muscles suggest that they belong to another species.
Distribution
Off Cape Point, 2 688-2 725 m.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I thank the late Drs Tom Barry and Naomi Millard, formerly of the South
African Museum, for the opportunity to study and report on this interesting
collection. I am indebted to Dr Frank Rowe, formerly of the Australian
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 407
Museum in Sydney, for his critical advice and guidance during my Ph.D.
studies, and Dr Adrian Gebruk, of the Academy of Sciences, Russia, for
verifying my identifications and for other useful comments. Financial assistance
from the University of Durban-Westville and the Foundation for Research
Development, towards part of this research, is gratefully acknowledged.
REFERENCES
ANON. 1963. Annual Report. Division of Sea Fisheries. South Africa 31: 1-242.
BARRETT, L. 1856. Description of four new species of Echinodermata. Annals and
Magazine of Natural History (2) 20: 46-48.
BELYAEV, G. M. 1971. Deep water holothurians of the genus Elpidia. In: BoGorov, V. G.
ed. Fauna of the Kurile-Kamchatka Trench and its environment. Trudy Instituta
Okeanologii. Akademiya NAUK SSSR 92: 326-367.
BELYAEV, G. M. 1975. New species of Elpidia from the South Atlantic. Trudy Instituta
Okeanologii. Akademiya NAUK SSSR 103: 259-280.
ae et. - 1907. The apodous holothurians. Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge
5: 1-206.
CLARK, H. L. 1923. The echinoderm fauna of South Africa. Annals of the South African
Museum 13: 221-435.
Day, J. 1967. A monograph on the Polychaeta of southern Africa 1. London: British
Museum (Natural History).
DEICHMANN, E. 1930. The holothurians of the western part of the Atlantic Ocean. Bulletin
of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College 71 (3): 41-226.
DEICHMANN, E. 1948. The holothurian fauna of South Africa. Annals of the Natal Museum
11 (2): 325-375.
EKMAN, S. 1926. Systematisch-phylogenetische Studien tiber Elasipoden und
Aspidochiroten. Zoologische Jahrbiicher (Anatomie) 47: 429-540.
FISHER, K. W. 1907. The holothurians of the Hawaiian Islands. Proceedings of the United
States National Museum 32: 637-744.
GEBRUK, A. 1993. New data on elasipodid fauna of South Atlantic and Antarctic. Trudy
Instituta Okeanologiya, Akademiya NAUK, SSSR 127: 228-244.
GrigEG, J. A. 1921. Echinodermata. Report on the Scientific Results of the ‘Michael Sars’
North Atlantic Deep Sea Expedition (3) 2: 1-47.
HANSEN, B. 1956. Holothurioidea from depths exceeding 6000 meters. Galathea Report 2:
33-54.
HANSEN, B. 1975. Systematics and biology of the deep sea holothurians. I. Elasipoda.
Galathea Report 13: 1-262.
HeEpDING, S. G. 1931. On the classification of the molpadids. Videnskabelige Meddelelser
fra Dansk naturhistorisk Forening i Kjabenhavn 92: 275-284.
HEDING, S. G. 1935. Holothurioidea. Part I. Apoda-Molpadioidea, Gephyrothurioidea.
Report on the Danish Ingolf-Expedition 4 (9): 1-84.
HEDING, S. G. 1940. Die Holothurien der deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition. II. Aspidochirote
und Elasipode Formen. Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse der Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition
auf dem Dampfer ‘Valdivia’ 1898-1899 24 (3): 317-375.
HEDING, S. G. 1942. Holothurioidea. Part II. Aspidochirota, Elasipoda, Dendrochirota.
Report on the Danish Ingolf-Expedition 4 (13): 1-39.
HEROUARD, E. 1902. Holothuries provenant des campagnes de la ‘Princesse-Alice’
(1892-1897). Resultats des campagnes scientifiques accomplies par le Prince Albert I
21: 1-61.
HEROUARD, E. 1923. Holothuries provenant des campagnes de la Princesse Alice et
L’Hirondelle II (1898-1915). Resultats des Campagnes Scientifique accomplies par le
Prince Albert I 66: 1-163.
KOEHLER, R. & VANEY, C. 1905. Holothuroidea. An account of the deep-sea
Holothuroidea collected by the Royal Indian Marine Survey Ship ‘Investigator’.
Echinoderma of the Indian Museum. Calcutta: Trustees of the Indian Museum.
408 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Lupwic, H. 1893. Vorlaufigen Bericht tiber die auf den Tiefsee Fahrten des ‘Albatross’
(Frukling 1891) im 6stlichen Stillen Ocean erbeuteten Holothurien. Zoologischer
Anzeiger 16: 177-186.
Lupwic, H. 1894. Reports on an exploration off the west coasts of Mexico, Central and
South America, and off the Galapagos Islands, in charge of Alexander Agassiz, by the
U.S. Fish Commission Steamer ‘Albatross’ during 1891. 12. The Holothurioidea.
Memoirs of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College 17 (3): 1-183.
Lupwic, H. 1901. Arktische und subarktische Holothurian. Fauna Arctica 1 (1): 135-178.
Lupwic, H. & HEDING, S. G. 1935. Die Holothurien der Deutschen Tiefsee Expedition.
Fusslose und dendrochirote Formen. Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse der Deutschen
Tiefsee-Expedition auf dem Dampfer ‘Valdivia’ 1898-1899 24: 123-214.
MAHONEY, R. 1966. Laboratory techniques in zoology. London: Butterworths.
MORTENSEN, TH. 1927. Handbook of the echinoderms of the British Isles. London: Oxford
University Press.
OHSHIMA, H. 1915. Report on the holothurians collected by the United States Fisheries
steamer ‘Albatross’ in the Northwestern Pacific during the summer of 1906.
Proceedings of the United States National Museum 48 (2073): 213-291.
O’LouGHLIN, P. M. 1998. A review of the holothurian family Gephyrothuriidae. In:
Mool, R. & TELFORD, M. eds. Echinoderms. Proceedings of the 9th International
Echinoderm Conference, San Francisco, August 1996: 493-498. Rotterdam: Balkema.
PANNING, A. 1949. Versuch einer Neuordnung der Familie Cucumariidae (Holothurioidea,
Dendrochirota). Zoologische Jahrbiicher 78: 404-470.
Pawson, D. L. 1965. The bathyal holothurians of the New Zealand region. Zoology
Publications from Victoria University College 39: 1-33.
Pawson, D. L. 1977. Molpadiid sea cucumbers (Echinodermata: Holothuroidea) of the
Southern Atlantic, Pacific, and Indian Oceans. Biology of the Antarctic Seas VI.
Antarctic research series 26: 97-123.
PERRIER, E. 1886. Les explorations sous-marines. Paris.
PERRIER, R. 1896. Sur les élasipodes recueillis par le ‘Travailleur’ et le ‘Talisman’.
Compte rendu Hebdomadaire des Séances de 1’Académie des Sciences, Paris 123:
900-903.
PERRIER, R. 1902. Holothuries. Expéditions Scientifiques du ‘Travailleur’ et du ‘Talisman’.
Paris 1902: 273-554.
Rowe, F. W. E. & Doty, J. E. 1977. The shallow-water holothurians of Guam.
Micronesica 13 (2): 217-250.
Rowe, F. W. E. & GaTEs, J. 1995. Echinodermata. In: WELLS, A. ed. Zoological
catalogue of Australia 33: 1-510. Melbourne: CSIRO Australia.
Sars, M. 1859. Om tre nye Holothurider af hvilke den ena danner Typus for en nys
Slaegt. Forhandlinger i Videnskabsselskabet i Kristiania 1959: 170-179.
Sars, M. 1861. Oversight at Norges Echinodermer. Forhandlinger i Videnskabsselskabet i
Khristiania 1861: 1-166.
SLUITER, C. PH. 1901. Die Holothurien der Siboga-Expedition. Siboga-Expeditie,
Monographie 44: 1-141.
THANDAR, A. S. 1984. The holothurian fauna of southern Africa. Unpublished Ph.D.
thesis, University of Durban-Westville, South Africa.
THANDAR, A. S. 1991. The cucumariid holothurians of southern Africa with the erection of
anew genus. South African Journal of Zoology 26 (3): 115-139.
THANDAR, A. S. 1992. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude cruises. 18.
Holothuroidea. Annals of the South African Museum 101 (7): 159-180.
THANDAR, A. S. 1998. A new genus and three new species of deep sea holothuroids from
the west coast of South Africa (Echinodermata). Journal of Zoology, London 244:
79-88.
THEEL, H. 1879. Preliminary report on the Holothuridae of the exploring voyage of
H.M.S. ‘Challenger’ I. Bihang till Kongl. svenska vetenskapsakademiens handlingar 5
(19): 1-20.
THEEL, H. 1882. Report on the Holothurioidea dredged by H.M.S. Challenger during the
years 1873-1876. Part I. Report of the Scientific Results of the Voyage of H.M.S.
‘Challenger’, (Zoology) 4 (13): 1-176.
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS OFF THE CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA 409
THEEL, H. 1886. Report on the Holothurioidea. Reports on the results of dredging, under
the supervision of Alexander Agassiz, in the Gulf of Mexico (1877-1878), in the
Caribbean Sea (1879-1880), and along the eastern coast of the United States during the
summer of 1880, by the United States Coast Survey Steamer ‘Blake’. Bulletin of the
Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College 13: 1-21.
ABBREVIATIONS
an—anus pa—papilla
cl—cloaca pv—polian vesicle
cr—calcareous ring r—radial plate
ir—interradial plate re—rectum
Irt—left respiratory tree tm—retractor muscle
m—mouth trt—right respiratory tree
o—oesophagus t—tentacle
p—pedicel/tube foot wvr—water vascular ring
&
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed
by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov.. sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov.,
etc. The name of the taxon should be followed, without intervening punctuation, by the author’s name
(not abbreviated) and the year of publication; a comma must separate author’s name and year. The
author’s name and date must be placed in parentheses if a species or subspecies is transferred from its
original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must be separated from the
scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be either according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order,
with all references to that name following in chronologica! order (see example 1), or according to
chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the year is placed in front of each entry, and the
synonym repeated in full for each entry (see example 2). The author should adopt one style or the
other throughout a paper.
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Example 1
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: SO.
Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871, pl. 2 (fig. 8a-b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example: comma separates author’s name and year; semicolon separates more than
one reference by the same author; full stop separates references by different authors; figures of = are enclosed in
parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures; dash, not comma, separates consecutive num
Example 2
1845 Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, p. 37.
1856 Leda plicifera A. Adams, p. 50.
1859 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould) Hanley, p. 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73).
1861 Nucula largillierti Philippi, p. 87.
1871 Laeda bicuspidata (Gould): Sowerby, pl. 2 (fig. 8a—-b).
1950 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, p. 163, fig. 301.
1955 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Nicklés, p. 110.
1964 Leda bicuspidata (Gould): Barnard, p. 234, figs 8-9.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens
mentioned in the original description are to be designated allotype (if applicable) and/or paratypes;
additional material not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data
(registration number, depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype
and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype. SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s
Beach, Port Elizabeth (33°51°S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text, e.g. *. . . the Figure depicting
C. namacolus .. .’, or *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10) .
(b) The prefixes of prefixed sumames in al] languages, when used in the text, if not preceded by initials or full
names: e.g. Du Toit, but A. L. du Toit: Von Huene, but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary. Reference to the author should
preferably be expressed in the third person. Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except
when forming part of the title of a book or article, e.g. ‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII.
Amphipoda.’. A specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its
abbreviation to initial capital letter (except at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph), provided the
same generic name is used consecutively. The name of new genus or species should not be included
in the title; it should be included in the abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet
the requirements of Biological Abstracts.
8. GENERAL. Once referees’ reports have been received by the editor, these will be discussed by the
editorial committee. If the paper is considered acceptable after minor or major revision, the reports
will be forwarded to the author who must then thoroughly revise in accordance with the referees’
Suggestions. Final acceptance of the revised manuscript will be considered by the editorial committee.
In the case of major revision being necessary, the committee reserves the right to consult one or more
referees regarding the revised manuscript.
AHMED S. THANDAR
DEEP-SEA HOLOTHUROIDS TAKEN BY THE
R.V. AFRICANA IT IN 1959,
FROM OFF THE WEST COAST OF THE
CAPE PENINSULA, SOUTH AFRICA
i
il
INSTITUTION LIBRARIES
3 9088 01206 7211
SMITHSONIAN
|
BCI 15
Oo Asn es
WPS oe
ere
oye
aoe . : 2 : : y ae IN as type
% ; :
PNR eon dy)
AED ay
eae
MAINEA separa,
NSPE Ags 4 > . F 3 “ a Seay Saas
AMA Mire, .
mcm
Mt EA ree n
YPSP PRPS Cm hans : vane : Era h de,
mW ¥gon, : Sangin gad
ana an NA Ae Paes
yeu d ‘ 4 s ‘I bunt pee 4
Sern r a,
Wate . ; 2 i theese Saf
Nea : ’ oa : PAN OAs, : a Pb an iter een
nie PMNs My ‘ . Megeped 7 : ; FOAL eu ci eT PR Brees é,
; : * tenn
" 3 ; : t OND Ay ren
SHS ye, ot - F f i : : ‘ ‘ 5 e : MORO ead one : 5 et
pacereees A Y : 5 785 © ae
Miah G Siete yyy
SAE Mah
Ao AMa RES
a> as Bremen Mes Chri
Paneth INE WET ining,
ig Ee
. . A panes
Corer c : a Wty tage
AT ore «a Up 4 . ‘ ‘
SUN ANE 3
eet
OMEN ay